Programmable Controller

PCwin
PROGRAMMER FOR PC10/3/2/1 SERIES,MX,PCDL,Plus
Correspond to SFC/FBD(TJA-2032)

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
 Trademarks

 Windows95/98/NT/2000/XP/Vista/7/10/11 are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the USA and
other countries.
 UniDraf and UniDraf SFC are the registered trademarks of SINWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION.
The other product names written in this manual are generally the trademarks or registered trademarks of the
product manufacturer.
Introduction

Thank you very much for your purchase of this product and please make sure
the following notices.

• For the safe use of this product, read thoroughly this Instruction Manual and
related manuals before operating the product. Keep this Instruction Manual
at your reach for quick reference during operation.

• Be sure to deliver this Instruction Manual to the end user of the product.

• Specifications are subject to change for improvement without prior notice.

• In accordance with the provisions in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
Control Law, export of products applicable as strategic goods (or service)
requires export permit by the Japanese Government.

• In the event any defect due to our manufacture is found in our products during
the warranty period, we will repair or replace them at our discretion. We shall
not be responsible for any direct or indirect damages related to our products
except as herein stated.

i
Notes for Safe Use

This instruction manual contains important information on safe use of the product and preventive

measures against personnel injuries and product damages.

Understand the following and read the text and observe the descriptions.

Explanation of indication

This indicates pressing danger, and if it is not avoided, personnel deaths or

serious injuries result, therefore, it is the most emphasized special information.

This indicates potential danger, and if it is not avoided, medium or slight

injuries or physical damages may result, therefore, it is a special information.

Contents

• Do not disassemble the module or contact its inside while power is

supplied. Otherwise, electric shock may result.

• Do not touch the terminals while power is supplied.

Otherwise, electric shock may result.

1. Avoid the following places for setting up the common module.

• Any place receiving direct sunlight and its temperature exceeding

the range of 5 to 35 degrees Celsius.

• Any place where the relative humidity exceeds the range of 30 to

80% or the change in the temperature is so sudden that

condensation is formed.

• Any place where the corrosive or flammable gases are present.

• Any place where the common module may be exposed to direct

vibration.

2. To store the common module, make sure that the temperature will

not exceed the range -10 to 60 degrees Celsius.

ii
3. When the air is extremely dry, excessive static electricity may be

generated. Touch a metal piece or the like, that has been

grounded, to discharge any static electricity, before touching the

common module.

4. Never use organic solvent such as thinners or gasoline, for cleaning

the common module as the case or key panel may melt or be

discolored. Take special care with the key panel, in particular, as it

can be greatly affected.

5. Take care that the key panel is not exposed to welding sparks or

melted solder.

6. When connecting the common module to the TOYOPUC CPU

module using the supplied cable, separate the cable from high

tension lines, motive power lines, signal lines to the input/output

module, and large capacity power lines as much as possible.

7. When the common module is not in use, remove the floppy disk from

the drive and store it in the designated case.

Leaving a floppy disk in the drive can lead to trouble.

8. Do not turn off the power when the internal hard disk or floppy disk is

in use. The hard disk access lamp is lit when the hard disk is in

use. The floppy disk access lamp is lit when the floppy disk is in

use. Check that these lamps are not lit before turning off the power.

In particular, take special care when the internal hard disk is in use.

9. Do not insert or remove modules into/from the base module while the

power is on.

iii
10. Notes on using floppy disks:

(1) Do not place floppy disks in a very hot and humid place.

Exposure to high temperatures or high humidity can cause

deformity.

Note also that a sudden environmental change can bring about

condensation which can cause errors. Do not use floppy disks

you have brought in from outdoors immediately. Leave them

30 to 60 minutes to adjust to the environment.

(2) Avoid direct sunlight.

Floppy disks can be deformed.

(3) Do not touch the recording surface.

The oil content of fingerprints can adhere to the magnetic

head, not only causing errors but also damaging the head

itself. Fingerprints can lower the quality of output and can be

the cause of the adhesion of dust or dirt and the growth of

mold.

(4) Do not bend floppy disks.

Bent floppy disks cause uneven rotation or errors.

(5) Do not use thinners, alcohol, Freon or the like, on floppy disks.

The floppy disk may be damaged.

(6) Do not put anything on top of floppy disks.

Placing heavy objects on floppy disks can cause the disks to

be deformed.

(7) Keep floppy disks away from magnetic fields.

When a floppy disk is placed near objects that generate strong

magnetic fields, data stored on the disk can be destroyed

iv
(8) Do not hold floppy disks with clips.

Attaching a memo pad with a clip, for example, can cause the

floppy disk to be deformed.

(9) Do not write directly on the jacket.

Be sure to write on the index label before attaching it to the

jacket.

If you must write on the label after it has been adhered to the

jacket, use a soft tipped pen. Writing on the jacket can leave

scratches on the disk or cause the disk to be deformed.

(10) Do not leave a floppy disk out.

Always store floppy disks in their cases and place them

vertically.

(11) Do not use an eraser.

Debris from the eraser may adhere to the magnetic disk and

cause errors.

Do not use an eraser near floppy disks.

(12) Do not handle floppy disks roughly.

Insert a floppy disk carefully, taking care not to damage the

disk. The magnetic head can be damaged as well.

(13) Do not eat, drink or smoke near floppy disks.

Smoke from cigarettes can cause errors as well. Eating and

drinking can easily lead to accidents resulting in system failure.

Never use a floppy disk wet with tea or the like.

v
Revision history of instruction manual
The revision code of the instruction manual is described as a part of the
control number on the back cover of the instruction manual.

Instruction Manual No.

T–A35-*-E
E: English, N: Japanese, F : French
Cz:Checho, Ch:Chinese
Series No. Revision code

Revision Date of Revision Details

No. Revision
0 June 1999 1st Edition

1 July 1999 Conversion of illustrations into Japanese

2 October 5.5.3.Import of LD comment:Addition of File Type Specification

1999 5.6.1.Export of Comment:Addition of Item
5.6.Peripheral Tool-wise File Type Correspondence Chart:Addition
8.12.LD Block Checking:Addition of File Type Specification
8.15.Usage Status:Addition of Item
8.18.Follow up Search:Addition of Item
11.4.Checking with the CPU:Addition of Item
12.3.4.Process Status Monitor: Addition of “Execution Step Search” button
12.3.5.History of Step Diagnosis Abnormality:Addition of “Jump” button
12.3.6.Process Batch Monitoring:Addition of Item
12.3.7. Execution Action Search:Addition of Item
12.4.1.Follow up Monitor:addition of 16 steps
12.4.2.Action Monitor:Addition of Item
Review of Contents
3 February Change of Project in the Menu bar to Conversion:All relevant places
2000 Review of Key Allocation:All relevant places
5.6.Peripheral Tool-wise File Type Correspondence Chart:Correction
6.6.3.Hiearchical display of Sub-process:Addition of Item
7.3.6.Marking of Dummy Step:Addition of Item
7.4.Dialog of the Action block:Addition of Comment Display
7.4.7.Setting of Action Qualifier:Re-arrangement of AQ Description Order
7.4.9.2.Fresh creation/ Change of Action:Addition of reversal in sky blue color.
7.5.Dialog of Sub-SFC:Addition of Comment Display
7.5.8.Jump to Sub-process(hierarchical shift):Addition of Item
7.8.3.Fresh creation/ Change of Transition Condition Program:Addition of reversal in
sky blue color
7.13.Undo 7.14.Re-do 7.15.Cut
7.16.Paste 7.17.Copy:Addition of explanation
7.18.Select All 7.19.Shift :Addition of Item
7.20. Comment Edit(Enter/ Edit Comment):Addition of Item
7.24.Jump:Addition of sub-step to Jump destination
8.7. Data Shift/ Copy :Overall Change,Addition of Right click on menu
8.8. Comment Edit(Enter/ Edit Comment):Addition of Item
8.17. Contact Table:Addition of use during Editing/ Monitoring
11.1.Menu:Change
11.3.8. Confirmation of SFC deletion and Program Writing:Addition of Item
13.4. Register Edit:Change of Dialog
15.2.3. Definition of Short Cut Key:Overall Change
Review of Contents

vi
4 November Related Instruction Manual Configuration PCI Serious /MX addition
2000 Menu bar CAD addition: Every place
Review of key allocation (layout) : Every place
Comment inhibit character addition : every place
3.1 PC2 connection conversion cable form modification, PC1 series /MX addition
3.2 PC1 series /MX addition
4.1.3.1 Icon addition [ Program • comment switching ]
4.1.3.2 PC1 series /MX addition
5. PC1 series /MX addition
5.2 Addition of prg into file classification
5.3 PC1 series /MX addition
5.6 Peripheral tool wise file type correspondence table :PC1 series /MX addition
7.4.1 Used actions number limit
7.7 Usable transactions number correction
7.12.1 Addition of Jump limit
7.26 Addition of Comment switching
8.1 PC1 Series /MX addition correspondence correction
8.2 PC1 Series /MX addition
9.1 PC1Series/MX addition
9.4 Error time RUN status setting
10. Program check [conversion] PC1 Series /MX addition
10.1 Addition of SFC memory expansion correspondence
10.4 Addition of all actions activation function
11.1 Addition of menu change. Read object table
11.2 Addition of menu change. write object table
Addition of project name check. write data check
11.2.7 Register selection screen correction
11.2.9 Addition of SFC memory expansion correspondence
11.2.10 Write during Run when SFC data exists
12.5 Correction of Register•I/O Address monitor
12.6 Addition of time chart monitor
15.1.1.2 Addition of Commonique deletion. Word lap setting addition
15.1.2,15.1.3 Commonique deletion
15.1.4 Addition of jump limit, addition of action number limit
15.2.2 CPU Addition of write in menu selection
16 CAD Addition of conversion function
Review of the contents.
5 July 2001 8.1.11.3. I/O Address Batch Change (Modification File Reading) addition
8.1.11.4. Batch change of Function Instruction Operands (Modification File reading)
addition
8.1.11.5. Batch Change of SFC Data addition
8.1.11.5.1. SFC Data addition
8.1.11.6. Format of Address Modification File addition
8.1.11.7. File Format Error Display addition
8.1.11.8. Cautions addition
8.2.11.3. I/O Address Change All (Change Instruction File Reading) addition
8.2.11.4. Change All of Function Instruction Operand (Change Instruction File
Reading) addition
10.3.1.1. Types of Format Error and Error Code addition
16.1.1 PCwin <- UniDraf Data Exchange[SUD] change
16.1.1.1 Symbol Number Setting addition
16.2.1 PCwin ->UniDraf SFC Data Conversion [SUD] change
16.2.1.1 Symbol Number Setting addition
16.3 Errors at the time of CAD Data <--> PC1 Language Data Conversion addition
Review of the contents.
6 August 9.7.2.18. PROFI-S2 addition
2001 Review of the contents.
7 April 2002 8.2.18. Editing of instruction language addition
11.8. Error Monitor of CPU change
12.6. Time chart monitor change
12.7. Event monitor addition
13.2 Change of Timer/Counter set value and current value change
13.3. Forced on/off of I/O change
13.6. Setting of Communication Module change
Review of the contents

vii
8 October 1.1. Operating Environment of PCwin change
2002 2.1. Confirmation of version information addition
4.1.3.1.Tool bar addition
4.1.5. Setting of communication Toolbar addition
5 File Library addition
5.5 Note of the library data save addition
5.8 Peripheral Tool-wise File Type Correspondence Chart change
List of Devices that can be saved Register File-wise addition
6.1 Setting of Project Window addition
7.3.7 Jump setting in the process in case of SFCmonitor addition
7.4 Example of symbolical compatible addition
7.4.3 Jump Display setting in the process from the SFC Step addition
7.4.10 The number of the comment characters for action change.
48 characters -> 100 characters
7.4.10.3-7.4.10.4 Example of symbolical compatible addition
7.8.2 The number of the comment characters for transition change
48 characters -> 75 characters
7.20.1 Step Comment Edit. The number of the comment characters modify
50 characters -> 48 characters
7.20.2 Transition Comment Edit. The number of the comment characters change
50 characters -> 75 characters
7.21.2 Comment 100 characters display addition
8.1.2 Address Programming notation addition
8.1.2.3 FBD(Function Block Diagram) addition
8.1.3 Symbolic Programming addition
8.1.9.3. Comment 100 characters display addition
8.2.8 The number of the comment characters for PC1 change.
50 characters ->28 characters
8.1.11. Can't use at the time of symbolical programming ON. addition
8.1.11.2 -4,9 Can't use at the time of symbolical programming ON. addition
8.1.12.2 -3 Can't use at the time of symbolical programming ON. addition
8.1.13.2. Can't use at the time of symbolical programming ON. addition
8.2. Can't use at the time of symbolical programming ON. addition
9 Library addition (Fixes a chapter number once more after 10.)
10.7.2.4 AS-i addition
10.7.2.5 SUB-CPU(Master) addition
10.7.2.6 SUB-CPU(Slave) addition
10.7.211 DLNK-S2 addition
12.1 Read from CPU Library addition
12.2 Write to CPU Library addition
12.8. Error Monitor of CPU CPU Error Details :7C addition
12.8.1 Detailed Display of Error Code:86 addition
13.3.8. Jump Display to Process from SFC Step addition
13.3.9. Flag Jump Display from SFC Step to FB Input Pin addition
13.4.1.2 Function Block Internal Monitor addition
13.5 Register and I/O Address Monitor Even when Symbolic Programming is ON, it
is used based on Coil Address specification. addition
13.6 Time chart monitor Even when Symbolic Programming is ON, it is used based
on Coil Address specification. addition
Notice addition:
It is not compatible with PLC of PC1 series(PC1,F2,M etc.)
14.2 Change of Timer/Counter set value and current value.
The change which accompanies a specification change.
14.3 Set the address and ON/OFF
The change which accompanies a specification change.
14.6 Setting of Communication Module
The change which accompanies a specification change.
16.1.2 FB is added to the color.
16.2.2 A symbolic programming is added to the operation.
16.2.4 Library addition
18.3 Circuit chart list Example for symbolically addition.
18.4 Library print addition.
19. FBD addition
Review of the contents.

viii
9 February 8.1.9.3 Comment of 100 Characters addition.
2003 8.1.13.1/8.1.13.2 Collation result explanation addition.
8.1.16 The explanation addition of Usage status display data
9.3.2.1 Change accompanying specification change of the automatic allotment
address of a library.
9.10.1 Number description mistake correction
12.2.11 Initialization explanation addition of the inside data of FB.
18.4.1 It described that the printing function of a library could not perform "Drawing
style print."
19. Drawing style print
20. PC3JD SFC functionality
Review of the contents.
10 April 2003 3.1 P C C o n n e c t i o n C a b l e change.
5. File for PC3JG addition.
8.1.2.3.7/8.1.3.5.7 NonCare output addition
8.1.11 Extended address addition.
9.3.1 Mass storage library addition.
9.3.2.1 Modification necessitated by the use of OUT-IN related display during FB
monitor in Pcwin.
10.1.1 Mode for PC3JG addition.
10.7.2.19 DLNK-M2 addition.
11.3.1 Duplication check setting of output type function instruction address addition.
11.4 All functions activation process delete.
12.2 Modification necessitated by Write Menu addition in CPU.
14.6.1 AUTO of Baud Rate addition.
20. TOOL addition
21. Chapter No. of PC3JD SFC functionality change.
Review of the screen
Review of the contents.
11 July 2003 1.1 Operating Environment of PCwin
5.5 Input of Related File
11.4 Defragment FB execution memory
12.2 Writing in CPU
14.4 Inside FB I/O Forced ON-OFF
21.3 Restrictions of SFC
Review of the screen
Review of the contents.
12 August 1.3 Required option table
2003 13.4.1.3 Ensued Monitoring of inside Function Block global point of contact
13.4.3 Continuity monitor
14.5 Inside FB I/O initial
21.4 Restrictions of FBD
Review of the screen
Review of the contents.
13 October 4.4 Change of display language: addition.
2003 5.8 Peripheral Tool-wise File Type Correspondence Chart: *.EFB addition.
8.1.2.3.2 Setting of Link Library: Master library addition.
8.1.14 Search: Func search addition.
9.1 Outline: Master library addition.
9.3.1 Creation of Library Project: Master library addition.
9.5.3 Writing in CPU: Subset library addition.
9.10 Library Import: Addition.
9.11 Library Export: Addition.
9.12 Bilingual correspondence of a library comment: Addition.
11.5 Program size: Addition.
12.2.1 All Program+Parameter+Comment: Addition.
12.2.11 About writing during RUN: Addition of library use.
21.4 Restrictions of FBD: Master/Subset library addition.
Review of the screen
Review of the contents.

ix
14 January Configuration of instruction manuals concerned
2004 PC2/PC2J/PC3J Series Programming Manual:Renewal The No. of Manual.
8.1.3.5.2 Setting of Link Library
Change or delete with Ladder Edit .Review of the screen.[SYS 432 OP3,comment]
9.5.3 Writing in CPU (3) Collate&Check of FB version with CPU. : Addition.
9.7.1 Collate&Check of FB version. : Addition.
12.2 Writing in CPU. :Renewal of Table.
12.2.1.1 Collate&Check of FB version when FB is used. : Added contents
12.2.2.1.Check on version of FB library.: : Added contents
12.2.3-12.2.5 Writable during RUN : Addition.
12.2.11.2 Writing of FB use program during RUN.: Added contents
12.2.11.3 Correspondence list writing of FB use program during RUN: Addition.
12.2.12 Initialization of the inside data of FB. :Added contents.
12.3.2 Collate&Check of FB version when FB is used. : Added contents
12.8.2 The table for error-code of CPU. : Added&Changed contents.
7C #9.:Addition.,A1 Contents of error.: Change
Review of the contents.
15 March 2004 8.1.2.3.2 Setting of link library. 6.Collate&Check of FB version. Added contents
8.1.13 LD Block Checking
Disagreement of FB version: Changes to deal below the decimal point.
8.1.14.1 Label seach. Added contents
12.2.1.1 Collate&Check of FB version when FB is used.
Dialog change. [Yes] [No]=>[OK]
12.2.1.2 Automatic change to writing with library. Deleted
12.2.9 Situation list of selection "Write project data,at the same time."Added contents
12.3.2 Collate&Check of FB version when FB is used. Changed dialog
16.2.2 [Option][Configration][Operation][Extended program check function is used]
Deleted contents
Changed to operation “Locked with checked”
Review of the contents.
September 1.1 Operating Environment of PCwin : Changed contents
16 2005 4 Screen Positioning (Peripheral Devices) : Changed contents
5.6.6 I/O Diagram Input . : Added contents
5.8 Peripheral Tool-wise File Type Correspondence Chart: Changed contents
9.12 Bilingual correspondence of a library comment : Deleted contents
9.12 PCwin Security Tool : Changed contents
12.2 Writing in CPU : Changed contents
12.2.9 Situation list of selection "Write project data,at the same time.": Changed contents
12.2.12.3 Correspondence list writing of FB use program during RUN: Changed contents
16.1 Customize: Changed contents
16.2 Setting : Changed contents
20.3 Log Data Display: Added contents
21 The switch among three comment languages : Added contents
22 Function of an I/O Diagram : Added contents
Document 1. To add fonts : Added contents
Review of the screen
Review of the contents.
January 8.1.11.2 Batch change of Application Instruction operand.
17 2006 13.6 Time chart monitor
16.2.2 Operation
The company name "TOYODA MACHINE WORKS,LTD" is changed to "JTEKT
CORPORATION"
Febuary 2 Installation of PCwin
18 2006
July 8.1.13.1 When Symbolic Programming is OFF
19 2006 8.1.13.2 When Symbolic Programming is ON
8.1.16 Usage status
8.2.12 LD block comparison (maching)
9.8 Block Comparison
16.2.2 Operation
18.5 Usage Status List
18.6 Other drawing style prints
19.4 Usage Status List
19.5 Other drawing style prints
20.3 Log Data Display

x
 January Chapter 1. Overview contents changed
20 2007 Chapter 2 Installation of PCwin contents changed
Chapter 3. Connect with CPU contents changed
Chapter 5.1 New contents changed
Chapter 7 Editing SFC display contents changed
Chapter 8.1.9 Sequence Comments optimization added
10.7.1 Link Parameter contents changed
Chapter 22 I/O chart contents changed
Chapter 23 Network chart added
February 1.4 PCwin limited version with monitoring functions added
21 2007
March 2007 5.6.7 Import translation data added
22 5.7.4 Export translation data added
10.1 CPU Operation mode screen changed
12.10 Maintenance information added
12.11 Test mode added
13.8 1/O recorder added
16/2/1 File added
Data2.4 Restriction of FBD contents changed
April 2007 23.3.3 CPU Symbols and restrictions of master symbols contents changed
23
May 2007 2.3 Movement of option when upgrade added
24 23.3 Network Drawing contens changed
5.8 Convert added
25 June 2007 5.9 Peripheral Tool-wise File Type Correspondence Chart changed
8.1.12.10 Batch change of index added
8.1.13.4 Re-allocation of index number added
9.12 Library Convert added
10.1 CPU operation mode changed
10.7.3 Auto set up network drawing parameters added
10.7.4 Compare of network drawing parameters added
14.6.2 Signed and floating-points address monitor added
14.6.3 ASCII monitor added
22.5.13 Font style batch change added
22.5.14 The window style is returned to default added
Document2-3 Restrictions of SFC changed
Document2-4 Restrictions of FBD changed
Document3 Function Command(PC10 extension mode) added
3.4 Communication procedure with PC10G changed
26 July 2007 10.3 I/O Module changed
11.4.1.2 Circuit not supported added
23.2.10 Disconnection diagnosis/Network diagnosis possible line added
23.3. Auto parameter setting changed
Document2-4 Restrictions of FBD changed
22.5.1 New changed
27 August 22.5.2.1 Setup of language changed
2007
September 10.3 I/O Module changed
28 2007 11.4.1.2 Circuit not supported changed
November 12.4 Clear registers of CPU added
29 2007 Read from CPU Writing in CPU
March Chapter 5 File Add contents
30 2008 10.1.1.1 PC10 mode added
12.1 Read from CPU changed
12.2 Writing in CPU changed
12.9.1 Clear history added
16.2.6 Interchangeable added
21.9 Confirm language environment added
Document4 About Ver 10 added

xi
 September 8.1.14 LD Block Checking Add contents
31 2008 8.1.17 Usage status changed
8.1.19 Action Search Add contents
9.3.3.2 FB Program Check added
10.7.2.21 Special (AD10) added
11.2 Error Code List of SFC Conversion(build) Add contents
11.3 SFC conversion (build) warning messages Add contents
13.4.1.4 Ensued Monitoring of flag contact added
19.4 Circuit Diagram List Add contents
22.4.4 Print of I/O Drawing Add contents
22.5.15 Mark added
January 8.1.17 Usage status Add contents
32 2009 17.1.2 PCwin <-Unidraf Data Exchange Add contents
23.2.1 Type of the reserved symbols (module tag of the symbol list) Add contents
June 8.1.14 LD block cross-check Added content
33 2009 11.1.1.1. Non-supported circuits Added content
13.4 LD monitor Added content
13.6 Time chart Added content
Chap. 17 CAD Changed content
22.1 Overview Added content
22.5.7 Entry data list Changed content
December 5 File File type addition
34 2009 5.9 File format by peripheral tool sheet Addition by file type
8.1.2.3 Link library settings Addition by library type
8.1.3.5.1 FB library directory settings Addition by library type
8.1.3.5.2 Link library settings Addition by library type
8.1.14 LD block crosscheck Rule addition
9 Library Addition by library type
16.2.4 Library Setting item addition
22.1 Overview Precaution item addition
July Addition of PCDL-CPU
35 2010 Chapter 1, 3, 5, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 17, 20, 21, 22 and Material
Addition of abolition of options
Chapter 1, 2, 8, 9 and 19
Deletion of Symbolic programming function
Chapter 5, 8, 13, 14 and 16
Other
2 Change in content of PCwin installation
4.3 Change in disposition and content of Windows
16.1.3 Change in display and content
November Support for subset library
36 2010 5.5 Precautions for library data saving. Description is added.
5.9 Peripheral tool-specific file format correspondence table. Description is added.
8.1.2.3. FBD (function block diagram). Description is added.
8.1.2.4 To open in the master library. Description is added.
8.1.2.5 To open in the subset library. Description is added.
8.1.13 LD block verification. Description is added.
12.1 Reading from CPU. Description is added.
16.2.4 Library. Description is added.
February Support for WindowsVista/7
37 2011 1.1 Operating Environment of PCwin.
2 Installation of PCwin
3.4 Communication procedure with PC10G
May TOYODA brand logo added on the front cover
38 2012

xii
 August Support for Plus-CPU
39 2012 Support for MCML link parameter
Support for NC-SFC
Support for the operation improvements in ladder and SFC
Chapter 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 20, 21, 22, 23, and Material
December 2.1 To start up in Ver.8.0 or upper
40 2012 13.9 Forced ON/OFF during Ladder Monitor
16.2.3.3 Block check FB execution address setting
16.2.3.4 Forced ON/OFF setting in ladder monitoring [Initial: OFF]
May Support for Windows7 64bit
41 2013 1.1 Operating Environment of PCwin
2 Installation of PCwin
December [12.2.8 Register] caution addition
42 2014 [13.5.1.1 Batch setting of monitor address] caution addition
[14.6.1.1.1 Batch Setting of Edit Address] caution addition
[18.3 Circuit Diagram List Print] caution addition
[19.4 Circuit Diagram List Drawing Style Print] caution addtion
January Support for addition of SFC manual functions
43 2015 Support for addition of automatic generation of bypass circuits
6.5 Added SFC manual setup
Chapter 7 Change of action dialog
7.4.10 Added SFC manual setup
7.4.11 Added setup for automatic generation of bypass circuits
October 1.1 Operating Environment of PCwin - Cautionary items were added.
47 2018 2 Installation of PCwin - Cautionary items were added. Description was modified.
3.2 Communication Setting - Description was modified.
5 File - Description about the extension was added. Description was modified.
5.6.3 A function to import address comments to the Screen Helper fault table was added.
Support for Windows 10
5.11 Peripheral Tool-wise File Type Correspondence Chart - Description was modified.
6.7 LD View - Function was added.
7.3.8 Jump Setting in the Process in Case of SFC Monitor - Description was
modified.
9 Preparation of Program in Modules - Added.
11.7.2 Additions were made to detail link parameter settings.
(MCSSC,AF1ML, ,EtherNet (32Port),CAN,Plus CLNK-M,Plus CLNK-S,
EtherNet/IP, EtherNet/IP Plus EtherNet/IP, EtherCAT-M, Special
Communication(AD,HPIC,CT10) Added.
14.10 Start Offline Monitor - Function was added.
14.11 Watch List Monitor - Function was added.
15.9 Network Monitor - Function was added.
"15.9.6 Network monitor display" Correction of mistakes in the picture
January
48 "23. Function of I/O Diagram" Add reference destination
2019
"Document 5. I/O diagram symbol list, Network diagram symbol list" Addition
March 9. Preparation of Program in Modules Description is added.
49 2019 12.2.Error Code List of SFC Conversion(build) Description is added.
April 8. Add device-specific collation result save function
50 2019 14. Add function of time chart monitor output file
June
51 2019
1.1 Operating Environment of PCwin Display settings is added.
July
52 2019
Appendix 5 Review of I / O Diagram IEC Symbols

January
53 2020
Clerical error correction.

"14 Monite "Time chart monitor (supports multiple PLCs)

"15 Settings"
July
55 2020
・Addition of communication module
・Addion of Network Monitor
14.7.2.1 Time chart monitor (supports multiple PLCs) Added support for HEX display

xiii
 Clerical error correction of Revision history of instruction manual
August 15.9.2.7 Changing the User Interface for Backup Folder Settings
56 2020 Clerical error correction of text.
Addition of 24.2.7 EtherCAT
January 15 Settings
57 2021 Addition of network monitor functions
Added AF1-ML operation mode (AF1K mode)
April
58 2021
11.7.2.18 AF1-ML
11.7.2.21 Plus AF1-ML
March
59 2022
Added connector and pin symbols (259-266) to the IEC symbol set

March
60 2022
TOYODA brand logo removed

May Added connector and pin symbols (107-110, 115-118, 140-147) to the IEC symbol set.
61 2022 Added 18.5 Precautions when creating a module

June Added Document 6 Requests for Customers Using Windows 10 Pro 2004 or Later
62 2022 PCs

September
63 2022
Document Added symbols to the document 5 IEC symbol set

March
64 2023
14.8 Addition of capacity expansion for event monitor settings

5. Add file extension list

11.3.2 Add current value description
11.7.3 Support for EtherNet/IP of automatic setting of network diagram
parameters and verification of network diagram parameters
June 12.4.1.1 Addition of Type of format error and error code 0C explanation
65 2023 13.11 Addition of Maintenance information function explanation
14.6.3 Addition of explanation of monitor start warning message
18.5. Addition of explanation of precautions when creating modules
24. Added EtherNet/IP for EtherNet/IP in the network diagram
Document 5 update (network diagram symbol update)
14.7.2 Addition of Time chart monitor after Ver. 19.13 R01 (Multiple PLCs
September
66 2023
Compatible)
24 network diagram DM compatible version description
1-1. Operating Environment of PCwin
Windows 11 compatibility description added, display resolution changed
November
67 2023
2.1. Installation of PCwin Ver. 17.3 Rev. 02 or Later
Added explanation when installing for the first time
14.7.2.6 Addition of Starting Monitor file format description
5.6.8 Addition of Importing of module
November 8.1.11.6 Addition of.6 Format of Address Modification File added
68 2024 8.1.20 Addition of Comment display when importing or copying
10.5.1 Addition of FB Program check

xiv
Configuration of instruction manuals concerned
Instruction
manual No. Name Outline
Describes the basic operation, function,
T-310*E PC3JD Instruction Manual specifications and so on of PC3JD.
Describes the basic operation, function,
T-833*E PC2J Series Instruction Manual specifications and so on of PC2J Series.
Describes the basic operation, function,
T-300*E PC3J Instruction Manual specifications and so on of PC3J.

T-822*E PC2 Series Instruction Manual Describes the basic operation, function,
specifications and so on of PC2 Series.
Describes the method to produce the sequence
T-307*E PC2/PC2J/PC3J Series program used in PC2/PC2J/PC3J and way to use the
Programming Manual
applicable instruction.

T-330*E MX Instruction Manual Basic operation, function specification etc of MX are

explained.

PC1/F2 Series Programming Process of creating Sequence Program used in

TM-616*E PC1/F2 series and method of using of application
manual command are explained.
SFC Programming Describes the method of operation,
T-350*E Manual functions, specifications etc. of tools used for
Programming SFC.

T-335*E PC10G Programming manual Describes the basic operation, function,

specifications and so on of PC10G.

PCDL Series Programming Describes the basic operation, function,

T-362*E
manual specifications and so on of PCDL Series.

T-380*E Plus CPU module Instruction Describes the basic operation, function,
manual specifications and so on of Plus.

xv
Reading Index

This document comprises of 23 chapters.

Chapter 1.Outline
Gives the outline of PCwin

Chapter 2.Installation
Explains the method of installation of PCwin

Chapter 3.Connection with CPU

Describes the method of connecting PCwin and TOYOPUC. In this chapter, the instance
of directly connecting CPU to TOYOPUC using PC RS232C has been described.

Chapter 4.Screen Positioning

Describes screen composition of PCwin.

Chapter 5.File
Describes the method of operation related to files.

Chapter 6.Project Window

Describes the Project Window Screen and the method of creation of process
in SFC programming.

Chapter 7.SFC Window Editing

Describes the methods of creation and editing of SFC Chart .

Chapter 8.LD Window Editing

Describes the methods of creation and editing of LD Program.

Chapter 9. Preparation of Program in Modules

Chapter 10.Library
Explains creation and editing method of library program.

Chapter 11.Parameter Setting

Describes the method of setting parameters needed for the operation of TOYOPUC.

Chapter 12.Program Check

Describes the method of Program check after the creation of program.

Chapter 13.CPU
Describes the reading and writing of data, parameters and programs with TOYOPUC
and about the interface between PCwin and CPU.

Chapter 14.Monitor
Describes the monitoring function and method of operation of SFC/LD/Data Register.

xi v
Chapter 15.Settings
Describes the method of changing set and current values of timer / counter as well as
set value of Register.

Chapter 16.ME-NET
Describes about Parameter settings and Parameter file of ME-NET module.

Chapter 17.Option
Describes about various option settings.

Chapter 18.CAD
Describes about CAD I/F function.

Chapter 19.Printing
Describes about printing function.

Chapter 20.Drawing Style Print

Describes about Drawing style print function.

Chapter 21.Tool
Describes about I/O Operation Panel, I/O Check, Logging Display.

Chapter 22.Conversion among 3 comment languages

Notes on conversion function among 3 comment languages

Chapter 23.I/O Functional Diagram

Notes on I/O Diagram edit, and Read/Write interfaces to CPU

Chapter 24.Network chart

Explain about edit functions of network chart.

Chapter 25. Help menu

Describes the functions of the help menu.

xv
 INDEX
1. PCwin Outline ................................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1. Operating Environment of PCwin.........................................................................................................................1-2
1.2. Scope of PCwin.....................................................................................................................................................1-6
1.3. Required option table ............................................................................................................................................1-6
2. Installation of PCwin ......................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1. Installation of PCwin Ver. 17.3 Rev. 02 or Later .........................................................................................2-6
2.2. To start up in Ver.8.0 or upper ......................................................................................................................2-14
2.3. Confirmation of version information ...................................................................................................................2-15
2.4. Movement of option when upgrade(Only PCwin Ver11 or earlier) ...................................................................2-16
2.4.1. Uninstalling of option(Only PCwin Ver11 or earlier) ...........................................................................2-16
2.4.2. Installation of option(Only PCwin Ver11 or earlier) ............................................................................2-18

3. Connection with CPU ....................................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1. Connection devices...............................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1. PC10G, Plus Connections ..............................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.2. PCDL connection.............................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.3. Other PLC Connection ....................................................................................................................................3-2
3.2. Communication Setting.........................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3. Connection of PC and PC10 ................................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.1. For Windows 2000 ..........................................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.2. For Windows XP..............................................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.3. Installation Startup Screen ..............................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.4. Search screen..................................................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.5. End screen of the installation ..........................................................................................................................3-7
3.4. Communication procedure with PC10G ..............................................................................................................3-8

4. Screen Positioning (Peripheral Devices) ..........................................................................................................................4-1

4.1. Tool Bar .......................................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1. Standard Tool Bar................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.2. SFC Tool Bar .......................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.1.3. LD Tool Bar ..........................................................................................................................................................4-3
4.1.3.1. PC2 / PC3 / PC10 series .............................................................................................................................4-3
4.1.3.2. PC1 Series / MX...........................................................................................................................................4-4
4.1.4. Book Mark Search Tool Bar ................................................................................................................................4-4
4.1.5. Communication module setting tool Bar ............................................................................................................4-4
4.1.6. I/O Drawing network chart toolbar ...................................................................................................................4-5
4.2. Positioning of Window ................................................................................................................................................4-6
4.3. Change of Window Positioning..................................................................................................................................4-7
4.4. Change of Display Language ....................................................................................................................................4-7
5. File ..................................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1. New ........................................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.2. Open (File).............................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.3. Save .......................................................................................................................................................................5-6
5.4. Save As..................................................................................................................................................................5-7
5.5. Note of the library data save .................................................................................................................................5-7
5.6. Import of Related File ............................................................................................................................................5-8
5.6.1. Import of SFC Program ...................................................................................................................................5-8
5.6.2. Import of LD Program......................................................................................................................................5-9
5.6.3. Import of Comment file .................................................................................................................................5-9
xvi
 5.6.4. Import of I/O Register .................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.6.5. Input of event monitoring file ......................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.6.6. Import of I/O Diagram , Network Drawing Data Input ............................................................................... 5-11
5.6.7. Export of translation data .............................................................................................................................. 5-11
5.6.8. Importing of module....................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.7. Export of Related Files........................................................................................................................................5-14
5.7.1. Export of comment ........................................................................................................................................5-14
5.7.2. Export of I/O Register ....................................................................................................................................5-14
5.7.3. Output of event monitoring file ......................................................................................................................5-14
5.7.4. Import of translation data...............................................................................................................................5-14
5.8. Convert ................................................................................................................................................................5-15
5.9. Saving While Ladder Editing ....................................................................................................................................5-14
5.9.1. File Saving .........................................................................................................................................................5-14
5.9.2. File Open ...........................................................................................................................................................5-15
5.9.3. CPU Writing .......................................................................................................................................................5-15
5.10. Bookmark Saving ...................................................................................................................................................5-16
5.10.1. File Saving .......................................................................................................................................................5-16
5.10.2. File Open .........................................................................................................................................................5-16
5.10.3. CPU Writing .....................................................................................................................................................5-16
5.11. Peripheral Tool-wise File Type Correspondence Chart ........................................................................................5-17

6. Project Window ..............................................................................................................................................................6-1

6.1. Setting of Project Window.....................................................................................................................................6-1
6.2. Registration Procedure of Process ......................................................................................................................6-3
6.3. Registration Procedure of Sub-Process ..............................................................................................................6-4
6.3.1. First Registration..............................................................................................................................................6-4
6.3.2. Registration after 2nd........................................................................................................................................6-5
6.3.3. Hierarchical display of Sub-processes ...........................................................................................................6-6
6.4. Change of comment .............................................................................................................................................6-7
6.4.1. Change of Process Comment ........................................................................................................................6-7
6.4.2. Change of Sub-process Comment .................................................................................................................6-8
6.5. SFC JOG OPERATION ........................................................................................................................................6-9
6.5.1. Change to enable/disable SFC manual function ...........................................................................................6-9
6.5.2. SFC manual mode allocation address .........................................................................................................6-10
6.6. Deletion of Process (PRO), Sub-process (SUB-PROC) .................................................................................. 6-11
6.6.1. Deletion of Process..................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.6.2. Deletion of sub-process ................................................................................................................................6-12
6.7. LD View ...............................................................................................................................................................6-13
6.7.1. Jump to Action, Label, Subroutine or Interrupt.............................................................................................6-13
6.7.2. Copying, Cutting and Pasting .......................................................................................................................6-13
7. SFC Window Edit ..........................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1. Positioning of Graphic Symbols ...........................................................................................................................7-2
7.2. Input of Steps ........................................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.1. Input Flow of Initial Step and Step ..................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.2. Input Flow of Sub-Step....................................................................................................................................7-2
7.3. Positioning of Step Symbols .................................................................................................................................7-3
7.3.1. Positioning of Initial Steps ...............................................................................................................................7-3
7.3.2. Duplication of Initial Step .................................................................................................................................7-3
7.3.3. Positioning of Steps .........................................................................................................................................7-3
7.3.4. Positioning of Sub-Step...................................................................................................................................7-4
7.3.5. Positioning of Diagnosed Step........................................................................................................................7-4
xvii
 7.3.6. Marking of Dummy Step display .....................................................................................................................7-4
7.3.7. NC Step Display ..............................................................................................................................................7-4
7.3.8. Jump setting in the process in case of SFC monitor .....................................................................................7-5
7.4. Feeding of Active Block.........................................................................................................................................7-6
7.4.1. Used Actions Number Limit ............................................................................................................................7-8
7.4.2. Entry of Step No. .............................................................................................................................................7-8
7.4.3. Entry of Step Comment...................................................................................................................................7-9
7.4.4. Selection of Step Diagnosis ..........................................................................................................................7-10
7.4.5. Setting of Step Diagnosis Set Value .............................................................................................................7-10
7.4.6. Setting of Step Diagnosis Alarm Output ....................................................................................................... 7-11
7.4.7. Setting of Set Elapsed Time Output ............................................................................................................. 7-11
7.4.8. Setting of Action Qualifier ..............................................................................................................................7-12
7.4.9. Setting of Action .............................................................................................................................................7-14
7.4.9.1. Setting based on Action No. .................................................................................................................7-16
7.4.9.2. Fresh creation or change of Action ......................................................................................................7-17
7.4.9.3. Setting based on Direct Bit Device Address ........................................................................................7-17
7.4.9.4. Monitor Input of Completion of Step Execution ...................................................................................7-18
7.4.10. SFC manual settings .....................................................................................................................................7-20
7.4.10.1. Reverse action settings ........................................................................................................................7-20
7.4.11. Setup for automatic generation of bypass circuit .........................................................................................7-21
7.4.11.1. Completion memory setup ...................................................................................................................7-21
7.4.11.2. Automatic generation ............................................................................................................................7-24
7.4.11.3. Restrictions ............................................................................................................................................7-26
7.5. Entry of Action Block(s) for NC step ...................................................................................................................7-27
7.5.1. Entry of Step No. ...........................................................................................................................................7-27
7.5.2. Entry of O Number ........................................................................................................................................7-27
7.5.3. Entry of Step Comment.................................................................................................................................7-27
7.5.4. Entry of Monitor Input of Completion of Step Execution..............................................................................7-27
7.5.5. NC- SFC Start Switch ...................................................................................................................................7-27
7.6. Entry of Sub-SFC Dialog ....................................................................................................................................7-28
7.6.1. Step No. Input ................................................................................................................................................7-28
7.6.2. Entry of Step Comment.................................................................................................................................7-28
7.6.3. Selection of Step Diagnosis ..........................................................................................................................7-29
7.6.4. Setting of Step Diagnosis Set Point..............................................................................................................7-29
7.6.5. Setting of Step Diagnosis Alarm Output .......................................................................................................7-30
7.6.6. Setting of Step Elapsed Time Output ...........................................................................................................7-30
7.6.7. Monitor Input of completion of Step Execution ............................................................................................7-30
7.6.8. Jump to Sub-process (Hierarchical Shift).....................................................................................................7-31
7.7. Entry of Transition ...............................................................................................................................................7-32
7.7.1. Flow of Transition Input .................................................................................................................................7-32
7.8. Positioning of Transition ......................................................................................................................................7-32
7.9. Entry of Transition Dialog ....................................................................................................................................7-32
7.9.1. Entry of Transition Number ...........................................................................................................................7-33
7.9.2. Transition Comment Input.............................................................................................................................7-33
7.9.3. Fresh creation/ Change of Transition Condition Program ...........................................................................7-34
7.10. Positioning of Sub SFC Start ..............................................................................................................................7-35
7.11. Positioning of Sub SFC End ...............................................................................................................................7-36
7.12. Positioning of Selective / Parallel Branching / Confluence ...............................................................................7-37
7.12.1. Description of Tool Bar Icons. .......................................................................................................................7-37
7.12.2. Branching / Branching Corner ......................................................................................................................7-37

xviii
 7.12.2.1. Insertion of Branch ................................................................................................................................7-37
7.12.2.2. Insertion of corner .................................................................................................................................7-37
7.12.2.3. Common use of Icons...........................................................................................................................7-38
7.12.3. Confluence / Confluence Corner ..................................................................................................................7-39
7.12.3.1. Insertion of Confluence .........................................................................................................................7-39
7.12.3.2. Insertion of Corner ................................................................................................................................7-39
7.12.3.3. Common use of Icons...........................................................................................................................7-39
7.13. Positioning of Jump .............................................................................................................................................7-40
7.13.1. Entry of Jump.................................................................................................................................................7-40
7.14. Collective positioning of symbols .......................................................................................................................7-41
7.14.1. Collective positioning of steps and transitions .............................................................................................7-41
7.14.2. Collective positioning of parallel connected dummy steps and connected transitions ..............................7-42
7.14.3. Collective positioning of selective branch dummy step and branch transition ...........................................7-43
7.15. Un Do ...................................................................................................................................................................7-44
7.16. Re Do ...................................................................................................................................................................7-44
7.17. Cut........................................................................................................................................................................7-44
7.18. Paste ....................................................................................................................................................................7-44
7.19. Copy.....................................................................................................................................................................7-45
7.20. Select All ..............................................................................................................................................................7-45
7.21. Move ....................................................................................................................................................................7-45
7.22. Insertion and Deletion of Row and Columns .....................................................................................................7-46
7.22.1. Insertion of rows and columns ......................................................................................................................7-46
7.22.2. Deletion of Row and Column ........................................................................................................................7-47
7.23. Insertion/Deletion/Automatic Sorting of Cell ......................................................................................................7-48
7.23.1. Insertion of Cell ..............................................................................................................................................7-48
7.23.2. Deletion of Cell...............................................................................................................................................7-48
7.23.3. Automatic Sorting of Cell...............................................................................................................................7-48
7.24. Comment Edit (Entry and Editing of Comment) ................................................................................................7-49
7.24.1. Step Comment Edit (Entry and Editing of Comment) ...............................................................................7-49
7.24.2. Transition Comment Edit (Entry/ Edit of Comment) ....................................................................................7-50
7.25. Display mode [Display] – [Display Type]............................................................................................................7-51
7.25.1. Comment Display ..........................................................................................................................................7-51
7.25.2. Comment 100 character display...................................................................................................................7-51
7.25.3. Step Elapsed Time Display ...........................................................................................................................7-52
7.25.4. Comment Display and Step Elapsed Time Display .....................................................................................7-52
7.26. Enlargement /Reduction of Display : [Display] – [Zoom] ..................................................................................7-52
7.27. Search : [Display] – [Search] ..............................................................................................................................7-53
7.27.1. Number Search .............................................................................................................................................7-53
7.27.2. Comment Search ..........................................................................................................................................7-53
7.27.3. Search Result ................................................................................................................................................7-54
7.27.3.1. Search Contents ...................................................................................................................................7-54
7.27.3.2. [OK] button ............................................................................................................................................7-54
7.27.3.3. [Cancel] button ......................................................................................................................................7-54
7.28. Jump : [Display] – [Jump] – [Step/Transition] ....................................................................................................7-55
7.29. Bookmark : [Display] – [Bookmark] ....................................................................................................................7-56
7.29.1. Setting / Release of Bookmark : [Display] – [Bookmark ] – Bookmark setting / Release].........................7-56
7.29.1.1. Setting of Bookmark..............................................................................................................................7-56
7.29.1.2. Release of Bookmark ...........................................................................................................................7-56
7.29.2. To Previous Mark : [Display] – [Bookmark] – [To Previous Mark] ...............................................................7-56
7.29.3. To Next Mark : [Display] – {bookmark} – [To Next Mark] .............................................................................7-56

xix
 7.29.4. Release of all Bookmarks : [Display] – [Bookmark] – [Release All Bookmarks] ........................................7-56
7.30. Reallocate All .......................................................................................................................................................7-57
7.30.1. Step No. : [Edit] – [Reallocate] – [Step No.] .................................................................................................7-57
7.30.2. Transition Number .........................................................................................................................................7-57

8. LD (Ladder) Window Edit ..............................................................................................................................................8-1

8.1. PC2/PC3J/PC10/PCDL/Plus series ...........................................................................................................8-2
8.1.1. Entry of New Block ....................................................................................................................................8-2
8.1.2. Address Programming ....................................................................................................................................8-3
8.1.2.1. Positioning of Symbols ...........................................................................................................................8-3
8.1.2.2. Change of Symbol ..................................................................................................................................8-5
8.1.2.3. Function Command ................................................................................................................................8-6
8.1.2.4. FBD(Function Block Diagram) .............................................................................................................8-10
8.1.2.5. To open in the master library ................................................................................................................ 8-11
8.1.2.5.1. Directory setting of FB Library........................................................................................................ 8-11
8.1.2.5.2. Setting of Link Library .....................................................................................................................8-12
8.1.2.5.3. Positioning of FB(Function Block)..................................................................................................8-16
8.1.2.5.4. Change of symbols.........................................................................................................................8-19
8.1.2.5.5. Constant/Variable Input ..................................................................................................................8-20
8.1.2.5.6. Variable Output ...............................................................................................................................8-22
8.1.2.5.7. Editing of FB I/O Part......................................................................................................................8-22
8.1.2.5.8. Loop back of Output Part of FB .....................................................................................................8-23
8.1.2.5.9. Loop back restriction during FB positioning ..................................................................................8-24
8.1.2.6. To open in the subset library .....................................................................................................8-25
8.1.2.6.1. FB library directory setting..............................................................................................................8-25
8.1.2.6.2. Limitations in function when the file is opened in the subset library.............................................8-25
8.1.3. Creation of OR Circuit ............................................................................................................................8-27
8.1.3.1. Line Insertion (Creation of 2 nd line in the same block) .......................................................8-27
8.1.3.2. Drawing of OR ...................................................................................................................................8-28
8.1.4. Contact Point Insertion ...........................................................................................................................8-29
8.1.5. Entry of Block Comment ........................................................................................................................8-30
8.1.6. Move/ Copy of Data.......................................................................................................................................8-31
8.1.6.1. Un Do.....................................................................................................................................................8-31
8.1.6.2. Re Do.....................................................................................................................................................8-31
8.1.6.3. Cut..........................................................................................................................................................8-31
8.1.6.4. Paste ......................................................................................................................................................8-31
8.1.6.5. Copy.......................................................................................................................................................8-32
8.1.6.6. Comment Tracking When Copying ......................................................................................................8-32
8.1.7. Comment Edit(Entry/ Edit of Comment).......................................................................................................8-33
8.1.8. Sequence comments optimization ...............................................................................................................8-34
8.1.9. Display Selection ...........................................................................................................................................8-35
8.1.9.1. Display Number.....................................................................................................................................8-35
8.1.9.2. Comment Display..................................................................................................................................8-35
8.1.9.3. Successive Entry of Comment .............................................................................................................8-37
8.1.9.4. Direct Input of Comment.......................................................................................................................8-38
8.1.9.5. Comment 100 characters display ........................................................................................................8-39
8.1.10. Change of Screen Enlargement ...................................................................................................................8-39
8.1.11. Change All......................................................................................................................................................8-40
8.1.11.1. Batch change of I/O Address................................................................................................................8-40
8.1.11.2. Batch change of Application Instruction operand. ...............................................................................8-44
8.1.11.3. I/O Address Batch Change (Modification File Reading) .....................................................................8-47
xx
 8.1.11.4. Batch change of Function Instruction Operands (Modification File reading) .....................................8-53
8.1.11.5. Batch Change of SFC Data..................................................................................................................8-57
8.1.11.5.1. SFC Data ......................................................................................................................................8-57
8.1.11.6. Format of Address Modification File.....................................................................................................8-58
8.1.11.7. File Format Error Display ......................................................................................................................8-59
8.1.11.8. Cautions.................................................................................................................................................8-61
8.1.11.9. Batch interchange of AB contact Points...............................................................................................8-62
8.1.11.10. Batch change of index ..........................................................................................................................8-63
8.1.12. Re-allocation ..................................................................................................................................................8-64
8.1.12.1. Re-allocation of Application Instruction Serial No................................................................................8-64
8.1.12.2. Re-allocation of Edge Detection Address ............................................................................................8-65
8.1.12.3. Re-allocation of Extended Edge Detection..........................................................................................8-66
8.1.12.4. Re-allocation of index number..............................................................................................................8-66
8.1.13. LD Block Checking ........................................................................................................................................8-67
8.1.13.1. CPU mode except PC1/MX..................................................................................................................8-67
8.1.13.2. PC1/MX CPU mode..............................................................................................................................8-71
8.1.14. Search ............................................................................................................................................................8-73
8.1.14.1. Label search ..........................................................................................................................................8-74
8.1.15. Jump using the Book Mark ...........................................................................................................................8-75
8.1.16. Usage status ..................................................................................................................................................8-76
8.1.17. Contact Point Table .......................................................................................................................................8-78
8.1.18. Action Search ................................................................................................................................................8-79
8.1.19. Tracing Search...............................................................................................................................................8-80
8.1.20. Comment display when importing or copying ..............................................................................................8-81
8.2. PC1 series /MX ...................................................................................................................................................8-82
8.2.1. Insertion of new block....................................................................................................................................8-82
8.2.2. Configuration (Layout) of symbols ................................................................................................................8-83
8.2.3. Change of symbol .........................................................................................................................................8-84
8.2.4. Creation of OR circuit ....................................................................................................................................8-85
8.2.4.1. Line insertion (Second line in the same block is created)...................................................................8-85
8.2.4.2. Plotting of OR ........................................................................................................................................8-85
8.2.5. Contact insertion ............................................................................................................................................8-86
8.2.6. Input of block comment .................................................................................................................................8-86
8.2.7. Data transfer (moving) and copy ..................................................................................................................8-87
8.2.7.1. Undo(return to original) :Un Do ............................................................................................................8-87
8.2.7.2. Re-do : Re Do .......................................................................................................................................8-87
8.2.7.3. Cut : Cut.................................................................................................................................................8-87
8.2.7.4. Paste : Paste .........................................................................................................................................8-87
8.2.7.5. Copy : Copy...........................................................................................................................................8-88
8.2.8. Comment editing (Input and editing of comment) .....................................................................8-89
8.2.9. Display selection ............................................................................................................................................8-90
8.2.9.1. Display number .....................................................................................................................................8-90
8.2.9.2. Comment display ..................................................................................................................................8-90
8.2.10. Change of screen enlargement ratio (screen expandability) ......................................................................8-91
8.2.11. Batch change .................................................................................................................................................8-92
8.2.11.1. I/O address batch change (modification) .............................................................................................8-92
8.2.11.2. Batch change of application command operand.................................................................................8-94
8.2.11.3. I/O Address Change All (Change Instruction File Reading)................................................................8-95
8.2.11.4. Change All of Function Instruction Operand(Change Instruction File Reading)................................8-95
8.2.11.5. Batch change of AB contacts switching. ..............................................................................................8-96

xxi
 8.2.12. LD block comparison (matching) ..................................................................................................................8-97
8.2.13. Search (Retrieval)..........................................................................................................................................8-99
8.2.14. Jump using bookmark ................................................................................................................................ 8-100
8.2.15. Use status ................................................................................................................................................... 8-101
8.2.16. Contact table ............................................................................................................................................... 8-101
8.2.17. Tracing search ............................................................................................................................................ 8-102
8.2.18. Editing of instruction language ................................................................................................................... 8-103

9. Preparation of Program in Modules ..................................................................................................................................9-1

9.1. How to Create the Module .........................................................................................................................................9-1
9.2. Ladder View ................................................................................................................................................................9-4
9.3. Operating the Module .................................................................................................................................................9-5
9.3.1. Adding a Module..................................................................................................................................................9-5
9.3.2. Deleting a Module ...............................................................................................................................................9-5
9.3.3. Canceling a Module ............................................................................................................................................9-6
9.3.4. Changing the Module Name or Comment .........................................................................................................9-7
9.3.5. Cutting the Module ..............................................................................................................................................9-8
9.3.6. Copying the Module ............................................................................................................................................9-8
9.3.7. Pasting the Module..............................................................................................................................................9-9
9.3.8. Moving the Module ............................................................................................................................................9-10
9.3.9. Exporting the Module ........................................................................................................................................ 9-11
9.3.10. Writing the module ..........................................................................................................................................9-13
9.4. Operating the Module ...............................................................................................................................................9-15
9.4.1. Importing the Module ........................................................................................................................................9-15
9.4.1.1. Importing the Program as a Module..........................................................................................................9-16
9.4.2. Reading the module from CPU ........................................................................................................................9-18
9.4.3. PCwin-to-UniDraf Conversion ..........................................................................................................................9-19
9.4.3.1. Example of Ladder Opened with UniDraf .................................................................................................9-20
9.4.4. UniDraf-to-PCwin Conversion ..........................................................................................................................9-21
9.5. Limitations and Cautionary Items ............................................................................................................................9-22

10. Library ......................................................................................................................................................................10-1

10.1. Outline..................................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.2. Edit Screen Image...............................................................................................................................................10-4
10.3. Creation of new FB Library .................................................................................................................................10-5
10.3.1. Creation of Library Project ............................................................................................................................10-5
10.3.2. Library Tag Definition .................................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.3.2.1. Tag Input Definition ............................................................................................................................ 10-10
10.3.2.2. Line Editing of Tag Edit Table ............................................................................................................ 10-14
10.3.3. Creation of Internal LD Program in FB ...................................................................................................... 10-19
10.3.3.1. Symbolic Programming ..................................................................................................................... 10-19
10.3.3.1.1. Positioning of Symbols .............................................................................................................. 10-19
10.3.3.1.2. Change of Symbol..................................................................................................................... 10-21
10.3.3.2. FB Program Check ............................................................................................................................ 10-22
10.4. Movement/Copy of FB Item ......................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.4.1. FB Cutting ................................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.4.2. FB Copying ................................................................................................................................................. 10-23
10.4.3. FB Paste ..................................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.4.4. Cautions when pasting FB ......................................................................................................................... 10-24
10.5. Writing of Library .............................................................................................................................................. 10-25
10.5.1. FB Program check...................................................................................................................................... 10-25
10.5.2. Save by putting File Name ......................................................................................................................... 10-26
xxii
 10.5.3. Overwriting of File ....................................................................................................................................... 10-26
10.5.4. Writing in CPU ............................................................................................................................................ 10-27
10.6. Reading of Library ............................................................................................................................................ 10-29
10.6.1. Open a file ................................................................................................................................................... 10-29
10.6.2. Reading from CPU ..................................................................................................................................... 10-30
10.7. Collate with CPU .............................................................................................................................................. 10-30
10.7.1. Collate of FB Library ................................................................................................................................... 10-30
10.7.2. Collate&Check of FB version ..................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.8. Block Comparison ............................................................................................................................................ 10-32
10.9. Close File .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-35
10.10. Library Import ................................................................................................................................................... 10-35
10.10.1. Input of the third language ......................................................................................................................... 10-35
10.11. Library Export ................................................................................................................................................... 10-36
10.11.1. Subset Library Export ................................................................................................................................. 10-36
10.12. Library Convert ................................................................................................................................................. 10-37
10.12.1. Convert to PC10 master 180KW library .................................................................................................... 10-37
10.12.2. Convert to Master 2 Free library ................................................................................................................ 10-38
10.13. Master 2 Free library ........................................................................................................................................ 10-39
10.13.1. Editing in Explorer....................................................................................................................................... 10-39
10.13.2. Hierarchy of 3 layers or more..................................................................................................................... 10-40
10.13.3. Cautions when editing ................................................................................................................................ 10-41
10.14. PCwin Security Tool ......................................................................................................................................... 10-42
10.14.1. Outline ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-42

11. Parameter Setting.................................................................................................................................................... 11-1

11.1. CPU operation mode .......................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1. PC10 series ................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1.1. PC10 Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1.2. PC10 Standard Mode ........................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.1.3. PC10 Extension Mode .......................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.2. PC3J series.................................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.3. PC2/PC2J series ........................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.4. PC1 series•MX .............................................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.1.4.1. PC1 series ............................................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.1.4.2. MX.......................................................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.1.4.3. PCDL ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.4.4. Plus ........................................................................................................................................................ 11-5
11.2. CPU Operation State .......................................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.3. I/O Module ........................................................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.3.1. Setting ............................................................................................................................................................ 11-8
11.3.2. Current Value ................................................................................................................................................. 11-8
11.4. Run State during Error ........................................................................................................................................ 11-9
11.5. Scan Time Timer ................................................................................................................................................. 11-9
11.6. Program Name .................................................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.7. Link Parameter ..................................................................................................................................................11-10
11.7.1. Link Setting ..................................................................................................................................................11-10
11.7.2. Detailed Setting ...........................................................................................................................................11-12
11.7.2.1. PC Link (Master) / (Slave) ..................................................................................................................11-12
11.7.2.2. PCI-1/F Input/ Output ..........................................................................................................................11-14
11.7.2.3. Computer Link .....................................................................................................................................11-15
11.7.2.4. MODBUS.............................................................................................................................................11-16
xxiii
 11.7.2.5. High Speed Remote I/O, AS-i.............................................................................................................11-17
11.7.2.6. HPC Link (Master), SUB-CPU (Master) ............................................................................................11-18
11.7.2.7. HPC Link Slave, SUB-CPU Slave .....................................................................................................11-18
11.7.2.8. Multiple Transfer ..................................................................................................................................11-19
11.7.2.9. Diagnosis Module ...............................................................................................................................11-20
11.7.2.10. 2 Port M-NET....................................................................................................................................11-21
11.7.2.11. Pulse Output Module. .........................................................................................................................11-22
11.7.2.12. DLINK-M, ,DLNK-S2...........................................................................................................................11-24
11.7.2.13. AF1K ....................................................................................................................................................11-25
11.7.2.14. MA1K ...................................................................................................................................................11-25
11.7.2.15. Motion Controller. ................................................................................................................................11-26
11.7.2.16. MCML ..................................................................................................................................................11-26
11.7.2.17. MCSSC(Motion controller) .................................................................................................................11-27
11.7.2.18. AF1ML(Motion controller) ...................................................................................................................11-27
11.7.2.19. Plus MCML (Motion controller) ...........................................................................................................11-28
11.7.2.20. Plus MCSSC(Motion controller) .........................................................................................................11-28
11.7.2.21. Plus AF1-ML(Motion controller)..........................................................................................................11-29
11.7.2.22. FL-net(8KB, 16KB, 32KB) ..................................................................................................................11-30
11.7.2.23. NC in-built PC......................................................................................................................................11-32
11.7.2.24. Ethernet / Ethernet(32port) .................................................................................................................11-33
11.7.2.25. PROFI-S2. ...........................................................................................................................................11-38
11.7.2.26. DLNK-M2.............................................................................................................................................11-39
11.7.2.27. FL Remote - M ....................................................................................................................................11-42
11.7.2.28. CAN .....................................................................................................................................................11-45
11.7.2.29. Plus CLNK-M ......................................................................................................................................11-46
11.7.2.30. Plus CLNK-S .......................................................................................................................................11-47
11.7.2.31. EtherNet / IP ........................................................................................................................................11-48
11.7.2.32. Plus EtherNet / IP................................................................................................................................11-49
11.7.2.33. EtherCAT-M .........................................................................................................................................11-50
11.7.2.34. Special (AD10, HPIC, CT10)..............................................................................................................11-51
11.7.2.35. Undefined Module. ..............................................................................................................................11-54
11.7.3. Auto set up network drawing parameters ..................................................................................................11-55
11.7.4. Check of network drawing parameters.......................................................................................................11-56
11.8. Interruption.........................................................................................................................................................11-56
11.8.1. Setting of Fixed Cycle Interruption Timer. ..................................................................................................11-57
11.8.2. Setting of External Interruption Timer .........................................................................................................11-57

12. Program Check........................................................................................................................................................12-1

12.1. SFC Program Check...........................................................................................................................................12-1
12.2. Error Code List of SFC Conversion(build) .........................................................................................................12-4
12.3. SFC conversion (build) warning messages .......................................................................................................12-5
12.4. LD Program Check [PC10/PC3/PC2serise] ......................................................................................................12-6
12.4.1. LD Program check result [PC10/PC3 /PC2series] ......................................................................................12-6
12.4.1.1. Types of Format Error and Error Code ................................................................................................12-7
12.4.1.2. Circuit not supported .............................................................................................................................12-8
12.4.2. LD program check result [PC1 series]....................................................................................................... 12-10
12.4.2.1. Display of Error in Circuit Display. ..................................................................................................... 12-10
12.4.2.2. Types and contents of format errors ..................................................................................................12-11
12.4.2.3. In the case of faulty creation of circuit. .............................................................................................. 12-14
12.5. Defragment FB execution memory ................................................................................................................. 12-16
12.6. Program size .................................................................................................................................................... 12-16
xxiv
13. CPU ..........................................................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1. Read from CPU ...................................................................................................................................................13-1
13.2. Writing in CPU .....................................................................................................................................................13-4
13.2.1. All Program + Parameter + Comment..........................................................................................................13-5
13.2.1.1. Collate&Check of FB version when FB is used...................................................................................13-7
13.2.2. All Program + Library+Parameter + Comment ............................................................................................13-8
13.2.2.1. Check on version of FB library .............................................................................................................13-8
13.2.3. Program 1 ......................................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.4. Program 2 ......................................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.5. Program 3 ......................................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.6. Parameter ......................................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.7. Comment .......................................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.8. Register ..........................................................................................................................................................13-9
13.2.9. Situation list of selection "Write project data, at the same time.". ............................................................ 13-10
13.2.10. Confirmation of SFC Deletion and Program Writing................................................................................. 13-12
13.2.10.1. Confirmation of SFC Deletion............................................................................................................ 13-12
13.2.10.2. Confirmation of Program Writing .................................................................................................... 13-12
13.2.11. SFC memory extension correspondence ................................................................................................. 13-12
13.2.12. About writing during RUN .......................................................................................................................... 13-14
13.2.12.1. Writing during RUN of a SFC use program ...................................................................................... 13-15
13.2.12.2. Writing during RUN of a FB use program ......................................................................................... 13-15
13.2.12.3. Correspondence list writing of FB use program during RUN .......................................................... 13-16
13.2.13. Initialization of the inside data of FB .......................................................................................................... 13-17
13.3. Collating with the CPU ..................................................................................................................................... 13-17
13.3.1. Binary checking of Program + Parameter ................................................................................................. 13-17
13.3.2. Collate&Check of FB version when FB is used. ....................................................................................... 13-18
13.3.3. In case of Register...................................................................................................................................... 13-19
13.4. Clear registers of CPU ..................................................................................................................................... 13-19
13.5. Operation Status of CPU ................................................................................................................................. 13-19
13.6. Stop/ Release stop of CPU.............................................................................................................................. 13-20
13.7. Resetting of CPU ............................................................................................................................................. 13-21
13.8. CPU Activation ................................................................................................................................................. 13-22
13.9. Error Monitor of CPU ....................................................................................................................................... 13-23
13.9.1. Clear history ................................................................................................................................................ 13-23
13.9.2. Detailed Display of Error Code:86 ............................................................................................................. 13-24
13.9.3. The table for error-code of CPU. ............................................................................................................... 13-25
13.10. Setting of Data and Time in the CPU. ............................................................................................................. 13-30
13.11. Repair and Maintenance ................................................................................................................................. 13-31
13.11.1. Facility information memory ....................................................................................................................... 13-31
13.11.2. System Write............................................................................................................................................... 13-32
13.12. Test mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 13-36
13.12.1. Setting the test mode ................................................................................................................................. 13-38
13.12.2. Cancel test mode........................................................................................................................................ 13-39
13.12.3. Apply test mode updates ........................................................................................................................... 13-40

14. Monitor .....................................................................................................................................................................14-1

14.1. Operation Outline .............................................................................................................................................14-1
14.2. Monitor Start / Stop:[Monitor] – [CPU Monitor Start] ...............................................................................14-1
14.2.1. Monitor Start :[Monitor] – [CPU Monitor Start] ...........................................................................14-1
14.2.2. Monitor Halt :[Monitor] – [CPU Monitor Halt] ..............................................................................14-1
14.3. SFC Chart Monitoring .....................................................................................................................................14-2

xxv
 14.3.1. Display of Execution History ..............................................................................................................14-2
14.3.2. Hold Action Display ................................................................................................................................14-3
14.3.3. Monitor with Step Elapsed Time .......................................................................................................14-4
14.3.4. Process Status Monitor:[Monitor] – [Process Status Monitor] .............................................14-5
14.3.5. Step Diagnostic Error History : [Monitor] – [Step Diagnostic Error]. ................................14-6
14.3.6. General Process Monitoring :[Monitor]-[General Process Monitor] ...................................14-7
14.3.7. Execution Action Search: [Monitor]-[Execution Action Search] ...........................................14-8
14.3.8. Jump Display to Process from SFC Step ......................................................................................14-9
14.3.9. Flag Jump Display from SFC Step to FB Input Pin ................................................................ 14-10
14.4. LD Monitor .......................................................................................................................................................14-11
14.4.1. Ensued Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 14-12
14.4.1.1. LD ....................................................................................................................................................... 14-12
14.4.1.2. Function Block Internal Monitor............................................................................................. 14-13
14.4.1.3. Ensued Monitoring of inside Function Block global point of contact ..................... 14-14
14.4.1.4. Ensued Monitoring of flag contact ........................................................................................ 14-15
14.4.2. Action Monitor ............................................................................................................................................. 14-16
14.4.3. Continuity monitor....................................................................................................................................... 14-16
14.5. Register and I/O Address Monitor ............................................................................................................. 14-17
14.5.1. Setting of monitor address ......................................................................................................................... 14-17
14.5.1.1. Batch setting of monitor address .......................................................................................... 14-17
14.5.1.2. Individual setting in address ................................................................................................... 14-18
14.6. Time chart monitor ........................................................................................................................................ 14-19
14.6.1. Activation of time chart monitor.................................................................................................................. 14-20
14.6.2. Address setting ........................................................................................................................................... 14-21
14.6.2.1. Title setting .................................................................................................................................... 14-21
14.6.2.2. CPU operation mode setting ................................................................................................... 14-22
14.6.2.3. Setting of scan unit ..................................................................................................................... 14-22
14.6.2.4. Change page ................................................................................................................................. 14-22
14.6.2.5. Line color ........................................................................................................................................ 14-22
14.6.2.6. Program No. selection ............................................................................................................... 14-23
14.6.2.7. Address setting ............................................................................................................................. 14-23
14.6.2.8. Continuous address input ........................................................................................................ 14-24
14.6.2.9. Monitor starting trigger .............................................................................................................. 14-25
14.6.2.10. Monitor stop trigger setting. .................................................................................................... 14-27
14.6.2.11. Ddress ALL CLEAR ..................................................................................................................... 14-29
14.6.3. Monitor starting ........................................................................................................................................... 14-31
14.6.4. Monitor stopping ......................................................................................................................................... 14-31
14.6.5. All Channel Display .................................................................................................................................... 14-32
14.6.6. Time measurement .................................................................................................................................... 14-33
14.6.6.1. Measurement time display ....................................................................................................... 14-34
14.6.7. Scale change .............................................................................................................................................. 14-34
14.6.8. Open file ...................................................................................................................................................... 14-35
14.6.9. Open a CSV File......................................................................................................................................... 14-36
14.6.10. CSV File Format ......................................................................................................................................... 14-37
14.6.11. File Saving .................................................................................................................................................. 14-39
14.6.12. CSV File Saving ......................................................................................................................................... 14-39
14.6.13. Printing ........................................................................................................................................................ 14-40
14.6.14. Display of comparison data........................................................................................................................ 14-41
14.7. Time Chart Monitor (Multiple PLCs Compatible) ................................................................................... 14-42
14.7.1. Time chart monitor before Ver. 19.13 R01 (Multiple PLC support) ....................................................... 14-42

xxvi
 14.7.1.1. Start Method ....................................................................................................................................... 14-42
14.7.1.2. User interface ..................................................................................................................................... 14-43
14.7.1.2.1. Screen positioning ..................................................................................................................... 14-43
14.7.1.2.2. In the toolbar .............................................................................................................................. 14-44
14.7.1.3. Monitor Settings ................................................................................................................................. 14-45
14.7.1.3.1. Start in Monitor Settings window .............................................................................................. 14-45
14.7.1.3.2. Address selection ...................................................................................................................... 14-46
14.7.1.3.3. Data type setting........................................................................................................................ 14-48
14.7.1.3.4. CH color setting ......................................................................................................................... 14-48
14.7.1.3.5. Display setting ........................................................................................................................... 14-49
14.7.1.3.6. Trigger settings .......................................................................................................................... 14-49
14.7.1.4. Starting Monitor .................................................................................................................................. 14-54
14.7.1.4.1. Collection settings ..................................................................................................................... 14-54
14.7.1.4.2. Start of collection ....................................................................................................................... 14-55
14.7.1.5. End of collection ................................................................................................................................. 14-56
14.7.1.6. Save .................................................................................................................................................... 14-56
14.7.1.7. Open ................................................................................................................................................... 14-56
14.7.1.8. Register scale indication .................................................................................................................... 14-57
14.7.1.9. Point display ....................................................................................................................................... 14-57
14.7.1.10. Print..................................................................................................................................................... 14-57
14.7.2. Time chart monitor after Ver. 19.13 R01 (Multiple PLCs Compatible)..................................................... 14-58
14.7.2.1. Start Method ....................................................................................................................................... 14-58
14.7.2.2. User interface ..................................................................................................................................... 14-59
14.7.2.2.1. Screen positioning ..................................................................................................................... 14-59
14.7.2.2.2. In the toolbar .............................................................................................................................. 14-60
14.7.2.3. Monitor Settings ................................................................................................................................. 14-60
14.7.2.3.1. Start in Monitor Settings window .............................................................................................. 14-60
14.7.2.3.2. Setting the Monitor Setting Screen ........................................................................................... 14-61
14.7.2.3.3. About Modules........................................................................................................................... 14-62
14.7.2.3.4. Address comment ..................................................................................................................... 14-64
14.7.2.3.5. Clearing Addresses ................................................................................................................... 14-64
14.7.2.3.6. Address selection ...................................................................................................................... 14-65
14.7.2.3.7. Data type setting........................................................................................................................ 14-66
14.7.2.3.8. CH color setting ......................................................................................................................... 14-67
14.7.2.3.9. Display setting ........................................................................................................................... 14-67
14.7.2.3.10. Trigger settings ........................................................................................................................ 14-68
14.7.2.4. Open ................................................................................................................................................... 14-69
14.7.2.5. Print..................................................................................................................................................... 14-70
14.7.2.6. Starting Monitor .................................................................................................................................. 14-70
14.7.2.6.1. Collection settings ..................................................................................................................... 14-70
14.7.2.6.2. Start of collection ....................................................................................................................... 14-72
14.7.2.7. End of collection ................................................................................................................................. 14-73
14.7.2.7.1. Collection completed ................................................................................................................. 14-73
14.7.2.7.2. Save ........................................................................................................................................... 14-73
14.7.2.8. Point display ....................................................................................................................................... 14-73
14.7.2.9. Zoom in/out......................................................................................................................................... 14-74
14.7.2.9.1. Time base scale......................................................................................................................... 14-74
14.7.2.9.2. Analog chart display .................................................................................................................. 14-75
14.8. Event monitor ................................................................................................................................................... 14-76
14.8.1. Creating of data for event monitor ................................................................................................ 14-76

xxvii
 14.8.1.1. Creating data by the toolbar ................................................................................................... 14-76
14.8.1.2. Creating data by the project window ................................................................................... 14-76
14.8.2. Opening/Reading of data for event monitor .............................................................................................. 14-77
14.8.2.1. Reading project data in CPU .................................................................................................. 14-77
14.8.2.2. Reading only the data for event monitor in CPU ............................................................ 14-78
14.8.2.3. Importing the data for event monitor ................................................................................... 14-78
14.8.2.4. Opening the project file ............................................................................................................ 14-79
14.8.3. Saving/Writing of data for event monitor ................................................................................... 14-80
14.8.3.1. Writing project data to CPU .................................................................................................... 14-80
14.8.3.2. Writing only the data for event monitor to CPU .............................................................. 14-82
14.8.3.3. Exporting the data for event monitor ................................................................................... 14-82
14.8.3.4. Saving the project file ................................................................................................................ 14-83
14.8.4. Display of setting data for event monitor ................................................................................... 14-84
14.8.5. Setting of Header information ......................................................................................................... 14-84
14.8.6. Setting of the parameters ........................................................................................................................... 14-85
14.8.6.1. Detail setting of action parameters ...................................................................................... 14-86
14.8.6.1.1. Setting of forwarding pattern ..................................................................................... 14-87
14.8.6.1.2. Copying of action parameter .......................................................................................... 14-87
14.8.7. Setting of the table ...................................................................................................................................... 14-88
14.8.7.1. Setting of table content ............................................................................................................. 14-88
14.8.7.2. Copying of table content ........................................................................................................... 14-89
14.9. I/O Recorder ..................................................................................................................................................... 14-90
14.9.1. Mechanism of I/O recorder ........................................................................................................................ 14-90
14.9.2. Start up I/O recorder ................................................................................................................................... 14-91
14.9.3. Read out I/O recorder data ........................................................................................................................ 14-92
14.9.4. Time chart ................................................................................................................................................... 14-92
14.9.5. Search button ............................................................................................................................................. 14-93
14.10. Forced ON/OFF during Ladder Monitor.......................................................................................................... 14-94
14.10.1. Forced ON/OFF Judgment ........................................................................................................................ 14-95
14.10.2. "ON" Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 14-96
14.10.3. "OFF" Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 14-96
14.10.4. Reset ........................................................................................................................................................... 14-96
14.10.5. Reset All ...................................................................................................................................................... 14-96
14.10.6. Open File..................................................................................................................................................... 14-97
14.10.7. Save File ..................................................................................................................................................... 14-97
14.10.8. I/O Operation Panel.................................................................................................................................... 14-97
14.11. Offline Monitor .................................................................................................................................................. 14-98
14.11.1. Starting Offline Monitor ..................................................................................................................... 14-98
14.11.2. Stopping Offline Monitor ................................................................................................................... 14-99
14.12. Watch Monitor Function ................................................................................................................................. 14-100
14.12.1. How to Register the Watch List .................................................................................................... 14-101
14.12.1.1. Exporting Watch List ................................................................................................................ 14-104
14.12.1.2. Importing Watch List ................................................................................................................ 14-104
14.12.1.3. Tab Control ................................................................................................................................... 14-105
14.12.2. Watch Monitor Circuit Jump ........................................................................................................... 14-106
15. Settings ....................................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1. Setting Menu .......................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.2. Change of Timer/Counter set value and current value. ....................................................................................15-1
15.3. I/O Forced on-off .................................................................................................................................................15-2
15.3.1. Set the address and ON/OFF .......................................................................................................................15-2
xxviii
 15.3.2. Writing the data to CPU.................................................................................................................................15-3
15.4. Inside FB I/O Forced on-off ................................................................................................................................15-4
15.4.1. Set the address and ON/OFF .......................................................................................................................15-4
15.4.2. Writing the data to CPU.................................................................................................................................15-5
15.5. Inside FB I/O initial ..............................................................................................................................................15-5
15.6. Register Edit ........................................................................................................................................................15-6
15.6.1. Register and I/O address Monitor.................................................................................................................15-6
15.6.1.1. Setting of Edit Address..........................................................................................................................15-6
15.6.1.1.1. Batch Setting of Edit Address ......................................................................................................15-6
15.6.1.1.2. Individual Setting of Edit Address ................................................................................................15-7
15.6.1.2. Offline Editing ........................................................................................................................................15-8
15.6.1.3. Data Fill..................................................................................................................................................15-8
15.6.1.4. CPU writing............................................................................................................................................15-8
15.6.2. Signed and floating-points address monitor.................................................................................................15-9
15.6.3. ASCII monitor ............................................................................................................................................. 15-10
15.7. Register Fill ....................................................................................................................................................... 15-10
15.8. Setting of Communication Module ...................................................................................................................15-11
15.8.1. Communication module Settings before Version 19.1 ............................................................................. 15-13
15.8.1.1. Setting of communication conditions ................................................................................................ 15-13
15.8.1.2. Setting via link .................................................................................................................................... 15-14
15.8.1.3. Setting of Remote Programming....................................................................................................... 15-17
15.8.2. Communication module setting of 19.1 or later ........................................................................................ 15-20
15.8.2.1. Communication settings .................................................................................................................... 15-22
15.8.2.2. Via link Settings .................................................................................................................................. 15-22
15.8.2.3. Editing in the Tree View ..................................................................................................................... 15-23
15.8.2.3.1. Move .......................................................................................................................................... 15-23
15.8.2.3.2. Direct Input to the tree ............................................................................................................... 15-24
15.8.2.4. Import/Export ...................................................................................................................................... 15-25
15.9. Network Monitor ............................................................................................................................................... 15-26
15.9.1. Networking Monitor earlier than Version 19.1 ........................................................................................... 15-26
15.9.1.1. Network Monitoring Range ................................................................................................................ 15-26
15.9.1.2. Starting the Network Configuration Tool ........................................................................................... 15-27
15.9.1.3. Creating .............................................................................................................................................. 15-28
15.9.1.4. Network Monitor Settings .................................................................................................................. 15-29
15.9.1.5. Target Station Edit of Network Monitor ............................................................................................. 15-32
15.9.1.6. Changing or Deleting the Name or Changing the Position.............................................................. 15-34
15.9.1.7. Monitor ................................................................................................................................................ 15-36
15.9.1.8. Network Monitor View ........................................................................................................................ 15-38
15.9.1.9. Data Backup ....................................................................................................................................... 15-39
15.9.1.10. Logging Function................................................................................................................................ 15-41
15.9.2. Networking Monitor Version 19.1 or Later................................................................................................. 15-42
15.9.2.1. Scope of network monitoring ............................................................................................................. 15-42
15.9.2.2. Start for networked Monitor ............................................................................................................... 15-43
15.9.2.3. Configuring Networking Monitor ........................................................................................................ 15-44
15.9.2.4. Monitor ................................................................................................................................................ 15-47
15.9.2.5. Update check ..................................................................................................................................... 15-49
15.9.2.6. Viewing Networked Monitor............................................................................................................... 15-50
15.9.2.7. Data backup ....................................................................................................................................... 15-50
15.9.2.8. Log function ........................................................................................................................................ 15-51
15.9.2.9. Configuration properties .................................................................................................................... 15-52

xxix
 15.9.2.10. Stand alone ........................................................................................................................................ 15-52

16. ME-NET ...................................................................................................................................................................16-1

16.1. ME-NET Menu ....................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.2. Editing ..................................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.2.1. Parameter setting ......................................................................................................................................16-1
16.2.2. Communication with ME-NET ......................................................................................................................16-3
16.3. Open the File. ......................................................................................................................................................16-3
16.4. Saving of File. ......................................................................................................................................................16-3
16.5. Save As................................................................................................................................................................16-3
17. Option .......................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1. Customize............................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1.1. Font ................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1.1.1. SFC, ladder display character font setting (Initial: MS Gothic 9 (Japanese)) ....................................17-1
17.1.1.2. Ladder contact comment display position setting (Initial: above) .......................................................17-1
17.1.1.3. Word wrap for SFC/ladder comment display setting (Initial: OFF) .....................................................17-1
17.1.2. Color ...............................................................................................................................................................17-2
17.1.2.1. Color setting for SFC/ladder display ....................................................................................................17-2
17.1.3. Display............................................................................................................................................................17-3
17.1.3.1. Tool bar, status bar display setting (Initial: ON) ...................................................................................17-3
17.1.3.2. Address display for search/contact screen (Initial: OFF) ....................................................................17-3
17.1.3.3. Ladder window display setting (Initial: OFF)........................................................................................17-4
17.1.4. SFC ................................................................................................................................................................17-5
17.1.4.1. Step number, transition number incremental value setting (Initial: 1).................................................17-5
17.1.4.2. Initial value setting for step diagnostic setting value (Initial: 100) .......................................................17-5
17.1.4.3. Initial step setting for jump (Initial: ON) ................................................................................................17-5
17.1.4.4. Limit setting for action setting number (Initial: ON)..............................................................................17-6
17.2. Setting ..................................................................................................................................................................17-7
17.2.1. File ..................................................................................................................................................................17-7
17.2.1.1. Simultaneously open/save related file setting (Initial: ON)..................................................................17-7
17.2.2. Operation 1 ....................................................................................................................................................17-8
17.2.2.1. Ladder circuit insert new block setting (Initial: ON) .............................................................................17-8
17.2.2.2. Direct display setting for the ladder circuit properties screen (Initial: ON) ......................................17-8
17.2.2.3. Continuous ladder circuit comment input setting (Initial: OFF) ...........................................................17-8
17.2.2.4. Setting for clearing the ladder circuit properties screen (Initial: ON) ..................................................17-9
17.2.2.5. Comment tracking setting when copying ladder circuit (Initial: ON) ...................................................17-9
17.2.2.6. Duplication check setting in SFC system Comment tracking setting when copying ladder circuit
(Initial: ON) ...............................................................................................................................................................17-9
17.2.2.7. Duplication check the SFC system work area and ladder circuit (Initial: ON) ................................ 17-10
17.2.2.8. Setting to prohibit writing to CPU of unsaved data (Initial: OFF) ..................................................... 17-10
17.2.2.9. Conduction monitor setting (Initial: OFF) .......................................................................................... 17-10
17.2.2.10. Mid-block page setting for ladder circuit printing (Initial: OFF)..........................................................17-11
17.2.2.11. Write program + single unit comment setting (Initial: OFF) ..............................................................17-11
17.2.2.12. Write setting of single unit program being displayed (Initial: OFF) .................................................. 17-12
17.2.2.13. User library setting for data back-up(Initial: OFF)............................................................................. 17-12
17.2.2.14. CPU operation mode setting when creating anew(Initial: PC3JG separation/PC10 standard)..... 17-12
17.2.2.15. Setting for monitor display type (Initial: hexadecimal) ...................................................................... 17-12
17.2.2.16. Monitor sampling time setting (Initial: 500ms) .................................................................................. 17-13
17.2.2.17. Floating point decimal setting (Initial: exponent display, 4 decimal display) ................................... 17-13
17.2.3. Operation 2 ................................................................................................................................................. 17-14
17.2.3.1. Block check display setting (Initial: OFF) .......................................................................................... 17-14
xxx
 17.2.3.2. Block check master library setting (Initial: ON) ................................................................................. 17-14
17.2.3.3. Block check FB execution address setting ....................................................................................... 17-14
17.2.3.4. Forced ON/OFF setting in ladder monitoring [Initial: OFF] .............................................................. 17-15
17.2.3.5. Comment Edit .................................................................................................................................... 17-15
17.2.4. Shortcut key definition ................................................................................................................................ 17-16
17.2.4.1. SFC, ladder shortcut key setting ....................................................................................................... 17-16
17.2.5. Library ......................................................................................................................................................... 17-17
17.2.5.1. FB library directory setting ................................................................................................................. 17-17
17.2.5.2. Comment setting when saving tags (Initial: OFF) ............................................................................ 17-17
17.2.5.3. Program check setting for changing link library (Initial: OFF) .......................................................... 17-17
17.2.5.4. FB library tree display setting (Initial: OFF)....................................................................................... 17-18
17.2.5.5. Sentinel setting for FB library editing (Initial: OFF) ........................................................................... 17-18
17.2.6. 3 languages ................................................................................................................................................ 17-19
17.2.6.1. Language setting for new projects .................................................................................................... 17-19
17.2.6.2. Usage condition setting for projects prior to 3 language support (Initial: OFF)............................... 17-19
17.2.6.3. 3 language recovery setting (Initial: OFF)......................................................................................... 17-19
17.2.7. Interchangeable .......................................................................................................................................... 17-20
17.2.7.1. PC10G and CPU operation mode setting ........................................................................................ 17-20
17.2.7.2. PC10 extended address display setting (Initial: OFF)...................................................................... 17-22
17.2.7.3. Forwarding location setting for I/O diagram, network diagram (Initial: OFF) .................................. 17-22
17.2.7.4. Ladder circuit single column display setting (Initial: OFF)................................................................ 17-22

18. CAD ..........................................................................................................................................................................18-1

18.1. Read from UniDraf ..............................................................................................................................................18-2
18.1.1. PCwin <- UniDraf Data Exchange [SUD] .....................................................................................................18-2
18.1.1.1. Symbol Number Setting........................................................................................................................18-4
18.1.2. PCwin <- UniDraf Data Exchange [ZMN].....................................................................................................18-5
18.1.3. Convert UniDraf to PC2/PC3/PC10 Ladder(UniDraf5 only) .......................................................................18-7
18.1.4. PCwin <- UniDraf Data Conversion [PC1] ...................................................................................................18-8
18.2. Writing in UniDraf ............................................................................................................................................. 18-10
18.2.1. PCwin ->UniDraf SFC Data Conversion [SUD] ........................................................................................ 18-10
18.2.1.1. Symbol Number Setting..................................................................................................................... 18-14
18.2.2. PCwin -> UniDraf Data Conversion [ZMN] ............................................................................................... 18-15
18.2.3. [Convert PC2/PC3/PC10 Ladder to UniDraf (UniDraf5 only)] ................................................................. 18-18
18.2.4. PCwin -> UniDraf Data Conversion [PC1] ................................................................................................ 18-19
18.3. FB library conversion for UniDraf .................................................................................................................... 18-23
18.4. Errors at the time of CAD Data <--> PC1 Language Data Conversion ........................................................ 18-24
18.5. Precautions when creating a module.............................................................................................................. 18-25
19. Print ..........................................................................................................................................................................19-1
19.1. Printing of SFC Sheet .........................................................................................................................................19-1
19.2. Printing of Action Block List ................................................................................................................................19-1
19.3. Circuit Diagram List .............................................................................................................................................19-2
19.4. Library Printing ....................................................................................................................................................19-3
19.4.1. Printing Procedure .........................................................................................................................................19-3
19.4.2. Instance of Function Block Print Output .......................................................................................................19-4
19.5. Usage Status List ................................................................................................................................................19-5
19.6. Other drawing style prints ...................................................................................................................................19-5
20. Drawing Style Print ..................................................................................................................................................20-1
20.1. Page set up .........................................................................................................................................................20-1
20.2. Form setup ..........................................................................................................................................................20-2

xxxi
 20.3. Printing of SFC Sheet .........................................................................................................................................20-5
20.4. Circuit Diagram List .............................................................................................................................................20-6
20.5. Usage Status List ............................................................................................................................................. 20-10
20.6. Other drawing style prints ................................................................................................................................ 20-10

21. Tool .................................................................................................................................................................................21-1

21.1. I/O Operation Panel................................................................................................................................................21-1
21.1.1. I/O Button Setting ............................................................................................................................................21-2
21.1.2. Execution Start/Stop .......................................................................................................................................21-3
21.1.3. Simulation Input (Effective only for PC3JG, PC10 and Plus extension mode)............................................21-4
21.2. I/O Check (for Output) (Effective only for PC3JG, PC10 and Plus extension mode) .........................................21-7
21.2.1. I/O Button Setting ............................................................................................................................................21-8
21.2.2. Execution Start/Stop .......................................................................................................................................21-8
21.3. Log Data Display ....................................................................................................................................................21-9

22. Switching three comment languages ...........................................................................................................................22-1

22.1. Summary.................................................................................................................................................................22-1
22.2. Initial settings ..........................................................................................................................................................22-4
22.2.1. Font settings ....................................................................................................................................................22-4
22.2.2. Function of setting 3 comment languages .....................................................................................................22-5
22.3. Sequence to convert previous projects to the 3 language projects (main projects) ...........................................22-6
22.3.1. Output the 3 language comments to existing projects ..................................................................................22-6
22.3.2. To save 3 comment languages projects ........................................................................................................22-7
22.3.3. To open the 3 comment languages project....................................................................................................22-7
22.3.4. To write three comment languages into CPU ................................................................................................22-8
22.3.5. The CPU read of 3 comment languages .......................................................................................................22-8
22.3.6. Recovery method of 3 comment languages data .........................................................................................22-9
22.4. Sequence to convert previous projects to the 3 languages projects (FB Library project) ............................... 22-10
22.4.1. Import 3 language comments to previous projects .................................................................................... 22-10
22.4.2. To save the 3 comment languages project ................................................................................................. 22-12
22.4.3. To open the 3 comment languages project................................................................................................. 22-12
22.4.4. To write 3 comment languages into CPU.................................................................................................... 22-13
22.4.5. CPU read of three comment languages ..................................................................................................... 22-13
22.4.6. Recovery method of 3 comment languages data ...................................................................................... 22-13
22.5. Switching methods of comment display ............................................................................................................. 22-15
22.6. Drawing style print method ................................................................................................................................. 22-15
22.7. Regular printing method ...................................................................................................................................... 22-16
22.8. Regarding to language selection ........................................................................................................................ 22-17
22.8.1. When the language settings in the main project and the FB library project are different ......................... 22-17
22.8.2. The sequence replacement method of the language selection................................................................. 22-17
22.9. Confirm language environment .......................................................................................................................... 22-18

23. Function of I/O Diagram ................................................................................................................................................23-1

23.1. Summary.................................................................................................................................................................23-1
23.2. Tracing search of I/O Drawing ...............................................................................................................................23-4
23.2.1. Tracing search(Input) ......................................................................................................................................23-4
23.2.2. Tracing search(Output) ...................................................................................................................................23-5
23.3. To setup the I/O Drawing and Network Drawing...................................................................................................23-6
23.4. Print of I/O Drawing ................................................................................................................................................23-7
23.4.1. Coil cross reference of I/O Drawing ...............................................................................................................23-7
23.4.2. The circuit diagram list coil mutual reference, the output circuit diagram contact point mutual reference .23-8
23.4.3. Contact cross reference of circuit diagram list ...............................................................................................23-9

xxxii
 23.4.4. Mutual reference of other device contact points in I/O diagram ...................................................................23-9
23.5. Edit of I/O Drawing and Network Drawing ......................................................................................................... 23-10
23.5.1. New ............................................................................................................................................................... 23-10
23.5.2. Setup of project .............................................................................................................................................23-11
23.5.2.1. Setup of language ..................................................................................................................................23-11
23.5.2.2. Properties of project .............................................................................................................................. 23-12
23.5.3. Import of comment ....................................................................................................................................... 23-13
23.5.4. Append of page number .............................................................................................................................. 23-13
23.5.5. Page property ............................................................................................................................................... 23-14
23.5.6. Symbol data list and text data list ................................................................................................................ 23-16
23.5.7. Input/output data list ..................................................................................................................................... 23-16
23.5.8. Move of page................................................................................................................................................ 23-17
23.5.9. Copy and paste of page............................................................................................................................... 23-17
23.5.10. The position of network Drawing ............................................................................................................... 23-18
23.5.11. Replacing .................................................................................................................................................... 23-19
23.5.12. Create Cover page and update ................................................................................................................. 23-20
23.5.13. Font style batch change............................................................................................................................. 23-21
23.5.14. The window style is returned to default..................................................................................................... 23-21
23.5.15. Mark ............................................................................................................................................................ 23-22
23.6. I/O Drawing, Structure of Network Drawing ....................................................................................................... 23-23
23.6.1. Import of I/O Drawing and Network Drawing data...................................................................................... 23-23
23.6.2. Save additional project of I/O Drawing and Network Drawing data .......................................................... 23-23
23.6.3. To edit the imported I/O Drawing and Network Drawing data.................................................................... 23-24
23.6.4. Write CPU of I/O and Network drawing ...................................................................................................... 23-25
23.6.5. Read CPU of I/O Drawing and Network Drawing ...................................................................................... 23-25
23.7. Illustration function ............................................................................................................................................... 23-26
23.7.1. Display toolbar .............................................................................................................................................. 23-26
23.7.2. Illustration command toolbar........................................................................................................................ 23-26
23.7.3. Style setting toolbar ...................................................................................................................................... 23-27
23.7.4. Page specification toolbar ............................................................................................................................ 23-28
23.7.5. Enlarge/reduce operation ............................................................................................................................ 23-29
23.7.6. Symbol group ............................................................................................................................................... 23-30

24. Network Drawing ...........................................................................................................................................................24-1

24.1. Flow from edit to diagnostic ...................................................................................................................................24-2
24.2. Edit the Network Drawing ......................................................................................................................................24-3
24.2.1 Type of the reserved symbols (module tag of the symbol list) .......................................................................24-4
24.2.2 Method of reduce symbol setting ....................................................................................................................24-8
24.2.3 Rules to locate the CPU symbol and Master symbol.................................................................................. 24-10
24.2.4 The object of Network Drawing diagnosis. ...................................................................................................24-11
24.2.5 Rules on Network Drawing ........................................................................................................................... 24-13
24.2.6 Add pages in Network Drawing .................................................................................................................... 24-13
24.2.7 Load ENI file(EtherCAT) ............................................................................................................................... 24-13
24.2.8 Rules of writing wire connection ................................................................................................................... 24-14
24.2.9 Entries of symbol property ............................................................................................................................ 24-16
24.2.9.1 Symbol property setting items ............................................................................................................... 24-16
24.2.9.2 Advanced EtherNet/IP Settings ............................................................................................................. 24-18
24.2.9.2.1 Scanner symbol .............................................................................................................................. 24-18
24.2.9.2.2 Adapter symbol ............................................................................................................................... 24-19
24.2.10 Ground fault and disconnection diagnosis setting..................................................................................... 24-20
24.2.11 Disconnection diagnosis/Network diagnosis possible line ........................................................................ 24-21
xxxiii
 24.2.12 Display of DeviceNet and FL remote communication area ...................................................................... 24-21
24.2.13 DM Network diagnosis/ground fault & disconnecting diagnostic check ................................................... 24-22
24.3. Auto parameter setting ........................................................................................................................................ 24-24
24.4. Save and print files, write to CPU ....................................................................................................................... 24-28
24.5. Direct circuit monitor-display/diagnosis .............................................................................................................. 24-28
24.5.1 Illustration of Screen Works .......................................................................................................................... 24-28
24.5.2 Follow up process of diagnostic trouble report ............................................................................................ 24-29

Document 1. To add fonts ...................................................................................................................................................... 1

Document2 SFC / FBD function and limitation of CPU .......................................................................................................... 2
Document2-1 Judging method ........................................................................................................................... 2
Document2-2 Display of SFC execution status .............................................................................................. 2
Document2-3 Restrictions of SFC................................................................................................................... 3
Document2-4 Restrictions of FBD................................................................................................................... 5

Document3 Function Command(PC10, PC10 extension mode) ........................................................................................ 7

Document3-1 Index register ............................................................................................................................ 7
Document3-2 Flash register ............................................................................................................................ 8
Document3-3 Floating decimal function........................................................................................................ 10
Document3-4 LABEL function ....................................................................................................................... 11
Document4 About Ver. 10.................................................................................................................................................... 13
Document4-1 PC10 mode ............................................................................................................................. 13

Document 5. I/O diagram symbol list, Network diagram symbol list .................................................................................... 14
Document 6 Requests for Customers Using Windows 10 Pro 2004 or Later PCs............................................................. 33

xxxiv
1. PCwin Outline
PCwin corresponds to the graphics language "Function Block Diagram" to which IEC61131-3 is
provided.
PCwin is a programming tool that enables programming in conformity with SFC Programming
Language stipulated in IEC 61131-3. SFC is a programming language that expresses a series of
production processes in a simple manner, using various types of Graphic Objects.
It enables visual representation in Flow Chart Style or “operational progress of each process of the
equipment” which was difficult to understand with the usual Ladder logic.
PCwin supports old TOYOPUC series TOYOPUC PC1 to the latest TOYOPUC PC10 series as well
as MX ‘from control design to maintenance’.
In this manual, method of operation using tools, with focus on SFC Edit, LD Edit and Monitoring, has
been described.
*SFC (Sequential Function Chart) *IEC (International Electro-technical Committee)

Process : PROC
ST1 Initial Step

TR1
ST2
Step
Transition
TR2

SUB3 ST4
Action (Ladder Diagram)

TR3
X1 M1
ST5
Sub
Step
ST1

SUB3
Initial Step
Sub- Process : SUB-PROC
TR1
ST2
Step
Transition TR2

ST3 ST4
Action (Ladder Diagram)

TR3 X1 M1
ST5

1-1
1.1. Operating Environment of PCwin

PCwin runs in the following environment.

Kindly read the “Safety Instructions” indicated at the beginning of this document for correct usage.
Always use after thoroughly studying the information about the machine, safety and other cautions.

<Table of correspondence between PCwin and OS>

Windows 7 Windows 10 Windows 11
Windows
PCwin Professional Professional Professional
2000/Vista/XP
32/64bit Enterprise 64bit Enterprise
~Ver.17.8 Rev.01 ○ ○ - -
Ver.18.1 Rev.01~
Ver19.13Rev01 - ○ ○ -
Ver.20.0 Rev.01~ - - ○ ○

<OS (Operating system)>

“○” in the correspondence table above indicates the support for the OS.
“-” indicates that PCwin does not function.
Be careful of the version of the PCwin with which the supported OS varies.

PCwin does not function with Microsoft Windows 95/98/ME/NT.

<PC Unit>
PC on which Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/10/11 operates.

 CPU  above III 500MHz Pentium

 Memory  above 512MB

 Display  Color display of above 1280768 dots. (Screen Color Scheme: 16-bit color)

 Hard disc  Free memory of above 200MB required

 Printer : Printer compatible with Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7/10/11

*1 Please acknowledge changing without a previous notice about the specification etc. for the
improvement occasionally.

*2 The following message is displayed when Pcwin is executed on Windows 95/98 ME/NT,and PCwin can’t
be executed.

*3 To operate PC win, administrator authority is required.

1-2
*4: With Windows Vista/7/10, it is recommended to turn the UAC (user account control) off.
A) How to change or check UAC (user account control) settings
1) Select “Control Panel” - “User Account.”
2-1) In case of Windows Vista
Select “Turn User Account Control on or off.”
2-2) In case of Windows 7/10
Select “Change User Account Control settings.”
3) If “User Account Control” is displayed, select the “Continue” button.
4-1) In case of Windows Vista
Clear the “Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer” check box and select
the “OK” button.
4-2) In case of Windows 7,10
Select “Do Not Notify” and select the “OK” button.
5) The Restart screen is displayed. Select the “Restart Now” button.
(The new UAC settings become effective after the computer is restarted.)

B) PCs with which UAC settings cannot be turned off

Install PCwin in a drive other than C.

C) For PCs with which UAC settings cannot be turned off and PCwin cannot be installed in a drive
other than C, the following effects can take place.
1) The communication module setting file does not change.
[Remedy] Delete the “Global” folder from the destination of installation of PCwin.
(The communication module settings must be entered again.)
2) The comment, device symbol and equipment name history data in the properties screen displayed
in the ladder-editing procedure is not retained.
[Remedy] Delete “*.bf” files from the destination of installation of PCwin.

1-3
*5: The file of PCwin may be damaged by the movement of Windows Update or security software.
When you start PCwin, the following message is displayed and you cannot use it.
In that case, uninstall PCwin and then install it again.

Note 1)

Note1) Target file may differ depending on the environment.

1-4
＜Display settings＞
Set the computer display size to 100% before use.
If you change the display size setting from 100%, the screen may not be displayed correctly as shown below.

Please set as follows.

In case of Windows 7
[Control Panel] - [Appearance and Personalization] – [Display]

In case of Windows 10
[Settings] - [System] – [Display]

In case of Windows 11

1-5
1.2. Scope of PCwin
'Maintenance from the control design' supports the latest TOYOPUC PC10 series and MX from the
TOYOPUC PC1 series of an old model.
The function of TOYOPUC-GL1, TOYOPUC-Hellowin, and CAD conversion was made an all-in-one
PCwin.

(1) When the PLC data is newly made, the new making procedure (Details are 5.1. NEW) is
executed. Next, CPU operation mode is set (Details are 10.PARAMETER SETTING).
(2) The PLC backup data made with an old peripheral is supported. Please read the data file when
you use existing PLC backup data. (Details are 5.2.OPEN(FILE))

PCwin
Hellowin TOYOPUC PC10G

GL1 PC2

TOYOPUC Plus
TOYOPUC PC2/3J

TOYOPUC MX
TOYOPUC

TOYOPUC PC1

1.3. Required option table

O: Required -: Needless
Tool
PCwin I/O Diagramt Security tool
TJA-2031 [E] Option1 Option 2 function TXY-6066 [25P]
TJA-2032 [J] TJA-6036 [E] TJA-6042 [E] extension tool TXY-6067[USB]
TJA-6233 TJA-6037 [J] TJA-6043 [J] TJA-6351 CD
[Ch] FD FD [USB]
Sentinel Sentinel Liblock
TJA-6285 [F] *1 *1
Hard Hard Soft CD
CD
LD O - - - - -
Project program edit SFC O - - - - -
FBD O O - - - -
FB library program edit LD O O - - O O
LD O - O - - -
Drawing style prints
SFC O - O - - -
(PCwin Since V4.5)
FBD O O O - - -
I/O Diagram
O - - O - -
(PCwin Since V7.5)
*1 Option 1/Option 2 becomes not necessary from PCwin Ver12 onwards. (These options become a
PCwin standard function)

1-6
2. Installation of PCwin
Here method of installation of PCwin is described.
Before installing in the hard disc, turn off the anti-virus software, which becomes the cause of problem
at the time of installation.
Important1

Do not connect TOYOPUC with the PC over a USB cable.

Do not plug USB cable into PC until the installation completed..
Security warning is displayed depends on your system setting.Click “Open” or “Run”.
Important2

Start SETUP.EXE to display [User Account Control].

Click [Allow] to continue SETUP.
When install other files including PCwin, after displayed [User Account Control], also
click [Allow] then [Yes].

Important3

Copy the downloaded installation folder on the desktop.

The installer does not run correctly if the installation folder is copied under a deeper
folder on the drive.

2-1
1 Double click “Setup.exe” of FD Route Directory.

2 When “Welcome” message appears, click “Next”.

Please read “Software License Agreement”. If you choose to agree to the Licensing Agreement,
please select “I agree with this grant of license” and click “Next”.
If you do not choose to agree to the Licensing Agreement, you cannot implement an installation.

2-2
3 Windows7 only
Select the operating system (32 bits or 64bits) of the PC onto which the program will be installed and click
“Next”.
* If you do not know the type of operating system, see “Control panel” – “Systems” – System type”.

4 Enter “Name, Company and Serial”. Click “Next>”.

When there is not a serial number, it isn't possible to install.
For a serial number, enter the number shown on the PCwin CD-Rom label.

2-3
5 Entering the directory of installation destination, click <Next>.

6 For installing with default setting, click <Next> in the displayed dialog box.
With the default setting, a new folder is created without writing in the existing PCwin folder.

7 When the installation of PCwin is finished, install USB driver.

Click [Install]

2-4
8 When the installation of USB driver is finished, the dialogs below are indicated.
*If “install: completed successfully” is appeared, the installation is completed properly.
*The indicated message is displayed depends on your system setting.

8.1 Windows2000/XP
On the completion of installation, end of set up is displayed.
Press “Finish” and complete the setup.

8.2 WindowsVista/7
On the completion of installation, end of set up is displayed.
Select [Yes, I want to restart my computer now.] and press “Finish.

9 To start the program, double click[PCwin] from [start]–[program]–[Allwin_V8]–[PCwin]or go to

the application folder by Explorer, and double click [PCwin.exe] in the installed directory.

2-5
2.1. Installation of PCwin Ver. 17.3 Rev. 02 or Later
[When installing for the first time]
When installing Ver20.0R01 or later for the first time, the following screen may be displayed.
If a screen appears, select "Install" to install.

1. Double click “Setup.exe” in the root directory of the CD. Installation of PCwin starts.
Click [Next].

2. Read the License Agreement.

To accept the terms of the License Agreement, select <I accept the terms of the license
agreement> and click <Next>.
Installation does not start if you do not accept the terms of the License Agreement.

2-6
3. Enter the User Name, Company Name and Serial Number and click <Next>.
Installation does not start if the Serial Number is unavailable.
Enter the number printed on the CD-ROM label as a Serial Number.

4. Select the destination directory of installation and click <Next>.

2-7
5. Select installation options.
Select optional functions used with PCwin and click <Next>.

6. Select the folder where PCwin is installed.

The default folder is “Allwin_V8.” No change is necessary in principle.
Click <Next>.

7. An installation progress bar is displayed. Wait until installation is finished.

2-8
8. Next, installation of PCwin2 begins.
To use PCwin2, refer to the instruction manual prepared for PCwin2 (t-a65n).
Installation of PCwin2 is conducted after installation of PCwin is finished.
To cancel installation, click [Cancel].
To continue to install PCwin2, click <Next> on the “Welcome” message screen.

After the “Welcome” message is displayed, click <Next>.

9. Read the License Agreement. To accept the terms of the License Agreement, select <I accept the
terms of the license agreement> and click <Next>.
Installation does not start if you do not accept the terms of the License Agreement.

2-9
10. Enter the User Name and Company Name and click <Next>.

11. Select the destination directory of installation and click <Next>.

2-10
12. Select installation options.
With PCwin2, only Edit Cycle Monitor is different from the earlier version (PCwin). To use, place a
check mark.
Click <Next>.

13. Select the folder where PCwin2 is installed.

The default folder is Allwin2. No change is necessary in principle.
Click <Next>.

14. An installation progress bar is displayed. Wait until installation is finished.

2-11
15. After the installation of PCwin2, install the USB driver.
Click the [Install] button.

16. After installation of the USB driver is finished, the following dialog box is displayed.
After checking the description of the dialog box, click <OK>.
* Installation is correctly finished if “install: completed successfully” is displayed.
* The displayed screen varies according to your environment.
* If the USB driver has already been installed, installation may not be finished correctly.
However, operation can be made without problems.

2-12
17. A setup completion message is displayed.
Select “Yes, I want to restart my computer now” and click “Finish.”

18. To start the program, double click [Start]-[Programs]-[Allwin8]-[PCwin] or view the folder in the Explorer window
and double click “PCwin.exe” located in the installation directory.

2-13
2.2. To start up in Ver.8.0 or upper
To start up, Click [PCwin] from[start]–[program]–[Allwin_V8]–[PCwin]or go to the folder by Explorer
and double click [PCwin.exe].

In WindowsXP(SP2), dialogs below are displayed when start up PCwin Ver8.0

Please select [Unblock].

A dialog box for selecting the forced ON/OFF function in ladder monitoring is displayed each time when PCwin is
launched. To stop showing this screen, select [Options] - [Settings] - [Operation 2] and change the relevant setting.

To use the function, enter the password and select the [OK] button.
[Password: #OUT]

Note: Equipment may start unexpected movement due to certain operation.

Be careful when operating.
Forced outputs are not issued.

If not to use the function, select the [OK] button without entering the password.

2-14
2.3. Confirmation of version information
Displayed with

or .

Installed information is displayed.

Option Information
Names of options installed to PCwin are displayed in the Option field of the about PCwin window.
Option 1/Option 2 becomes not necessary from PCwin Ver12 onwards, and options are shown with
no installation of the options.

2-15
2.4. Movement of option when upgrade(Only PCwin Ver11 or earlier)

When upgrade to the latest version 8 later from previous version 7, it is necessary to move the
license of option 1 and option 2.

The folder is as follows at the installation destination of the default of PCwin.

PCwin Ver.7( and older version ) ----- C:¥Program Files¥PCwin
PCwin Ver.8( and later version ) ----- C:¥Program Files¥PCwin_V8

The license of the option is set to the folder at each installation destination.
Please move the license of option according to the following procedure.
(It is assumed that it installed it in "PCwin" and "PCwin_V8" of the default folder when PCwin is
installed.)

(1) The floppy disk of the bought option is inserted.

(2) The option of PCwin Ver.7 is uninstalled.
(3) The option of PCwin Ver.8 is installed.

2.4.1. Uninstalling of option(Only PCwin Ver11 or earlier)

1. The floppy disk of option 1 is set in the drive[A:].

2. Pop1Wiz.exe on the floppy disk is executed.
• PCwin option 1 license wizard starts.

3. Push the [Next>] button.

2-16
4. Set the place of PCwin.exe.
• Display the file dialog pushing the […] button

• Move to the place where PCwin was installed(C:¥Program Files¥PCwin), and select PCwin.exe.
• Push the [Open] button.

• Push the [Next>] button.

• The license can be uninstalled

2-17
 5. When [NEXT] button is pushed, uninstallation is executed.

6. Push the [Finish] button

About option 2, please operate it similarly.

Notes:
• This program can be started from the floppy disk [DRIVE A:].
• It is not possible to use by copying this program to the hard disk.
• Please put into the state of being possible to write and use the floppy disk.
• It is not possible to use it in the state of not being possible to write (write-protection).
• It is necessary to install PCwin beforehand to use this program.
• The version of PCwin corresponding to this program is since Ver.4.3.
• When the license is installed, the LICENSE folder is made for the place where PCwin was
installed.
Option 1 license file (PCWOPT1.LDB) is set in that.
• Don't delete either LICENSE folder or option 1 license file (PCWOPT1.LDB).
License information is lost when deleting these.
• Option 1 license file (PCWOPT1.LDB) becomes the one for the computer which installs this.
Even if this file is copied to other computers, the license is not recognized.
• Moreover, even if the file in the floppy disk is copied, the license is not recognized.
The license is correctly set by using this program.
• Only one computer can set one license.
• One remainder license decreases when the license is installed.
• When the remainder license is 0, the license cannot be installed. Only uninstalling is possible.
• After of the return of the license to the floppy disk beforehand, try to install the license in be a
new computer when exchange the computer.
• Please take notes of the computer which installs the license to the label of the floppy disk etc.
• Installation/uninstalling the license must use the same floppy disk.
When the floppy disk for a different computer is used, the license might be lost.

2.4.2. Installation of option(Only PCwin Ver11 or earlier)

Please install the option of PCwin Ver.8 after completing the uninstallation of option of PCwin
Ver.7.
Location of PCwin.exe (Installation destination folder) is “C:¥Program Files¥PCwin_V8”.
Please refer to the handling explanation appended to the option for details.

2-18
3. Connection with CPU

3.1. Connection devices

3.1.1. PC10G, Plus Connections

Connecting to CPU using a USB cable is explained below.
Standard USB cables are applied to the connection of PCwin, PC10G Series, and Plus.
PC10G

USB (Standard USB cables)

Use the standard USB cable to minimize the breakdown of USB ports caused by personal
computer’s
current leakage. Please use our recommended products which are written on the instruction
manuals of PC10G and Plus.

3.1.2. PCDL connection

Explains the method to connect CPU using RS232C of personal computers.
To connect PCwin and PCDL, use "PCk connection cable" (TKY-6485) which incorporates cross
modular cable and connector converting from modular to RS232C (DSub9 pins) of personal
computer.

PCk connection cable (TKY-6485)

PCDL
ＴＯＹＯＰＵＣ

3-1
3.1.3. Other PLC Connection

Here method of connecting with CPU using RS23C of PC is explained.

To connect PCwin and PC3J/PC2J series, PC interface cables (TXY-6071) or USB1/F cables
(TXY-6266) can be used.
For communicating with PC2, use separate conversion cable (TXY 5621) for PC2 connection

PC2J/PC3J series, MX
Personal computer connection cable 2 (TXY-6071)

9 pin 15pin
USB1/F cables (TXY-6266)

USB 15pin
PC end requires
PC2
9 Pin connector of
RS232C

+
15pi 25pin PC1 series
PC2 connection conversion cable
(TXY 5621)

M, FB etc.
+
+
15pi PG-DB PG-DB
25pin

PC2 Connection Ladder Interface

Conversion Connection Cable
Cable Ladder Interface (TXY-6500)
(TXY-5621) (TXA-2580)

PC Connection cable(TXY-5619) can be used.

Combination of Conversion adapter 2 (TXA 5044) and communication cable (TXY 7716), or PC
Connection cable(TXY-5619) used in Hellowin or GL1 can also be used as it is.

In case of RS232 connection with PC end is other than 9 pin one, use in combination with
communication adapter 2.
In case of 25 Pin : Communication adapter 2 (TXA 5044) + Communication cable (TXY 7716) +
[Peripheral conversion cable (TXY 2778)]
In case of half –pitch 14 pin : RS232C cable (TXY 5105) + communication adapter 2 +
communication cable + peripheral conversion cable.

3-2
PCwin-Safe TOYOPUC-PCS

PCwin PC2J/PC3J Series

Communication disabled

PCwin-Safe is not capable of reading or writing program of PC2/PC3J series.

If they are connected, no response or communication error occurs because their
communication system is different.
PCwin is not capable of reading or writing program of TOYOPUC-PCS.
Communication is enabled in writing, but is not guaranteed. (Communication error occurs
in part.)
No response or communication error occurs in reading because their communication
system is different.
Pin layout and electric characteristics of connector are the same, Connected CPU may not
be destroyed, but do not connect in wrong connection.

3-3
3.2. Communication Setting
To connect PCwin with the CPU directly, enter the following settings.
Two cases are described: RS232C connection and USB connection.

1. In case of RS232C connection

(1) Click [Setting] – [Setting of communication module].
A list of setting name registered before is displayed. Selecting the list as
you like, carry out [Change], [Delete] or [Addition] to the list.

(2) Select the module name

Click the module name and name select the communication

module[CPU] to be connected.

(3)Set the communication conditions.

Communication port : Change according to the setting of the customer’s PC.

Baudrate : Select “AUTO.”

3-4
2. In case of USB connection
(1) Click [Settings] - [Communication Module Setup].
View the list of past setting names. Select a desired one and select [Change],
[Delete] or [Add].

Press the button on the left of the module name in the Communication
Module Setup and select “CPU-USB.”

While checking that “CPU-USB” is displayed as a module name, enter the

name in the Comment field and press the “OK” button.

Use one among 49152 to 49159 as a communication condition in the default

case.
For details, refer to [USB communication setup] COM_SERV in “3.4
Communication Procedure W ith PC10G.”

(2) A set name is input as a comment.

(3) Completion of setting

Click “OK” after all settings are complete.

When connecting with Ethernet or connecting via communication

module, since setting conditions differ, refer to “Item 15. Setting.”

3-5
3.3. Connection of PC and PC10
Connect PC to PC10 using a USB cable.

3.3.1. For Windows 2000

When the USB cable is connected to PC, USB driver is installed automatically (PC10 must be turned on).

3.3.2. For Windows XP

Installation of the driver is needed. Please follow the instructions below for the installation.

3.3.3. Installation Startup Screen

When the USB cable is connected to PC, a dialog of New Hardware Wizard is displayed.(PC10 must be
turned on).

Select “Install the software automatically (recommended)” and select “Next”

3-6
3.3.4. Search screen
Then the installation started automatically.

3.3.5. End screen of the installation

The completed screen is displayed after finishing the installation.

Click “Finish” to close the dialog box and complete installation.

3-7
3.4. Communication procedure with PC10G

To start up PCwin Ver.8.0 or upper, USB network icon is displayed on Task Tray.

USB communication icon

(Green)Communication available
(Red)Communication unavailable

When the network is available, the USB network icon turns green. In case of the communication with
PC10G is down, the icon turns red. When the icon is red, please make sure the USB cable between
PC and PC10G is connected properly, and make sure the power of PC10G is turned on.
When you have communication tasks such as download/upload programs or monitoring, please
check the indicator of the icon first.

(USB communication set up)

Right click the USB communication icon on Task Bar, a menu is displayed.

Open: Set up
Close: Close (Close and restart
PCwin and start USB communication)

Port number could be changed (Defauld:49152~49159)

Usually,do not change but use default value.

High speed 480Mbps(USB 2.0)

① Default(Usully do not change)

Full speed 12Mbps(Fastest speed of USB 1.1)

Display same colour like
② Try Full speed(Confirm ON) if High speed communication not
USB communication icon work

Enable : Select whether or not to retry after a failure in

③ Wait before communications with the CPU. Place a check mark if
retrying necessary.
Retry count : The retry frequency is displayed if Retry is
selected.

3-8
If the COM_SERV icon is not displayed on the task bar with Windows Vista/7, select “Customize” on
the icon tray to display the [Customize Notification Icon] dialog box.
Change the COM_SERV setting from [Only Show Notifications] to [Show Icon and Notifications].
(The setting is retained even after the power is turned off.)

Windows Vista/7

Windows 10

3-9
4. Screen Positioning (Peripheral Devices)

PC win Window Title Bar

Menu Bar Tool Bar SFC Edit Window
Project Window

I/O Diagram
Window

Action Program Edit Window

(Ladder Program Edit Window)

Project Window Title Bar LD Edit Window Title Bar

Status Bar
SFC Edit Window
Title Bar

4-1
4.1. Tool Bar
4.1.1. Standard Tool Bar
Used in Project window, SFC window and Action Program Edit Window (Ladder Program Edit Window).
It functions through the click of Icon.
If unusable at the active window or selected operation, display turns gray.
Identical Function operation from the Menu is also possible based on selection from the menu bar.

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭

No. Function Name (E)

① New file
② Open (File)
③ Save
④ Cut
⑤ Copy
⑥ Paste
⑦ Help
⑧ Print
⑨ Undo
⑩ Redo
⑪ Search
⑫ Jump
⑬ Zoom
⑭ Grid lines

4.1.2. SFC Tool Bar

Used when drawing the chart with SFC window.
Placement of symbols can be made by clicking the Icons or pressing function keys [F1 ~ F12].

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱ ⑲

No. Name of symbol (E) Key

① Initial Step F1
② Step F2
③ Dummy step Shift+F2
④ Diagnosed step F3
⑤ Transition F4
⑥ Jump F5
⑦ Selective branching F6
⑧ Selective coupling F7
⑨ Parallel branching F8
⑩ Parallel coupling F9
⑪ Sub SFC step F10
⑫ Sub SFC start F11
⑬ Sub SFC end F12
⑭ NC step Shift+F10
⑮ Initial step + Transition Ctrl+F1
⑯ Step + Transition Ctrl+F2
⑰ Dummy step + Transition Ctrl+Shift+F2
⑱ Dummy step + Selective confluence Ctrl+F6
⑲ Dummy step + Parallel confluence Ctrl+F9

4-2
4.1.3. LD Tool Bar
4.1.3.1. PC2 / PC3 / PC10 series
Used when drawing LD circuit with LD window.
Placement of symbols can be made by clicking the Icons or pressing function keys [FF1 ~ F12].

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭

No. Name of symbol Key

① Vertical Bar F1
② Horizontal Bar F2
③ A-Contact F3
④ B-Contact F4
⑤ Rise Differential F5
⑥ Fall Differential F6
⑦ Coil F7
⑧ Set Coil F8
⑨ Reset Coil F9
⑩ Timer F10
⑪ Counter F11
⑫ Output type application
F12
command
⑬ Connection type application
Shift+F12
command
⑭ Function block

Insertion of Circuit Block

Line insertion for OR circuit creation

LD Program No. switching.

Comment switching [Bilingual] * It cannot be used in PC1/MX mode.

Display of Comment of 100 characters

Ladder Conversion

Changing comment languages

Changing comment input mode

4-3
4.1.3.2. PC1 Series / MX
It is used when LD circuit is plotted on LD window.
Symbol layout (location) is possible by clicking the icon or pushing the Function key (F1~F12).

Application command
Counter
Timer
Coil
B contact
A contact
Horizontal bar
Vertical bar

Insertion of circuit block.

Line insertion for OR circuit creation.

LD program No. switching

Display of Comment of 100 characters

Ladder Conversion

4.1.4. Book Mark Search Tool Bar

Used for searching bookmark in SFC and LD window.

Setting/Release of Book Mark

Jump downwards

Jump upwards

Deletion of All Bookmarks

4.1.5. Communication module setting tool Bar

Communication module setting Name display at connection destination

Communication module setting

4-4
4.1.6. I/O Drawing network chart toolbar

Enlarge/Reduce
Last page
Next page
Page specification
Previous page
First page

4-5
4.2. Positioning of Window
Default positioning of each window of Project, SFC, LD, I/O of PCwin is displayed with each
window overlapping as shown below.

(1) In case of Program where SFC,I/O chart exists.

(2) In case of Program made up of LD only.

4-6
4.3. Change of Window Positioning.
Change of positioning of each window of Project, SFC, LD can be made with “Window” menu.

Implies window currently under display.

Mark is the upper most window.
Select the desired window from this menu if it is
hidden below other ones.

(1)Overlapping display type 1 : It is positioning of default.

(2)Overlapping display type 2 : See below.
(3)Adjacent display : No overlapping positioning. However, in case of small screen like a
small lap top, coil portion of LD unit is sometimes not visible.
(4)Maximum display of ladder window : Disposition for a maximum display of ladder windows.

Overlapping display type 2 Adjacent display

4.4. Change of Display Language

All windows (Project window, LD edit window) are closed and operated. [View]-[Language] is
chosen and [Japanese] or [English] or [Chinese] is chosen.
Currently displayed language is grayed out.

Then, a message is displayed. Please click [OK], and close and start PCwin.
A display language changes after starting.

4-7
5. File
In this peripheral device, basically following 5 files are handled. For details of manageable File
format, see “5.11 Peripheral Tool-wise File Type Correspondence Chart” at the end of the Chapter.
*. prj : Project file
*. sfc : SFC Chart file
*. pp1 : LD (Ladder) Program+Parameter File
*. csv : LD (Ladder) Comment File
*. rr1 : Register Data File
These file are not specified independently but they are all selected when “*.prj” Project file is
selected.
However, the Register Data File in selected depends on the option settings.
Further, when only the LD (ladder) program excluding SFC chart is used [P2 . P3 of MX included],
there will be basically the following three files.
For details of file types that can be handled, see “ Peripheral tool-wise File Type Correspondence
Chart”
at the end of this chapter.
*. pp1 : LD (Ladder)Program + Parameter File
*. csv : LD (Ladder) Comment File
*. rr1 : Register Data File

In PC3JG Separate / PC10 Standard Mode, LD(Ladder)Program + Parameter File and Register
Data File will be as under.
*. pp2 : LD (Ladder)Program + Parameter File
*. rr2 : Register Data File

In PC10 Extension Mode, LD(Ladder)Program + Parameter File and Register Data File will be as
under.
*. pp3 : LD (Ladder)Program + Parameter File
*. rr3 : Register Data File (*_EB. rr3 / *_FR#. ee3 [ # = 1 - 8 ]:Only device EB / FR)

LD (Ladder) program+parameter files and memory data files in PC10 module are as followings.
(When extended user address and applying command not applied)
*. pp2 : LD (Ladder)Program + Parameter File
*. rr2 : Register Data File
(When extended user address and application command applied)
*. pp4 : LD (Ladder)Program + Parameter File
*. rr3 : Register Data File

In the PCDL mode, LD (ladder) program + Parameter file and Register file are as follows.
*. ppd : LD (Ladder)Program + Parameter File
*. rrd : Register Data File

In the Plus Standard Mode, LD (ladder) program + Parameter file and Register file are as follows.
*. ppe : LD (Ladder)Program + Parameter File
*. rre : Register Data File

In the Plus Extension Mode, LD (ladder) program + Parameter file and Register file are as follows.
*. ppf : LD (Ladder)Program + Parameter File
*. rrf : Register Data File

5-1
PC1 series / MX
When only LD(ladder) program is used, there will be basically the following three files.
Please refer “Peripheral tool-wise file type correspondence table” at the end of this chapter.
*. prg : LD(ladder) program
*. ct2 : LD(ladder) comment file
*. dt0 : Register data file [*. dt1 - *. Dt7]

In the Library, basically following 4 files are handled.

*.prj : Project File
*.lbh : Library Header File
*.flp : Library LD(Ladder) Program+Parameter File
*.csv : Library LD(Ladder) Comment File

These files are not separately specified but they are all selected by selecting [*.prj]Project File.
When huge library (60[KW]) and master library 180[KW]) applied, the library, program and files could be
different.
This kind of application lib could be used after PC3JG.
*.flg : LD (Ladder) Program+Parameter Files (60[KW]/180[KW])
When PC10 master library (180[KW]) applied, only PC10 extended mode could be used.
*.flu : LD (Ladder) Program+Parameter Files (180[KW])

Master ２ Free library can be used in PC3J mode, PC3JG mode, PC10 mode.
*.lzf : Compressed file with all library information

Basically the following two files are handled in the user library.
*.lpb : User library program file
*.lcb : User library comment file
To back up these files with PCwin, optional settings are necessary.
For details, refer to 17.2.2.13.

The following files are handled as log information files.

*.Lg1 : Log file in other than the PCDL mode
*.lg2 : Log file in PCDL mode
*.bkm : Bookmark information file

*Cautions when delivering data

When delivering above data through E mail etc, it is recommended that all the files to be delivered are
compressed with the compression tool.
It helps to avoid unexpected situations like file name getting changed due to IT, OA environment etc.

5-2
Files have the following extensions

Description Extension Description

Project .PRJ Project file

LD .PGM Program [PC2/PC2J]
Program+Parameter .PPM Program + Parameter + Comment [PC2/PC2J]
.PG1 Program+Parameter [PC2/PC2J]
.PP1 Program+Parameter [PC3J]
.PP2 Program+Parameter [PC10 Standard /PC3JG]
.PP3 Program+Parameter [PC10 Expansion]
.PP4 Program+Parameter [PC10]
.PPD Program+Parameter [PCDL]
.PPE Program+Parameter [Plus Standard]
.PPF Program+Parameter [Plus Expansion]
.PSU Program+Parameter+Comment (with equipment code) [PC2/PC2J]
Program+Parameter+Comment
.PSU (device code, device code) [PC2/PC2J,PC3J]
Register data .REG Register [PC2/PC2J]
.RGS Register [PC2/PC2J]
.IOD Register [PC2/PC2J]
.RR1 Register [PC2/PC2J]
.RR1 Register [PC3J]
.RR2 Register [PC10 Standard /PC3JG]
.RR3 Register [PC10 Expansion /PC10]
.RRD Register [PCDL]
.RRE Register [Plus Standard]
.RRF Register [Plus Expansion]
Comment .COT Comment [PC2/PC2J]
.CT1 Comment [PC2/PC2J]
.CT2 Comment [PC1/MX]
.CT3 Comment (with instrument code) [PC2/PC2J]
.CSV Comment (with instrument code) [PC2/PC2J]
.CSV Comment (device code, device code) [PC2/PC2J, PC10, PCDL]
.CT5 Comment (device code, device code) [PC2/PC2J]
Time chart .TCM Time chart monitor [PC2/PC2J]
/I/O recorder .TCM Time Chart Monitor [PC2/PC2J, PC3J]
.ZMN Cycle diagram monitor [PC2/PC2J, PC3J]
.TM1 Time Chart Monitor [PC2/PC2J, PC3J,PC10 Normal /PC3JG,PCDL]
.TM2 Time Chart Monitor (Scan Time) [PC10 Standard /PC3JG]
.TP1 Time Chart Monitor [PC10 Extended /PC10]
.TP2 Time Chart Monitor (Scan Time) [PC10 Extended /PC10]
.TP3 I/O recorder [PC10]
.JSON Multiple PLC of time chart monitor
5-3
 Description Extension Description

SFC .SFC SFC File

.SFCOBJ SFCOBJ File
Library .FLP Library program standard-size 32KW[PC3J,PC10]
.FLG Library program large-capacity 60KW[PC3J,PC10]
.FLM Library program master 180KW[PC3J,PC10]
.FLU Library program PC10G master 180KW[PC10]
.LBH Library headers [PC3JG,PC10]
.TAG Symbolic Programming [PC3J,PC10]
.PRJS Subset library project file
.EFB Export Subset Library [PC3J,PC10]
.lzf Compressed library [PC3J,PC10]
.LPB User library program
.LCB User Library Comments
I/O 図 .DFS Formatting
.COV Cover setting
.IOZ I/O diagram project
.RLC I/O diagram relay commentary
.IOC I/O Diagram Symbology Comments
.SSM I/O diagram subset symbology
編集中ファイル .XP1 Program+Parameter (Editing) [PC3J]
.XP2 Program+Parameter (Editing) [PC10 Normal /PC3JG]
.XP3 Program+Parameter (Editing) [PC10 Extension]
.XP4 Program+Parameter (Editing) [PC10]
.XPD Program+Parameter (Editing) [PCDL]
.XPE Program+Parameter (Editing) [Plus Standard]
.XPF Program+Parameter (Editing) [Plus Extension]
.GRD Program (Editing)
ログファイル .LG1 CPU Event Log [PCDL]
.LG2 CPU event log information [other than PCDL]
その他 .bkm Bookmark information file
.SS1 Event Monitor [PC3J,PC10]
.PEP Link parameter setting file (PROFINET)
.WAT Watchlist file
.OPP I/O control panel [PC2/PC2J,PC3J,PC3JG,PC10,PCDL]
.SIO I/O control panel: Virtual input [PC3JG,PC10]
.CFG Setting of communication module

5-4
5.1. New
Left click the Icon of standard tool bar with mouse or on the menu bar, open new project
window by selecting (File) (New) and creation of new program will become possible.
In case file is not saved during creation, confirmation of saving is displayed.

For saving, left click(Yes(Y)) with mouse.

In case file is registered, it is saved. (see 5.3 : Save).
In case it is not registered, it is saved after registering in a new title. (see 5.4 : Save As).
When the file is not to be saved, left click (No (N)) with the mouse.
In this case, file is discarded even in the midst of creation.
When a new file is created, CPU operation mode can be assigned from [option] – [setting] –
[operation].

5.2. Open (File)

Left click Icon for Standard Tool Bar with mouse or display dialog for opening file by selecting
(File) (Open) on the menu bar and file to be opened is selected. Registered file can be changed.

File displayed here is one which includes SFC Program information where the extension of Files is
“*.prj”. By specifying this project file, all data of this project (SFC Chart, LD (Ladder Program,
Comment Etc. ) is read.

5-5
Further, when wanting to select program created only with LD ( Ladder) Program, select *. pp1, *.
pp2, *. pp3, *. pp4,
*. ppd, *. ppe, *. ppf, *. pg1, *. ppm, *. prg from the file types.

In case file is not saved during creation, confirmation of saving is displayed.

For saving, left click(Yes(Y)) with mouse.

In case file is registered, it is saved. (see 5.3 : Save).
In case it is not registered, it is saved after registering in a new title. (see 5.4 : Save As).
When the file is not to be saved, left click (No (N)) with the mouse.
In this case, file is discarded even in the midst of creation.

5.3. Save
Left click the Icon of Standard Tool Bar with a mouse, or by selecting [File] [Save] on the menu
bar, the data is saved in the registered file after Program check.
In case of unregistered file, it has to be saved by giving it a title. (5.4 : Save As).
Besides, if invalid address was applied in set CPU operation mode in SFC, following message will
be displayed. Please change then save.

5-6
5.4. Save As
By selecting [File] [Save As] on the menu bar, dialog for saving by giving the data a title is isplayed.
After entering new file name, left click [Save (S)] with mouse.

When saving the file, selection of File Type (File Extension) is not required.
When the content of project is distinguished automatically at the System side and SFC Chart is present,
saving will be executed by [ *.prj ]. When there is only LD(ladder) program, saving should be executed
by either [*.pp1] (PC3 mode) or [*.pg1] (PC2 mode), or [*.prg] (PC1/MX mode). Further, Comment data
is also saved simultaneously.

5.5. Note of the library data save

When using a linked Library data, the Library data is not saved.
Save the data using Library function (For details, see Chapter 9)
With PCwin Ver. 12.1 or later, the subset library data must be saved. If the subset library data has
been saved, this screen is not displayed.

5-7
5.6. Import of Related File
This function is used when copying existing data in the Project.
Once this function is executed, return to previous data can not be made.
Select [File]-[Import Data]. The following data can be imported.

5.6.1. Import of SFC Program

It reads existing SFC Chart Program in units of programs.
Select [File] in the menu bar and then select [Import of Related File], [Import of SFC Program].

Since above mentioned caution message will be displayed, click [OK].

Next, as the dialog for File selection will be displayed, specify the file here.

Next as the Dialogs to specify transfer source and transfer destination will be displayed, select the
Program No. and click “OK”.

SFC Chart will be copied in the specified Program.

5-8
5.6.2. Import of LD Program
Import of LD Program can be carried out by the same operation as import of SFC Program.

5.6.3. Import of Comment file

Address comments of the LD program, address comments of the Screen Helper fault table, block
comments, comments of application instructions and so on can be imported.
Select [File]-[Import Data]-[Comment]-[Language Selection].

When importing the comment for PC2, specify the type of the file “Comment File (*.ct5, *.ct3, *.ct1,
*.cot)”
When importing the comment for PC1, specify the type of the file “Comment File (*.ct2)”.
With PC3, PC10 or Plus, designate “Comment Files (*.csv).”
To import address comments of the Screen Helper fault table, designate Screen Helper fault table
comment file (*_TBL.shz2).

The following files are applicable.

File type Filter
Comment file (*.csv) *.csv
Comment files (*.ct5, *.ct3, *.ct1, *.cot) *.ct5, *.ct3, *.ct1, *.cot
Screen Helper fault table comment file (*_TBL.shz2) *_TBL.shz2

5-9
While checking the imported data, select one of the following import mode items.

Import mode
Item Imported data
It replaces with the comment data of file. (All · All existing comment data is deleted and address
data) comments are added.
It adds the comment data of the file to the · Comments are added to free addresses only.
unregistered address. · The addresses with existing comments are not
overwritten.
It overwrites the comment data of the file. · Comments are added to the addresses having no
comment.
· The addresses with existing comments are overwritten.
It overwrites the comment data of the file. · Comments are added to the addresses having no
(Confirmation message’s there being) comment.
· The addresses with existing comments are checked in a
dialog box and overwritten.

Comments are reflected on the project being edited.

<Precautions on importation with Screen Helper>

1) The applicable file to be imported is a Screen Helper fault table comment file (*_TBL.shz2) having
been output with Screen Helper.
*=Name of Screen Helper project
2) Comments in the Screen Helper fault table are separated in the lamp indication line. A single-
byte space is added between lines in the displayed comment.

CNC FAULT

A single-byte space is added.

Lamp image CNC
FAULT
Note: The data not prepared with Screen Helper is rejected with a format error message during
importation and not imported if one is designated.
5-10
5.6.4. Import of I/O Register
In case of import of I/O Register, partial reading is not carried out unlike other import. Specified files
are read as a batch.

5.6.5. Input of event monitoring file

Refer to "13.7 Event Monitoring File"

5.6.6. Import of I/O Diagram , Network Drawing Data Input

Refer to "22.6 I/O Diagram Embedding"

5.6.7. Export of translation data

Import comment files which are outputted from translation support functions (CMTConv). Please
refer to the manual and the CD-ROM in PCwin package for details.

5.6.8. Importing of module

Import the module.
Select [File] - [Import Data] - [Import Module]

The following message will be displayed, so select [OK].

5-11
After selecting the file of the module to import, select [Open].

When you select a file, the following screen will be displayed.

Example)
Import From Import to

5-12
 Specify the position of the module to be imported.
(1) Check the box for the module to be copied from the import source.
(2) Check the box for the module position to be imported to.
The module will be added below the module with the check box selected.
To add the module above the module with the check box selected, check the box for “Add
above”.

If you check the box to add above, the

module will be added above the
module you have selected for import.

If there is no check, it will be added

below.

(3) Select [Execute].

The module will be imported.

Note 1) If the source of the import has a FB, selecting the [Execute] button will display the following
message screen and then import the data.

Note 2) If the same module name already exists in the import destination, the following message will
be displayed and the copy will not be made.

5-13
5.7. Export of Related Files

5.7.1. Export of comment

Comment data is specified with File name and is saved.
When created with PC2 mode, comment format can be specified with the type of the file.
Specify from among “ *.ct1 ” , ” *.ct3 ” , ” *.ct5 ” , ” *.csv ”

5.7.2. Export of I/O Register

I/O Register data is saved after specifying the file name.

Concerning the I/O Register Data, data processing mode is set by the option setting such as
the mode to automatically read and save the I/O registers when reading or writing a program
from or to the file.

5.7.3. Output of event monitoring file

Refer to "13.7 Event Monitoring File"

5.7.4. Import of translation data

Export the comment data to the file format which can be handled in the translation support functions
(CMTConv). Please refer to the manual and the CD-ROM in PCwin package for details.

5-14
5.8. Convert
The function is to convert LD program to different mode.
From PC10 Standard (PC3JG separate) convert to PC10 Extend mode.
LD Program·SFC·parameter convert to PC10 Extend mode.

PC10 Standard mode PC10 Extension

(PC3JG(separate) Covert mode

Operation method is to select[File]-[Convert].

Administrator of library with

Sentinel of "PCwin Security
Tools" can be done to Convert
of FB library.

Not saving.

< The order to convert the programs in FB program base >

1. To move PC10 Master Library to the target directory.
([Option]-[Configuration]-[Library]-[FB Library directory])
2. Convert LD program
3. Link "PC10 Master Library"([File]-[Link Library])

5-15
6. Project Window
6.1. Setting of Project Window
Settings in the Project window have been explained below.
These settings are required for drawing SFC with PCwin.
Settings are possible for a maximum of 3 PLC Programs (Program 1, 2 and 3).
Useable PLC Program No. varies depending on the CPU operation mode.

Library Program tab

See Method of Operation of Library
Project Program Tab

Data

Setting of Parameter
Refer to method of operation of Parameter
setting

For Program 1
Refer to method of operation of LD.
Settings / Registration related to SFC drawing
For Program 2

Same as above

For Program 3

Same as above

While creating a new program, carry out setting of CPU operation mode of the parameter
in the beginning.

6-1
- About Project Folder

Comment set in the system of Program name of the Parameter is displayed as Project
Folder comment.

- About Program Folder

Comment set in the Program of Program name of the Parameter is displayed as Program
Folder comment.

- About SFC Folder

Process (PROC) and Sub-process (SUB-PROC) are registered in this folder.
Sub process (SUB-PROC) is registered below the Process (PROC)
No. that can be registered No. that can be used
PROC : 100 00 – 99
SUB-PROC: 256 000 - 255

The number of sub-processes (SUB-PROC) that can be registered in one process (PROC) is from
0 to 256.
In case of PCwin, chart (process diagram) is drawn with the concept of sheet against
each registered process.
It is not possible to use Sub-SFC registered in other Processes (PROC) as Self
Process (PROC).

- About LD Folder
In this folder, actions specified with SFC are registered. It is not possible to add or
delete actions in the Project window.
Further, ‘Ladder Sequence”, is registered as overall LD Program.
In case of LD only program, only this “Ladder sequence”, is registered.

- About “+” and “-” on the left side of the Folder

“+” and “-” on the left side of the Folder indicate open/close state of the folder. “+”
denotes closed state of the folder. Folder can be opened by double clicking the folder
and registered contents can be displayed.

- I/O Drawing and Network holder

Full list of built-into I/O chart and network chart are displayed.
Double click I/O charts and network, I/O charts and network chart window are opened.

6-2
6.2. Registration Procedure of Process

(1) SFC
Select the Folder by left clicking with mouse.

(2)
Open following menu by right clicking the folder with mouse.

(3) Select [Add] in the menu by left clicking with mouse.

(4) Enter Process No. and Comment.

- Entry of Number (PROC No. : Process No.)

Enter Numerical (decimal number) from 0 to 99.
Note that characters shown
- Entry of comment (Process comment) below must not be used.
Process comment is entered. However, its entry is not a must. # ! ; ,
{ } “ ~
Comment may contain a maximum of 48 characters.

- Entry of Next No.

Starting No. at the time of creation of SFC chart is entered. Since it can be changed at
the time of SFC chart creation, its entry is not a must.

- SFC JOG OPERATION

Refer to "6.5 Individual SFC Settings".

While registering input details, left click [OK] with the mouse.

Completion of Registration

Comment

While not registering input details, left click [cancel] with the mouse.
6-3
6.3. Registration Procedure of Sub-Process
6.3.1. First Registration
(1) Select PROCCO comment, the Icon of Registered Process, by left clicking with mouse.
Comment

(2) Open the following menu by right clicking PROCCO comment, the Icon for selected
process with the mouse.

Comment

(3) Select [Add] in the menu by the left click of mouse.

(4) Select [Sub-process] in [Type] by the left click of mouse.

(5) Entry of Sub-process No. and Comment

Entry of No. (SUB-PROC No. : Sub process No.)
Numerical (decimal number) from 0 - 255 is entered.
Note that characters shown
- Process comment is entered. below must not be used.
However, its entry is not a must. # ! ; ,
Comment may contain a maximum of 48 characters. { } “ ~

- Entry of Next Number.

Starting Number at the time of SFC chart creation is entered. It can be changed even at
the time of SFC chart creation. Therefore, its entry is not a must.

- While registering the input details, left click [OK] with mouse.
Completion of Registration.
While not registering input details, left click [Cancel] with mouse.

6-4
6.3.2. Registration after 2nd

(1) Select

Comment
Comment
,the Icons of registered sub-processes by the left click of mouse.

(2) Open following menu

Comment
Comment
,the Icons for selected sub-processes, by right clicking the mouse

(3) Select [Add] in the menu with the left click of mouse.

(4) Entry of Sub-process No. and Comment

Entry of Number (SUB-PROC No. : Sub-process No.)

Numerical (Decimal No.)from 0 – 255 is entered.
Note that characters shown
Entry of Comment (Process Comment)
below must not be used.
Process Comment is entered. But its entry is not a must.
Comment may contain a maximum of 48 characters. # ! ; ,
{ } “ ~
While registering input details, Left click [OK] with mouse.

Completion of Registration
While not registering the input details, left click [Cancel] with mouse.

6-5
6.3.3. Hierarchical display of Sub-processes
In case sub-steps are positioned in the Sub-process, hierarchical display of
Sub-processes is made like shown on the right side.
Registration of hierarchies is possible up to a
maximum of 256 steps, but display is possible up to
8 steps.
In case of hierarchical structure exceeding 8 steps,
“∇***” (A) is displayed in the 9th hierarchical position
and beyond the 9th will be displayed in the 1st
hierarchical position like “*SUBnnn” (B).
Further, unused sub-process (sub-processes are A
registered and sub-steps are not positioned in any
process or sub-process) is also displayed in the 1st B
hierarchical position like “*SUBnnn”.

Registration of hierarchy can not be made in the Project

window.
Automatic registration and hierarchy display is made by positioning sub-steps in the
sub-processes on the SFC Window.

Sub-process 1st hierarchy Sub-process 2nd hierarchy

6-6
6.4. Change of comment
Comment of Registered Process and Sub-process is changed.
6.4.1. Change of Process Comment
(1) Select
Comment
,the Icon for registered process, by the left click of mouse.
(2) Right click
Comment
,the Icon for selected process, with the mouse and open the following menu.

(3) Select [Properties] in the Menu by left clicking the mouse.

(4) Change of Process Comment

Entry of Comment (Process Comment)

Process comment is entered. However, it is not a must.
Comment may contain a maximum of 48 characters.

Note that characters shown below must not be used.

# ! ; ,
{ } “ ~

Entry of No. (PROC No. : Process No.) is not possible.

While registering the input details, left click [OK] with the mouse.

While not registering the input details, left click [Cancel] with the mouse.

6-7
6.4.2. Change of Sub-process Comment
(1) Select

Comment
Comment
,the Icons for registered sub-processes, by the left click of mouse.

(2) Open the following menu

Comment
Comment
,the Icons for selected sub-processes, by the right click of mouse.

(3) Select {Properties} in the menu by left clicking the mouse.

(4) Change of Sub-process Comment

Note that characters shown

below must not be used.
Entry of Comment (Process Comment) # ! ; ,
Process comment is entered. However, it is not a must. { } “ ~
Comment may contain a maximum of 48 characters.

Entry of No. (PROC No. : Process No.) is not possible.

While registering the input details, left click [OK] with the mouse.

While not registering the input details, left click [Cancel] with the mouse

6-8
6.5. SFC JOG OPERATION
Conduct setup on the SFC monitor when using the SFC manual function.
Setup and usage is possible on the below PCwin and PLC versions and later.
Functions support PCwin Ver. 16.0 Rev 01 and later.
Supported PLC versions include PC10G Ver. 3.51 and later, and Plus CPU Ver. 2.11 and later.
Operable DM versions include Ver. 7.10.0 and later.

6.5.1. Change to enable/disable SFC manual function

(1) Left-click the icon for registered processes

with the mouse to select it.

(2) Right-click the icon of the selected process

with the mouse to open the menu shown below.

(3) Left-click “Property” inside the menu to select it.

(4) Change SFC manual

The check box for “Support for SFC JOG OPERATION” controls settings for whether or not the current
project supports SFC manual.

6-9
6.5.2. SFC manual mode allocation address
For SFC manual motion, SFC manual mode has been added to enable interlock for ladder circuits.
The SFC manual mode signal turns on during SFC manual operation.
SFC manual mode signal address is allocated below as a fixed address for each project.

EK900 SFC manual

If the allocated address is already in use, the address will be automatically allocated after a vacancy in EK901
through EK9FF (*1) is found.
If there are no vacancies, allocation will be performed in the order of the below addresses.
(1) EK000 through 0FF
(2) EK100 through 8FF
(3) Error message dialog display → Untick the check box
In the above addresses, “SFC manual” will be automatically set as a comment.
Addresses may be changed, however the “SFC manual” comment will be automatically entered into the
address whenever the address is changed, and the previous address comment will not be removed.

The on/off timing for the SFC manual mode address is the same as the timing for the display/hide of the SFC
manual dialog on the SFC monitor.

(Note) The time chart monitor for scan, I/O operation panel hold-type, I/O check, and I/O
recorder function cannot be used on the PCwin while the SFC manual mode address is on.

6-10
6.6. Deletion of Process (PRO), Sub-process (SUB-PROC)
Comment of Registered Process and Sub-process is deleted.
6.6.1. Deletion of Process
(1) Select
Comment
, the icon of registered process, by left clicking the mouse.

(2) Open the following menu by right clicking

Comment
,the Icon of selected process.

(3) Select [Delete] in the menu by left clicking the mouse.

(4) Confirmation of deletion of Process.

While deleting, left click [OK] with the mouse.

All selected processes (PRO) and sub-processes (SUB-PROC) included in that process
will be deleted.
Further, when deletion of process is implemented, LD Program for transition conditions
of that process and sub-process will also get deleted simultaneously.
When not deleting, left-click [Cancel] with the mouse.

6-11
6.6.2. Deletion of sub-process
(1) Select Icons for registered process, with the left click of mouse.

Comment
Comment

(2) Open the following menu Icons for selected process, by right clicking with the mouse.

Comment
Comment

(3) Select [Delete] in the menu by left clicking with the mouse.

(4) Confirmation of deletion of Process.

While deleting, Left click [OK] with the mouse.

Selected sub-processes [SUB-PROC] will be deleted.

While not deleting, Left click [Cancel] with the mouse.

6-12
6.7. LD View
Actions, labels, subroutines and interrupts are displayed in the tree view.

Action

Subroutine
Label

Interrupt

6.7.1. Jump to Action, Label, Subroutine or Interrupt

While actions, labels, subroutines and interrupts are displayed in the tree view, double click
the desired item to jump to the corresponding label position.

6.7.2. Copying, Cutting and Pasting

The module, action or subroutine of the program can be cut, copied or pasted in the tree
view.

6-13
<Cutting>
The program is cut.
Select an action, subroutine, label or interrupt in the tree view and select [Cut].

Press the [OK] key to cut the program. Paste it in the desired position.

<Copying>
The program is copied.
Select an action, subroutine, label or interrupt in the tree view and select [Copy].
The program to be copied is selected.

<Pasting>
The program is pasted.
Move the cursor to the desired position in the tree view and select Paste.
Pasting is made on the selected program.
If there is a subroutine of the same name in the destination of copying, the following dialog
box is displayed. Change the name.

Note: There may not be subroutines of an identical name.

The following message is displayed. Press the [OK] key and enter another number.

6-14
7. SFC Window Edit
Drawing of chart (Process Flow Diagram) and related registration and settings are carried
out with SFC Window.

SFC Window is displayed by double clicking the process that needs to be displayed.

Program No. Process No.

String No.:0-31

Double click

Line No.:0-255

SFC window cursor

position

Drawing area of Process (PROC) or sub-process (SUB-PROC) is made up of vertically

256 lines and horizontally 32 sequences of cells (grids) per process.
When drawing the chart (Process Flow Diagram), graphic symbols are positioned in the
cells within this range.

While implementing programming based on SFC, confirm “Document2 SFC

(Sequential Function Chart) /FBD (Function Block Diagram) function and limitation
of CPU”. Restrictions from the programming point of view are mentioned in there.

7-1
7.1. Positioning of Graphic Symbols
When drawing SFC chart, only SFC elements (components) need be positioned and
horizontal and vertical lines as connecting lines are drawn automatically.
When inputting (placing) a component, the condition becomes “Insert” always.
7.2. Input of Steps
There are 3 types of steps namely Initial step, Step and Sub-step.
7.2.1. Input Flow of Initial Step and Step
In case of initial step and step, there are action block and action ladder (when carrying out
“AC nnn” specification of action with action block) as related settings. Below their flow
chart is indicated.
When using initial step and step as dummy steps, only their graphic symbols need be
positioned.

Left click the mouse

Select the Action and
here or press [Enter] Entry of Action
click the [Action
key. Program
Program] button.

SFC Window
Action Block
Ladder Window

For details, vide input of action block (7.4)

7.2.2. Input Flow of Sub-Step

Double click the sub SFC start or
Left click the mouse sub SFC end symbol to return to
here or press
key. the SFC window.
SFC Window

Click the [Jump to

Sub-process] button to Sub SFC Window
open the SFC window.

Sub SFC

For details, refer to input of Sub-SFC Dialog (7.5)

7-2
7.3. Positioning of Step Symbols
7.3.1. Positioning of Initial Steps
It is a step always needed for Process (PROC) and Sub-process (SUB-PROC).
It starts the process.
More than 1 initial step can not be placed on the same sheet.

Move the cursor on the sheet and click on the tool bar
Initial step will be displayed on the sheet.
Step Number is automatically allocated based on Starting No. and Increment value.

(Default value Starting No. : 0, Increment value : 1. Can be changed with option).
Number that can be used as Step No. is 0 ~ 9999. Step No. can be changed any time with
Action Block Dialog (7.4. Feeding of Action Block).

7.3.2. Duplication of Initial Step

When already there is an initial step on the sheet and another initial step is fed, an error
message will be displayed.
Delete the existing initial step before continuing.

7.3.3. Positioning of Steps

Move the cursor on the sheet and click on the Tool Bar.
Pressing the key will display dummy steps.
The dummy steps automatically sets necessary items.
•Step No. : Blank No. from 9000-9999
•Comment : @ (max. 3 languages)
•Step Complete Input : V4

Steps that can be used when Program is 16 kw is maximum 500. And a maximum of 1000
when the Program is 32 kw.

Number that can be used as Step No. is 0 ~ 9999 for all the cases.
Duplication is permitted between processes but not permissible within the same process.
Step No. is allocated automatically based on Starting No. and Increment value.
(Default value Starting No. : 0, Increment Value : 1. Can be changed with option)

Step No. can be changed at any time based on Acton Block Dialog (7.4. Feeding of Action
Block).

7-3
7.3.4. Positioning of Sub-Step
Move the cursor on the sheet and click on the Tool Bar.
Sub-Step will be displayed on the sheet.

Number that can be used as Sub-step No. is 0 ~ 255.

Duplicate use of Sub-step No. is possible whether between processes or within the same
process.
However, the total number should not exceed the number useable in steps and Sub-steps.
Sub-step No. can be changed at any time based on Sub SFC Dialog (7.5 Feeding of
Sub-SFC Dialog).

7.3.5. Positioning of Diagnosed Step

Move the cursor on the sheet and click on the Tool Bar. Steps will be displayed
on the sheet.

Useable No. of Steps is maximum 500 when program is 16 kw and a maximum 100 when
program is 32 kw.
Number useable as Step No. is 0 ~ 9999 for all the cases.

Duplication between processes is permissible but not within the same process.
Step No. is automatically allocated based on start No. and Increment No.
(Default value Starting No. : 0, Increment Value : 1. Can be changed with option)
Step No. can be changed at any time with Action Block Dialog (7.4 Feeding of Action
Block).

7.3.6. Marking of Dummy Step display

Dummy steps can be displayed as . ( Displayed by a square smaller than

standard steps)

Step No. is input in the range of 9000 to 9999 with symbol “@” is registered at the
beginning of a comment. The comment takes up one character size. In the display,
symbol ”@”is not displayed as a comment.

7.3.7. NC Step Display

Move the cursor on the sheet and click on the tool bar.
NC step will be displayed on the sheet.

Number useable as NC Step No. is 0 to 8999 for all the cases.

Using the same No. between processes is permissible but not within the same process.
Step No. is automatically allocated based on the starting No. and Increment value.
(Default value Starting No. : 0, Increment Value : 1. Can be changed with option)
Step No. can be changed at any time with Action Block Dialog (7.5 Action Block Input for
NC Step).

7-4
7.3.8. Jump setting in the process in case of SFC monitor
The program number - process/sub-process designated during SFC monitoring can be
displayed as a destination of a jump from the step.
In regular cases, priority is given to the jump view to the action ladder program specified
in the AQ (action qualifier) or the address designated as a bit device.

Create comment data according to the following rule to provide a jump view to the process
from a step with PCwin and direct circuit monitoring.

Format: [@Pn-PROCnn], [@Pn-PROCnn-SUBnn]

1. @, [ ], [ ],PROCnn is a must.
2. Pn-,-SUBnnn can be omitted.
3. For alphabetic letters, only upper case characters are valid.
Other entries are treated as normal comments.
4. Blank characters are ignored.
Note 1) Non-existent jump destination is ignored.
Note 2) If there is an error in the format, it is invalid.
Note 3) In case of direct circuit monitoring, priority is given to the jump view to the
address entered in step completion monitoring.

Example: SFC monitoring screen

7-5
7.4. Feeding of Active Block
Move the cursor on the sheet and either double click the left side of the mouse in the step
position or press [Enter] key.
Action Block Dialog will be displayed. (See the instance given below).

The previous settings

dialog is displayed with the
Ommitted settings advanced setup button.
• AQ: N
• Automatic allocation of step number
• Comment sharing
• 1 action setting
• No completion memory settings

[Previous settings dialog]

The above action dialog is displayed in PCwin Ver. 16.0 Rev. 01 and later.
In earlier versions of PCwin, a dialog will open without the “Reverse action” and “Completion memory”
settings seen in the “Previous settings dialog”.

7-6
It indicates each processing in the Process (Step).
Action must correspond to the Step.
Action list corresponding to the Step is called Action Block and in this Action Block, actual
operation procedure in the process of one step is set.
Setting is to be made in half-size characters. (However, excluding the comment).
Action is set with Action No. or Bit Device Address (Relay). 0 ~ 16 settings can be made
for 1 step.
Further, number of settings for the Holding System can be 00 ~ 4 for 1 step.
When set with Action No., its contents are programmed separately with Ladder Program.
All actions in 1 step are executed simultaneously when that step is in execution state,
unless otherwise specified and when the step is in inactive state, all actions end
simultaneously.

When displaying Action Block, “N : ON when activated” is automatically set in No.1 for
the initial value for the Action Qualifier.
When setting other Action Qualifiers, modification is necessary.

AQ Set Value Action

N AC000
S AC010

N AC100

AQ (Action Qualifier) Action

Defines the execution form of action. Object of Execution
For details, see 7.4.7 Action Qualifier Setting. Action is set with Action No. or Bit Device Address (Relay). 0
~ 16 settings are possible against 1 step.
When set with Action No. its contents need to be
programmed with separate Ladder Program.

7-7
7.4.1. Used Actions Number Limit
When “Number of actions in the step is limited to below 1 except R action” is pressed √
after setting [option]•[customize]•[SFC], the actions setting number will get limited to 0-1
except R action.

7.4.2. Entry of Step No.

Step No. (Decimal number) is fed in the Step No. column.
Number that can be used as step no. is 0 ~ 9999.
Duplication between processes is permissible but not in the same process.
Step No. is automatically allocated based on Starting No. and Increment Value.
(Default value Starting No. : 0, Increment Value : 1. Can be changed with option).

7-8
7.4.3. Entry of Step Comment
Step comment is entered in the comment column.
Comment may contain a maximum of 48 characters.
Entry in this item is reflected in Display with comment of SFC and SFC print.

Note that characters shown below must not be used.

# ! ; ,
{ } “ ~

7-9
7.4.4. Selection of Step Diagnosis
Press step diagnostic button.

Left click Step Diagnosis Check column with the mouse.

Based on checking of the present column, step diagnosis becomes valid and a red cross
mark “+” will be affixed to the Step No. Graphic Symbol.
Further, entry of setting column namely 7.4.5 Setting of Step Diagnosis Set Value and
7.4.6 Setting of Step Diagnosis Alarm Output becomes valid.

7.4.5. Setting of Step Diagnosis Set Value

When Step Diagnosis is valid, set value is entered in the Step Diagnosis Set Value
column.
Setting contents are Word Device Address or Set value (0.0 ~ 6553.5 [sec]).
Elapsed time Error detection of that step based on this set value becomes possible.
Further, when step diagnosis becomes valid, this set value is a must.
When not entered, message to enter the set value is displayed.

7-10
7.4.6. Setting of Step Diagnosis Alarm Output
When step diagnosis is not valid, set value is entered in the step diagnosis Alarm output
column. It is Word Device Address that is set.
When elapsed time error of that step is detected based on step diagnosis, Bit Device
Address set here is turned ON.
Further, when Step Diagnosis is valid, this set value need not be there.

7.4.7. Setting of Set Elapsed Time Output

It can be set irrespective of validity / invalidity of Step Diagnosis.
Set value is entered in the Step Elapsed Time output column.
It is Word Device Address that is set.
Elapsed time of that step is displayed in the set Word Device Address.

7-11
7.4.8. Setting of Action Qualifier
Action Qualifier is set in AQ column. In this setting effective configuration of AQ is
defined.
After left-clicking tabular entry field 1 of action qualifier, enter N, R or S directly.
Or left click Tabular Form Input column (1) of Action Qualifier with the mouse.
left click Action Qualifier Input column (1) with the mouse.
left click Action Qualifier Input column (2) with the mouse.

(2)

(1)

AQ to be set is selected by left clicking (from among 3 types) with the mouse.

As for precautions such as numbers that can be set etc., Refer 7.4 Entry of Action Block.

Active state Inactive state R

N ↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↓
S ↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↑↓

Step currently under execution is called active state and when transaction conditions are
satisfied and active state moves on to the next step, it becomes the inactive state.
During the shift from active to non-active state, not only the execution of the specified
action program stops but execution to turn OFF the coil timer in the end is executed once.
(Excluding the holding system).
Consequently, in the inactive state, coil timer becomes OFF.

7-12
If other letters except N, S or R entered in the action qualifier and pressed OK, following
error message is displayed.

7-13
7.4.9. Setting of Action
Action is set in the Action column.
Action No. or Direct Bit Device Address is set.

For the Action, comment may contain a maximum of 100 characters.

Note that characters shown below must not be used.

# ! ; , { } “ ~

7-14
When Action Address Comment and Step comment are the same, input an action address
comment and tick “Share comment”. Then you will not need to input Step Comment.
When the Comment Share box is not ticked, you can input different comments in Action
Address Comment and Step Comment.

· Entering comments for initial step

With the setting for the initial step, the “Share comment” check box is fixed at OFF. To
enter the comment for the initial step, press the “An advanced setup” button to display
the above-mentioned action block dialog box and enter.

Tick to share
comment.
Input only the comment for
Action Address.
Step Comment is automatically
copied.

7-15
7.4.9.1. Setting based on Action No.

Action is set in the format of Action No. “AC n n n”.

nnn : 0 ~ 999 ( decimal number).
As for entry of nnn, in case it is 1 digit / 2 digit numeral , “0” of upper digit need not be
there.

When sub-SFC is made, one action No. is automatically consumed.

Action No. is consumed from 999 in the reverse order. Therefore, when using 100 sub-SFC, the action
No. which the user can use becomes “0-899". It is necessary to note that.
Please avoid the use of No. 800 and No. 900 of the action No. as much as possible.

When setting is carried out with Action No., create the contents of action to be executed
with Ladder (Sequence Program).

If it is left clicked with the mouse, window shifts to Ladder editing.

7-16
7.4.9.2. Fresh creation or change of Action
When creating a new Action, Bookmark is set automatically in the Ladder position
corresponding to Action No.(Acnnn)and a jump is made. Targeted Action Ladder portion is
reverse displayed in sky blue color. Automatically set Bookmark is released automatically.
After creating the Action program, change with [Change] - [Change all the Ladder edited
Programs] on the menu.

See LD Edit for editing of Ladder.

7.4.9.3. Setting based on Direct Bit Device Address

Action is set with Direct Bit Device Address
All(Except the areas reserved with SFC)can be set with Direct Bit Device Address.

7-17
 Action Bit Device Address in the step(s) of SFC screen will be displayed at all the time.

Action
Bit Device Address

7.4.9.4. Monitor Input of Completion of Step Execution

It is the setting for the monitor and has no impact on the actual operation. Even if not fed,
it leads to no problem.
When SFC monitor is carried out, this function displays monitor display in executed form,
even if step is active but the set address state is “ON”.
This function is mainly meant for judging whether it is waiting state for completion of
execution of other steps or the execution is not complete yet, at the last stage of parallel
branching.

Executed
Display[Green]

Uncompleted
Active Step[Orange]
Display[Orange]

When there is no setting of monitor When there is setting of monitor

7-18
Setting is made with Bit Device Address.(e.g.:X110 Top End Entry)

If Step completion monitor is black and press [OK] button, an error message is displayed.
(Only when the action is specified by bit address).

7-19
7.4.10. SFC manual settings
7.4.10.1. Reverse action settings
The advance/return (execute/reverse) of an action can be associated with the step.
Reverse action can be set up through the area shown below in the step settings dialog.

• Step conditions displayed with reverse action step number

1. There must be one step action setting, and the Action Qualifier (AQ) must be “N”.
2. Does not apply to initial step, dummy steps, or NC steps

When reverse action step settings are set up for the step, reverse action step settings will be performed
automatically for the step that has been set up.

Finish setup and Finish setup

set to automatic without setting to
settings automatic settings

7-20
 [Error handling]
The below error message will be displayed if the step that was set up as the reverse action step is deleted.

Stops deletion
processing

If there is no step that was set up as the reverse action step during SFC conversion, an error will be
outputted when the cut operation of the step set up as the reverse action is performed,
(The error message will not be displayed immediately after the cut operation.)

7.4.11. Setup for automatic generation of bypass circuit

7.4.11.1. Completion memory setup
Setup of completion memory is conducted in the area within the red frame shown below.

When the “Use” check box is ticked, the completion memory flag address is allocated automatically.

7-21
The range of the area of completion memory flag address allocation is as follows.
Allocation is conducted in order beginning with the minimum address EKF00.
CPU mode Min. Max. Remarks
All CPU mode EKF00 EKFFF This area is shared between programs 1 through 3
*A total of 128 completion memory actions are possible for the programs.

An error message will be outputted when the check box is ticked in the following circumstances.
Check location Error details Error display Troubleshooting
after error detection
Completion Immediately before Check box
memory step selective branch automatically returns
to off

Last step within

parallel branch

Last in sub-process

When there exist no Check box

vacant addresses in automatically returns
the area for to off
allocation of
completion memory

(Note) Completion memory setup cannot be performed for sub-processes.

7-22
Starting step selection is made in the area within the red frame.

Only the following steps will be shown on the drop down list for the starting step.
(1) Steps within the same process
(2) Steps within the same branch
(3) Steps before completion memory steps

7-23
7.4.11.2. Automatic generation
By clicking the [OK] button after completion memory setup finishes, a bypass circuit will be automatically set
up in the ladder circuit and SFC chart.

+1 address

(Note) Automatically generated ladder circuits require circuit design suited for
equipment according to the designer.
Coil edit is possible but not necessary.

(Note) Occupies the address of the completion memory address + 1 additional

address

7-24
 As shown above, a dummy step and total of 4 condition branch lines are automatically added above the SFC
chart.
The blue-colored chart indicates the branch chart created by completion memory setup. The step that has been
set up is shown with a mark.
In the following circumstances, an error will be displayed and the chart will not be automatically generated.
• When 256 lines are exceeded due to symbol insertion
• When 32 columns are exceeded due to symbol insertion
• When the number of transitions exceeds the limit (999) due to symbol insertion
• When the number of steps exceeds the limit (999) due to symbol insertion

7-25
7.4.11.3. Restrictions
The following operations are prohibited (colored section of cells shown below) for the automatic generation
sections, starting section (step only) and completion memory sections (steps and transitions).
(1) Symbol insertion and deletion
(2) Transfer including the above symbols (includes the “cut” operation)
(3) Editing of actions of automatically generated dummy steps

7-26
7.5. Entry of Action Block(s) for NC step
Move the cursor on the sheet and either double click the left side of the mouse in the NC
step position or press [Enter] key.
Action Block Dialog will be displayed. (See an exmaple below)

7.5.1. Entry of Step No.

Input a step number (decimal number) in the Step No. column.
Number. that can be used as Step No. is 0 to 8999.
Using the same No. between processes is permissible but not within the same one
process.

7.5.2. Entry of O Number

Input O number (decimal number) for the NC program that activates in this step.
Number. that can be used as Step No. is 0 to 9999.
The input data in this section is reflected in Display with SFC comment and SFC print.

7.5.3. Entry of Step Comment

Refer to “Entry of Step Comment”

7.5.4. Entry of Monitor Input of Completion of Step Execution

Refer to “Monitor Input of Completion of Step Execution”

7.5.5. NC- SFC Start Switch

“NCwin” which can creates SFC chart for the NC program will start.
If no “NCwin” has been installed, nothing would start.

7-27
7.6. Entry of Sub-SFC Dialog
7.6.1. Step No. Input
Step No. (decimal Number) is entered in the Sub SFC No. Column.
Number. that can be used as Sub-Step No. is 0 ~ 255.
Duplication of Sub-Step No. is possible whether between processes or within the same
process.
However, the total number of steps for all Steps and Sub-Steps should not be exceeded.
Step Number is automatically allocated based on Start No. and Increment No.
(Default Value Starting No. : 0, Increment Value : 1. Can be changed with option).

7.6.2. Entry of Step Comment

Sub-Step comment is entered in the comment column.
Comment may contain a maximum of 48 characters.

Note that characters shown below must not be used.

# ! ; , { } “ ~

This input will be reflected in SFC display with comment and SFC Print.

7-28
7.6.3. Selection of Step Diagnosis
Left click Step Diagnosis Check column with the mouse.
Based on this check, step diagnosis becomes valid and a Red Cross mark “+” will be
affixed in the graphic symbol of the sub-step.
Further, entry of setting columns, namely 7.6.4 Setting of Step Diagnosis Set Point and
7.6.5 Setting of Step Diagnosis Alarm Output becomes valid.

7.6.4. Setting of Step Diagnosis Set Point

When Step Diagnosis is valid, set point is entered in the Step Diagnosis Set Point column.
Word Device Address or set point (0.0 ~ 6553.5 [sec.]) is entered here.
Elapsed time error detection of that step becomes valid on the basis of this set point.
Further, when Step Diagnosis is valid, this Set Point is always required.
If not fed, message demanding its entry will be displayed.

7-29
7.6.5. Setting of Step Diagnosis Alarm Output
When Step Diagnosis is valid, Set Point is entered in the Step Diagnosis Alarm output
column.
Bit Device Address is entered here.
When Elapsed Timer Error of that step based on Step Diagnosis is detected, Bit Device
Address set here is turned ON.
Further, even when Step Diagnosis is valid, this setting need not be fed.

7.6.6. Setting of Step Elapsed Time Output

It can be set regardless of validity / invalidity of Step Diagnosis.
Step Point is entered in the Step Elapsed Time Output column.
Word Device Address is set.
Elapsed Time of that step will be indicated in the set Word Device Address.

7.6.7. Monitor Input of completion of Step Execution

Setting of monitor for the completion of step execution can be made. For details, vide
7.4.9.4. Monitor Input of Completion of Step Execution.

Bit Device Address is set here. It is, however, not mandatory to set it.

7-30
7.6.8. Jump to Sub-process (Hierarchical Shift)

Sub-process of the corresponding Sub-SFC No. is opened with the clicking of[Jump to
Sub-process]button. Simultaneously, Sub-process(SUB-PROC)is automatically registered
on the Project Window.
When Sub-process is opened with[Jump to Sub-process], one can return up to a
maximum of 8 Upper Processes(Calling Source Process or Sub-process).
(1) Sub-SFC start or Sub-SFC end positioned on the Sub-process is double clicked.
(2) After right clicking the mouse, “Return to Upper Process” is selected with the left click
of the mouse.

7-31
7.7. Entry of Transition
7.7.1. Flow of Transition Input
Transition has Transition Dialog and Transition Condition Ladder as related settings.
Below their flow is indicated.

Left click the mouse

here or press [Enter] key

Click [Transition
Program] button Transition Condition
SFC Window

Transition
Ladder Window

For details, refer to 7.8 Entry of Transition Dialog

7.8. Positioning of Transition

Move the cursor on the sheet and by clicking on the tool bar, transition can be
positioned.
Maximum number of usable transactions, which can be created, irrespective of the
program capacity, is 1000.
Number useable as Transition No. is 0 ~ 9999 in all the cases.
Duplication is permissible between processes but not within one process.
Transition No. is allocated automatically based on Starting No. and Increment Value.
(Default Value Starting No. : 0, Increment Value : 1. Can be changed with option).
Transition No. can be changed at any time based on Transition Dialog.

7.9. Entry of Transition Dialog

Move the cursor on the sheet and double click the transition position with the left button of
the mouse or press [Enter] key.
Transition Dialog is displayed (see the instance below)

Entry of setting is restricted to half size characters (However, excluding the comment).

7-32
7.9.1. Entry of Transition Number
Transition Number (Decimal Number) is entered in the Transition Number Column.
Number useable as Transition Number is 0 ~ 9999.
Duplication is permissible within processes but not in the same process.
Transition Number is allocated automatically based on Starting Number and Increment
value. (Default Value Starting No. : 0, Increment value : 1 . Can be changed with
option).

Input contents are made valid and dialog is closed, if Is clicked with the
left button of the mouse.

Input contents are made invalid and dialog is closed, if is clicked with the left
button of the mouse.
Input contents are made valid and dialog is closed and shift to Ladder editing of transition

is made if Is clicked with the left button of the mouse.

7.9.2. Transition Comment Input

Comment of transition is entered in the comment column.
Comment may contain a maximum of 75 characters.

Note that characters shown below must not be used.

# ! ; , { } “ ~

Entry of this item is reflected in SFC display with comment and SFC printing.

7-33
7.9.3. Fresh creation/ Change of Transition Condition Program
When creating new Transition Condition Program, Bookmark is automatically set in the
Ladder position corresponding to Transition No.(TRnnnn)and a jump is made. Targeted
Transition Ladder portion is displayed in sky blue color. Automatically set Bookmark is
released automatically.
After creating the transition Condition Program, change with [Change] - [Change All
Ladder Edited Blocks] on the menu.

About Edit operation of Ladder, see LD Edit.

Transition controls the shift of active state of step and shift conditions are specified
In the Transition Program (Ladder)

TR***(R580-0~R5BE-7are allocated automatically)

|-----||-------||----+---||-------------------------------------------------[ ]---|
|
|-----||-------|/|----+ Ladder circuit of 1 Block
Transition
Conditions

• I PC10, PC3JG Separate / PC10 Standard, Separate 1~5 / Single 1~6 Mode

If Program based on SFC is carried out, area of R580-0~R5BE-7 is shared on the system side
as data memory for transition control of SFC.

• PC10 Extension Mode

Area (JSC80-0~JSCBE-7) for SFC is used.

7-34
7.10. Positioning of Sub SFC Start

Move the cursor on the sheet and click on the tool bar.

Sub SFC start will be displayed on the sheet.

Number registered in Project window will be automatically allotted to the SUB Number.
This graphic symbol denotes start position of chart (Process Diagram) of sub-process and
always only one symbol is required for the sheet of sub process (SUB-PROC) and it
should be positioned in the upper position than any other graphic symbol.

Automatic addition
of SUB No.

A step is surely required for the under of a Sub SFC start.

Please arrange a dummy step, even when unnecessary on a process.

7-35
7.11. Positioning of Sub SFC End

Move the cursor on the sheet and click on the tool bar

Sub SFC End will be displayed on the sheet.

This graphic symbol denotes the end position of chart (Process Diagram) of Sub Process
and always only one is needed for a sheet of Sub Process (SUB-PROC). It should always
be positioned in the lower position than any other graphic symbol.

A step is surely required for the top of a Sub SFC end.

Please arrange a dummy step, even when unnecessary on a process.

7-36
7.12. Positioning of Selective / Parallel Branching / Confluence

7.12.1. Description of Tool Bar Icons.

Selective Branching and Selective Branching corner are positioned.

Selective Confluence and Selective Confluence corner are positioned.

Parallel Branching and Parallel Branching corner are positioned.

Parallel Confluence and Parallel Confluence corner are positioned.

Left click above mentioned tool icon with the mouse or press F6,F7,F8,F9 keys to
position graphic symbols.

7.12.2. Branching / Branching Corner

Patterns during entry of branching and branching corner are indicated below.

7.12.2.1. Insertion of Branch

Selective Branch is positioned in the cursor position shown below.

1 Cell is shifted downwards

Selective Branch is positioned.

Positioning of Parallel Branch or Parallel Branch corner is carried out with

7.12.2.2. Insertion of corner

Selective corner is positioned in the cursor position shown below.

Selective Branch Corner is positioned.

Positioning of Parallel Branch or Parallel Branch corner is carried out with

7-37
7.12.2.3. Common use of Icons

and are commonly used for positioning 3 types of symbols each.

Depending on the presence of Branch or Corner on the left and right side of the cursor
position, symbols change automatically giving preference to the left side.

Branch on Left Side Corner on Right Side

Selection Yes No Yes No

Odd No.

Changes cyclically

Even No.

7-38
7.12.3. Confluence / Confluence Corner
Pattern in the entry of confluence and confluence corner is indicated below.
7.12.3.1. Insertion of Confluence
Selective Confluence is positioned in the cursor position shown below.

Select Branch is positioned.

. For positioning Parallel Confluence and Parallel Confluence Corner, is used.

7.12.3.2. Insertion of Corner

Selective Corner is positioned in the cursor position shown below.

Selective Confluence Corner is positioned.

For positioning Parallel confluence and Parallel Confluence corner, is used.

7.12.3.3. Common use of Icons

and are commonly used for positioning 3 types of symbols each.

Depending on the presence of Branch or Corner on the left and right side of the cursor
position, symbols change automatically giving preference to the left side.

Branch on Left Side Corner on Right Side

Selection Yes No Yes No

Odd No.

Changes cyclically

Even No.

7-39
7.13. Positioning of Jump
Jump to a step in the same process can be made.

7.13.1. Entry of Jump

Move the cursor on the sheet and click on the tool bar with the left button of the
mouse.

Jump will be positioned on the sheet.

When cursor is on the Jump symbol, if left button of the mouse or Enter key is pressed,
Jump dialog will be displayed.
However, Step No. of initial step will be granted when “automatic jump to initial step
during jump insertion” is checked √ by [option]•[customize]•[SFC] setting.
List of Drawn Steps and Sub Steps will be displayed along with comment.

Step of the Jump destination is selected from the Step List.

The dialog closed with the double click of the left button of the mouse or the [OK] button.
Then, the selected Step No., affixed to the Jump symbol, is displayed.

Dialog is closed without registering anything with the Cancel button.

7-40
7.14. Collective positioning of symbols
Steps, transitions, and selective branching/parallel confluences can be collectively positioned.

7.14.1. Collective positioning of steps and transitions

The initial step and transition will be positioned synchronously by moving the cursor on the sheet and

clicking on the tool bar. The shortcut key for this action is [Ctrl] + [F1].

Steps and transitions will be positioned synchronously by moving the cursor on the sheet and clicking
on the tool bar. The shortcut key for this action is [Ctrl] + [F2].

7-41
 The dummy and transition will be positioned synchronously by moving the cursor on the sheet and clicking

on the tool bar. The shortcut key for this action is [Ctrl] + [Shift] + [F2].

7.14.2. Collective positioning of parallel connected dummy steps and connected transitions
Dummy steps will be positioned and connected in the parallel connection section by moving the cursor on

the sheet and clicking on the tool bar. The shortcut key for this action is [Ctrl] + [F9].

7-42
7.14.3. Collective positioning of selective branch dummy step and branch transition
The dummy step will be positioned in the selective branch section and a selective branch created by moving

the cursor on the sheet and clicking the on the tool bar. The shortcut key for this action is [Ctrl] + [F6].

7-43
7.15. Un Do
Returns the created/ edited chart to 1 step earlier state. It is possible up to a maximum of
7 times.

Procedure

Either select [Edit]-[Undo] or left click or after right clicking the mouse, select “Undo”.
Short cut keys are [Ctrl]+[Z].

7.16. Re Do
Re does the chart returned to 1 step earlier state with [Edit]-[Re Do] in the original state
after editing.
It is possible up to a maximum of 7 times.

Procedure

Either select [Edit]-[Re Do] or click or after right clicking the mouse select
“ Re Do”.
Short cut keys are [Ctrl]+[Y].

7.17. Cut
Selected data is cut on the Clipboard. Cut data can be positioned in any position with
[Paste].

Procedure
(1)Move the mouse on the Chart area while pressing the left button and symbols in the
range Mouse is moved are selected with Cell( Lattice) Unit.

(2)Either select [Edit]-[Cut] or click or after right clicking the mouse, select “ Cut”.
Short cut keys are [Ctrl]+[X].

7.18. Paste
Cut on the Clipboard or call the copied symbols and paste them.

Procedure
(1)Place the cursor in the position where data is to be pasted(gray box) .

(2)Either select [Edit]-[Paste] or click or after right clicking the mouse, select “Paste”.
Short cut keys are [Ctrl]+[X].
Data will be recalled and pasted there. When symbols exist in the position of pasting,
Clip data is inserted and the subsequent data moves downwards.

7-44
7.19. Copy

Selected data is copied on the clipboard. Cut data can be positioned anywhere with
[Paste].

Procedure
(1)Move the mouse on the Chart area while pressing the left button and symbols in the
range mouse is moved are selected with Cell( Lattice) Unit.

(2)Either select [Edit]-[Copy] or click or after right clicking the mouse, select “Copy”.
Short cut keys are [Ctrl]+[X]. Selected symbols are copied on the clipboard.

7.20. Select All

Data of currently active (selected files) circuits is reversed and selected.

Procedure
(1)Either select [Edit]-[select All] or after right clicking the mouse, select “ Select All”.

7.21. Move
Selected symbol can be re-positioned in any positioned.

Procedure
(1)Move the mouse on the Chart area while pressing the left button and symbols in the
range mouse is moved are selected with Cell( Lattice) Unit. Selected range is reverse
displayed.
(2)Again move the selected range while pressing down the left button of the mouse in the
selected range and then release the left button.

When symbols are already positioned in the area, it returns to the former position, as it
can not move.
Either move to a position having enough empty area or cut and paste.

7-45
7.22. Insertion and Deletion of Row and Columns
Insertion and deletion of rows and columns of SFC are possible.
You can Un Do/Re Do after the insertion or deletion.

7.22.1. Insertion of rows and columns

***Operation Flow***
1) Select the row or column you want to insert. (You can select more than one
rows/columns.)

Selection of Row Selection of Column

2) Select “Insert” with a right click.

3) Selected row(s)/column(s) will be inserted.

Row Insertion : Shift down
Column Insertion : Shift right

Row Insertion Column Insertion

7-46
7.22.2. Deletion of Row and Column
***Operation Flow***
Select the row or column you want to delete. (You can select more than one
rows/columns)

Selection of Row Selection of Column

2) Select “Delete” with a right click.

3) Selected row(s)/column(s) will be deleted.

Row Insertion : Shift up
Column Insertion : Shift left

Row Deletion Column Deletion

7-47
7.23. Insertion/Deletion/Automatic Sorting of Cell
Insertion, deletion, or automatic sorting of SFC cell(s) is possible.
You can Un Do/Re Do after the insertion, deletion, or automatic sorting.

7.23.1. Insertion of Cell

***Operation Flow***
1) Select the cell you want to insert. (You can select more than one cells.)
2) When you select “Insert” with a right click, the below screen will be displayed.

Shift rightward : Shifts the selected cell rightward.

Shift downward : Shifts the selected cell downward.
Entire row : Shifts the selected row cell downward.
Entire column : Shifts the selected string cell rightward.
3) The selected cell will be inserted.

7.23.2. Deletion of Cell

This deletes cell(s) and also carries out the operation same as that of pressing DEL key.

7.23.3. Automatic Sorting of Cell

When you select “Automatic sorting” with a right click after selecting cell, unnecessary
blank area is deleted.

7-48
7.24. Comment Edit (Entry and Editing of Comment)
7.24.1. Step Comment Edit (Entry and Editing of Comment)
Step comment can be entered and edited in the exclusive List Box.

Procedure
(1)Select [Edit]- [Comment Edit]- [Step Comment] when SFC Window is in Active state.
(2)Targeted Step is double clicked with the mouse.
(3)Since Dialog Box of [Comment Change] is displayed, comment is fed and corrected.

Maximum Input Letter No. Comment: 48 characters

Note that characters shown below must not be used.

# ! ; , { } “ ~

(4)Click [OK].
♦ Program
When there are multiple SFC, if number is selected here, that particular comment will be
displayed.
♦ PROC
Comment of PROC selected here is displayed.
♦ SUB
Comment of SUB selected here is displayed.

7-49
7.24.2. Transition Comment Edit (Entry/ Edit of Comment)
Comments of transition can be entered and edited in the exclusive List Box.

Procedure
(1)Select [Edit]- [Comment Edit]- [Transition Comment] when SFC Window is in Active state.
(2)Double click the targeted Transition with the mouse.
(3)Since Dialog Box of [Comment Change] is displayed, comment is fed and corrected.

Maximum Input Letter No. Comment: 75 characters

Note that characters shown below must not be used.

# ! ; , { } “ ~

(4)Click[OK ].

♦ Program
When there are multiple SFC, if number is selected here, that particular comment will
be displayed.
♦ PROC
Comment of PROC selected here is displayed.
♦ SUB
Comment of SUB selected here is displayed..

7-50
7.25. Display mode [Display] – [Display Type]
Selection of Display mode can be made with Display – Display Type in the menu.

Graphic Symbols Comment Step Elapesd Time

Display Method
Standard Display Not Display Not Display
Type with Comment Display Display Not Display
Type with Step Time Display Not Display Display
Display All Display Display Display

7.25.1. Comment Display

During display of set comment only first half i.e. 24 characters will be displayed.

7.25.2. Comment 100 character display

If on the tool bar is clicked, Comment in the cursor position of Comment Box up to a
maximum of 100 characters is displayed. Comment Box can be moved to an optional
position.
Moreover, display/non-display state is held at the time of Pcwin end. A blank character is
displayed by "_".

7-51
7.25.3. Step Elapsed Time Display
During monitoring it displays execution time of that step.

7.25.4. Comment Display and Step Elapsed Time Display

During monitoring, it displays execution time of comment and each step.

7.26. Enlargement /Reduction of Display : [Display] – [Zoom]

Selection of Enlargement / Reduction of display can be made with Display – Zoom on the
menu.

Selection of Enlargement / Reduction is as under. Selection is made in the % column.

Selection can be made from among 5 types i.e. 100% (Standard), 150% (Big), 200%
(Maximum), 50% (Small), 25% (Smallest) and graphic and font are enlarged or reduced.

Further, if the button on the tool bar is pressed, magnification of zoom can be
changed.

Magnification of zoom will change cyclically with the current magnification as the start.
Smallest – 50% (Small) – 100% (Standard) – 150% (Big) – 200% (Biggest) – 25%
(Smallest).

7-52
7.27. Search : [Display] – [Search]
Number and comment search can be carried out.
Search can be carried out in the Program in which current active sheet is included.

Search can be executed by clicking Display – Search on the menu.

Search Results will be displayed in a Tabular form and it jumps to a selected place.

7.27.1. Number Search

Selection is made with the Radio button of Transition and Search is carried out.

7.27.2. Comment Search

History of searched character sequence remains.
All characters sequence search is carried out for comment character sequence being
searched.
Search can not be made for Partial character sequence.

Bad Instance :
1.Comment character sequence “Process * “ … Wild card.
2.Comment character sequence “Process” … Blank characters.

Good Instance :
1.Comment character sequence “Process”.

7-53
7.27.3. Search Result
Search Results of Number Search and Comment Search are displayed in the same window.

7.27.3.1. Search Contents

Contents of search are displayed.
In case of Comment Search, fed comment character sequence is displayed.
In case of Number Search, display is made by affixing “ST” in case of step and “TR” in
case of Transition to the number.

Search Result for 10 items is displayed and for results beyond the10th item, use scroll
bar.
If search result is one, direct jump is made.

7.27.3.2. [OK] button

Jump to the selected step or Transition is made.
In case of jump other than current active process, closing / opening of the sheet is carried
out.

7.27.3.3. [Cancel] button

Return to [Search] window is made.

7-54
7.28. Jump : [Display] – [Jump] – [Step/Transition]
Jump to Step, SUB step or Transition is made.
A complete list of steps and transitions of the Program where currently active sheet is
included, is displayed.
Select from this list and directly jump to the selected point.

(1)Select [Jump] from the menu.

Steps and Transitions with comments from all the processes of the active program will
be extracted and displayed in Tabular Form.
If [NO] button, [PROC] button, [SUB] button, [ST/TR] button, [Comment] button are
clicked, sorting of each item will be carried out.

(2)Step or Transition where jump is to be made is selected.

Moving to ST/TR where jump is to be made, if [OK]button,[Enter]key or double click
with mouse is done, cursor jumps to Step, SUB step or Transition on the sheet.

7-55
7.29. Bookmark : [Display] – [Bookmark]
By setting bookmark in each cell of SFC, instantaneous jump and display cab be made.

7.29.1. Setting / Release of Bookmark : [Display] – [Bookmark ] – Bookmark setting / Release]

7.29.1.1. Setting of Bookmark
(1)Place the cursor on the target line.

(2)Click button of the icon and mark, as shown below, will be affixed

7.29.1.2. Release of Bookmark

(1)Place the cursor on the line to be released.

(2)Click button of the icon.

7.29.2. To Previous Mark : [Display] – [Bookmark] – [To Previous Mark]

Jump to the Bookmark in the previous position than the current cursor position is made.

Or click button.

7.29.3. To Next Mark : [Display] – {bookmark} – [To Next Mark]

Jump to the Bookmark in the next position than the current cursor position is made.

Or click button.

7.29.4. Release of all Bookmarks : [Display] – [Bookmark] – [Release All Bookmarks]

Releases all the Bookmarks on the Sheet.

Or click button

7-56
7.30. Reallocate All
7.30.1. Step No. : [Edit] – [Reallocate] – [Step No.]

Reallocation of Step Nos. with Process Unit can be made.

However, numbers starting with 9000 are outside its purview.

Procedure
(1)Display the Process where reallocation is to be carried out and select [Edit] –
[Reallocated] – [Step No.] from the menu.

(2) Set the starting value and Increment value of Step No.
Instance : Start : 100, Increment : 2 – 100, 102, 104 ….

(3) Set the priority order for affixing number.

(4 )Click [OK]

7.30.2. Transition Number

Reallocation of Transition No. with Process Unit can be made.

Procedure
(1) Display the process where reallocation is to be carried out and select [Edit] -
[Reallocate] - [Transition No.] from the menu.
(2) Set the start value and Increment value of the Transition No.
(3) Set the priority order for numbering.
(4) Click [OK]

7-57
8. LD (Ladder) Window Edit
There are following 3 patterns for displaying LD Window.
(1)Display from Action Block of SFC.

Here left click the Select Action and

mouse or press [Enter] Action Program.
click [Action Block]
key. button.
SFC Window
Action Block
Ladder Window

(2)Display from Transition Block of SFC.

Here left click

the mouse or Click [Transition
SFC window press [Enter] Program] button.
Transition Condition
Program.

Transition
Ladder Window

(3)Display from Project Window.

Double clicking the “LD Folder” of Project window, open the tree. When
SFC chart exists, “AC***” and “Ladder Sequence” are displayed. In case
of LD only, “Ladder sequence” is displayed.

If program to be displayed is double clicked in this state, LD window is

played.

Double Click

8-1
8.1. PC2/PC3J/PC10/PCDL/Plus series
8.1.1. Entry of New Block
When creating new circuit Block, it is necessary to carry out insertion operation of new block and create the
place for circuit, circuit creation is fully carried out with this insertion operation.
When creating new project, 3 circuit blocks of “START”, “END”, “PEND” are automatically created. In case
of main program, program is inserted between “START” and “END” and in case of sub-routine or SFC Action,
between “END” and “PEND”.

Procedure
(1) Position to be created is clicked and cursor is placed there.

(2)On the tool bar is clicked. New Block is created and subsequent circuits are shifted.

The shortcut keys for inserting new blocks are [Ctrl]＋[Ins].

New block creation line

Modified circuit blocks will have modification mark “O”.

8-2
8.1.2. Address Programming

8.1.2.1. Positioning of Symbols

Positioning of Electric symbols is carried out as under.

Procedure
(1)Position to be created is clicked and cursor is placed there.
(2)Either the icon of symbol on the tool bar is clicked or the function key of the keyboard is pressed. (See
below given diagram)

(3)Symbol is positioned.
(4)If either [Enter] key is pressed or double clicked with the mouse, following input properties are displayed.
Entering [Address], [Comment]. Either press [Enter] or [Apply] button.

Memo
♦[Address] is automatically entered in capital letters even if [Caps lock] is not pressed. Further, in following cases,
there is no need to enter everything.
In case of M001, enter M1
In case of M03A, enter M3A
♦ [Comment] may be entered either on the contact point side or the coil side. Entered comment is reflected in all.
Place a check mark at “Multiple language comment display” to enter the comment in each of three languages
simultaneously.

8-3
♦ The following devices use the common area.
• X and Y devices
• T and C devices
• GX and GY devices
• EX and EY devices

Example: Description is made for the X and Y devices.

To use Y as an output, “Y” is displayed if the same address is used for a contact or the like.

Y0 is used as an
output
Program conversion

If Y0 is used as an output, Y0 is also

displayed as an input

Note: Note that the X and Y, GX and GY, and EX and EY devices are used in bytes.

If X000 is used, X000 to X007 are displayed Y000 to Y007.

8-4
8.1.2.2. Change of Symbol
Positioned Electric Symbol is changed by the following procedure.

Procedure
(1) Either double click the symbol to be changed or place the cursor (Yellow Box) on it and press [Enter].
(2)Following Input Properties will be displayed.

M011 M11

POSSIBLE TO OPERATE FOR WRITE OF ID

♦ For Changing address or comment

After modifying Address or Comment, either press [Enter] key or click [Apply].

♦ For changing the type of symbol

Either click the symbol to be changed from [Symbol select] and press [Enter] key or click [Apply].
Further, by clicking the tab on the properties, change to different type of symbol can be made.

8-5
8.1.2.3. Function Command
Differentiate the symbols of output type and connection type.
Output type function can be added by [F12] key.
Connection type function can be added by [Shift] + [F12].

Output type Connection type

Property screen of Function Command has two modes.

•Normal Property Screen
If “Change entry mode” is unticked, normal property screen will be displayed. (Initial setting value is
“unticked”.)

•Automatic Identification Property Screen

If “Change entry mode” is ticked, automatic Identification property screen will be displayed.

A) Entry of command followed by operand

B) Automatic decision of transfer command
C) Displays description of command
D) Entry of operand comment
E) Search command

C)
A)
B) E)

D)

8-6
A) Entry of Command, followed by Operand
In automatic Identification mode, you can enter command, directly followed by operand.
Example) If you enter [Screen A] in the data column successively and then apply, [Screen B] will
appear.
[Screen A] [Screen B]

***Rule for Successive Entry***

1) Enter space between command and operand.
2) If operand is a constant value, enter “* (comma)” before the constant value.
BCD Octal Decimal Hex
“B,” “Q,” “D,” “H,”
3) If operand is an address, enter “*” after the address.
Byte Word*1 Double Word
“L or H” “W” “,W”

*1 If operand is a register address, you can omit this.

B) Automatic Decision of Transfer Command

If transfer command type is unknown, enter “MOV”, and applicable command will be automatically
decided based on the contents of the operand.
Example 1) “MOV Do D10” → WMOVE D000 -> D0010
Example 2) “MOV D,64 D10L” → MOVER 64d -> D0010L

Entry Operand
Command after automatic decision
Command First Second Third
(1) L/H MOV (2-digit hex constant transfer)
(2) W WMOV (4-digit hex constant transfer)
(3) ,W DMOV (8-digit hex constant transfer)
(4) L/H MOVP (BCD 2-digit constant transfer)
(5) W WMOVP (BCD 4-digit constant transfer)
(6) ,W DMOVP (BCD 8-digit constant transfer)
(7) L/H MOVR (3-digit decimal constant transfer)
(8) W WMOVR (5-digit decimal constant transfer)
(9) ,W DMOVR (10-digit decimal constant transfer)
(10) L/H MOVQ (3-digit octal constant transfer)
MOV (11) W WMOVQ (6-digit octal constant transfer)
(12) ,W DMOVQ (11-digit octal constant transfer)
(1) L/H L/H MOVT (2-digit hex constant transfer to 2 places)
(2) W W WMOVT (4-digit hex constant transfer to 2 places)
L/H L/H MOVE (1 byte direct transfer)
W W WMOVE (2-byte direct transfer)
,W ,W DMOVE (4-byte direct transfer)
L/H L/H L/H BMOV1 (Byte data block transfer 1)
L/H L/H (7) BMOV2 (Byte data block transfer 2)
W W (7) WBMOV (Word data block transfer)
B B (7) BBMOV (Bit block transfer)

8-7
 (1) Hex below 2-digit (As this is HEX judgment, add “H” at the top) : Ex. H,D1
(2) Hex below 4-digit : Ex. H,D80FF
(3) Hex below 8-digit : Ex. H,FFFF0000
(4) BCD below 2-digit (As this is BCD judgment, add “B” at the top) : Ex. B,99
(5) BCD below 4-digit : Ex. B,9876
(6) BCD below 8-digit : Ex. B,98129876
(7) Numeral below 3-digit (As this is numeral judgment, add “D” at the top) : Ex. D,255
(8) Numeral below 5-digit : Ex. D,19876
(9) Numeral below 10-digit : Ex. D,4294967295
(10)Octal below 3-digit (As this is numeral judgment, add “Q” at the top) : Ex. Q,377
(11)Octal below 6-digit : Ex. Q,17777
(12)Octal below 11-digit : Ex. Q, 37777777777

C) Displayed explanation of command

Displays the explanations of command.
The explanation of command change will also be followed.

D) Entry of Operand Comment

With function command property, operand comment(s) can be entered.
Constant values cannot enter with operand comment.

8-8
E) Command Search
Command search is possible.
1) Search top Button
Search for commands whose top word matches. (Search results will be displayed in “Command
list”.)
Example. MO -> MOV, MOVP, etc.
2) Ambiguous search Button
Search for commands, some part of which matches. (Search results will be displayed in
“Command list”.)
Searching from even one character is possible is possible.
Example. <= → <=D, D<=D , etc.
3) Manual reference Button
Displays programming manual. (Automatically jumps to a selected command.)

When pressing
[OK], the
command will be
reflected

8-9
8.1.2.4. FBD(Function Block Diagram)
PCwin support "Function Block Diagram" (FBD).
FB can be moved to any optional position in the Project Ladder Edit Window.
Entity of FB Control circuit is created and registered with separate FB Library.
For details of FB Library, see 9. Library.
PCwin version 4.3 or later is necessary to use FB.
PCwin Option 1[Symbolic•FBD]Software:TJA-6036is required separately.
Option 1 becomes not necessary from PCwin Ver12 onwards. (This option becomes a PCwin standard function.)

PLC: PC3JD[Ver.2.60 or later], PC3JB[Ver.2.60 or later]

PC3JL, PC3JM(Integrated control system)Library does not correspond.

With PCwin Ver. 12.0 or earlier, the master library is necessary to open a file.
With PCwin Ver. 12.1 or later, the file can be opened even without the master library if it is saved in the subset library.
The flow of opening the file in the master library or subset library is shown here.

Directory of FB library
Open a file
Flow for subset library
Flow for master library

Setting yes/no
Yes

No
Name check Agree

Version check

Do not agree
Inquiry whether or not to
open as a subset
No
Subset yes/no

Yes

Yes
Open as a subset

No
Name check
Version check
Do not agree Error display

Agree

Open in the Open in the

subset library master library
File opening is canceled.
Open in the master library.

8-10
8.1.2.5. To open in the master library
For the overview of the master library, refer to 9.1 Library Overview.

8.1.2.5.1. Directory setting of FB Library

Storage place of FB library is set up with [Option][Set][FB Library].
Settings are saved at the time of PCwin termination.

1. 2.

3. Reference of folder set with is displayed. It is selected by clicking the folder to be set.

4. Click [Cancel] to return to 2. without selecting a folder.

5. Set by clicking [OK].
6. After confirmation, setting is confirmed by clicking [OK].

8-11
8.1.2.5.2. Setting of Link Library
Link Library is set with [File]-[Link Library].
When create new Project Program with FB Library or replacing FB Library of an existing Project Program.
When not replacing a FB Library of an existing Project program, this setting is not required.

1.[File][Set Link Library]

2. Set Dialog of FB Library is displayed.

Please choose.

8-12
3. FB Library linked by using is selected.

Standard Library 32KW

Large Library 60KW

Master Library 180KW

Master 2 Free Library Free

PC10 Master Library 180KW

Subset Library *1 8/32 / 60KW

*1: 8KW when PCDL-CPU.

4. PCwin checks each FB version information on the PCwin side and FB library side in the comparison collation by
using [Open]. If there is a mis-matching in the check result, it displays check result of FB information.

The setting of the link library is continued with [Yes].

The setting of the link library is discontinued with [No].And it returns to the dialog of [Open library](display of the list of
the FB library).
8-13
5. Confirm the selection of FB Library linked by using [Open].

Close the dialog with [Cancel].

Delete of link library configuration with [Delete].
FB which opens the export dialog of a library with [Details] and is not used by the program can be taken in to a
Subset library. Please refer to [9.11.1 Subset library Export].
Usually, in case it writes in PLC, FB used by the program is taken in to the subset library. Therefore, a setup for
taking in FB which is not used can be performed here.

6. By clicking [OK], link with FB Library Ladder Program is made.

In case of FB Library and linked Project program, substitution confirmation dialog of FB Library is displayed.

Close the dialog by clicking [No].

FB Library linked by clicking [Yes]is substituted.

8-14
Based on this setting, following program is automatically created just before FUN[START] against all programs.
Kindly do not change or delete with Ladder Edit.

Change/Edit
banned

Cautions when substituting FB Library

In case of substitution of FB Library, information regarding ID Number of FB, IN Pin Number, OUT Pin Number is
the criterion for similarity/difference. In the following case, FB Name is displayed as “UNDEF” as undefined FB.

Review and modify the Ladder Coil Block of Bookmark points suitably.
Deletion of Ladder Coil Block, Repositioning of FB Symbol, ID No. of new FB Library, IN Pin No., OUT Pin No.
Correction etc.

1.When ID No. of FB registered in the old FB Library is not registered in the substituted new FB Library.
2.ID No. of FB registered in the old FB Library is registered in the substituted new FB Library but when either IN Pin
No. or OUT Pin No. is different.
• Set old FB Library

• UNDEF Display

8-15
8.1.2.5.3. Positioning of FB(Function Block)
When positioning FB, carry out prior setting of 8.1.2.5.1, Directory setting of FB Library and 8.1.2.5.2. Setting of Link
Library. In case they are not set, FB to be positioned cannot be selected.
FB symbol are positioned in fixed position like 7column-10 column
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Condition for FB on the input side is up to 6th column or on the output side up to 2nd column and other symbols can
be positioned.
On the output side, loop back positioning is possible only once and other symbols equivalent to a maximum of 14
columns can be positioned.

Following procedure is followed for positioning FB symbols.

Procedure
(1) Click on the position where you want to create it to move the cursor there.

(2) Either click the symbol icons on the tool bar (See figure below)

1.

8-16
2. After left double click with mouse on the cursor position or after clicking [Enter]key, select the [Function Block].

(3)FB: Select internal FB icons.

8-17
(4) Press[Apply]button. Selected FB will be positioned there.

In case of circuit including FB, portion equivalent to several lines is treated as one circuit block. (It is same as multi
-output Coil Block)

8-18
8.1.2.5.4. Change of symbols
Change of positioned FB symbols follows below given order.

Procedure
(1) Either double click on the FB symbol to be changed or place the cursor and press [Enter].

(2) Following input properties will be displayed.

Select other FB: internal icon and press [Apply] button. Depending on requirement, scrolling in FB: is possible
with the scroll bar.

♦ For changing types of symbols

By clicking the tab on the property, change to different types of symbols can be made.

♦ For changing I/O No. of FB or definition etc.

Correct it using the Library function. In case of Project Program, since only FB Library data is being referred to, c
hange in this function cannot be made.

For details of Library Function, see 9. Library.

8-19
8.1.2.5.5. Constant/Variable Input
In case Input Pin Definition of FB (Library Function Tag Edit Reference)is BYTE or WORD, it is possible to enter
constant/variable.

(1).Constant Input

1. Base number (decimal, hexadecimal, octal number, BCD)is selected from the menu.

2. Numerical depending on the definition type of base number/data is entered in the Address/Data column and
depending on requirement, comment is entered in the comment column.

8-20
3. Constant Transfer Symbol is positioned in FB Input Pin by clicking [Apply].

Match the numerical with the base number and the defined BYTE or WORD type.

In case it differs, following message will be displayed.

2.Variable Input

1. After selecting Variable, enter the Address in the Address Column.

2. Variable Transfer Symbol is positioned in the FB Pin by clicking [Apply].

Match the Address with the defined BYTE or WORD type.

8-21
8.1.2.5.6. Variable Output
Entry of Variable is possible in case Output Pin Definition of FB(Library Function Tag Edit Reference)is BYTE or
WORD. Since Constant cannot be treated as transfer destination, it cannot be entered.
1. Enter Address in the Address column.

2.Position the Variable Transfer Symbol in the Output Pin by clicking [Apply].

Match the address the type of defined BYTE or WORD.

8.1.2.5.7. Editing of FB I/O Part

1.Input Part
Creation of OR circuit in the Input Part of Function Block is possible.
It is possible to treat existing Input(IN)as normally OFF without connecting anything. (Non Care input)

2.Output Part
Creation of multi coil circuit in the Output Part of Function Block is possible
Coils connected to output are only the output number created with FB and a coil cannot be connected to
non-existent Output(OUT).
Unused Output(OUT) need not be connected (Non Care output).

OR, multi coil may be created after the line insertion operation.

1 IN1 OUT1
2
OR Circuit 3 IN2 OUT2
Multi coil
4
5 IN3 OUT3
6
: OUT4
:
: IN20
:
60

8-22
8.1.2.5.8. Loop back of Output Part of FB
Connection based on loop back is possible and if there is loop back in the Output Part, all output will have loop back.
Loop back in the Input Part is not possible.

1 IN1 OUT1
2
3 IN2 OUT2
4
5 IN3 OUT3
6 Addition(Function)
: IN4 OUT4

1 IN1 OUT1 A
2
B
Loop back
3 IN2 OUT2
4
5 IN3 OUT3 C
6
: IN4 OUT4 D
Output side all will
loop back
A
B
C

D TMR

8-23
8.1.2.5.9. Loop back restriction during FB positioning
Loop back restriction per 1 coil block during FB positioning is indicated.
Loop back is possible only up to 1 step and it is possible only up to a maximum of 60 lines including F B line, OR line
and loop back line.

Loop back based on

insertion

1 IN1 OUT1 A
2 IN2 OUT2 B
: .. .. :
20Lines
.. .. :

OUT19 S
:
.. OUT20 T
23
: ..

39 IN19

40 IN20

1 IN1 OUT1 A
2 IN2 OUT2 B
: .. .. :
.. .. :
20
OUT19 S
:
OUT20 T
23 .. 40
: ..

39 IN19 Loop back beyond

40 IN20 this is not possible.
Possible up to
60 lines

A
B
:
20Lines
:
S
T

8-24
8.1.2.6. To open in the subset library
For the overview of the subset library, refer to 9.1 Library

8.1.2.6.1. FB library directory setting

Select [Option] [Settings] [FB Library] to delete the FB library directory setting.
The setting is saved when PCwin is terminated.

8.1.2.6.2. Limitations in function when the file is opened in the subset library
When the file is opened in the subset library, library operations are prohibited.
Prohibited operations are described.

(1) FB addition/change
Nothing is displayed in the library list so that you cannot add or delete FB in the function block tab.
Merely comment editing is allowed.

8-25
(2) FB pasting
An error message is displayed when you are pasting the FB block.

(3) FB deletion
An error message is displayed when you are deleting the FB block.

(4) Link library setting

An error message is displayed when you select [File] - [Link Library Settings].

(5) Import
An error message is displayed when you select [File] - [Import LD Program].

(6) Project window view

The FB data is not displayed in the library section of the project window.

8-26
8.1.3. Creation of OR Circuit
8.1.3.1. Line Insertion (Creation of 2nd line in the same block)
In order to create OR circuit, it is necessary to create the 2nd line in the same block.

Procedure
(1)Click the position to be created and place the cursor there.

(2)Click on the tool bar . New line will be created on line below
The shortcut keys for inserting lines are [Shift]＋[Ins].

OR Circuit Creation Line

8-27
8.1.3.2. Drawing of OR

In order to draw the vertical bar of OR, either click the icon on the tool bar or press “F1” key.

Procedure 1
(1)Place the cursor on the position where OR is to be drawn.

(2)On Click ,OR will be drawn.

Memo

♦ When wanting to delete drawn OR, place the cursor on it and click

8-28
8.1.4. Contact Point Insertion
When inserting a contact point in an existing circuit, first move the existing symbol to the right side and then
position the contact point.

Press [Insert] key to move positioned Electric symbol by 1 line to the right. Electric symbols in the cursor
position are also included. When the number than can be positioned in 1 line is exceeded, they are returned
automatically.

Press [Insert] key

Symbols are automatically returned

When [Insert] key is invalid.

[Insert] key becomes invalid in case of horizontal bar before the coil, like in the above circuit.
In such a case, enter [Insert] key placing cursor on the coil. It will be automatically returned.

8-29
8.1.5. Entry of Block Comment
Comment can be inserted in each block of the circuit diagram as explanatory note. This block comment can
be displayed on the screen by putting a check against [Display] – [Block Comment]. [If not selected, there
will be no display of the comment]

Procedure
(1) By putting a check against [Display] – [Block Comment], Block comment is put in display state.

(2) Place the cursor on the 1st line of the circuit where Block Comment is to be entered and either press
[Enter] key or double click with the mouse.
The following input properties will be displayed. Here click the tab of [Block Comment].

(3) Comment up to 4 lines (50 bytes per line) can be entered. After entry of the comment, either press
[Enter] or click [Apply] button.

8-30
8.1.6. Move/ Copy of Data
8.1.6.1. Un Do
Returns the created/ edited circuit to 1 step former state. It is possible up to a maximum of 7 times.

Procedure

Either select [Edit]-[Un Do] or click or after right clicking the mouse, select “ Un Do”.
Short cut keys are [Ctrl]+[Z].

8.1.6.2. Re Do
Re does the chart returned to 1 step former position with [Edit]-[Re Do]. It is possible up to a maximum
of 7 times.

Procedure

1) Either select [Edit]-[Re Do] or click or after the right click of the mouse, select “ Re Do”.
Short cut keys are [Ctrl]+[Y].

8.1.6.3. Cut
Selected data is cut on the clipboard. Cut data can be positioned anywhere with [Paste].

Procedure
(1)In the area on the circuit, move the mouse with left button pressed and select the symbols in the
range the mouse has moved.
As for selection unit, specification with line unit where the left side area on the circuit is left clicked
with the mouse and specification with column unit where optional area on the circuit is left clicked
with the mouse is possible. Selected area is reversed displayed

(2)Either select [Edit]-[Cut] or click or after right clicking the mouse, select “Cut”.
Short cut keys are [Ctrl]+[X].

8.1.6.4. Paste
Symbols copied or cut on the clipboard are recalled and pasted.
♦In case of range specification of line unit, line is inserted. Symbol where data is copied remains there.
♦In case of range specification of column unit, overwriting is done. Symbol where data is copied
disappears.

Procedure
(1)Place the cursor in the position data is to be pasted( gray box).

(2)Either select [Edit]-[Paste] or click or after right clicking the mouse, select “Paste”.
Short cut keys are [Ctrl]+[V].
Data gets pasted. In case symbols exist in the pasted position, clip data is inserted and subsequent
data shifts downwards.

8-31
8.1.6.5. Copy
Copies the selected data to clipboard. Copied data can be placed in a position of the user's choice by
using [Paste].

Procedure
(1)In the area on the circuit, move the mouse with left button pressed and select the symbols in the
range the mouse has moved.
As for selection unit, specification with line unit where the left side area on the circuit is left clicked
with the mouse and specification with column unit where optional area on the circuit is left clicked
with the mouse is possible. Selected area is reversed displayed.

(2)Either select [Edit]-[Copy] or click or after right clicking the mouse, select “Copy”.
Short cut keys are [Ctrl]+[C]. Selected symbols are copied on the clipboard.

8.1.6.6. Comment Tracking When Copying

When enabling comment track, tick “Overwrite comment when copying circuit” under
[Option]-[Setting]-[Operation 1].

Comment is copied at the same time of block copying the ladder circuit.
The target comments to be copied are below. Contact comment is not copied.
① Coil Comment
② Function Comment
③ Block Comment
④ Index Comment
Device name and label symbols are copied at the same time.
Up to three language data can be copied at the same time.

8-32
8.1.7. Comment Edit(Entry/ Edit of Comment)
Comments of Coil etc. can be entered and edited in the exclusive List Box.

Procedure
(1)Select [Edit]- [Comment Edit]- sequence Comment] with LD Window in active state.
(2)Targeted address is double clicked with the mouse.
(3)Since dialog box of [Comment Change] is displayed, comment is entered/ corrected.
Further, input of Device name and Function Code as name of the signal is possible.

Maximum No. of Input Letters

Comment:100 characters,Instrument Name:6 characters,Function Code:9 characters

(4)Click [ OK ].
♦ Program
When there are multiple Ladder Programs, if here number is selected, that particular comment
will be displayed.
♦ Device
Comment of the Device selected here is displayed.
♦ Display Range
Select the display range of the address. However, the type of range displayed in the List box
varies depending on the device.

8-33
8.1.8. Sequence comments optimization

Sequence comments which are not used in sequence programs, I/O chart, link parameters (FL-net,
PC link, DLINK) can be deleted.

Procedure
1) Select [Edit] – [Edit comment] – [Optimization of comment data]. (When LD window is not active or LD
is unconverted, displays by gray.)

2) Check addresses to be deleted from the optimization criteria.

3) If deleted comments are saved in the files, select [Archive log file] and specify the file.

4) Select [delete], then sequence comments optimization starts.

8-34
8.1.9. Display Selection
8.1.9.1. Display Number
As for the number displayed on the left of LD circuit, change from step to Block number and vice versa
is possible.

Procedure
(1)Select [Display] – [Display No.] and then select [Step No.] or [Block No.].

8.1.9.2. Comment Display

Three methods of display can be selected for LD comment.

Procedure
(1)One of the following 3 items is selected from [Display] – [[Ladder Display].
♦ No Comment
Without the display of comment, only Ladder Diagram is displayed.

♦ With Comment – Type 1

Comment is displayed only to the right of coil or Function Instruction.

8-35
♦ With Comment – Type 2
Comment is displayed only to the right or on the contact point of coil or Function Instruction. As a
result, there is lot of space between lines.

It is possible to select a location of displaying contact comment either from [Top aligned] or
[Bottom aligned].
Ladder print can also print from either [Top aligned] or [Bottom aligned] print with the same setting.

Top Bottom
aligned aligned

Selecatble

Set a comment display location from [Option]-[Customize]-[Font]-[Character arrangement].

8-36
8.1.9.3. Successive Entry of Comment
To enable the comment successive entry, tick [Enter address, followed by a comment] under
[Option]-[Setting]-[Operation 1].

When enabling the comment successive entry, address and comment can be entered successively.
***Operation Flow***
1) After positioning contact point with [F3] key, property screen will be displayed, so enter address.

2) Apply with the [Enter] key, then comment entry box will appear.

3) After entering comment, confirm with the [Enter] key.

4) With the [Enter] key, move the cursor to the contact point next to this one.

5) Repeat 1) to 4).

8-37
8.1.9.4. Direct Input of Comment
Change the normal input mode and comment direct input mode.

Normal input mode Direct input mode

If you change to comment direct input mode, comment can be input successively.
***Entry Flow ***

1) Select the comment input mode from the tool bar.

2) Move the cursor to M000 contact point and input the [Enter] key.
3) Input the comment and then confirm with the [Enter] key.
4) With the [Enter] key, move the cursor to the next contact point.
5) Repeat 1) to 4).

Enter Enter Enter

Enter Enter
Enter

Enter Enter

Application command can also input serial number comment and operand comment.

Enter
/ TAB

Enter
/ TAB

8-38
8.1.9.5. Comment 100 characters display

On clicking on the tool bar, comment in the cursor position in the comment box equivalent to a
maximum of 100 characters will be displayed. Comment box can be moved to an optional position.
Moreover, display/non-display state is held at the time of PCwin termination. A blank character is
displayed by "_".

Alternatively, display cursor position on window status bar, maximum 100 characters.

8.1.10. Change of Screen Enlargement

For changing the enlargement of circuit diagram, change the [size] of characters with [change] button in
[option] –[customize].
(In case of PCwin, overall size is enlarged or reduced according to character size)

Procedure
(1)Click [option] – [customize]
(2)As the Dialog box of [Customize] will be displayed, click [change] button of the Ladder in[Font] tab.
(3)As the Dialog box of [Font specification] will be displayed, select [size] appropriately and click [OK].
(4)As the Dialog box of [Customize] will be displayed again, click [OK] if the contents of change are
fine.

<Details Item>
Customizing of Font

8-39
8.1.11. Change All
8.1.11.1. Batch change of I/O Address
Coil and Addresses of each contact point can be changed altogether.
In case of PC3 mode, change to extended area or reference to other areas can be made.
Since the batch change address is fixed, one needs to be careful about it.
Below the combination table of basic and extended addresses is indicated.

•Combination of batch change in case of basic address.

The address before
P K V T/C L X/Y M Sb Nb Rb Db Bb
P O X X X X X X X X X X X
K X O X X O O O X X X X X
V X X O X X X X X X X X X
T/C X X X O X X X X X X X X
L X X X X O O O X X O O X
X/Y X X X X O O O X X O O X
M X X X X O O O X X O O X
Sb X X X X X X X O X X X X
Nb X X X X X X X X O X X X
The address after change

Rb X X X X O O O X X O O X
Db X X X X O O O X X O O X
Bb X X X X X X X X X X X O
EP O X X X X X X X X X X X
EK X O X X O O O X X X X X
EV X X O X X X X X X X X X
ET/C X X X X X X X X X X X X
EL X X X X O O O X X O O X
EX/Y X X X X O O O X X O O X
EM X X X X O O O X X O O X
GX/Y X X X X O O O X X X X X
GM X X X X O O O X X X X X
ESb X X X X X X X O X X X X
ENb X X X X X X X X O X X X
Hb X X X X X X X X X X X X
Ub X X X X O O O X X O O X
EBb X X X X X X X X X X X X

8-40
•Combination of batch change in case of extended address.
The address before
EV
EP EK EL EX/Y EM GX/Y GM ESb ENb Hb Ub EBb
ET/C
P O X X X X X X X X X X X X X
K X O X X O O O X X X X X X X
V X X O X X X X X X X X X X X
T/C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
L X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
X/Y X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
M X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
Sb X X X X X X X X X O X X X X
Nb X X X X X X X X X X O X X X
The address after change

Rb X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
Db X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
Bb X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
EP O X X X X X X X X X X X X X
EK X O X X X X X X X X X X X X
EV X X O X X X X X X X X X X X
ET/C X X X O X X X X X X X X X X
EL X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
EX/Y X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
EM X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
GX/Y X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
GM X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
ESb X X X X X X X X X O X X X X
ENb X X X X X X X X X X O X X X
Hb X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Ub X X X X O O O O O X X O O X
EBb X X X X X X X X X X X X X O

8-41
•Procedure for carrying out batch change for the Program as a whole during display.
(1)Click [Edit] – [Batch change] – [I/O Address].

(2)Click [Add] button.

(3)Device that needs to be changed is set.

When changing M000 – MFFF used in Program 1 to M500 – M5FF of Program 1.

8-42
 (4)Click [OK]. In the change table, set device will be displayed.

(5)Select [Character arrangement].

[All Programs] : Processes Program 1-3 simultaneously.
[Program*] : Processes only the program displayed in ladder.
[Selected Part] : Processes only the selected part.
(6)Select [Comment].
[Move] : Moves the before-changed address comment to after-changed address
comment.
[Copy] : Copies the before-changed address comment to after-changed address comment.
[Do not change] : Comment will not be moved nor copied. It remains as before-changed state.
(7)Click [Execute] to carry out the changes.

•Procedure for batch change of specified range.

(1)Data range that is to change as a batch is selected.
For selection, move the cursor to near the Step No. and while pressing the left button, move to the
last line of the object range. Highlighted portion will be the selected range.

(2)Click [Edit] – [Batch Change] – [I/O Address]

(3)There will a check in the [Specified Range] of [Change Range].
Thereafter, it is same as the aforesaid procedure (4) and so on.

8-43
8.1.11.2. Batch change of Application Instruction operand.
Operands of Application Instruction can be changed all together.
In case of PC3 mode, change to Extended Area or Reference to other area is possible.

The input of the function operand is shown below.

1) WORD type is specified before change address.
Alter all ones which were WORD,BYTE,BIT types before change.

2) BYTE type is specified before change address.

Alter all ones which were WORD,BYTE,BIT types before change.

3) BIT type is specified before change address.

Only alter the ones which were BIT type before change.

Note: It is unable to alter the types of the addresses of before change as well as the addresses of after
change.

The result of change and the input example of change using function operand could be displayed by
selecting [Help] button.

8-44
•Procedure for Batch change during displayed Program.
(1)Click [Edit] – [Change All] – [Application Instruction Operand].

(2)Click [Add] Button.

(3)Set the operand that is to be changed.

Instance) When replacing D0000 – D001F used as operands of Application Instruction in Program
1 with R10 – R11f of Program 1.

8-45
 (4)Click [OK]. Set Device will be displayed in the change list.

(5)Select [Character arrangement].

[All Programs] : Processes Program 1-3 simultaneously.
[Program*] : Processes only the program(s) displayed in ladder.
[Selected Part] : Processes only the selected part.
(6)Select [Comment].
[Move] : Moves the before-changed address comment to after-changed address
comment.
[Copy] : Copies the before-changed address comment to after-changed address comment.
[Do not change] : Comment will not be moved nor copied. It remains as before-changed state.
(7)Click [Execute] to carry out the changes.

•Procedure for Batch change of specified range.

(1)Select the data range that needs to be batch changed.
Move the cursor near the Step No. and while pressing the left button, move to the last line of the
object range. Highlighted portion will be the selected range.

(2)Click [Range] – [Batch change] – [Application Instruction Operand].

(3)There will be a check in the [Specified Range] of [Change Range].
Thereafter the procedure is same as aforesaid 4).

8-46
8.1.11.3. I/O Address Batch Change (Modification File Reading)
It can be carried out with PCwin Ver.3.1 and subsequent versions.
Addresses of coil and each contact point can be changed altogether by reading the Address
Modification File and by dividing them into multiple address areas.
In case of PC3 mode, change to Extension Area or Other Area Reference is possible.
It may be noted that combinations of modifiable addresses have certain limitations.
Below a list of combinations of Basic Addresses and Extended Addresses is given.

•Combinations of Batch Change in case of Basic Address.

The address before
P K V T/C L X/Y M Sb Nb Rb Db Bb
P O X X X X X X X X X X X
K X O X X O O O X X X X X
V X X O X X X X X X X X X
T/C X X X O X X X X X X X X
L X X X X O O O X X O O X
X/Y X X X X O O O X X O O X
M X X X X O O O X X O O X
Sb X X X X X X X O X X X X
Nb X X X X X X X X O X X X
The address after change

Rb X X X X O O O X X O O X
Db X X X X O O O X X O O X
Bb X X X X X X X X X X X O
EP O X X X X X X X X X X X
EK X O X X O O O X X X X X
EV X X O X X X X X X X X X
ET/C X X X X X X X X X X X X
EL X X X X O O O X X O O X
EX/Y X X X X O O O X X O O X
EM X X X X O O O X X O O X
GX/Y X X X X O O O X X X X X
GM X X X X O O O X X X X X
ESb X X X X X X X O X X X X
ENb X X X X X X X X O X X X
Hb X X X X X X X X X X X X
Ub X X X X O O O X X O O X
EBb X X X X X X X X X X X X

8-47
•Combinations of Batch Change in case of Extended Address
The address before
EV
EP EK EL EX/Y EM GX/Y GM ESb ENb Hb Ub EBb
ET/C
P O X X X X X X X X X X X X X
K X O X X O O O X X X X X X X
V X X O X X X X X X X X X X X
T/C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
L X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
X/Y X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
M X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
Sb X X X X X X X X X O X X X X
Nb X X X X X X X X X X O X X X
The address after change

Rb X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
Db X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
Bb X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
EP O X X X X X X X X X X X X X
EK X O X X X X X X X X X X X X
EV X X O X X X X X X X X X X X
ET/C X X X O X X X X X X X X X X
EL X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
EX/Y X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
EM X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
GX/Y X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
GM X X X X O O O O O X X X O X
ESb X X X X X X X X X O X X X X
ENb X X X X X X X X X X O X X X
Hb X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Ub X X X X O O O O O X X O O X
EBb X X X X X X X X X X X X X O

8-48
•Procedure for carrying out Batch Change in the whole Program being displayed.
(Note) When there are multiple programs in PC3 Mode, only the program being displayed can be
targeted.

(1) Click [Edit]-[Change All]-[I/O Address]

(2) Click [File] button.

Select Address Modification File in the File Dialog and click [Open] button.

Address Modification File

•Describe the address before and after modification.
•CSV File Format(Can be edited with EXCEL etc.)

8-49
Instance of Address Modification File (*.csv)

#CHANGEALL
#BEGIN_IOBIT File Header [Must]
Y100 Y700 I/O Address Batch Modification Start Mark [Must]
Y101 Y701
Y102 Y702
P1-L200 X300 Pre-modification Address, Post-modification Address
P1-L201 X301
P1-L202 X302
P1-D00FF-F P1-M000
EM000F P1-D00FF-0
I/O Address Batch Modification End Mark [Must]
#END
#BEGIN_FUNCOP
:
: (Function Instruction Operand Change All Indication)
:
#END

(3) Confirm the read modified address and if it is fine, click [Execute] button to modify it.

* If necessary, line-wise modification is possible.

Select the line to be modified and modify by clicking the [Change] button.
However, it will not be reflected in the Address Modification file read from the File Dialog.

8-50
Following message will be displayed on completion of modification.

On clicking [ OK ], following message will be displayed.

On clicking [OK], I/O Address Batch Change is completed.

When SFC is not used, I/O Address Batch Change is ended without displaying the message.

* For Batch Change of SFC data, see 8.1.11.5 Batch Change of SFC Data.

8-51
•Procedure when changing specified area as a batch
(1) Select the data range to be changed as a batch. For selection, move the cursor close to the
Step Number and move to the last line of the target area while pressing the left button.
Inversed portion will be the selected area.

(2) Click [Edit]-[Change All]-[I/O Address].

(3) [Specified Range] of [Modified Range] will have a check mark against it. Remaining
procedure is same as the aforesaid Procedure (1).

8-52
8.1.11.4. Batch change of Function Instruction Operands (Modification File reading)
It can be carried out with PCwin Ver.3.1 and subsequent versions.
Function Instruction Operands can be changed altogether.
In case of PC3 Mode, modification to Extended area or Other Area reference can be made.

• Procedure for carrying out batch change in the Program being displayed.
(Note) •When there are multiple programs in the PC3 mode, only the Program being displayed will be
the target.
•When there is SFC data, following related portions can also be targeted for Batch Change.
Step Completion Monitor Input, Bit Address Direct specification of Action,
Step Diagnosis Set Value, Step Diagnosis Alarm Output, Step Elapsed Time Output

(1)Click [Edit]-[Batch Change]-[Function Instruction Operand].

(2)Click the [File] button.

Select the Address Modification File in the File Dialog and click [Open] button.

Address Modification File

• Describe address before and after modification.
• CSV File format (can be edited with EXCEL etc.)

8-53
Instance of Address Modification File (*.csv) Format

#CHANGEALL File Header [Must]

#BEGIN_IOBIT
:
:
:
: (I/O Address Batch Modification)
:
:
:
:
#END Function Instruction Operands Batch modification Start Mark [Must]
#BEGIN_FUNCOP
P1-M11W EM20W *1
P1-D1000 P1-D0020
Y123W P1-D123 Function Instruction Operands Batch modification End Mark [Must]
#END
*1 Modification Target: Any of the following type Operands can be targeted.
Set the I/O Address Batch Modification Portion in duplicate. It is needed for reflection in the SFC
Data.
Specify by adding the Data type (W,H,L,-n) at the end.

Data Type Bit Device Address Register Address

1) (Double Word) W -
2) Word W -
3) Bytes [Lower 8 bits] L L
[Upper 8 bits] H H
4) Bit - -n

(3) Confirm the read address and if it is fine, modify it by clicking [Execute] button.

* If necessary, it can be modified line-wise, separately.

Select the line to be modified and click [Change] button to modify.
However, it will not be reflected in the Address Modification File read from the File Dialog.

8-54
On completion of modification, following message will be displayed.

By clicking [OK], following message is displayed and Address Batch Change of SFC data can be
selected.

If [No]is clicked, Address Batch Change of SFC Data is terminated.

If [Yes]is clicked, Address Batch Change of SFC Data is carried out.
Following message of confirmation will appear.

•
• Function Instruction Operands Batch Change Instruction portion
•

If [Yes] is clicked, this address modification is carried out.

If [No] is clicked, this address modification is skipped.
If [Cancel] is clicked, all the subsequent address modifications are cancelled.

8-55
 Following message will be displayed on completion of modification.

When Function Instruction Operands Batch Change data does not exist in SFC data, 0 number will be
displayed. Click [OK] to end it.

•Procedure for Batch change of specified range.

(1)Select the data range that needs to be batch changed.
Move the cursor near the Step No. and while pressing the left button, move to the last line of the
object range. Highlighted portion will be the selected range.

(2)Click [Range] – [Batch change] – [Application Instruction Operand].

There will be a check in the [Specified Range] of [Change Range].
Thereafter the procedure is same as aforesaid (1).

*It isn't possible to do the choice of the data range to SFC.

8-56
8.1.11.5. Batch Change of SFC Data
It can be carried out with PCwin Ver.3.1 and subsequent versions.
When address setting in there in the Action dialog of SFC, batch change of SFC data is necessary.
It is not needed, when there is no address setting or SFC is not used.

8.1.11.5.1.SFC Data
Following SFC data becomes the object of address modification.
1) Bit Address Direct Specification of Action
2) Step Completion Monitor Input
3) Step Diagnosis Set Value
4) Step Diagnosis Alarm Output
5) Step Elapsed Time Output
[Action Dialog of Step]

1)

2)

[Step diag]
3)

4)

5)

[Action Dialog of Sub-step]

3)
4)
5)
2)

All these can be modified based on Batch change of Function Instruction Operands.
See 8.1.11.4 Batch Change of Function Instruction Operands(Modification File reading).
Modification cannot be carried out with I/O Address Batch Change.

8-57
8.1.11.6. Format of Address Modification File
(1) Mention the keyword for Address modification :#CHANGEALL at the top of the file.
(2) Modification data of I/O address is mentioned in-between the start mark:#BEGIN_IOBIT and the
end mark :#END.
(3) Address modification data of Function Operands is mentioned in between the start
mark :#BEGIN_FUNCOP and the end mark :#END.
(4)Modification data of I/O Address and Address Modification Data for Function Operands are indicated
in the order of pre-modification address, post-modification address and comment.

pre-modification address,
#CHANGEALL post-modification address and comment
#BEGIN_IOBIT Y10, Y20, COMMENT1
Y11, Y21,
:
I/O Address Modification Data
:

#END

#BEGIN_FUNCOP P1-D0000, P1-D0200,

P1-D0001, P1-D0201, COMMENT2
:
Function Operand Modification
:
Data

#END

Address Modification File(.csv)

 Address Modification File Format is :CSV and file extension is .CSV.

 Address Modification file can be prepared by using the Application software that can handle CSV
file such as Text Editor or EXCEL.
 When saving the file, save it in the CSV File format.
 Comment Data cannot be incorporated in the Peripheral tools and PLC unit.

Note: When selecting a file (using the address change instruction file) for batch changes, specify the
addresses one by one. You cannot specify a range.

Example: To change Y000~Y008 to Y010~Y018, set it as follows.

Y000, Y010
Y001, Y011
Y002, Y012
Y003, Y013
Y004, Y014
Y005, Y015
Y006, Y016
Y007, Y017
Y008,Y018

The following range specifications are not possible.

Y000-Y008, Y010-Y01.

8-58
8.1.11.7. File Format Error Display
In case there is any error in the format at the time of reading the Address Modification File, following
message will be displayed. Re-execute after modifying the data in accordance with the format.

1) When address specification other than Bit Address exists in the modification data of I/O Address.
ex.L000W in the 3rd line of CSV file.

2) When Bit Address specification that cannot be used in the modification data of I/O Address exists.
ex.L000-0 in the 3rd line of CSV file.

3) There is no start mark :#BEGIN_IOBIT in the modification data of I/O Address.

ex.Detection of #END without the start mark in the 41st line of CSV file

4) There is no end mark: #END in the modification data of I/O Address.

ex.Detection of #BEGIN_FUNCOP without #END mark in the 36th line of CSV file.

8-59
5) There are unnecessary address specifications.
ex.R0000-0 in the 3rd line of CSV file.

6) There is no start mark :#BEGIN_FUNCOP in the Address Modification data of Function Operand.
ex.Detection of #END without the start mark in the 41st line of CSV file.

7) There is no end mark in the Address modification data of Function Operand.

ex.Detection of blank line without #END in the 41st line of CSV file.

8) There are unnecessary address specifications in the Address modification data of Function Operand.
ex.R0000 in the 6th line of CSV file.

9) Specification of pre-modification address is repeated.

ex. Y20 exists in the specification of pre-modification address up to the 7th line of CSV file.

8-60
8.1.11.8. Cautions
• When specifying bytes for the pre and post modification address, make it as L -> L, H -> H. It cannot
be L -> H,H -> L .
• Address once modified cannot be modified again.
• Pre-modification address cannot be repeated.

Pre-modification address,
post-modification address
* I/O Address(X/Y) is described with Y.
Y10, Y20 • • • 1)
* P1-M∆∆∆ M etc. are described indicating the Program number.
P1-M1, P1-M2 • • • 2)
: • • • 3)

Comment 1 Comment 2
X10 X11
|------||------------||-----------
Pre-modification address, post-modification address
Y10, Y20
Comment 1 Comment 2 Y11, Y21
X20 X21
|------||------------||-----------

When Address Conversion(A↔B) occurs in the Address Modification File, it is described as A→B ,B→
A.
Comment 1 Comment2
X10 X11
|------||------------||-----------
Pre-modification address, post-modification address
Y10, Y11
Y11, Y10
Comment 2 Comment 1
X10 ↔ X11 Address Conversion
X11 X10
|-------||------------||-----------

Modification is processed by a single scan.

Comment 1 Comment 2
X10 X11
|-------||------------||-----------
Pre-modification address, post-modification address
Y10, Y11
Y11, Y12
Comment 1 Comment 2
X11 X12
|------||------------||-----------

• Modification mark affixed to the block of modified elements(Contact, Coil).

If the menu [Convert]-[Convert all the Ladder Edited Blocks] is selected, modification is carried out.

8-61
8.1.11.9. Batch interchange of AB contact Points.
Batch interchange of A contact point and B contact point of specified address is possible.

Procedure
(1)Click [Edit] – [Batch Change] – [Interchange of AB Contact Points].

(2)After feeding the address, click [Execute] button.

Procedure at the time of Batch Change of Data in the specified range

(1)Select the data range that needs to be Batch changed.
Move the cursor close to Step No. and while pressing the left button, move to the last line of the
object range to select it. Highlighted portion becomes the selected range.

(2)Click [Edit] – [Batch Change] – [Interchange of AB Contact Point].

(3)There will be a check in the [Specified Range] of [Change Range].
After entering the address, click [Execute] button.

8-62
8.1.11.10. Batch change of index
Batch change of index is available.

Procedure
(1) Click [Edit]-[Batch Change]-[Index No]

(2) Please refer to 8.1.11.1 Batch change of I/O address.

8-63
8.1.12. Re-allocation
8.1.12.1. Re-allocation of Application Instruction Serial No.
Serial No. allotted to the Application Instruction is re-allocated in order from the start of the data.
Before Change

After Change

Serial No. (F001-) is related to Comment File (can be edited with Device F of Comment Edit) but since
this command simultaneously changes them also, their relation with the comment file is not disturbed.

Procedure
(1)Click [Edit] – [Re-allocation] – [Application Instruction Serial No.]
(2)Since the following message will be displayed, click [OK] if it may be executed.

(3)Since processing will be executed and the confirmation message will be displayed, click [OK].

8-64
8.1.12.2. Re-allocation of Edge Detection Address
Addresses (P -) of Rise Differential (PTS) and Fall Differential (NTS) will be allocated from the start of
the data.
Before change

After change

However, in case of coil or contact that has P in the address, it will not be reallocated and the address
will be skipped.
(In the instance below, P002 is skipped).

Procedure
(1)Click [Edit] – [Reallocate] – [Edge Detection (P) Address]
(2)Since the following message will be displayed, click (OK), if it may be executed.

(3)Since message for confirmation after the execution of processing will be displayed. Click [OK].

8-65
8.1.12.3. Re-allocation of Extended Edge Detection.
Extended Address (EP ~) of Rise Differential (PTS) and Fall Differential (NTS) will be reallocated in
order from the start of data for the whole program.

Procedure
(1)Click [Edit] – [Reallocate] [Extended Edge Detection (EP) Address].
(2)Since the following message will be displayed, click [OK] if it may be executed.

(3)Since confirmation message will be displayed after the execution of processing, click [OK].

8.1.12.4. Re-allocation of index number

Re-allocate serial number attached on index command according to the sequence. (Sequence number:
#****)

Procedure
(1)Click [Edit]-[Reallocate]-[Index Serial No]

(2)Following information display. Click [OK] button if it is available.

(3)Confirm information of processing display. Please click [OK] button.

8-66
8.1.13. LD Block Checking
2 Data files are compared and blocks that are different or blocks only on one side will be displayed.
Rename the program prior to change and by comparing the program with the one after change,
corrections can be easily grasped. Comparison is made between currently displayed program and the
program having similar number as the selected file.
8.1.13.1. CPU mode except PC1/MX
Procedure
(1)Display the LD Program to be compared.
(2)Click [Edit] – [Block checking]
(3)Following dialog for File selection will be displayed.
Select the LD Program file which is the object of comparison.

(4)Display the result of check in the Block checking screen.

Difference in address
Difference in contact
Check

Difference in block

Difference in contact

Check target
Difference in OR positions
Blocks are the same

The result bar of block comparison

Display the blocks which are different from the present state in
a different color . ([Option] - [Setting] may change)

8-67
• Bookmarks
Can set,delete bookmarks and jump to the bookmarks

• Program switch（P1/P2/P3）
Can switch the displayed program.

• Compare program(A) /Compare program (B) language switch

Can switch the display language,when there are three languages comment.

• FB property
Put the cursor on FB, can display the FB property of Compare program(A) and Compare program (B).

If the FB property is different, it will display in different color. If FB address is different from the
comparison targets, please check off [option] - [setting] in the [FB address is different from the
comparison targets] .

• The next different point

Reverse display the different points below the current location.

• The previous different point

Reverse display different points above the current position.

• Ladder Edit
Open the circuit with PCwin, can select comparison former and comparison targets.

• Switching from top to bottom division and left to right division

Can switch the division of the comparison windows.

8-68
 ● Saving of device-based check result
Procedure
(1) Display the Block checking screen of the LD Program.
(2) Click [File] – [Save file of Block Compare Result by device].
(3) A file selection dialog is displayed as shown below.
Enter the name of the file to which the device-based check result is saved.

(4) The device-based check result file is saved.

Opening the device-based check result file in Excel will display the following.

Project file name of check source

Project file name of check target

Device-based check result

By checking ○ under Changed, a device with a circuit change can be easily confirmed.
Content of change shows a block No. with a difference.
The details of the difference can be checked in the Block checking screen.

Note:
(1) Checking LD programs is based on the assumption that all the blocks have a device name.
(2) A block without a device name is judged to be a block belonging to the device of the preceding
block.
(3) Blocks are checked with reference to addresses. A different address is judged to be a
difference even if the device name or label is the same.

8-69
The restrictions of the block comparison
1) The circuit of comparison former and comparison targets only can be compared under the same
CPU mode.
2) CPU operating mode: PC1/MX N/A.
3) The block comparison of FB library N/A.
4) Corresponding FB library (master library) to the circuit of comparison former and comparison target
is pre-existing in the computer. *1
5) When corresponding FB library (master library) to the circuit of comparison former and comparison
does not exist (Error),N/A. *1
6) Comment can not be comparison target.
7) Function serial number can not be comparison target.
8) Once operand of function is not the same , it will display different.
9) Can not edit and run monitor in block comparison windows.

Cross-check rules
1) Block cross-check is performed using the cross-check origin as the reference.
2) Blocks that have the same coil in the cross-check origin and cross-check destination are [Same] or
[Different] blocks.
3) Even [Matching] or [Different] blocks will be deemed [New] blocks if a contradiction arises on the
cross-check list regarding the cross-check destination block number sequence.
4) However, if the first block of the cross-check origin has the same coil in the cross-check destination
it will be deemed a [Same] or [Different] block.
Caution：
If cross-check is performed with the cross-check origin and cross-check destination back-to-front, the
number of [Different] blocks may differ.

FB library (the main library) notes *1

It's necessary to open the main library when using FB library.
• When the FB library of Compare program (A) and Compare program (B) is the same.
Please check on the [The same master library as Compare program (A) is used].
Open the file of Compare program (A), the same master library with the Compare program (A) can be
automatically read.

• The FB library of Compare program (A) and Compare program (B) is different.
Please check off [The same master library as Compare program (A) is used].
Open the file of Compare program (A), select to read the different master library.

*1. If the file is opened in the subset library with PCwin Ver. 12.1 or later, the master library is
unnecessary. Block verification can be made with the subset library.

8-70
8.1.13.2. PC1/MX CPU mode
Procedure
(1)Display the LD Program to be compared.
(2)Click [Edit] – [Block checking]
(3)Following dialog for File selection will be displayed.
Select the LD Program file which is the object of comparison.

(4)Following dialog will be displayed. Click [Check] button.

8-71
(5)Following comparison, [S] will be displayed if they are same, [D] if different and [N] if blocks exist
only on one side. Displayed numeral implies the serial number of the block.
Further, based on the use of FB(Function Block), F,L,F/L are displayed in the Supplementary Info
Column on case of [D].
• F :Denotes that there is difference in input side conditions of FB and output side coil.
• L :Denotes that there is difference other than input side conditions of FB and output side coil.
Resetting of Link Library is required.
(Differences in this case cannot be seen on the Ladder View display.
There is a difference in the following.)
IN/OUT number of FB
FB save data word size.
FB save area [ES] address.
Version of FB [Integer part / Decimal part]
• F/L :Denotes that above mentioned 2 differences are there.
Displayed numerical denotes the block sequence number.

[Comparison] button
Comparison of 2 Data Files is executed.

[Block Display] button

If execution is carried out after clicking the Block No. in the displayed list, corresponding circuit
diagram will be displayed.

[Next Difference] button

Reverse display of the different point below the present position is carried out.

[Previous Difference] button

Reverse display of the different point above the present position is carried out.

[Save Result] button

Save comparison result in list to file.

8-72
8.1.14. Search
Contents of Circuit Data of currently displayed Program can be searched by specifying the character
sequence.
Procedure
(1)Click [Display] – [Search] and next menu will be displayed.

(2)Depending on the item to be searched, click the tab of one of the following [Coil/Contact], [Function],
[Comment].

(3)Check the check box of the type that is the object of search from the [Search Object].

(4)After feeding characters in [Address] (or [Character Sequence]), execute search with
[Search downwards] or [Search upwards].

♦ [Setting of mark in all]

Set bookmark in all the data that corresponds to search conditions.

♦[After search, do not display on window (but reflected on toolbar)]

After searching on search window, do not display the window. Future search can be done on toolbar.

Input address Prior Next

8-73
8.1.14.1. Label search
In the address programming, label search can be searched by using LD search dialog.
It searches character string in the address column of LD search dialog. Then display jump to the
corresponding position. This character string is included in the object of the search as a label. This
character string is included in the object of the search as a label.
The comment character string which contains the specified character string is searched.
Example) Specified character string: AA
Comment string Agreement
AA O
AABB O
BAA O
BAAC O
BADAC X

An active LD view is the object of the search.

The LD symbol deals for the search is the one that the check selection is done in the undermentioned
frame.

'Search '****' is not found' is displayed when there is no correspondence in the result of the search.
**** : The character string for search.

•Label

8-74
8.1.15. Jump using the Book Mark
By setting bookmark in each point of the circuit diagram, display can be made by instantaneous jump.

How to set the Bookmark?

(1)Place the cursor on the object line.

(2)Click the Icon button. Marks like shown below will be affixed.

How to display the set Bookmark position?

When jumping downwards than the present cursor position, click the button and

when jumping upwards, click button.

How to reset a particular Bookmark?

(1)Place the cursor on the line to be reset.

(2)Click button of the Icon.

How to release all the Bookmarks?

Click button.

8-75
8.1.16. Usage status
Usage Status List for addresses are displayed by choosing [View]-[Used Status] in menu bar.
Both addresses used in coil·contact and in function operand are displayed with mark IN USE.
Non-used addresses are displayed with mark "·".
Input area and output area are displayed with background colors of light blue and orange respectively.
Mark Explanation
. Non-use Address
lower case A Contact, B Contact, Edge and Function input operand
upper case Coil and Function output operand
A SFC Coil
Background color Light blue Function input area
Background color Orange Function output area

(Example) M

m : Using in contact
M : Using in coil
Light Blue : Function input area
Orange : Function output area

Color priority level : Orange > Light blue

Character priority level : A > M > m

[Configure] button
Display for Usage Status can be changed

• Contact and function operand(input)

• Coil and function operand(output)
• SFC Coil
Cannot changed
• Function input area
Address range for function input area is Mark-displayed along with setting check ON.
• Function output area
Address range for function output area is Mark-displayed along with setting check ON.
• Block area
All the block transfer areas are Mark-displayed along with setting check ON.

Configure is changed along with touching button [OK]. To apply the change, please re-open the
Usage Status.

8-76
It explains the method of the display with the following circuits.
2
Only the coil

1 Only the contact 3

Contact and coil

Coil and function input operand 4

DWORD instruction 6 Contact and function output operand

Block transfer instruction 7

Display of 1, 2, 3
Only the contact : lower case[m]
Only the coil : upper case[M]
Contact and coil : upper case[M]

Display of 4 Coil and function input operand :

Light blue, coil use area is a capital
letter.[D], coil unused area is a small
letter.[d]
Display of 5

Contact and function output operand :

Orange color, Capital letter without the
contact existence relation.[D]

DWORD instruction :
Display of 6 All the DWORD areas are displayed.

Display of 7

Block transfer instruction :

All the block transfer areas are
displayed.

*The application order of designating indirect address and the index order are not displayed in
the input and output order area.

8-77
8.1.17. Contact Point Table
Jump using Contact Point Table can be made.
Place the cursor on the Contact Point or coil to be searched, and by selecting [Display] –[Contact Point
Table], the contact point table is displayed.

Here, if the position where the jump is to be made is double clicked, jump can be made.
Further, with the contact point table being displayed, if [search] is clicked, contact Point Table of that
address will be displayed.
It can be used during editing and monitoring. However, during monitoring, cursor is not displayed.

8-78
8.1.18. Action Search
When programmed with SFC, it is possible to search the step of SFC where the action is specified from
LD side and Jump to that SFC can be made.
• AC situation

Cursor is placed on the label for action and is right clicked. As the Menu is displayed, click [Search
Action ].

• Flag situation

Right-click the EK address. When the menu is displayed, click [Action / steps search].

When there is one step where action is specified, directly jump to the SFC where that step is, is made.
If the steps are multiple, a list will be displayed. Therefore, jump by selecting the place where jump is
to be made.
List is same as that in case of 7.23.3 ‘Search Result’ of SFC Edit.

8-79
8.1.19. Tracing Search
Jump to the coil is made with the right click of Contact. Further, with the right click of the coil, return to
the original contact position is made. Tracing search up to a maximum of 16 steps is possible.
During tracing search, jump into self program or to other program is possible.
However, if selection of Circuit Edit-Program is made, this function is reset.

8-80
8.1.20. Comment display when importing or copying

The comment status will change when importing ladders, modules, etc., or when copying and pasting.
The comment status will be as follows.
Overwrite check when copying No overwrite check when copying a
circuits *1 circuit *1
Contact Coil Comment Contact Coil Comment
Comment Overwrite Comment Overwrite
Overwrite Overwrite
Importing LD Programs - - - -
Importing Modules    
Import LD Comments    
Ladder copy Same PCwin -  - -
Different PCwin -  - -
Module Same PCwin -  - -
Copy Different PCwin -  - -
I/O diagram import    

*1 “Overwrite comments when copying circuits” can be set to either checked or unchecked using the
following settings.

Select［Option］－［Configuration］‐［Operation 1］

For information on importing each type of file, please refer to “5.6. Importing Related Files”

8-81
8.2. PC1 series /MX
8.2.1. Insertion of new block
When a new circuit block is created, it is necessary to make a place for creating that circuit
after executing the new block insert operation. All circuit creation is done by this Insert
operation.
“END” circuit block at the time of new project creation will be created automatically.
Program should be inserted prior to ”END” circuit block.

Procedure
(1) Keep the cursor after clicking the location for creation.

(2) Click of tool bar. New block will get created and the circuit there onward will
get shifted.
The shortcut keys for inserting new blocks are [Ctrl]＋[Ins].

New block creation line

Correction mark “•“ will appear on the modified (corrected) circuit block.

8-82
8.2.2. Configuration (Layout) of symbols
Configuration (layout) of electrical symbols can be executed in the following procedure.

Procedure
(1) Keep the cursor after clicking the location for creation.
(2) Click either the icon of symbols on the tool bar or press the Function key on the
keyboard. (Refer the diagram below)

(3) Configuration (layout) of the symbols will take place.

(4) Following input property will get displayed when [Enter] key is pressed or double click
by the mouse is executed. Either press [Enter] after inputting [address] and [comment]
or click [adapt] button.

Memo
♦ Input of [address] should be done in the range of 0000 – 3777.
♦ [comment] can be inputted either from the contact side or from the coil side. The inputted
comment will reflect on all.

8-83
8.2.3. Change of symbol
The configured (laid out) electrical symbols can be changed in the following procedure.

Procedure
(1) Either double click the symbol going to be changed or press [Enter] after
setting the cursor (yellow box).
(2)The following input property will get displayed.

♦ Changing address and comment

After the correction of address and comment, either press the [Enter] key or click [adapt]

♦ Changing the type of symbol

Either press the [Enter] key after clicking the symbol, which should be changed, from
[select symbol] or click [adapt].
Further, symbol can be changed into a different type by clicking the tab on the property.

8-84
8.2.4. Creation of OR circuit
8.2.4.1. Line insertion (Second line in the same block is created)
It is necessary to create a second line in the same block for creating a OR circuit.
Procedure
(1) Keep the cursor after clicking the location for the creation.

(2) Click of the tool bar. New line will get created one line below.
The shortcut keys for inserting lines are [Shift]＋[Ins].

OR circuit creation line

8.2.4.2. Plotting of OR

Vertical bar of OR is plotted either by clicking the icon of the tool bar or by pressing
the “F1” key.

Procedure
(1) Set the cursor at the location intended for plotting OR.

(2) OR will get plotted when is clicked.

Memo

♦ Click the cursor after setting it on for erasing the plotted OR.

8-85
8.2.5. Contact insertion
When a contact is inserted for the existing circuit, contact should be positioned after
moving the existing symbols to right side.

Press the [Insert] key for moving the already placed electrical symbol to the right side by
one row. Symbols at the cursor position will also be moved together. Loop back will take
place automatically when its total number crossed the quantity meant for placing on one
line.

Procedure
Press [Insert] key

Loop back will take place automatically.

When [Insert] key is invalid

[Insert] key will be invalid on horizontal bar before coil as in the case of the above circuit.
In such cases, input the [Insert] key after setting the cursor on the coil. Loop back will take
place automatically.

8.2.6. Input of block comment

# It does not correspond to PC1 series /MX.

8-86
8.2.7. Data transfer (moving) and copy
8.2.7.1. Undo(return to original) :Un Do
Created/edited circuit will return to the previous step (one step backward). Maximum seven
times possible.

Procedure

Either select [edit]-[undo], or left clicking of or select “UnDo” after right clicking of the
mouse. [Ctrl]+[Z] is the shortcut key.

8.2.7.2. Re-do : Re Do
The chart which has returned to one step backward by [edit]-[UnDo]] will go to the original
status after the edit. Maximum seven times possible.

Procedure

Either select [edit]-[ReDo] or click or select “ReDo” after the right click of the mouse.
[Ctrl]+[Y] is the shortcut key.

8.2.7.3. Cut : Cut

Selected data will be cut into clip board. The data, which is cut out, is placed at the optional
position by [paste].

Procedure

1) Move the mouse, in the left clicked condition, through the area on the circuit and select
the symbols coming within the range of mouse movement.
Selection unit can be set in two ways. One is the line unit setting, where selection is done
by left clicking of the left side area of the circuit by the mouse and the other is the column
unit setting, where the selection is done by left clicking of optional area on the circuit by the
mouse.

2) Either select [edit]-[Cut] or click or select “cut” after the right clicking of the mouse.
[Ctrl]+[X] is the shortcut key.

8.2.7.4. Paste : Paste

Symbol cut into clip board or copied will be called and pasted.
♦ Line is inserted when the range is set in line unit. The symbol at the pasted side will not
disappear.
♦ Overwrite is done when range is set in column unit. The symbol at the pasted side will
disappear.

Procedure

1) Set the cursor (gray box) at the location to be used for pasting.

2) Select either [edit]-[paste], or click or select “paste” after the right click of the
mouse. [Ctrl]+[X] is the shortcut key.
Data will be called and pasted. Clip data will be inserted if a symbol is present in the
pasting location and the data thereafter will migrate (transfer) to the bottom side.
8-87
8.2.7.5. Copy : Copy
The selected data is copied into the clip board. The data, which has been cut, can be
placed to an optional location by [paste].

Procedure

1) Move the mouse, in the left clicked condition, through the area on the circuit and select
the symbol coming within the range of mouse movement.
Selection unit can be set in two ways. One is line unit setting, where the selection is
done by the left clicking of left side area on the circuit by the mouse, and the other is the
column unit setting, where the selection is done by left clicking of an optional area on
the circuit by the mouse. Reverse display of the selected range will be done.

2) Either select [edit]-[copy], or click or select “copy” after the right clicking of the
mouse. [Ctrl]+[C] is the shortcut key. The selected symbols will be copied on the
clipboard.

8-88
8.2.8. Comment editing (Input and editing of comment)
Input and editing of comment of P1:PC1 program coil etc can be possible in special list
box.

Procedure
1) Select [edit]-[comment edit]-[sequence comment] in the active state of LD window.
2) Select the target address from [display range] by using the mouse.
3) Since the dialog box, [Change comment], will get display, comment should be inputted and
corrected.

Maximum number of input possible characters

Comment : 28 characters

8-89
8.2.9. Display selection
8.2.9.1. Display number
The display of number displayed at the left side of LD circuit will be switched from step No.
to block No. and block No. to step No.

Procedure
(1)Select either [step No.] or [block No.] by selecting [display]-[display No.]

8.2.9.2. Comment display

Three types display methods can be selected against LD comment.

Procedure
(1)Any of the following three is selected by [display]-[ladder display]

♦Comment nil (No comment)

Without displaying comment, only the ladder diagram will be displayed.

♦Comment attached -Type1

Comment will be displayed only at the right side of coil, function command etc.

8-90
 ♦Comment attached –type2
Comment will be displayed at the right side and on the contact of coil, function command
etc.

8.2.10. Change of screen enlargement ratio (screen expandability)

For changing the enlargement ratio (expandability) of circuit diagram, character size should
be changed by [change] in [option]-[customize]

Procedure
1) Click [option]-[customize]
2) Since the dialog box of [customize] will be displayed, click the [change] button of ladder
in [font] tab.
3) Since the dialog box of [font setting] will be displayed, click [OK] after selecting [size] as
an option.
4) Since the dialog box of [customize] will be displayed again, click [OK] if the content of
change is alright

<Details>
Customization of font.

8-91
8.2.11. Batch change
8.2.11.1. I/O address batch change (modification)
Batch change of coil and contact addresses is possible.

• Procedure for batch change (modification) of the whole program under display.

(1)Click [edit]-[batch change]-[I/O address]

(2)Click the [add] button.

(3)Set the device, which has to be changed.

Example) When 0000 ~ 0077 used in program 1 is changed into 0100 ~ 0177 of program 1.

8-92
 (4)Click [OK]. The device set as per the example will be displayed in the change list.

(5)Change will take place when [execute] button is clicked.

• Procedure for batch change in the specified range.

(1)Select the data range for batch change. After moving the cursor to the vicinity of Step
No., press the left button and move the cursor in that condition to the final line of the
target range. The portion, which reversed will become the range.

(2)Click [edit]-[batch modification]-[I/O address]

(3)Check will enter in to the [specified range] of the [changed range]. The remaining
procedure is same as the procedure given from (4) onwards above.

8-93
8.2.11.2. Batch change of application command operand
Application command operand can be changed in batch.
Change to extended area and other area reference is possible in PC3 mode.

• Procedure to execute batch change of displayed program.

(1)Click [edit]-[batch change]-[application command operand]

(2)Click the [add] button

(3)Set the operand to be changed

Example) When 4000 ~ 4177 used in program 1 as application command operand is
replaced with 4300 ~ 4477 of program 1.

8-94
 (4)Click [OK]. The device, which has been set in the example, will be displayed in the
change list.

(5)Change will take place when [execute] button is clicked.

• Procedure for batch change in a specified range.

(1)Select the data range for batch change. Move the cursor to the vicinity of the Step No.
and press the left button and then move the cursor in that condition to the last line of the
target range. The reversed portion will become the selected range.

(2)Click [edit]-[batch change]-[application command operand]

(3)Check will enter in to the [specified range] of the [changed range]. Rest is same as the
procedure from (4) onwards given above.

8.2.11.3. I/O Address Change All (Change Instruction File Reading)

It is incompatible with PC1 Series Program.
CPU Operation mode is P1 (Program 1) of PC1 mode and MX[Split 1 • Single 1] mode.

8.2.11.4. Change All of Function Instruction Operand(Change Instruction File Reading)

It is incompatible with PC1 Series Program.
CPU Operation mode is P1 (Program 1) of PC1 mode and MX [Split 1 • Single 1] mode
8-95
8.2.11.5. Batch change of AB contacts switching.
Batch switching of A contact and B contact of the specified address is possible.

Procedure
(1)Click [edit]-[batch change]-[AB contacts switching]

(2)Click the [execute] button after address input.

Procedure for batch change in the specified range.

(1)Select the data range for the batch change. Move the cursor to the vicinity of the Step No. and press its
left button and move the cursor in that condition to the last line of the target range. The reversed portion
will become the selected range.

(2)Click [edit]-[batch change]-[AB contact switching]

(3)Check will enter into the [specified range] of the [changed range]. Click [execute] button after address
input.

8-96
8.2.12. LD block comparison (matching)
Different block or block present only in one file will be displayed after comparing two data
files. Corrections executed can be easily grasped by renaming and comparing the program
before the change with the program after the change.
Comparison is done between the program displayed presently and the program of the
same No. of the selected file.
Procedure
(1)Display the LD program to be compared.
(2)Click [edit]-[block comparison].
(3)File selection dialog as shown below will be displayed. Select the LD program file, which
should be compared.

(4)Dialog as shown next will be displayed. Click the [comparison] button.

8-97
(5)After the comparison, if the blocks are same then [S], if they are different then [D] and if
block is present only in one side then [N] will be displayed. The numeric value displayed
is showing the serial number of the block.

[ Comparison ] button
It executes the comparison of two data files.

[ Block display] button

The relevant circuit diagram will get displayed when the block No. in the list display is
clicked and executed by the mouse.

[ Next difference] button

Reverse display of the difference below the current position will be executed.

[ previous difference] button

Reverse display of the difference above the current position will be executed.

[Save Result] button

Save comparison result in list to file.

8-98
8.2.13. Search (Retrieval)
It is possible to search (retrieve) the currently displayed program circuit data after
specifying character string.

Procedure
(1)The following menu will appear when [display]-[search] is clicked.

(2) Corresponding to the item to be searched (retrieved), click any Tab out of [coil/contact][function] and
[comment].
(3)Select (tick) the type (class) check box for the search from [Search object].

(4) After inputting the characters into [address] (or into the character string ]),
execute the search by using [search down] or [search up].
Total search (retrieval) from ladder header is done with [Enter] key.
♦ [Set mark on all]
Bookmark is set on all data corresponding to the search (retrieval) condition.

♦ [After search, do not display on window (but reflected on toolbar)]

After searching on search window, do not display the window. Future search can be
done on toolbar.

Input address Prior Next

8-99
8.2.14. Jump using bookmark
Quick Jump and display in a moment is made possible by bookmark setting on every point
on the circuit diagram.

Procedure for setting bookmark

Place the cursor on the target line.

Click the icon button. Mark as shown in the diagram below will be added.

Procedure for displaying the specified bookmark position.

Click button for jumping to down side of the present cursor position and click the
button for jumping to the up side.

Procedure for canceling bookmark partially

(1)Place the cursor on the line, which should be cancelled.

(2)Click the icon button.

Procedure for canceling all bookmarks

Click button.

8-100
8.2.15. Use status
When [display]- [use status] is selected from the menu bar, the list showing the used / not
used status of the bit device address will be displayed.
About the address by which the coil is created, or the address currently used by the operand of an
application command, a device kind is displayed as a used mark. “-“ is displayed when unused.
However, use addresses other than the address shown by the operand of an application command become
an unused display.
Example:FUN-00 [2-byte direct transmission]
The 1 byte shown by the operand becomes "used."
The 2 byte which is not shown by the operand becomes "unused."

8.2.16. Contact table

Jump using contact table is possible.
The contact table will get displayed when [display] - [contact] is selected by placing the
cursor on the contact or coil, which has be searched (retrieved).

Jump (own program and other's program) is executed by double clicking of the position
aimed for jump.
Further, when [search] is clicked after changing the address in the contact display status,
the contact table of the concerned address will be displayed.
It can be used during editing and monitoring. However, there will be no cursor display
during monitoring.

8-101
8.2.17. Tracing search
Jump to coil is done by the right click of the contact. Again, it will return to the original
position by the right clicking of the coil. Tracing search for maximum 16 steps is possible.
Tracing search jumps within one's own program and to other's program is possible.
However, this function will get reset when circuit edit - program switching is executed.

8-102
8.2.18. Editing of instruction language
It is possible that the sequence circuit is edited with the instruction language.
(1) Display the sequence circuit.
(2) Click [Edit Language for PC1] in the menu, and display the editing dialog.

8-103
(3) Changing of instruction
Select the changing step.
Click [Change] button.
Select the new instruction, set the data, and click [OK] button.

(4) Inserting of instruction

Select the inserting step.
Click [Insert] button.
Select the inserted instruction, set the data, and click [OK] button.

(5) Deleting of instruction

Select the deleting step.
Click [Delete] button to delete the select step.

(6) Cancel of editing

Click [Undo] button to cancel the previous editing(Change, Insert, Delete).

(7) Reediting of canceled editing

Click [Redo] button to reedit the canceled editing by [Undo] button.

8-104
(8) Search
Click [Search] button to display the search dialog.

Set the condition to search

Click the button of searching type([JMP], [UP Search], [Down Search])
[JMP] : The data is searched below. If it is searched to the end step, It is searched from the first step.
[UP Search] : The data is searched above. If it is searched to the first step, Searching is stopped.
[Down Search] : The data is searched below. If it is searched to the end step, Searching is stopped.

(9) Finishing of editing

Click [OK->Ld] button

8-105
9. Preparation of Program in Modules
This chapter describes how to prepare the program in modules and how to operate the module.
Cautionary item
For module operation, the PCwin version must be Ver17.0 R06 or later.
In addition, the following program operation modes are supported.
● Supported operation mode
PC10 mode, PC10 extension mode, Plus standard mode, Plus extension mode

9.1. How to Create the Module

(1) Open the desired project (*.PRJ). (2) Open the desired ladder program in the
project view or tool bar.

Program 1

Program 2

Program 3

(3) Select the range of blocks in the ladder

program to be prepared as a module.

(4) Right click on the selected part and select

“Module create” in the popup menu.

9-1
(5) Enter the “Module name” and “Comment.”

Enter the “Module name” with up to six

alphanumeric characters.
Prohibited characters: /:*?¥¥"<>| SFC** Map**

Enter the “Comment” with up to 100

single-byte characters.

(6) Select the “OK” button.

A module start application instruction is added.

The background
color of the module
range changes to
pale blue.

A module end application instruction is added.

(7) Conduct ladder conversion.

The module is added to the project view.

9-2
Repeat steps (3) through (7) for other ladder programs to be converted into modules.

(8) The project is saved in regular cases

when the PCwin project is saved.

xxx.PRJ

The project is saved.

9-3
9.2. Ladder View
The program converted into modules features easy-to-understand project configuration and
improved ease of circuit viewing and editing.

In regular cases Project tree

The top of the sequence is displayed.

Scroll or conduct a search to access

the desired circuit.

With modules

Separation is made into modules

Project tree
and each module is displayed.
Ladder circuit

The first circuit of the module selected in the tree is displayed.

9-4
9.3. Operating the Module
9.3.1. Adding a Module
Create a module on the project tree.

9.3.2. Deleting a Module

“Module Delete” deletes the ladder and information belonging to the module.

Module to be deleted
After deletion

[Module deletion]
• The designated module is deleted from the
tree
• The ladder of the module is deleted

Ladder circuit The ladder circuit including the module start and
end of [SR2] Special relay is deleted.

[SR2]Special relay

[18] heat displacement correction

[18] heat displacement correction

Note: Once deletion is executed, recovery is impossible.

9-5
9.3.3. Canceling a Module
“Module Release” deletes the start and end ladder of the module.

[Cancellation of module]
• The designated module is deleted from the tree
• The start/end ladder of the module is deleted

Ladder circuit Start of module

[SR2Special relay

[18] heat displacement correction

The module start/end block ladder circuits are

deleted while the ladder circuit in the [SR2]
special relay module remains.

9-6
9.3.4. Changing the Module Name or Comment

Module to be modified New module name

The old module name and comment are

displayed.

If there is another module of the same name when OK is

pressed, a change prohibition message is displayed.

OK: Changes are applied and the dialog box is closed.

Cancel: Changes are abandoned and the dialog box is closed.

OK: This dialog box is closed and “Module Add” is displayed again.

The unit division and coil comment of the application instruction at the
module start are used as the module name and comment.

9-7
9.3.5. Cutting the Module

Module to be cut
After cutting

[Module cutting]
• The information about the designated
module is cut
• The module ladder is cut

Ladder circuit

[SR2]Special relay

[18] heat displacement correction

Circuit to be cut [18] heat displacement correction

9.3.6. Copying the Module

[Module copying]
• The information about the designated
module is copied
• The module ladder is copied

9-8
9.3.7. Pasting the Module
The menu item is valid if copied module information is in the temporary area.

· If the same module name is not found

To paste [18] heat displacement compensation having been copied Another project

Addition is made next to the selected module.

Pasting is made in the developed state.

· If the same module name already exists

If the same module name as the one of the source of pasting exists in the destination of pasting, a module pasting dialog
box is displayed.

If there is the same module name exists when OK is

pressed, a confirmation message to overwrite is
displayed.

OK: Changes are applied and the dialog box is closed.

Cancel: Changes are abandoned and the dialog box is closed.

OK: The existing module is deleted and pasting is made.

Cancel: This dialog box is closed and “Module Paste” is displayed again.

9-9
9.3.8. Moving the Module

Before move After move

After move

Drag and drop to move a module.

The moving range of the module is limited to the part above the ladder
sequence. If there are actions, the range is above the actions.

Those other than the module may not

be moved.

9-10
9.3.9. Exporting the Module
Export the module.
The ladder circuit of only the selected module is saved as a project file (*****.prj).

Select the module to be exported, and right-click [Module exported(X)].

Specify the export destination folder, then input a file name, and then click [Save].

The exported file can be imported by [File] [Import Data].

For details, refer to “9.4.1. Importing the Module”.

9-11
Sorting the module number

Sort the modules by module number.

To be sorted in ascending order of module

number registered to the modules

While the cursor is on the module to be sorted, right-click [Sort the modules by number(J)].

9-12
9.3.10. Writing the module
Write the module.
Select the module to be written, and right-click [Module write-in(W)].

Note) When there is a difference between the CPU operation mode and PCwin data operation mode, the module
cannot be written.

When writing the module, select an address comment write-in setting.

<Write-in mode>
· Add module comment data for unspecified address
Add address comment data that does not exist in the CPU.
· Overwrite module comment data
Overwrite the address comment data that exists in the CPU.

<Data range for write-in destination>

Select the write-in destination data range.

After selecting the write-in mode and the range, click [OK].

Use to select the position of the additional

module (above or below the existing module).

Specify the reference position for the additional

module to be written.
Use to select the module.
Example)
·
·
The module is written above the END.

9-13
Clicking [Start write-in] writes the module into the CPU.

The following message appears if there is a same module name in the CPU.

If there is a same module name in the CPU, the data is overwritten.

Confirm the content before writing.

If the written module number is overlapping with a module in the CPU, the following message appears.

Change the module number and write the module.

9-14
9.4. Operating the Module
9.4.1. Importing the Module

(1) Select [Import Module (D)].

(2) A warning message is displayed.

Abort
importation

(3) Select the OK button.

(4) Select the source project of

importation.

Abort
importation

(5) Select the Open button.

9-15
9.4.1.1. Importing the Program as a Module
If the program contains no module, the program can be imported as a single module.
1) Module importation steps (1) through (6) are common.
2) If the program contains no module, the entire program is converted and imported as a
module.

If the program contains no module, select the

program itself. The entire program is converted To add a module above the
and imported as a module. checked item in the view below,
check here.

The module is imported next to

the checked item.

(1) Press the Execute button.

(2) Enter the name of the destination

module of importation.

If the program contains no module

(3) Select the OK button.

• Importation
If the selected program contains no module
The ladder circuit between the START and END (not including
START or END) is imported with the module.

The module is added.

9-16
 Cautionary item
The following caution message is displayed if a module of a project of a different operation mode is selected
during module importation.
This is due to the address area varying among operation modes. If you are sure that the addresses used in
the module can be used at the destination of importation, press “OK” to import normally.

9-17
9.4.2. Reading the module from CPU
Modules can be exclusively read from the CPU.
Click [CPU] [Read Data] [Module].

Select the module to read and click [Execute].

The project name is the first language comment of the read module. When there is no comment, [No comment] is
displayed in the project name.
When there is a comment When there is no comment

The comment name is used as the project name. When the comment name is blank, No comment.prj is displayed.

Project name of the read module comment

Parameters are the default for a new project.

However, the same language and operation mode
as in the CPU are used.

The module in P1 in the CPU is allocated in P1 as it is.

Data is blank for other than the module.

9-18
 9.4.3. PCwin-to-UniDraf Conversion

(1) Select from the menu.

Add to divide
Use to divide.

(1) Place a check mark. If no

check mark is placed, existing
process is executed.

Abort
PCwin-to-UniDraf
(2) Place a check mark at one of conversion
modules to be output. * Two or more
modules may not be selected.
(3) Execute conversion.

Ladder circuits (modules) of programs 1-3 in the

project view are displayed. START/END/PEND are not
included.

A file (*.mne) is saved for each selected module (in UniDraf 5.0 interface specification).

9-19
9.4.3.1. Example of Ladder Opened with UniDraf

Operand 1: 1d (fixed value)

Start of module
Operand 2: Module identification number
(module name_S)

Operand 1: 1d (fixed value)

End of module
Operand 2: Module identification number
(module name_E)

9-20
9.4.4. UniDraf-to-PCwin Conversion

(1) Place a check mark.

If no check mark is placed,
existing process is executed.

Use to import as a module.

(2) Designate the imported position.

(3) Enter the name of the module to be imported.

(4) Press the Execute button to start importation.

9-21
9.5. Limitations and Cautionary Items
Cautionary item 1
While actions converted into a module can be moved and pasted at a part above END, do not specify
a position above END.

Cautionary item 2
Note that the action range is not checked when an action block is converted into a module.

Cautionary item 3
If the “OK” button is pressed without changing the module name in response to the pasting operation of
a copied module to another program, the following message is displayed.
If this is the case, change the module name.

Limitation 1
The START/END/PEND may not be included in the module.

Limitation 2
Up to 235 modules can be used. An error is displayed if the number is exceeded.

9-22
 Limitation 3
Prohibited ladder editing procedure
(1) The module block may not be edited.

Start of module

These two blocks may not

be edited in the ladder.
End of module

(2) Blocks may not be copied or cut beyond a module identification instruction.

If the range of copying or cutting is beyond

a module identification instruction

Start of module

End of module

9-23
10. Library
It is compatible with PCwin Version4.3 R** or above.
In addition, PCwin Option 1[Symbolic/FBD] Japanese Version FD TJA-6037 and PCwin Security
Tool[Sentinel25P: TXY-6066],[Sentinel USB: TXY-6067]are required.
At the time of editing, attaching one of the following is also necessary.
a.Hardware key[Sentinel25P]an accessory of TXY-6066
b.Hardware key[SentinelUSB]an accessory of TXY-6067

Option 1 becomes not necessary from PCwin Ver12 onwards. (This option becomes a PCwin standard function.)

10.1. Outline
FB Library creates Entity Ladder Program of FBD (Function Block Diagram) created with Main Ladder
Program (P1-P3) and is used by calling from the Main ladder program.
How to use the PLC library
PC3J Series Program Memory
Compatibility PLC:PC3JD[above Ver.2.60],PC3JB[above Ver.2.60]
*Not Compatible with 3JL,PC3JM(Integrated Control System) Library
Program1 Program2 Program3 FB Library

(1)Library Memory and CPU Modes that Can be Used

Standard Large Master PC10 Master 2
memory memory 180KW Master Free
32KW 60KW 180KW
PC3J mode O - O - O
PC3JG mode O O O - O
PC10 mode O O O - O
PC10 extension mode - - - O -
PCDL mode - - O - O
Plus standard mode - - O - O
Plus extension mode - - O - O
The library memory for Master 2 Free depends on the available memory on the PC hard drive.

10-1
 (2)Structure of Master library/Subset library
When writing the program which carried out link setup of the master library to CPU, the library
(subset library) which extracted use FB from the master library is generated automatically.

Link Program

FB110
Master library

FB220
PCwin

*2

Writing to CPU

FB110
The subset library which extracted
Use FB is generated automatically.

Link

FB220
Subset library(*1)

*2
PC3JG
*1: “Subset” indicates a “partial set.”
*2: It is also possible to include FB which is not
used by the program side in a subset library by
manual operation.

10-2
(3)The Way the Master 2 Free Library Works
The saved library will become one compressed file.
One file will be created for every opened FB(Only possible to open in PCwin. Sentinel is necessary
to unzip)FB, and operation is possible in Explorer.

Compress
StdLib.lpf (Library information)

Individual FB compressed files (file name = FB name)

SFC_ControlP1_FB16.ofb

.lzf
Common1_FB34.ofb
Cylinder3_FB104.ofb
FRMT4_FB182.ofb

Unzip
Compress all FBs
into one file

Files created for individual FBs . (.ofb)

Operate in Explorer

Change FB name
Delete FB
Cut FB
Copy FB
Paste FB

Create new folder (multiple layers OK)

Delete folder (delete all FB data within folder)
Change folder name
Cut folder (cut all FB data within folder)
Copy folder (copy all FB data within folder)
Paste folder (paste all FB data within folder)

10-3
10.2. Edit Screen Image

Project Window Library Project Tab Tag Edit Window Ladder Edit Window

10-4
10.3. Creation of new FB Library
FB Library cannot be created afresh in case of “Sentinel not mounted” as one does not have the right to
Library security. User Library can be created even without mounting Sentinel.
FB Library Data is created afresh as per the following procedure.

10.3.1. Creation of Library Project

1.After starting PCwin or in the newly created state, × on the Project Window is clicked to close it.

10-5
 2.Select [Library]-[New]-[FB Library] from the menu.

3. Set the items in the Property Dialog of FB Library.

Library Name is set. Name can use Input maximum characters are 50.
Version is used alphanumeric character and under "Master 180[KW]" is selected by
to manage the line(_). Input maximum character is 50. the program capacity, item which
FB library. Default name is NO_NAME. requires inputting.
Range is
Input maximum
0.00-99.99.
characters of
[Description]
Create date or are 100.
update. Format
is yyyy.mm.dd.
Default is a Select Program capacity. Large
current date . library (60 KW) cannot be used
except in PC3JG and PC10.
PC10 master 180[KW] could only
be applied in PC10 extended
mode.
• Making a new library is canceled by pressing the [Cancel] button.
• Making a new library is continued by pressing the [OK] button, and an empty FB library folder is
made.

• Family name : This name is used to relate the Master Library and Subset Library. The relation of
both libraries is shown being added to the Subset Library made from Master
Library..
• Program capacity : Program capacity of FB library can be chosen.
Change of program capacity can perform 32->60kW and 60->180kW.
The change to 32->180kW is changed into 60kW at once. Then, a dialog is closed
by [OK], and again, a property dialog is opened and it changes into 180kW.
(It’s impossible to change about PC10 Master 180kW.)
It can change.

It cannot change.

It is accepted at the time of new creation (default: 32kW), and a change

to 32->180kW can be made. It’s impossible to change to PC10 Master
180kW.
To make Master 2 Free, first please create Master 180 [KW]. Refer to
[10.13 Master 2 Free library] for how to convert to Master 2 Free.

10-6
 This FB Library Folder cannot be deleted.

At the time of “Master 180[KW]”selection

Area A1/2/3 are created automatically.

A change of a Area name can be made
by this operation with "The change of a
4. Select [FB Library] Folder and left click the mouse. name" of a folder.("An-"fixed) The folder
creation to area A1/2/3 is possible.

5. Select [New Folder] from the pop up menu and enter Folder name.

• Cancel Folder creation with [Cancel].

• Create new folder with [OK].

10-7
6. Select [Jig] folder and right click the mouse.

7.Select [FB Addition] from the pop up menu. Property Dialog of created FB will be displayed.

8.Set the data in the Property Dialog. FB Name is input by 40 characters.(Only

alphanumeric character and "_" can be
input.)It is not possible to overlap in the library.

Enter ID No. of FB in the range of 1-1023.

Overlapping in the Library is not possible..
(At the time of fresh creation, min.value of
blank number is displayed with default.

I/O Number of FB is entered in the range of1-20.

It can be used for controlling FB as

system. Input range is 0.00-99.99.

One can enter explanation note up to half

size 100 characters as comment.

• Cancel FB creation process by clicking [Cancel].

10-8
• FB is created by clicking [OK].

9.Since Entity Ladder Program of FB is created, double click the created FB.
FB Tag Edit Window and FB Ladder Edit Window will open.

FB Tag Edit Window

FB Ladder Edit Window

(Ladder Edit Window)

By selecting from the menu or by clicking, Focus of FB Ladder Edit Window and FB Tag Edit Window
can be selected.

10-9
10.3.2. Library Tag Definition
10.3.2.1. Tag Input Definition
Tag is defined with FB Tag Edit Window.
Programming of FB Library Ladder is carried out with Tag Name. Usual programming based on
Address cannot be carried out. Therefore, with this item linking Tag Name and PLC Address as well as
setting of various related definitions are carried out.

• Tag Editing is carried out with the following Table Format.

• Tag Record equivalent to I/O is automatically created in IN/OUT Folder at the time of new creation.
• Editable cell background is in light yellow that of non-editable ones is in gray.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1. Tag Name
• Overlapping definition in FB is not possible. If there are different FB in the FB Library, overlapping
definition cannot be made.
• Half size characters including alphabet, numerical, underscore ( _ ) below 9 can be used.
• Continuous use of underscore ( _ ) or ending with underscore is banned.
• There is no distinction of capital letters or lower case letters. (e.g.: ABC and abc will become
overlapping definition)
* In the definition, qualifiers [.0 -..F, .L, .H] in the Tag Name are not permissible.

2. Alias
• It is separate definition of the Tag Name. Setting of only the existing Tag Names is possible and the
same address as allocated to the existing Tag Name is automatically allocated. Alias definition in the
IN/OUT Field cannot be made.

When Alias is entered, Set Value, Data Type, Address, Attribute Column will become non-editable
(gray).

Definition using the qualifiers [.0 -..F, .L, .H] is possible.

• Tag Name of BYTE or WORD type can be treated as BOOL by qualifying with ” .”.
• In BYTE or WORD type, Alias Name:ppp.0 denoted bit0 of the Base Tag:ppp. ppp.0 will get fixed in
the Data type:BOOL.
• In WORD type, Tag Name: ppp.L denotes lower byte of ppp and ppp.L gets fixed in Data
Type:BYTE.
10-10
• In WORD Type, Alias: ppp.H denotes the upper byte of ppp and ppp.H gets fixed in the Data
type:BYTE. Tag with .L .H as the base can be used only in WORD type.
• Tag where .bit(n) is the base can be used in 0∼7 / 8∼F if BYTE type and 0∼.F if WORD type.
For using ppp.0 ppp.L ppp.H etc. it is necessary that ppp which is its base is defined in the Tag.
Attribute of Tag with qualifier will be fixed at the same level as that of Base Tag.

3. Set Value
Attribute can be edited in case of TIMER or COUNTER.
Defined Tag Name or numerical [0-65535] can be used.
This set value becomes the initial value when positioning TIMER or COUNTER at the time of Ladder
Editing of FB Library.
Moreover, when setting is made with defined Tag Name, if indirect TIMER or COUNTER is set with
numerical value, direct TIMER or COUNTER will be applicable.

10-11
4. Data Type
Select Data type from the Combo Box. For Data types see below.

BOOL :Bit Address can be allocated. [M123,D0123-F etc.]

BYTE :Byte Address can be allocated [M12L,D0123L etc.]
WORD :Word Address can be allocated [M12W,D0123 etc.]
<<<Instance of use of Qualifier>>>
Tag Definition

Tag name : Nil, Tag Name:Exists, Tag Name :Exists,

Alias Qualifier Setting : Nil Alias Qualifier Setting:Nil Alias Qualifier Setting:Exists
Tag Name[F]qualifier[.3]specification Tag Name[ G ]direct setting Tag Name[ F ]direct setting

Tag name:Exists, Tag name:Exists,

Alias Qualifier Setting:Nil Alias Qualifier Setting:Exists
Tag Name[ E ]direct setting Tag Name[ J ]direct setting

10-12
5. Address
Address is directly entered(Attribute:EXTERN)or automatically allocated(Attribute:besides EXTERN)

6. Attribute
Attribute is selected from the Combo Box. For types of Attribute see below.
TIMER :Selected when using as Timer.
COUNTER:Selected when using as Counter.
EDGE :Selected when using as Edge Detection.
VAR :Selected when using as Variable in FB.
EXTERN :Selected when using as External Reference.
Attribute Auto-allocated Address BOOL BYTE WORD Value of TIMER/COUNTER can be treated
TIMER Timer (T,C000-00F) O × × by putting "&" ahead of the
COUNTER Counter (T,C000-00F) O × ×
Edge Detection TIMER/COUNTER tag name.
EDGE O × ×
(ES600-ES7FF *1) Example:
VAR Variable(ES600-ES7FF *1) O O O
CURRENT Current Value (N000-00F) × × O
TIMER/COUNTER Tag – TIM
Direct Entry,External Reference Value - &TIM
EXTERN O O O
Other area can be specified

• Normally, in Variable Record, if Variable having TIMER/COUNTER attribute is created, Internal Tag
(CURRENT:Current value Attribute)which is its pair is automatically generated.
• Normally, in Variable Record, if Variable having TIMER/COUNTER attribute is deleted, Internal Tag
(CURRENT:Current value Attribute)which is its pair is automatically deleted.
*1 PC10 Master Library uses P*-JL0000~ P*-JL01FF. And it’s possible for user to use device ES of FB
execution / save areas.(PC10 Master Library )

7. Comment
Tag Name comment may contain a maximum of 100 characters.

• Setting of OUT-IN Relation Display during FB monitor

In case of OUT-IN Relation Display during FB monitor, IN Pin related to OUT Pin Output in FB
Internal Ladder is indicated with blue line in the FB symbol. OUT Pin of the cursor position is the
target of related display.
By creating Comment Data based on following rules, OUT-IN Related Display during FB monitor
becomes possible with Direct Circuit Monitor [DM-10WZ].

<Rules>
Setting Target:Comment End of OUT Tag
Setting Method:@[INpin Number – INpin Number - …INpin Number]
Instance of Setting :

Instance of Execution : Ladder Screen of Direct Circuit Monitor

• Comments in 3 languages
Display comments in 3 languages, editable in all 3 languages

10-13
10.3.2.2. Line Editing of Tag Edit Table
<Line Insertion>
1.Line Insertion in IN Field
After selecting below mentioned position, press Ins key.

Ins key

2.Line Insertion in OUT Field

After selecting below mentioned position, press Ins key.

Ins key

10-14
3.Line Insertion besides IN/OUT Field
After selecting below mentioned position, press Ins key.

Ins key

<Line Deletion>
As for Line deletion, symbol used in LD Program can be deleted directly.
Edit/delete the Program equivalent to symbol deleted with LD Edit.

1.Line Deletion in IN Field

After selecting below mentioned position, press Del key.

Del Key

10-15
2.Line Deletion in OUT Field
After selecting below mentioned position, press Del key.

Del key

3.Line Deletion other than in IN/OUT Field

After selecting below mentioned position, press Del key.

Del key

10-16
4.Line Deletion of Tag where Related Tag exists
1) TIMER/COUNTER
After selecting below mentioned position, press Del key.

Following message is displayed.

Interrupt deletion with [No].

Related CURRENT line is also deleted along with it by clicking[Yes].

2) Alias
After selecting below mentioned position, press Del key.

Following message is displayed.

Interrupt deletion by clicking [No].

Related Lines defined in related Alias are also deleted along with it by clicking [Yes].

10-17
10-18
10.3.3. Creation of Internal LD Program in FB
1.Internal LD Program of FB is created in Ladder Edit Window.
Circuit Edit Operation is similar to normal Ladder Edit(Editing based on Tool bar and Property).
Only Symbolic Programming is valid and programming based on Address in invalid.

10.3.3.1. Symbolic Programming

As for "FB Library Ladder Editing", by defining Tag Name (Symbol Name)with Tag Edit Function, not
only usual programming based on Address but Ladder Programming based on Symbol Name is also
carried out.
Reduction in dependence on Address during Control Software Design contributes towards
improvement in flow of Equipment Data.
10.3.3.1.1. Positioning of Symbols
Following procedure is adopted for positioning electric symbols.
Procedure
(1) Place the cursor by clicking the position where the symbol is to be created.

(2) Either click the icon of the symbol on the tool bar or press the function key of the key boa
rd (See below given Fig.)

FB Library In case of Ladder Edit becomes invalid.

FB cannot be positioned in Library.
(3) Symbol is positioned.

(4) Either on clicking [Enter] key or double click of the mouse, following Input Property is displ
ayed. Here, either press [Enter] after entering [Symbol selection][Tag Name] or click [Apply]
button.

10-19
Memo
♦ As for [Tag Name], either drag & drop from Tag Edit View or directly enter the tag defined Tag name
in half size characters.
♦ As for [Comment], Comment entered with Tag Edit will be reflected. Editing of property cannot be
made.
♦ Drag & Drop
Tag Edit Cell is selected by left click of the mouse. On the reselected cell, keep the left side of the

mouse pressed. Mouse cursor will change to drag .

With the left side of the mouse pressed, move to Property Tag Name Column and release the left
side.

10-20
10.3.3.1.2. Change of Symbol
Change the positioned electric symbol as per following procedure.

Procedure
(1) Either double click the symbol to be changed or place the cursor and press [Enter].
(2) Following Input Property will be displayed.

♦ To change the Tag Name

After correcting the Tag Name either press [Enter] key or click [Apply].
As for [Tag Name], either drag & drop from Tag Edit View or directly enter the tag defined Tag name in
half size characters.

♦ To change the Comment

Change [Comment] with Tag Edit. Change with Property cannot be made.

♦ To change type of Symbol

Either click the symbol to be changed from [Symbol Selection] and press [Enter] key or click [Apply].
Further, by clicking the tab on Property, change to different type of symbol can be made.

10-21
10.3.3.2. FB Program Check
Can check the finished FB program. Select [library] - [FB program check].
1) Current opened FB
[Check Content]
① Edge double error
② Coil double error
③ Label number double error
④ JMP/ LABEL order compatibility errors

2) All library
[Check Content]
Label number double error

Display the result page of FB program check.

Select errors, double-click the left, can jump to the relevant ladder block.

10-22
10.4. Movement/Copy of FB Item
It is possible to move/copy the existing FB item and Tag definition/Ladder program related to FB Item is
moved and copied simultaneously. Basically, multiple number of Pcwin move/copy FB item.
This function works only in the Library Function. Expansion to Project program cannot be made.
Folder after FB Library(Upper FB Item)cannot be edited like this item.
10.4.1. FB Cutting
With right click of mouse at FB Item , Edit Menu is displayed and[FB Cutting]is selected.
Cut data can be positioned in an optional folder with [FB Paste].

10.4.2. FB Copying
With right click of mouse at FB Item , Edit Menu is displayed and[FB Copy]is selected.
Copied data can be positioned in an optional folder with [FB Paste].

10.4.3. FB Paste
With right click of mouse at folder point, Edit Menu is displayed and [FB Paste]is selected.
FB cut or FB copied can be positioned in an optional folder .
Tag Definition and Ladder Program related to FB Item can be pasted simultaneously.

10-23
10.4.4. Cautions when pasting FB
FB Name and ID No. of FB where data is to be copied should not overlap with the FB Name and ID No.
of FB of copy source.
Following message will be displayed if it overlaps.

Avoid it by clicking[OK] and operate in a way that FB Name and ID No. of FB do not overlap.

(1) Activate multiple number of Pcwin and operate between them.

Below instance between 2 Pcwin have been indicated.

1. Select PCwin(Lower).
2. Copy FB:COPY10 of PCwin(Lower)
3. Select PCwin(Upper).
4. Paste in the Paste Folder of Pcwin (Upper).

* After copying in one Pcwin, changing FB Name and ID No. of FB with FB Property of the Copy Source
and pasting it is also possible.

10-24
10.5. Writing of Library
10.5.1. FB Program check
After creating or modifying a library, the FB program check is performed before saving.
Select [Library] - [FB Program Check].

The program check will be performed on the currently open FB or the entire library.

<Current FB>

Displays the name of the FB

to be checked.

<All of library>

If the target of the program

check is the entire library, it
will display ******.

10-25
10.5.2. Save by putting File Name
FB Library file is saved with [Library] [Save As].
Please perform a program check before saving.
For details, please refer to 10.5.1 FB Program Check.
FB Library is saved in an optional folder. In case of Default, it will be PCwin Lib Folder. (When using in
the Project program, Path and [File] [Link Library Setting] set with [Option] [Setting] [FB Library] are
followed.)

10.5.3. Overwriting of File

FB Library File is overwritten with the help of [Library] [Save by overwriting].
Please perform a program check before saving.
For details, please refer to 10.5.1 FB Program Check
When FB Library Data is corrected, it is checked whether version has been updated and if it is not
updated, warning message is displayed.

Overwriting is carried out in set version by clicking[Yes].

Even when version has not been changed, it is saved as it is in the version information.

Property of FB Library is displayed by clicking [No].

Version information is overwritten in the new version by clicking [OK] as and when it is changed.
Saving is interrupted by clicking [Cancel]and return to Edit is made.

10-26
10.5.4. Writing in CPU
Select[Library][Writing in CPU][FB Library].
Authority regarding Library Security [Sentinel Mounting] is not necessary.

(1) The following message is displayed by the existence of the information on FB stored in PLC.
♦When there is information on FB stored in PLC

If [OK] is chosen, from a master library, the subset library which extracted only FB currently used within
Present PLC will be created, and it will write in PLC.
Selection of [Cancel] interrupts writing.
If [Export FB] is chosen, FB can be added to the subset library created. For details, please refer to
"9.11.1.Subset Library Export."

♦When there is no information on FB stored in PLC

This message is displayed the following condition.

It will generate, if the writing of last FB library is performed by PCwin Ver.5.2 or earlier and writes in
henceforth PCwin Ver.5.6 this time.
In this case, please use PCwin Ver.5.6 or subsequent ones and perform the writing of a project
program and a library program. Please perform the next operation, when there is a project program
only in PLC.
• A project program is read from PLC.
• A link library is set as a new library. ([File]-[Link Library Configuration])
• A project program and a library program are written in.([CPU]-[Write Data]-
[All Program+Library+Parameter+Comment])

10-27
(2)Version checks of FB Library
It checks version of FB Library File. In case version is different on PLC side and Tool side, following
message is displayed.

Writing is interrupted by clicking[No].

FB Library Data is written in PLC by clicking[Yes].

(3) Collate&Check of FB version with CPU

The version of individual FB used by the project program is checked.

The dialog is displayed as follows. When The master library or the subset library is used by link setting
for the project program. And if the version of individual FB is difference between the PCwin side and the
PLC side .
When the FB library where the link setting use is done is standard 32KW and large capacity 60KW, this
display is not done.
Refer to the PLC side based on FB arranged in the project program on the PCwin side.
FB not arranged in the project program is not targeted even if registered in the FB library.

Writing is discontinued with [NO].

Writing is continued with [YES].

10-28
10.6. Reading of Library

10.6.1. Open a file

Select[Library][Open][FB Library].

Select FB Library project from File Dialog.

In case authority for Library security is not there i.e. [Sentinel not mounted], FB Library becomes read
only and it cannot be edited.

FB Library Data is read from File by clicking [Read only] button.

Reading is interrupted by clicking [Cancel] button.

10-29
10.6.2. Reading from CPU
Select[Library][Read from CPU][FB Library].

Following message is displayed on completion of reading. It can be edited by clicking [OK].

10.7. Collate with CPU

10.7.1. Collate of FB Library
Select[Library][Compare with the CPU][FB Library].

Binary collation of FB library Data of CPU and FB Library Data in Pcwin is carried out.
If FB Library Data is exactly the same, following message is displayed.

If information mismatching with FB Library data exists, following display is made.

10-30
10.7.2. Collate&Check of FB version
Please select [Library],[Compare with the CPU], [FB version].

Only when the subset library is opened, [FB version] command can be selected.

The version of each FB registered in the subset library is checked.

When the FB version of program project which has opened with PCwin and the FB version of PLC are
different, the following dialog is displayed.
FB of PLC is collated based on the FB list of the subset library on the PCwin.

10-31
10.8. Block Comparison
In the state where Ladder View is focused, FB Library Data open on PCwin and saved FB Library data
is compared at FB Unit/Coil Block Unit by clicking[Edit][Block Comparison]on the menu. It contributes to
partial verification of differences between new and old FB Library data.

Block
Library compari
Data son

Dialog that opens FB Library is displayed.

Select the existing file which is target of Block comparison and open the file by clicking [Open].

Dialog for FB Library Block comparison is displayed.

10-32
Inside of PCwin and target file are compared at FB unit by clicking[Compare]button.
Comparison at FB unit is the comparison of Ladder Coil Blocks of same FB Name and ID No. of FB.

In case there are different blocks, their number is displayed as under. Close it by clicking[OK].

Comparison result shows [S] when blocks are same, [D] when blocks are different and [N] when blocks
exist only on one side. Displayed numerical denotes the sequence number of Coil Block of the Ladder.
If either FB Name or ID No. of FB is different, result will be [D],[N],[E].

In case of [D] during comparison of FB unit, comparison is carried out of Coil Block of Ladder by
clicking [Details]button after selection.

10-33
In case there is difference on both sides, their number is displayed as under. Close it by clicking [OK].

Comparison result shows [S] when blocks are same, [D] when blocks are different and [N] when blocks
exist only on one side. Displayed numerical denotes the sequence number of Coil Block of the Ladder.

During comparison of Coil Block of Ladder, in case of[D], jump display to Coil Block of Ladder which is
different is made by clicking[Block Display]button after selection.

[Save Result] button

Save comparison result showing in list to file. There are those functions both in [FB LIBRARY
BLOCK COMPARISON] and in [FB UNIT COMPARISON].

10-34
10.9. Close File
Select[Library][Close].

If saving of FB Library data is complete, each view is closed.

In case un-entered Tag Name exists in IN/OUT during Tag Edit, following message is displayed.

After confirming by clicking[OK], complete the un-entered Tag name.

10.10. Library Import

10.10.1. Input of the third language

Select [Library] [Library Input] [Third language Input]. With the presence of first and second comments,
the menu is in effect.
Third language Input refer to "21.4.1 Input 3 comment languages into existing projects"

10-35
 10.11. Library Export
10.11.1. Subset Library Export

Select [Library][Library Export][Subset Library Export]. When Master library is opened, it is effective.

FB which exports to the subset library is selected by the following dialog.

Program capacity of the exporting The total size of The check mark is
Subset library is specified. checked FB is shown. turned On and Off.

All FB of
Area1/2/3 is
displayed.

Check is shown. The check on the subset which

Check on red : Used now. has already been exported can
Check on green : Used in the future be read.(*.EFB)

When select of [OK] specifies the file name of the Subset library to export.
Then, when Save is selected, checked FB is exported to the subset library.
All exporting FB moves to area 1(A1).

10-36
10.12. Library Convert
10.12.1. Convert to PC10 master 180KW library
This function could convert master180KW program base to PC10 master180KW program base.
Administrator of library with Sentinel of "PCwin Security Tools" can be done to Convert of FB library.

Master 180KW PC10 Master

Convert
Library 180KW

How to Operate
Select [Library]－[Convert to PC10 Master].

10-37
10.12.2. Convert to Master 2 Free library
This function converts from Master 180KW Library to Master 2 Free.
Please have the library administrator with the PCwin Security Tool] sentinel perform FB library
conversion.

Master 180KW Master 2 Free library

Convert
Library

How to Operate
Select [Library]－[Convert to Master (No memory restriction)].

(Note)Will convert to ! if ¥,/,:,*,?,”,<,>,| are used in the folder name.

10-38
10.13. Master 2 Free library
To create the Master 2 Free library, Master 180KW library must be created and converted. (Refer to Chap.
9.12.2)
As with the Master 180KW library, it is possible to edit in PCwin however editing in Explorer is also
possible using the below operations.
Operation Explorer operation
Create new FB (FB files(.ofb)cannot be created new)
Change FB name Change FB file(.ofb)name(Note 1)
Delete FB Delete FB file(.ofb)
Cut FB Cut FB file(.ofb)
Copy FB Copy FB file(.ofb)(Note 2)
Paste FB Paste FB file(.ofb)(Note 2)
Create new folder Create new folder
Change folder name Change folder name
Delete folder Delete folder
Cut folder Cut folder
Copy folder Copy folder
Paste folder Paste folder
(Note 1)The input of FB names on PCwin is restricted to a maximum of 40 alphanumeric characters and "_ ".
FB file names are handled the same way, however there are no such restrictions when inputting in
Explorer.
(Note 2)Copying or pasting FB files(.ofb)in Explorer will cause the FB number to duplicate. Duplicate FB
numbers are removed on PCwin.

10.13.1. Editing in Explorer

Normally, Master 2 Free library is managed in 1 file(.lzf), therefore when editing in Explorer, it is necessary
to open the file (unzip) using the below procedures.

(1) Start PCwin.

(2) Open the library to be edited.
At this point, the file will be opened in the folder containing the library.

Folder
containing the
opened FB

Master 2 Free library

(3) Edit in Explorer.
(4) Execute [Library]-[Update Latest Information] in PCwin, and the content edited in Explorer will be
reflected.
(5) Edit function blocks in PCwin.
(6) Save the library.
By saving the library, the opened file will be deleted.

10-39
10.13.2. Hierarchy of 3 layers or more
Create a folder 3 layers or more and manage the FB.
However, when writing to the CPU (= when sub-set library is generated）, FBs with 3 layers or more will
be integrated in the 2 layer folder. This is to maintain compatibility with the conventional sub-set library.

When writing to the CPU, FBs

inside folders in layer 3, layer 4 or
layer 5 folder will be integrated in
layer 2-1

10-40
10.13.3. Cautions when editing
If editing in PCwin, perform the below procedures.
(1) Open Master 2 Free library by going to [Library]-[Open].
At this point the library file（.lzf）will open.
(It will be opened in the folder with the same name as the Master 2 Free library name）
(2) Edit the FB.
Editing is performed one opened FB file at a time.
When one FB editing is complete, the FB file (.ofb) will automatically be saved.
(3) Save the library by going to「Library」－「Save」 （or [Save As]）.
This operation will save all the individual edited FBs into the library file(.lzf).

Master 2 Free library

Test_V11.lzf

Open
Save
PCwin Explorer

(Note1) How to cancel edited FBs

To cancel FBs being edited
Close the edit window.

To cancel FBs that have already been edited

FB data that has already been edited is saved to the opened FB file(.ofb). Therefore, after
ending PCwin, delete all the opened files in Explorer.

10-41
10.14. PCwin Security Tool
10.14.1. Outline
FB Library can be locked.
Locked FB Library cannot be edited if it is not sentinel having corresponding user key. (Reading,
Display, Monitoring is possible)

FB

FB

Option1:
Irrespective of Sentinel, User key, in case of PCwin not having PCwin [Option1] license(Function
Block Library)reading, writing and editing of FB Library cannot be made.
Option 1 becomes not necessary from PCwin Ver12 onwards. (This option becomes a PCwin
standard function.)

Master / Subset library

Please refer to "9. Library" for the specification of master/subset.
Library which becomes possible the edit by Sentinel is Master library. The subset library cannot be
edited. PCwin corresponding to master/subset library is since V5.8.

10-42
Procedure for locking Library
1. Mount the Sentinel set with User key on the PC and activate PCwin.
In case of Sentinel not set with User key, locking of FB Library is not possible.
For setting User Key in the Sentinel, use the software appended with the Sentinel
Pcwin Sentinel Utility :LibLock.

Key icon will be displayed on the status bar of Pcwin. Key icon display changes depending on the
state.
(Reference)

Sentinel Mounting(Library Editing possible)

2. Open the FB Library Project to be locked.

3. Select the folder of FB Library from the Library Project Window, right click it and select {Property}
form the menu.

(Reference)
Key Icon display on the status bar
Sentinel mounted (Library Editing
Sentinel not mounted
not possible)

Property of FB Library will be displayed.

4. select [Library is locked].

At this stage, Library is still not locked. It can be locked when saving FB Library.
5. Overwriting of FB Library is done.
Select [Library]-[Save As].

10-43
Procedure for unlocking the Library
1. Open the Library Project.
2. Select the FB Library folder from the Library Project Window and right clicking it, select [Property]
from the menu.
3. Select [Unlock the Library].
4. FB Library is overwritten.
* Unlocked FB Library can be edited even with Sentinel having different User key.

Procedure for confirming locking of Library

1. Open the Library Project.
2. Select FB Library folder from the Library Project Window and right clicking it, select [Property] from
the menu.

Click [Details] button.

Detailed information about FB Library Property will be displayed.

Date and time Date and time of last update of FB Library is shown.
of updating

Creator Code Indicates the Sentinel Number used for locking FB Library.
Usually, it becomes the Sentinel No. (Note) of the User who created/edited FB
Library.

Attribute It indicated whether at present FB Library can be edited or not.

Security It indicates whether it is possible to lock FB Library or not.

(Note)Sentinel No. is put for each Sentinel and is different from the user key.

10-44
11. Parameter Setting
For parameter setting, if the Folder of parameter on the Project Screen is double clicked, following
parameter setting items will be displayed.
Next by double clicking the items to be set, setting dialog will be displayed.

Double-click the
item to be set

11.1. CPU operation mode

Please determine the data area (program capacity, file register capacity, comment capacity) matching
to the system.

11.1.1. PC10 series

11.1.1.1. PC10 Mode
Target PLC is PC10G.
Please set up program contend and flash register (FR) size

*Switch to PC10 mode is available only when new production begin.

11-1
11.1.1.2. PC10 Standard Mode
Same to PC3JG separate mode. (Please refer to series 11.1.2 PC3J series)
*Only when PC10 standard/PC3JG combination is available.
(More details please refer to 17.2.7 Interchangeable)

11.1.1.3. PC10 Extension Mode

Target PLC is only PC10GE.
Please set up program contend and flash register (FR) size

*Only when PC10 Extension combination is available

(More details please refer to 17.2.7 Interchangeable)
*Change of PC10 mode is available only when new production begin.

11-2
11.1.2. PC3J series
In case target PLC is PC3JG(PC10), [PC3JG separate (PC10 standard mode)] or [Separate 1-5] is
selected.
In case of other PC3 series, [Separate 1-5] or [Single 1-6] is selected.

Note1) When the set mode is ' separate ', it is not possible to change it to single mode. Similarly,
when the set mode is 'single', it is not possible to change it to the split mode. If the circuit
under editing is of PC compatibility mode, the separate mode can be changed to single
mode.
Note 2) PC10 standard mode and PC3JG split-mode have same specifications. The ON/OFF of
valid/invalid checking are interlocked.

11.1.3. PC2/PC2J series

[PC2 mode] should be selected when the object PLC is of PC2/PC2J series.
Input of "program capacity", "file register" and "comment capacity" will be possible when PC2 mode
is selected.

Complete the setting by clicking [OK]. For canceling the setting, click [cancel].
11-3
11.1.4. PC1 series•MX
11.1.4.1. PC1 series
[PC1 mode] is selected when the object PLC is the conventional type(TOYOPUC-PC1,L,F etc.)
Register area used in[PC1register specification]should beset. Normally, it is 04000-07777(dt0).
[P1 program capacity] matching to the program capacity of PLC should be selected. Selector is
8•4•3•2•1kw.

Setting is completed by clicking [OK]. For canceling the setting, click [cancel].

* Setting of following parameters is not required when [PC1 mode] is selected.(11.2 CPU Operation
Status ~ 11.8 interruption)

11.1.4.2. MX
Either [MX separate 1] or [MX single 1] should be selected when the object PLC is TOYOPUC-MX.

Setting is completed by clicking [OK]. For canceling the setting, click [cancel].

11-4
11.1.4.3. PCDL
Select [PCDL mode] when target PLC is TOYOPUC-PCDL.

Setting is completed by clicking [OK]. For canceling the setting, click [cancel].
* Change to PCDL mode is effective only when creating anew.

11.1.4.4. Plus
Select [Plus Standard/Extension mode] when target PLC is TOYOPUC-Plus.

Setting is completed by clicking [OK]. For canceling, click [cancel].

* Change to Plus standard/extension mode is effective only when creating anew.

11-5
11.2. CPU Operation State

Setting whether execution is to be made against allocated Program Number or not is made (Setting of
Program 2,3 cannot be made in case of PC2 compatible mode).

* This setting is not necessary when PCDL mode.

11.3. I/O Module

Select all the modules mounted on the Rack.

As for method of setting, there are “Automatic Setting” and “Manual Setting”. (Usually “automatic setting”
is carried out.)

When TOYOPUC-PC10P
When PC10P is selected by rack number=0, the first address of BUS-EXP is set to X10W.

11-6
- When TOYOPUC-PCDL

Rack numbers are only 0 to 4.

Set the first address of each rack (Entry range: 0x00 to 0x 7F)

- When TOYOPUC-Plus
Rack numbers are only 0 to 1. Slot numbers are only 0 to 3.

11-7
11.3.1. Setting
Select the Rack No. and the Slot No. that are to be set and press [Set (S)].

Following screen will be displayed. Set the Allocated point, Identification code, Module Type and
Module Name.

11.3.2. Current Value

Current state can be easily set by reading the Program from the CPU.
(1)Read the Program from the CPU.
(2)After displaying the setting of I/O module, “Current Value” is pressed.
(3)Following message will be displayed and select [Yes].

Note) If there is an unmounted slot before the mounted module, 16 points are assigned to the unmounted slot.

11-8
11.4. Run State during Error

Run state when error is detected in CPU can be set. Insert the check in the item “Stop the CPU”
when error occurs.
11.5. Scan Time Timer

Scan Time Value of overall Program of the System, Initial Program of Programs 1 ~ 3 and each Scan
Time value of Main Program are set. At the time of Program execution, if set scan time is executed,
CPU error will occur.

11.6. Program Name

Program name can be respectively set in the system and Program 1~3. Input Range is maximum 64
half size characters.
Program Name set here will be displayed in the Program Folder of the Project Screen.

11-9
11.7. Link Parameter

Link Parameter can be set for each Program, when incorporating the link modules in the system, set
the respective parameters.
11.7.1. Link Setting

Select the Rack No. and Slot No. and select the Link Module Name from the List.
When setting AD10 special link parameters, please check the special (AD10).
After the setting is complete, click [OK] to end the process.

11-10
•L1/L2 Setting
(Target CPU : PC10G) : Refer to the table below for details.
Peripherals settings
Rack
Hard port Module Link Module Slot No
No
ET Ethernet
FL-net(8KB)
L1 FL FL-net(16KB) Built-in L1
FL-net(32KB)
FL-RMT FL remote-M
ET Ethernet
FL-net(8KB)
L2 FL FL-net(16KB) Built-in L2
FL-net(32KB)
FL-RMT FL remote -M
SN-IF
L3 PC PC Link
Built-in Standard
CMP Computer link

(Target CPU : PCDL) : Refer to the table below for details.

Peripherals settings
Rack
Hard port Module Link Module Slot No
No
FL/ET FL FL-net(8KB) Built-in L1
MODBUS MODBUS
PORT2 Built-in L2
CMP Computer link

(Target CPU : Plus) : Refer to the table below for details.

Peripherals settings
Rack
Name Module Link Module Slot No
No
ET Ethernet
FL FL-net(8KB) Built-in L1
FL-RMT FL Remote M
CPU CMP Computer link
PC PC link
Built-in Standard
S10 SIO link
MODBUS MODBUS
CMP Computer link
PC PC link
EX Built-in Optional
S10 SIO link
MODBUS MODBUS

11-11
11.7.2. Detailed Setting
11.7.2.1. PC Link (Master) / (Slave)
Set the Link Parameter Setting in the “PC Link Master Port, PC 1 I/F Output”. If “Detailed Setting” is
selected, following screen will be displayed.

On the above screen, if “PC Link (Master) is selected, following screen will be displayed.

When setting PC Link in-built in the PC3 series, it Is necessary to set Rack No. in “In-built”, Slot No.
in “Standard” or “Option” and also set [Soft SW(S)].

Procedure is as under.
(1) Link Area Starting Address is set.
(2) Connection Slave is set. Check the Connection Slave.
(3) Transmission bytes are set. Total transmission bytes are up to 64.
(4) Select [Soft SW(S)] and set the software switch.
(5) When the setting is complete, select [OK] and complete the process.

11-12
 Setting of Software SW.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Transmission data when CPU is stopped is set.
Data OFF : OFF Data is transmitted when CPU is stopped.
Pre-Stop Data : Pre-Stop Data is transmitted when CPU is stopped.
(2) CPU Operation at the time of communication error is set.
Stop : CPU is stopped at the time of communication error.
RUN Continuation : CPU is not stopped at the time of communication error.
Special Relay for communication error is turned ON.
(3) Communication Error at the time of connection sequence is set.
Indicate Error : When there is communication error in connection sequence , communication with all
Slave is stopped.
Power source should be switched on in the order of [Slave – Master].
If power is supplied in the order of [Master – Slave], there will be communication error
and communication will stop.
Repeat : Even if there is communication error in connection sequence, it is repeated till all
Slave complete the connection sequence. Therefore even if the order of power supply
is “Master – Slave” or “Slave – Master”, there will be no communication error.
However, it must be noted that even if the communication line is snapped at the time
of power supply, error will not be notified.
(4) Communication speed is set.
Selection is made from among 57600 bps, 19200 bps, NC.
Note) When communicating with M-NET Triple Speed corresponding NC Machine, if
communication speed is set at 57600 bps, sometimes checking of communication error can
not be made.
(5) 2 wire/ 4 wire channel setting is made.
(6) After setting is complete, click [OK].

11-13
11.7.2.2. PCI-1/F Input/ Output
Set Link Parameter Setting at “PC Link Master – PC-1 I/F output”. If “Detailed Setting” is selected,
following screen will be displayed.

If “PC-1/F Output” is selected in the above screen, following screen will be displayed.

Procedure is as under
(1) Link Area starting Address is set.
(2) Connection Slave is set. Check the Connection Slave.
(3) Transmission bytes are set. Total transmission bytes are maximum 64.
(4) After setting is over, click [OK].

11-14
11.7.2.3. Computer Link
Setting of Computer Link is carried out.
When setting in-built Computer Link of PC3K Series, it is necessary to Set Rack No. in “In-built”, Slot
No. in “Standard” or “Option”.

Procedure is as under
(1) Port No. is set.
(2) Data length is set.
(3) Stop bit length is set.
(4) Communication speed is set.
Select by moving the cursor.
(5) 2 wire / 4 wire channel.
(6) After setting is complete, click [OK].

11-15
11.7.2.4. MODBUS
Set MODBUS.
When setting MODBUS of PCDL, it is necessary to set Rack No. to "Built-in" and Slot number either
to "L1" or "L2".

Procedure is as under
(1) Port No. is set.
(2) Stop bit length is set.
(3) It is necessary to set a parity
(4) Communication speed is set.
(5) After setting is complete, click [OK].

11-16
11.7.2.5. High Speed Remote I/O, AS-i
Carry out setting of High Speed Remote I/O,AS-i.

Procedure is as under
(1) Link Area Starting Address is set.
(2) Connection Slave is set. Check the Connection Slave.
(3) Transmission bytes are set. Total transmission bytes are a maximum of 256.
(4) After setting is over, click [OK].

11-17
11.7.2.6. HPC Link (Master), SUB-CPU (Master)
Carry out setting of HPC Link Master and SUB-CPU Master.

Procedure is as under
(1) Connected Ports are set.
(2) Output state at the time of RUN halt is set.
Select output state at the time of RUN halt of Relay Link and Register Link from [Clear] [Hold].
(3) Detailed Item are set.
If [setting] is selected, following screen will be displayed.

[Starting Address] [Bytes] of Relay Link are fed. Bytes are decimal number 3 digits and
transmission bytes are up to 256.
if total bytes exceed 256, “***” will be displayed.
“Starting Address” “Bytes” of Register Link are fed.
Bytes are decimal number 4 digits and total transmission bytes are 1792. If total bytes exceed 1792,
“***” will be displayed.
After input is complete, click [OK].
(4) After setting is complete, click [OK].

11.7.2.7. HPC Link Slave, SUB-CPU Slave

Enter Communication Station No. of HPC Link(Slave), SUB-CPU(Slave). On completion of entry,
click [OK] to end the processing.

11-18
11.7.2.8. Multiple Transfer
Multiple transfer i/F setting is carried out.

Procedure is as follows.
(1) Specification of output / input area is carried out. (Area other than specified will turn gray and can not be
set.)
(2) Starting Address is fed.
(3) Channels are fed. (Input range is 1~256 (decimal number)).
(4) Channel NO. is set. (Input range is 0~777 (Octal number)).
If [Setting] is pressed, one Channel No. can be set.
If consecutive number is set, Channel No. after the specified address can be set with consecutive
number.
(5) Press [Clear] and data of the specified area will be cleared.
(6) After setting is complete, select [OK] to complete the process.

11-19
11.7.2.9. Diagnosis Module
Setting of Diagnosis module is carried out.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Network to be used is selected.
(2) Diagnosis during RUN halt is selected.
Interruption :Diagnosis / Measurement are interrupted when PC is stopped. They are
resumed when PC Run is started.
Continuation :Diagnosis / Measurement are continued even when PC is stopped. When
carrying out measurement of cumulative time, this setting is carried out.
(3) Setting of Host computer is carried out.
When “use” is selected, Diagnosis Port No. is fed. (Input range is 1~32 (decimal number).
(4) Setting of number of Network Ports used in set.
Select the Port No. to be set and press [Setting of used Links(U)] to display the detailed screen.

Set the Link used in the Diagnosis Module. After setting is complete, click [OK].

(5) After all the settings are completed. Click [OK].

11-20
11.7.2.10. 2 Port M-NET
Setting of 2 Port M-NET is carried out.

Procedure is as under
(1) Port to be set is selected.
(2) Next Detailed screen is displayed.

a) Link Area starting Address is fed.

b) Communication speed is selected.
c) Operation mode is selected (Mode other than specified will turn gray and can not be set.)
d) Connection Port is set.
e) Transmission Bytes are fed. Total transmission bytes are up to 32.
f) After setting is complete, press [OK].

(3) After required settings are complete, press [OK].

11-21
11.7.2.11. Pulse Output Module.
Pulse Output setting is carried out.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Starting Address of Relay Link/ Register Link is fed.
(2) Stroke Limit Minimum Value / Maximum value are fed.
(Input range is 134217728~134217727 (decimal number)).
(3) Coordinate Set value is fed (input range is 134217728~134217727 (Decimal number)).
(4) Constant at the time of speed adjustment is fed. Automatic correction at a unit of 5ms is made (Input
range is 5~25000 (decimal number)).
(5) Back slash correction value is fed. (Input range is 0~9999 (decimal number)).
(6) Origin Detection Pattern is fed. (Input range is 0~7 (decimal number)).
(7) Imposition signal is selected.
(8) Setting of speed parameter is carried out. [Speed] is pressed to display the following screen.

Various feed rates are fed. (Automatic correction is made at a unit of 30 pps).
Position control feed rate is fed.
Speed No. to be set is selected and pressing [Speed Setting], position control feed rate is fed.
(Automatic correction is made at a unit of 30 pps).
After setting is complete, [Setting Complete] is pressed to end the process.

11-22
(9) Setting of Position control command parameter is carried out. [Command] is pressed and following
screen is displayed.

Command to be set is selected and pressing [Position Specification], Specification method is

selected.
Specified position is fed. (Input range is 134217728~134217727 (decimal number)).
Feed rate is fed. (Input range is 0~31 (decimal number)).
After setting is complete, press [Setting complete] to end the process.

(10) After all the required settings are complete, press [OK].

11-23
11.7.2.12. DLINK-M, ,DLNK-S2
Carry out setting of DLNK-M,DLNK-S2.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Link Area Starting Address is fed.
(2) DLNK-M Slave is set.
Slave No. to be specified is selected from the Slave setting list and pressing the [Slave Setup(E)],
detailed screen is displayed.

Slave connection setting is carried out.

Transmission bytes setting is carried out. Feed in decimal number.
If “Transfer Direction” is pressed, arrow direction will inverse.
After setting is complete, press [OK].

(3) After all the necessary settings are complete , press [OK].

11-24
11.7.2.13. AF1K
Setting of AF1K is carried out.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Starting Address of Relay Link is fed.
(2) Transmission bytes of Relay Link are fed. Bytes are fed in decimal number 3 digits and their total is a
maximum of 256. If exceeded, “***” is displayed.
(3) Starting Address of Register Link is fed.
(4) Transmission bytes of Register Link are fed. They are fed in decimal number 4 digits and a total of
1792 bytes, If exceeded, “***” will be displayed.
(5) If [Standard Setting] is clicked, Starting Address of Relay Link and Register Link, Transmission Bytes
are set in the Standard value.
(6) After all setting are complete, click [OK].

11.7.2.14. MA1K
MA1K (Motion Controller) is set.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Starting Address of Relay Link is fed.
(2) Transmission bytes of Relay Link are fed. They are fed in decimal number 3 digits and their total of 256.
bytes If exceeded, “***” is displayed.
(3) Starting Address of Register Link is fed.
(4) Transmission bytes of Register Link are fed. They are fed in decimal number 4 digits and a total of 1792
bytes, If exceeded, “***” will be displayed.
(5) If “Standard Setting” is pressed, Starting Address of Relay Link and Register Link as well as
Transmission Bytes are set in the Standard value.
(6) After all setting are complete, click [OK].

11-25
11.7.2.15. Motion Controller.
Setting of Motion Controller is carried out.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Sub code is fed. (Input range is 82~9F (hexadecimal number)).
(2) Starting Address of Relay Link is fed.
(3) Transmission bytes of Relay Link are fed. They are fed in decimal number 3 digits and a total of 256
bytes. If exceeded, “***” is displayed.
(4) Starting Address of Register Link is fed.
(5) Transmission bytes of Register Link are fed. They are fed in decimal number 4 digits and a total of
1792 bytes, If exceeded, “***” will be displayed.
(6) If [Standard Setting] is pressed, Starting Address of Relay Link and Register Link as well as
Transmission Bytes are set in the Standard value.
(7) After all setting are complete, click [OK].

11.7.2.16. MCML
Setting of MCML is carried out.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Number of axes is fed (Input range is 1 to 8)
(2) Operation mode is selected.
(3) Output state when RUN stops.
(4) Starting Address of Relay Link is input.
(5) Starting Address of Register Link is input.
(6) After completing all settings, click [OK] to close the procedure .

11-26
11.7.2.17. MCSSC(Motion controller)
Enter the MCSSC (motion controller) settings.

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter the number of axes needing area reservation. The setting range is 1-8.
(2) Enter the link area of the relay link.
(3) Check the number of transferred bytes of the relay link. If excessive, “****” is displayed.
(4) Enter the link area of the register link.
(5) Check the number of transferred bytes of the register link. If excessive, “*****” is displayed.
(6) Press [OK] to exit.

11.7.2.18. AF1ML(Motion controller)

Enter the AF1ML (motion controller) settings.

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter the operation mode.
Select AF1-C, AF1V/VI/II, or AF1K.
(2) Enter the link area of the relay link.
(3) Check the number of transferred bytes of the relay link.
(4) Enter the link area of the register link.
(5) Check the number of transferred bytes of the register link.
(6) For AF1K mode, set the number of relays.
(7) For AF1K mode, set the number of register bites.
(8) For AF1K mode, set link area of AF1K register link.
(9) To register as a standard setup, select Standard setup.

11-27
11.7.2.19. Plus MCML (Motion controller)
Enter the Plus MCML (motion controller) settings.

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter the number of axes needing area reservation. The setting range is 1-8.
(2) Enter the link area of the relay link.
(3) Check the number of transferred bytes of the relay link.
(4) Enter the link area of the register link.
(5) Check the number of transferred bytes of the register link.

11.7.2.20. Plus MCSSC(Motion controller)

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter the number of axes needing area reservation. The setting range is 1-8.
(2) Enter the link area of the relay link.
(3) Check the number of transferred bytes of the relay link.
(4) Enter the link area of the register link.
(5) Check the number of transferred bytes of the register link.

11-28
11.7.2.21. Plus AF1-ML(Motion controller)

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter the operation mode.
Select AF1-C, AF1V/VI/II, or AF1K.
(2) Enter the link area of the relay link.
(3) Check the number of transferred bytes of the relay link.
(4) Enter the link area of the register link.
(5) Check the number of transferred bytes of the register link.
(6) For AF1K mode, set the number of relays.
(7) For AF1K mode, set the number of register bites.
(8) For AF1K mode, set link area of AF1K register link.
(9) To register as a standard setup, select Standard setup.

11-29
11.7.2.22. FL-net(8KB, 16KB, 32KB)
Setting of FL-net is carried out.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Node Number is fed. (Input range is 1~249 (decimal number)).
(2) Node Name is fed. (with half-size English numeral 10 characters).
(3) Output state at the time RUN of halt and Input state at the time of other Node detaching are set.
(4) Communication system is set.
(5) [Data Link (I)] is selected.

When communication system is “N : N or 1 : N Parent Port” following screen will be displayed.

Relay Link : Link Area Starting Address / Transmission Area starting Address is fed.
(Addresses that can be fed L/M/XY/EL/EM/EXY)
Link Area word number / Transmission Area number is fed.
(Input range 0~128 (decimal number)).

Register Link : Link Area starting address / Transmission Area starting address are fed.
(Device that can be entered R/D)
Input Area word Number / Transmission Area word Number are fed.
(Input range 0~8192 (decimal number)).

11-30
 When communication system is “1 : N Slave”, following screen will be displayed.

Master Node No. is fed. (Input Range 1~249 (decimal number)).

Relay Link : Receive Area Starting Address is fed.

(Devices that can be fed : L/M/XY/EL/EM/EXY)
Received word No. / Sent word No. is fed.
(Input range 0~128 (decimal number)).
Common memory Transmission Area Starting address is fed.
(Input range 0~1FF (hexadecimal number)).
Register Link : Receive Area Starting Address is fed.
(Device that can be fed : R/D)
Received word No. / Sent word No. is fed.
(Input range 0~8192 (decimal number)).
Common memory Transmission Area Starting address is fed.
(Input range 0~1FFF (hexadecimal number)).

(6) IF [Network (E)] is selected, following dialog will be displayed.

Network address is fed. (Input range is 0~255 (decimal number)).

Token Supervision Time out time is fed.
Minimum Allowable Frame Interval is fed.

(7) When all settings are complete, press [OK].

11-31
11.7.2.23. NC in-built PC.
Setting NC in-built PC is carried out.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Starting Address off Relay Link is fed.
(2) Transfer bytes are fed in decimal number 3 digits, Total bytes are up to 255, In case bytes exceed
255, “***” will be displayed.
If excessive, “***” is displayed as a last address of the link area, or the total transferred bytes.
(3) After all the settings are complete, press [OK].

11-32
11.7.2.24. Ethernet / Ethernet(32port)
Setting of Ethernet.
Refer the Ethernet Operation Manual (T-751*E) for details of each item.
<In case of Ethernet>

<In case of Ethernet (32 ports)>

Total 32 ports can be set for Sets 1-4.

11-33
Its procedure is as follows.

(1) Input 4 digits of self (own) node IP address. (Input possible range is 0~255(decimal))
(2) Protocol-open system

Select any of the one from TCP Active, TCP remote specific passive, TCP remote non-specific
passive and UDP connections.
(3) Input the self- node (own node) Port No. (Input possible range is 1025~65534(decimal))
(4) Input other node table No. (Input possible range is 1~16(Decimal))
Further, when "TCP remote non-specific passive" is selected, the display will turn gray and no
setting will be possible.
(5) Set the other node table.
Following screen will be displayed when [Set other node table] is selected.
<In case of Ethernet> <In case of Ethernet (32 ports)>
Total 32 ports can be set for Sets 1-4.

Following is the Procedure.

(5-1) Input 4 digits of other node IP address. (Input possible range is 0~255(decimal))
(5-2) Input other node port No. (Input possible range is 1025~65534(decimal))
(5-3) Press [OK] for completing the setting.

11-34
 (6) Setting of timers.
Following screen will be displayed when [Set timers] is selected.

Following is the procedure.

(6-1) Re-sending frequency of Reset wait
Specify either "No Set" or "Set". Input 're-sending frequency' if "Set" has been specified.
(Input possible range is either 0 or 3~10(decimal))(Default is 5)
(6-2) Non-receive timer
Specify either "No set" or "Set". Input the set value when "Set" has been specified.
(Input possible range 0~255(decimal) )(0 seconds is the default)
Select either "second" or "minute" unit.
(6-3) Response timer
Set the decimal of 1~255.(Default is 6)
(6-4) Re-send timer (data)
Set the decimal of 3~600. (Default is 5)
(6-5) Re-send timer (SYN/FIN)
Set the decimal of 3~600. (Default is 5)
(6-6) Close timer
Set the decimal of 2~60. (Default is 5)
(6-7) Packet life time
Set the decimal of 1~255. (Default is 10)
(6-8) IP assembly timer
Set the decimal of 1~255.(Default is 5)
(6-9) Once all the setting is over, click [OK].

11-35
(7) Execute the setting of Sub-net mask gateway IP Address.
Following screen will be displayed when [Sub-net mask gateway IP address] is selected.
Usually it will turn to gray display. Please refer Ethernet Instruction Manual (T-876*N ) whenever
this setting is changed.
Gray display will get cancelled, making input possible, when[change]button is pressed.

(7-1) Input the sub-net mask.

(Input possible range 0~255(decimal))

(7-2) Input the gateway IP address.

(Input possible range 0~255(decimal))
Gray display of Initial Value 0 as shown below will be displayed when [Initial value] button is
clicked.

(7-3) Once the setting is over, click [OK].

11-36
(8) Selection of Initialization
(8-1) Following screen will be displayed when [OK] button is clicked after selecting [initialization by link
parameters]

Click the [yes] button if initialization is done by the set parameters.

(8-2) Following screen will be displayed when [OK] button is clicked after selecting [Initialization by initial
sequence program]

Click [yes] button if initialization is done by Initial sequence program.

11-37
11.7.2.25. PROFI-S2.
Setting of PROFI-S2 is carried out.
Refer the PROFI-S2 Operation Manual (T-761*E) for details of each item.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Station No. is fed. (Input range is 1-126).
(2) Select Disable/Enable of Relay Link setting.
(3) Select Clear/Hold of "State of relay-link output in halt".
(4) Starting Address of Relay Link area is fed.
(5) Transmission bytes of Relay Link area are fed. They are fed in decimal number 3 digits and a total of 256
bytes. If exceeded, “***” is displayed on "Total".
(6) Select Disable/Enable of Register Link setting.
(7) Select Clear/Hold of "State of relay-link output in halt".
(8) Starting Address of Register Link area is fed.
(9) Transmission bytes of Register Link area are fed. They are fed in decimal number 3 digits and a total of
384 bytes, If exceeded, “***” will be displayed on "Total".
(10) After all setting are complete, click [OK].

*Input bytes of Relay Link + Register Link are total of 192 bytes.
*Output bytes of Relay Link + Register Link are total of 192 bytes.

11-38
11.7.2.26. DLNK-M2
Setting of DLNK-M2.

Procedure is as under.

(1) Link Area Starting Address is fed.

11-39
(2) DLNK-M2 Slave Port is set.
Slave Port No. to be specified is selected from the Slave Port setting list and pressing the [Slave
setup (E)], detailed screen is displayed.

Set the Slave Connection.

Carry out setting of Transferred bytes. Enter in decimal.
If [Transmission Direction] is clicked, arrow mark direction will get inverted.
Connection path Setting.
Carry out Extended Setting.
Set the Diagnosis Function.
Set the Unconnected Detecting.
On completion of settings, click [OK].

11-40
(3) Set detailed diagnostic details

Press [Detailed diagnostic setting], and displays detail diagnostics.

Enter each address.

(4) After all the necessary settings are complete, press [OK]

11-41
11.7.2.27. FL Remote - M
Set FL remote-M

Follow following procedures.

(1) Enter link area initial address.

11-42
(2) Set FL remote – M mobile unit.
Select mobile unit numbers from mobile setting list and press [set mobile unit] to display the detail setting
screen.

Set mobile unit connecting.

Set transfer bite count. Enter by decimal number.
To press [transfer direction], the direction of arrow is rotated.
Set extended functions.
Set diagnostic functions.
Set detection of connection incomplete.
Press [OK] to complete the setting.

11-43
(3) Set diagnostic details.

To press [Set diagnostic details], to display diagnostic details setting screen.

Enter each address.

(4) After entering required items, press [OK] to complete the setting

11-44
11.7.2.28. CAN
Enter the CAN settings.

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter the CAN name. (Enter within 10 single-byte alphanumeric characters.)
(2) Enter 1 to 16 IDs for transmission and reception. (0-7EF)
(3) Select the timing for each entered ID of transmission/reception. (Cycle, Event, Scan)
(4) If Frequency is selected as a transmission/reception timing, enter the Specified time. (1-65534)
(5) Enter the number of bytes sent/received. (0-8)
(6) According to the number of bytes sent/received, enter the transmission area.
(7) After entering necessary settings, press [OK] to exit.

11-45
11.7.2.29. Plus CLNK-M
Enter the Plus CLNK-M settings.

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter the link area settings.

(2) Enter the [Slave setup] settings.

(2-1) Select the connection setting among [Connect, Reserved, DO not connect].
(2-2) Select either [Ver2 or Ver1] as station information.
Select either [Remote device or Local station/intelligent device] as a slave station type.
(2-3) Select the I/O type among [Mixed back and front sides, Input, Output, Mixed].
(2-4) Select the total number of I/O points among [Dependent on number of stations, 8 points, 32
points and 16 points].
(2-5) Select the number of occupied stations among [1 station, 2 stations, 3 stations and 4
stations].
(2-6) Select the extended cyclic setting among [1 time, 2 times, 4 times and 8 times].
(2-7) Select the allocation between [Input output and Output input].
(2-8) Selection can be made to ignore faults.

(3) Select the System settings.

(3-1) To read the status, place a check mark and enter the area settings.
(3-2) Select the operation mode between [Online and Offline].
(3-3) Select the I/O input at a fault between [Clear entry and Retain entry].
(3-4) Select the I/O output at RUN stop between [Clear output and Memory in CPU].
(3-5) Enter the transmission speed. Select one among [10Mbps, 5 Mbps, 2.5 Mbps, 625 Kbps and
156 Kbps].
(3-6) Enter the delay in the [0 to 5000] range.
(3-7) Enter the resetting quantity in the [1 to 10] range.
(3-8) Enter the communication retry frequency in the [1 to 7] range.
(3-9) Select the resetting action between [Auto, User designation].

(4) After entering all the necessary settings, press [OK] to exit.

11-46
11.7.2.30. Plus CLNK-S
Enter the Plus CLNK-S settings.

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter the station number in the [1 to 64] range.

(2) Select the communication rate among [10Mbps, 5 Mbps, 2.5 Mbps, 625 Kbps and 156 Kbps].
(3) Select the operation mode among [Online, Offline and Loopback test].
(4) Select the slave station type between [Remote device Ver1 and Remote device Ver2].
(5) Select the total number of I/O points between [Dependent on number of stations and 32 points].
(6) Select the number of occupied stations among [1 station, 2 stations, 3 stations and 4 stations].
(7) Select the extended cyclic setting among [1 time, 2 times, 4 times and 8 times].
(8) Enter the I/O area and register area settings.
(9) Select the allocation between [Output Input and Input Output].
(10) Select the I/O input at a fault between [Clear entry and Retain entry].
(11) Select the I/O output at RUN stop between [Clear output and Memory in CPU].
(12) After entering all the necessary settings, press [OK] to exit.

11-47
11.7.2.31. EtherNet / IP
Enter the EtherNet / IP settings.
For details, refer to “11.2.5.2 EtherNet / IP in the TOYOPUC-EF10 Instruction Manual (t-760n).
Select “EtherNet / IP” as a link parameter setting and select “Detail.” The screen shown below is
displayed.

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter the address of the own node. (128.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255)

(2) Select Individual setting.
(2-1) Select either [Do or Do not] as a connection setting.
(2-2) Select either [Target or Originator] as a function.
(2-3) Enter settings corresponding to the target or originator function.
(3) Enter the list settings.
(3-1) Parameter settings can be viewed or edited in the list format. EXCEL or other data can be copied & pasted.
(3-2) Parameter settings can be imported from or exported to a file.
(3-3) EDS file can be read and reflected in parameter setting.
(4) Select the option.
(4-1) Select the number of connections (128 or 384).
(4-2) Enter the address of the destination IP address output area of connection.
(4-3) Enter the address of the packet loss count output area.
(4-4) Enter the address of the disconnection register area.
(4-5) Enter the address of the connection state output area.
(4-6) Enter the address of the connection fault history output area.
(4-7) Enter the address of the universal port status output area.
(4-8) Select “Notification of fault to CPU.”
(5) Enter detail network settings.
(5-1) Enter the subnet mask.
(5-2) Enter the IP address of the gateway.
(5-3) Enter the UDP port number for command communications.
(5-4) Enter the packet survival time (UDP multi cast)
(6) Save the target settings.
(6-1) Save the tag name information of the target in text data.
(7) Enter detail universal TCP settings.
(7-1) Enter settings and universal communication settings of connections 1-8.

11-48
11.7.2.32. Plus EtherNet / IP
Enter the Plus EtherNet / IP settings.
For details, refer to 9.15.4.2 EtherNet / IP in the TOYOPUC-Plus Instruction Manual (t-380e).
Select “EtherNet/ IP” as a link parameter setting and select “Detail.” The screen shown below is
displayed.

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter the address of the own node. (128.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255)

(2) Select Individual setting.
(2-1) Select either “[Do or Do not] as a connection setting.
(2-2) Select either [Target or Originator] as a function.
(2-3) Enter settings corresponding to the target or originator function.
(3) Enter the list settings.
(3-1) Parameter settings can be viewed and edited in the list format. EXCEL or other data can be copied &
pasted.
(3-2) Parameter settings can be imported from or exported to a file.
(3-3) EDS file can be read and reflected in parameter setting.
(4) Select the option.
(4-1) The number of connections is 128.
(4-2) Enter the address of the destination IP address output area of connection.
(4-3) Enter the address of the packet loss count output area.
(4-4) Enter the address of the disconnection register area.
(4-5) Enter the address of the connection state output area.
(4-6) Enter the address of the connection fault history output area.
(4-7) Enter the address of the universal port status output area.
(4-8) Select “Notification of fault to CPU.”
(5) Enter detail network settings.
(5-1) Enter the subnet mask.
(5-2) Enter the IP address of the gateway.
(5-3) Enter the UDP port number for command communications.
(5-4) Enter the packet survival time (UDP multi cast).
(6) Save the target settings.
(6-1) Save the tag name information of the target in text data.

11-49
11.7.2.33. EtherCAT-M
Enter the EtherCAT-M settings.
Select “EtherCAT-M” as a link parameter setting and select “Detail.” The screen shown below is
displayed.
For details, refer to 2.4.2. EtherCAT parameter setting in EtherCAT
(t-326e).

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter an address in the Link area field.

(2) Load the ENI file.
(2-1) Enter the address of the universal status area.
(2-2) Enter the address of the short-circuit state area.
(2-3) Enter the address of the non-connection state area.
(3) Enter diagnostic detail settings.
(3-1) Enter the address of the universal status area.
(3-2) Enter the address of the short-circuit state area.
(3-3) Enter the address of the non-connection state area.
(4) Enter settings.
(4-1) Select “Clear, Hold” as an output state setting at RUN stop.
(4-2) Select “RUN continue, Halt” as a CPU action setting at a communication fault.
(4-3) Select “Stop, Not Stop” as a communication stop setting at a communication fault.
(4-4) Enter the PDO communication frequency, timeout, and retry frequency settings.
(4-5) Enter the SDO frequency setting.
(4-6) Enter extended settings.

11-50
11.7.2.34. Special (AD10, HPIC, CT10)
Enter special settings for AD10, HPIC and CT10.

Follow the procedure below.

(1) Enter the module quantity setting. (Settings can be added up to 26.)

Press the [Add] button to reserve serial numbers for the number of modules.

11-51
 (2) Enter the module settings.
Press the [Module setup] button. The module mounting position setting screen is displayed.

(2-1) Select the module name.

(2-2) Select the module position. (CPU or Remote)
(2-3) Enter detail settings of the module position.
In case of CPU: Enter the rack number and slot number.
In case of Remote: Master module link parameter (program No., link No.), slave node No.
and module slot No.

(3) After entering the settings, press [OK] to exit.

11-52
(4) Set the module detailedly.
Click [detail settings], display the modules' actual installation setting page.

(4-1) Settings of CPU and I/O.

(4-2) Select the program No..
(4-3) Input the leading address. (available device: XY, M, L, EXY, EM, EL, GXY, GM)
(4-4) Set the word number of input and output.
(4-5) Select the refresh mode.
(4-6) Set the using channel.
(4-7) Select the range.
(4-8) Set the average management.
(4-9) Disable/Enable
(4-10) Processing mode (Number / Time)
(4-11) Processing mode setting value

(5) When setting is completed, press [OK] to finish.

(6) After complete indispensable setting, press [OK] to finish.

11-53
11.7.2.35. Undefined Module.
Function for system adjustment; general users may not use.
When module set in Link Parameter List is not defined, it is set as undefined module.

Procedure is as under.
(1) Enter the module number. (Input range is OA, OB, OF~FF (hexadecimal number)).
(2) Link Parameter contents are fed. Address to be selected is specified and pressing [Setting
Change], following screen is displayed.

(3) After setting is complete, press [OK].

11-54
11.7.3. Auto set up network drawing parameters
Change network drawing link parameter set up to set up PCwin link parameters.

When parameters are same.

If an error occurs during link parameter automatic setting, an error message is displayed and the
automatic setting of the target module is skipped.

11-55
11.7.4. Check of network drawing parameters
Check link parameters of network drawing and PCwin Display to display the results.

When parameters are same.

11.8. Interruption

Interruption is of 2 types namely “Fixed Cycle Interruption” and “External Interruption”. Select the
appropriate item and set .

* When PCDL, Plus standard and Plus extension mode, it is not necessary to set the external
interrupt mask.

11-56
11.8.1. Setting of Fixed Cycle Interruption Timer.

Selecting Interruption No., if [Details] is pressed, Details Setting Screen will be displayed.

After all the settings are complete, press [OK].

11.8.2. Setting of External Interruption Timer

Selecting Interruption No., if [Details] is pressed, Detailed setting screen will be displayed.

Set the Mask and the used program.

After the setting is complete, click [OK].

11-57
12. Program Check
After creating the program, carry out Program Check for verification.

12.1. SFC Program Check

While creating the Program with SFC, carry out Program Check in the following order.

Procedure
Select [Projects] -[Build] from the menu.

Select [Start] when the above screen is displayed.

12-1
 LD steps + SFC steps
(Max:32767)

Build result will be displayed as shown above. If there is no error, end with [Close].
In this operation, not only SFC check but Program Check of LD side is also simultaneously
carried out.

Build implies conversion so that the Program created with SFC can be executed by CPU.
In case of Program Check, normality of the program is judged on the basis of normal end of this
conversion.
Since this build processing is carried out automatically during writing of program in the CPU, this
check operation is not mandatory.

Following message will be displayed when in split 1 mode the P1 (program No.1) program capacity
during SFC conversion (build) has crossed 16KW.
Click [OK] after confirming that the object PLC is corresponding to the SFC memory extension(16KW).
Write the program into SFC memory extension.

12-2
In case of any error, details of error are displayed.

Jump to error points can be made by selecting [SFC Edit] here.

When any error is found, a warning message is displayed

In case there is error on LD side, even if there is no error on the SFC Side, display such as
under appears.

12-3
12.2. Error Code List of SFC Conversion(build)
Error
Code
Contents Countermeasure
C0001 No. of processes used exceeded the limit at the time of process Reduce the number of used processes.
compilation.
C0002 No. of steps used exceeded the limit at the time of process Reduce the number of used Steps.
(Sub-process) compilation.
C0003 No. of transitions used exceeded the limit at the time of process Reduce the number of used Transitions
(Sub-process) compilation.
C0004 Step (Step**) not connected to transition was discovered at the time of Either the connection of the Step(Step**) that had error is unclear or there
process (Sub-process) compilation. is possibility of Step(Step**) to Step connection.
Rectify so that Step (Step**) is connected to transition.
C0005 Transition (Transition**) not connected to Step was discovered at the Either the connection of the Transition(Transition**) that had error is
time of process (Sub-process) compilation. unclear or there is possibility of Transition(Transition**) to Transition
connection.
Rectify so that Transition(Transition**) is connected to Step.
C0006 Action Block where action is not created was found at the time of Create the Action in the Action Block of Step(Step**).
compilation of Step(Step**) of Process(Sub-process)
C0007 Action Block where number of actions used exceeded the limit was Reduce the number of actions used by the Step(Step**).
found at the time of compilation of Step (Step**) of Process
(Sub-process).
C0008 Action Block where number of used Retention system Actions exceeded Reduce the number of Retention system actions used by Step (Step**).
the limit was found at the time of compilation of Step(Step**) of Number of useable Retention system actions in the Action Block is 4.
Process(Sub-process). Retention system Action Qualifiers are ‘R’,’S’,’SD’,’DS’,’SL’.
C0009 Action Labels used exceeded the limit were found at the time of Reduce the number of Action Labels.
compilation of Step (Step**) of Process (Sub-process).
C0010 Initial step was not found at the time of compilation of Process. Initial Step is always needed for the Process.
Create the Initial step in the Process.
Multiple Initial Steps cannot be created in a process.
C0011 Starting Step of Sub-process was discovered at the time of compilation Starting step of Sub-process cannot be created in a process.
of process. Delete the Starting step of Sub-process in the process.
C0012 End Step of Sub-process was discovered at the time of compilation of End step of Sub-process cannot be created in a process.
process. Delete the End step of Sub-process in the process.
C0013 Initial Step of Sub-process was discovered at the time of compilation of Initial step cannot be created in a Sub-process.
process. Delete the Initial step in the Sub-process.
C0014 Starting Step was not discovered at the time of compilation of 1 Starting Step is always needed in a Sub-process.
Sub-process. Add a Starting Step in the sub-process.
Multiple Starting Steps cannot be created in a Sub-process.
C0015 End Step was not discovered at the time of compilation of Sub-process. 1 End Step is always needed in a Sub-process.
Add a End Step in the sub-process.
Multiple End Steps cannot be created in a Sub-process.
C0016 Multiple Starting steps of Sub-SFC were discovered at the time of Multiple Starting Steps cannot be created in a Sub-process.
compilation of Sub-process. Make the Starting Step in the Sub-process one.
C0017 Multiple End steps of Sub-process were discovered at the time of Multiple End Steps cannot be created in a Sub-process.
compilation of Sub-process. Make the End Step in the Sub-process one.
C0018 Number of used Sub-processes exceeded the limit at the time of Reduce the number of used Sub-processes.
Process compilation.
C0019 Capacity of the Sequence Program exceeded the limit at the time of Reduce the number of used Processes (Sub-processes).
Process (Sub-Process) compilation.
C0020 Called Sub SFC was not discovered at the time of Sub-process Either the Sub-process of the called destination is not correct or not
compilation. created.
Create the sub-process correctly.
C0021 Number of used Action Qualifier `SD` exceeded the limit at the time of Reduce the number of used Action Qualifier `SD` in the Action Block
compilation of Step (Step**) of Process (Sub-process). below 1024.
C0022 Step No. at the Jump destination is not set. Set the step No. of the Jump destination.

C0023 Transition No. at the Jump destination is not set. Set the transition No. of the Jump destination.
C0024 There is a branching error. For selective branching, use selective coupling.
For parallel branching, use parallel coupling.
After selective branching and before selective coupling, use a transition.
After parallel branching and before parallel coupling, use a step.
C0025 The start step is not set in the sub-process. Set the start step in the sub-process.
C0026 The end step is not set in the sub-process. Set the end step in the sub-process.
C0027 The action block is incorrect. Review the address setting.
An unusable address is set.
C0028 The sub-process is incorrect. Delete the same sub-process and re-create it.
The same sub-process exists.
C0029 A branching line is added to the bypass part of the total recall chart.
Delete the branching line to the bypass part of the total recall chart.
C0030 This step cannot be set to the reverse action. There must be one step action setting, and the Action Qualifier (AQ) must
be “N”.
Do not set an initial step, dummy step and NC step.
C0031 A step set to the reverse action is not found. Create a step set to the reverse action.
C0032 The address specified as the SFC manual mode allocation address is in Change the address.
use.
C0033 Variable setting is not found. Set the variable.

12-4
 Error
Contents Countermeasure
Code
Process 00 is needed for each Program.
L0001 Process 00 was not found at the time of link.
Create Process 00.
Sub-process (SUB**) of the called destination was not found at the time
L0002 Create Sub-process (SUB**).
of link.
Action program (Action program**) of Step (Step**) was not found in the Create the Action Program (Action Program**) beyond the END command
L0003
sequence program at the time of link. of the Sequence program.
Action program (Action program**) of Step (Step**) was found in Main Move the Action program (Action program**) after the END command of
L0004
Sequence Program (before the END command) at the time of link. the Sequence program.
Reduce the number of used Processes (Sub-SFC), Main sequences and
L0005 Capacity of the Sequence Program was exceeded at the time of link.
Action programs.
Condition Program of Transition (Transition**) was not found in the Create Condition Program (Transition**) in the Main Sequence (Before
L0006
Sequence Program at the time of link. END Command).
Condition Program of Transition (Transition**) was found after the Main Move the Condition Program (Transition**) in the Main Sequence (Before
L0007
sequence ( after END command) at the time of link. END Command).
L0008 Can't find the RET order of action (AC**) during the link. Complete the RET order of action (AC**).

L0014 An SFC occupation label (EL1023) is in use for the ladder. Change the label (EL1023) of the ladder.

12.3. SFC conversion (build) warning messages

Warning messages Trouble shooting
Other than N/S/R are configured in the program Configure N/S/R in AQ(action)qualifier).
X-PROCXX-STXXXX-AQ (action qualifier).
Program X-PROCXX-STXXXX-step execution completed, input Enter the address into the monitor when step execution
monitor is not configured. completed.
Including the steps of grogram X-PROCXX- can't run and Delete the useless step and jump.
jump.

12-5
12.4. LD Program Check [PC10/PC3/PC2serise]
In case of Program of LD only or Program Check of LD portion only, first LD window is put in active state.
In this state, select [Edit] – [LD Program Check] from the menu.

12.4.1. LD Program check result [PC10/PC3 /PC2series]

LD Program Check result is displayed as above.

When program read/write with PLC, program check is automatically done.

When error is not detected, check result is not displayed.

(Caution) Display of check result is separated at each program.

Display of the program with error is displayed forward.
When the tab of P1,P2,P3 is selected, each program result is displayed.

Setting by which Duplication Check targets output address of Function instruction by setting option.
[Option] – [Set] – [Operate]

<Target Address> < Target Address>

Coil x Coil Coil x Coil
Coil x Function Address
Function Address x Function Address

12-6
12.4.1.1. Types of Format Error and Error Code
(1) Format Error
Error Code Details
04 Address other than "P" was used in PTS or NTS Instruction.
05 Address "P" has been used twice.
Undefined Instruction is included in the Program.
Module-created in PCwin Ver17.0R06 or later was opened below
0C
PCwin Ver17.0R06.
(Please upgrade PCwin.)

When above errors occur, modification can be carried out with the Ladder symbol.

(2) When Display is not possible

When a block is displayed with Circuit Display mode, portions that cannot be displayed as Ladder
Diagram are displayed as under in the Ladder Diagram Area. In this case, modification based on
Ladder symbol cannot be carried out. After Block deletion, re-prepare the circuit.

**

Error Code Details

01 Exceed display limit(Exceeding 22 lines in 1 Block)
02 Stack over during STR, STR NOT Instruction.
03 There is OR Instruction without STR Instruction.
04 There is AND Instruction without STR Instruction
05 Stack over during FPS Instruction.
06 There is FRD Instruction without FPS.
07 There is FPP Instruction without FPS.
08 Since there is no value in Stack (S0), AND STR is not possible.
09 Since there is no value in Stack (S0), OR STR is not possible.
0A Counter Instruction Block Stack Number error.
0B Exceeding the Program limit(Circuit Block of over 256 steps).
0E Bit Pattern error in the Timer Counter.
0F Since there is no value in Stack (S0), FPP is not possible.
10 It is not popping with the Stack in pushed state. (There is residual Stack)
11 There is OR system instruction in the Timer Counter Instruction Block.
12 There are OR,OR NOT,OR STR Instructions soon after FPS Instruction.
There are STR,STR NOT,OR,OR NOT,OR STR,AND STR Instructions after
13
OUT system Instruction.
14 There is no OUT system Instruction Word in 1 Block.
15 It is non-displayable pattern with contact type Function.

12-7
12.4.1.2. Circuit not supported

Please change the circuit when the following message is displayed.

[Example of circuit not supported]

The pattern that there is a point of contact only in the following multi coil of OR-circuit and the head of the
multi coil is not supported.

[Example of equivalent circuit]

Please make following "Example of equivalent circuit" when the above-mentioned message is displayed.

12-8
Change the circuit if the following message is displayed.

[An example of non-supported circuits]

In PC10 standard/PC3JG separate mode, multi coil patters which do not have contacts at the start
(below figure) are not supported.

[An example of an equalized circuit]

When the above message is displayed, create the following equalized circuit.

12-9
12.4.2. LD program check result [PC1 series]

LD program check result will be displayed as shown above.

Program check will be executed automatically during program write in and read in with PLC
also.
Above display will not appear if there is no error at this time.

12.4.2.1. Display of Error in Circuit Display.

Circuit Blocks, which can not be displayed as circuit diagrams, will be displayed as shown
below.

(1) ***** Program over circuit

(2) ***** Display over circuit
(3) ***** Format error circuit
Please refer "11.4.2.2 Types and contents of format errors" for details.
(4) ***** HLT circuit
(5) ***** RQI circuit
(6) ***** Reverse output circuit
(7) ***** Multi output circuit
(8) ***** Circuit which can not be displayed (non-displayable circuit)

Note 1) Header address of the block will be displayed in"*****”(5 octal digits)
Note 2) If it is displayed as shown above, it will not be possible to correct or change the block In PCwin.

When correction or change is required, create a correct circuit block after deleting the
concerned coil block.

12-10
12.4.2.2. Types and contents of format errors

Contents of format errors

Command Command
Error contents Error contents
word word
TNA or TFA command is after TNO or YON command is after SKP
TFO command.

TNA or TFA command is after SKP JMP command jumps the YON
command. command.

JMP command jumps TNA or TFA YON command is after TNO or TFO
TNA
command command.
or
There is error in the use of JMN JMY command jumps YON
command though TNA or TFA command.
TFA
command is the jump destination of
JMN command. There is error in the use of JMN
command though JMN command
jumps YON command.
There is error in the use of JMY
command though TNA or TFA
command is the jump destination of YON YON is jump destination of JMN
JMY command. command.
Though YON command is one of
TNO or TFO command is after SKP
the multi outputs, this multi output
command.
has crossed other 4 outputs.
JMP command jumps TNO or TFO
Command It has turned into a short circuit.
TNO
There is error in the use of JMY There is error in the use of JMY
or
command though TNO or TFO command though YON command is
command is the jump destination of the jump destination of JMY
TFO
JMY command. command.
ALL 1 bit pattern is present in the
There is error in the use of JMN
circuit block including YON
command though TNO or TFO
command.
command is the jump destination of
JMN command.
TIM command is after SKP
TNE or TFE command is after SKP command.
command.
JMP command jumps TIM
JMP command jumps TNE or TFE command.
command
TIM command is after TNO or TFO
TNE command.
Some command other than TNO or
TFO command is coming after. TIM
or
JMN command jumps TIM
TNE or TFE command is the jump command.
TFE
destination of JMY command.

JMY command jumps TIM

TNE or TFE command is the jump command.
destination of JMN command.

12-11
Command Command
Error contents Error contents
word word
The is error in the use of JMY command JMY command is after SKP
though TIM command is the jump command.
destination of JMY command.
JMP command jumps JMY
TIM
command.
ALL 1 bit pattern is present in the circuit JMY
block including TIM command. There is error in the use of JMY
command.

SON command is in front of (before) the JMY command is the jump

circuit block. destination of JMN command.

JMN command is in front of (before)

JMP command jumps SON command.
circuit block.

JMN command is after TNO or TFO

SON command is after SKP command
command.

SON command is after IO test JMN command is not there after the
command. IO test command.
JMN
JMN command is after SKP
Either the SON command is the jump
command.
destination of JMY command or JMY
command jumps SON command.
JMP command jumps the JMN
command.
SON SON command does not jump by JMN
command.
There is error in the use of JMN
command.
There is error in the use of JMN
command though this JMN command SOF is in front of (before) the block
jumps SON command. circuit.

SON command is the jump destination

SOF is after IO test command.
of JMN command.

Though SOF command jumps by the

Though SON command is one of the
JMN command, there is error in the
multi outputs, it crosses 4 other multi
use of that JMN command.
outputs.

ALL 1 bit pattern is present in the circuit SOF command is the jump
block including SON command. SOF destination of JMN command, but
there is error in the use of that JMN
command.
JMY command is in front of (before) the
circuit block.
There is error in the use of SOF
command.
JMY is after TNO or TFO
JMY Command. There is error in the multi output
circuit including the SOF command.
JMY command is not present after IO
test command. SOF command is the jump
destination of JMY command.

12-12
Command Command
Error contents Error contents
word word
SKP command is in front of (before) the HLT or RQI command is in front of
circuit block. (before) the circuit block.

SKP command is after IO test HLT or RQI command is after IO test

command. command.

HLT or RQI command is after SKP

SKP command is after SKP command.
command.
HLT
JMY command jumps HLT or RQI
JMP command jumps SKP command.
command.
SKP
There is error in the use of JMN
JMY command jumps SKP command.
command though that JMN
command jumps HLT or RQI
JMN command does not jump SKP command.
command.
There is JMPO command in the O
address SOF memory address.
There is error in the use of JMN
command though that JMN command
jumps the SKP command. There is error in the use of JMP
command.

NOP command is after SKP command.

JMP command is after IO test
command.
NOP There is error in the use of JMN
command though NOP command is the JMP command is after SKP
jump destination of that JMN command. command.

JMP command jumps the JMP

command.
FON command is after SKP command.

There is error in the end program.

JMP commands jumps the FON
command.
JMP
There is error in the use of JMN
FON is after TNO or TFO command. command though the JMN command
jumps the JMP command.
JMN command jumps the FON
command.
FON
JMY command jumps the FON
command.

There is error in the use of JMY

command though FON is the jump
destination of that JMY command.

FUN No. displayed by FON command is

above 100.

FUN No. displayed by FON command is

not defined.

12-13
12.4.2.3. In the case of faulty creation of circuit.
Program conversion may not be possible in a faulty circuit as shown below. In such cases, the
following message will be displayed. Please execute the conversion after correcting it to the
normal circuit in the right side after clicking [OK].

Example of fault
Faulty circuit Normal circuit
(error)

Parallel contact is
1
on the top

Midway contact
2 collapses one line
down.

Circuit has become

3
zigzag.

4 Wraparound Circuit

Short-circuited
5
contact

Hence, please avoid creating a circuit like the above one.

12-14
Note 1) What is meant by 'wraparound circuit' is explained below.

↑
Bus

Circuit (flow) condition of every contact is checked from the left end of the circuit (bus) to the
right in the sequence program to judge whether the coil is ON or OFF.
There are four flow sequences in the example given in the previous item to check the circuit
(flow) condition.

(1)
When the circuit (flow) condition is checked
(2) from contact A, circuit (flow) condition in both
(1),(2) is checked from left to right.

(3)
When circuit (flow) condition is checked from
(4) contact F, circuit condition in (3) should be
checked one point at D from right to left.
In (4), the circuit (flow) condition should be
checked from left to right.

As shown in above (3), when the circuit (flow) condition is checked from F contact, places with reverse
flow, some time left some time right, will appear. Such circuits are called "wraparound circuits". It is not
possible to have program on such wraparound circuits, please do not create any ladder circuit.

12-15
12.5. Defragment FB execution memory

Select [Xchange] -[Defragment FB execution memory] from the menu.

This function is not usually used. Defragment FB execution memory is automatically arranged when the
arrangement is necessary. The menu selection of the one done by the automatic operation is enabled.
The memory of the save area which each FB uses is arranged when Defragment FB execution memory
is done, and a settled empty area is secured.

12.6. Program size

Select [Xchange] -[Program size].

Displays rate of program Capacity, Free space, and Raito of free space for every Program.

1. In the case of a program project

CPU operation mode is displayed.
2. In the case of a library project
Library classification is displayed.

1. In the case of a Program project

Size of P1,P2,P3 is displayed.
2. In the case of a Library project
Master library: Size of A1,A2,A3 is displayed.
Except Master library: Size of A1 displayed.

12-16
13. CPU
By connecting with CPU, reading and writing of Program comment Register Data and Setting of monitor data can
be carried out.
Use Library Function (See Chapter 10) for reading, writing and checking of FB Library data.

13.1. Read from CPU

Program comment Register stored in the CPU is read on PC win side.

When CPU is PC10 or Plus

When CPU is PC2/PC3

When CPU is MX

When CPU is PC1

When CPU is PCDL

*1 Refer to "9.4.2 Module read from CPU".

When read data from different CPU, following error message will be displayed. Read data failed.

13-1
 Data marked by O in the table below can be read from CPU
O Read, × Does not read, - No function in PLC
I/O and
TOYOPUC SFC project SFC LD
menu selection items parameter comment register Library Network Data
series program data chart program
drawing back up
PC10/Plus program+parameter+comment O O O O O × O*1 O ×
PC10/Plus program+parameter+comment+registe O O O O O O O*1 O ×
yes
PC10/Plus register × × × × × O × × ×
PC10 PC10/Plus data back-up O O O O O O × O O
Plus PC10 program+parameter+comment O × O O O × O*1 O ×
PC10 program+parameter+comment+register O × O O O O O*1 O ×
no
PC10 register × × × × × O × × ×
PC10 data back-up O × O O O O × O O
PC2/PC3 program+parameter+comment O O O O O × O*1 O ×
PC2/PC3 program+parameter+comment+register O O O O O O O*1 O ×
yes
PC2/PC3 register × × × × × O × × ×
PC10 PC2/PC3 data back-up O O O O O O × O O
3J PC2/PC3 program+parameter+comment O × O O O × O*1 O ×
PC2/PC3 program+parameter+comment+register O × O O O O O*1 O ×
no
PC2/PC3 register × × × × × O × × ×
PC2/PC3 data back-up O × O O O O × O O
3J PC2/PC3 program+parameter+comment - - O O O × × O ×
PC2 PC2/PC3 program+parameter+comment+register - - O O O O × O ×
-
compatible PC2/PC3 register - - × × × O × × ×
mode PC2/PC3 data back-up - - O O O O × O O
PC2/PC3 program+parameter+comment - - O O - × × × ×
PC2/PC3 program+parameter+comment+register - - O O - O × × ×
2/2J -
PC2/PC3 register - - × × - O × × ×
PC2/PC3 data back-up - - O O - O × × O
MX program+parameter+comment - - O O O × × × ×
MX - MX register - - × × × O × × ×
MX data back-up - - O O O O × × O
PC1 program1 - - O - - × × - ×
PC1 - PC1 register - - × - - O × - ×
PC1 data back-up - - O - - O × - O
PCDL program+parameter+comment O O O O O × O*1 O ×
PCDL program+parameter+comment+register O O O O O O O*1 O ×
yes
PCDL register × × × × × O × × ×
PCDL data back-up O O O O O O × O O
PCDL
PCDL program+parameter+comment O × O O O × O*1 × ×
PCDL program+parameter+comment+register O × O O O O O*1 × ×
no
PCDL register × × × × × O × × ×
PCDL data back-up O × O O O O × × O
*1. Neither editing nor saving can be made with PCwin Ver. 12.0 or earlier.
Saving can be made in the subset library format with PCwin Ver. 12.0 or later.
Since the type and State of CPU are identified automatically during reading, there is no need for any special setting.
Further, in case Program on PC win side is edited and the File is not saved, following message is displayed.

During reading, following dialog is displayed and it implies that it is being read.

Program check is automatically carried out on completion of reading.

13-2
In case any error is detected during Program Check, details of error are displayed.
In case there is no error, check results are not displayed.

13-3
 13.2. Writing in CPU

Program Parameter Register Data held by PC win is written in CPU.

Avoid it during operation of equipment or object equipment to be used.

Since the equipment can sometimes have unexpected operation depending
on the contents of writing, sufficient care must be taken for safety.

Data marked by O in the table below can be written into CPU

O Write, × Does not write, - No function in PLC

I/O and
TOYOPUC SFC project SFC LD LD LD comment comment comment comment
menu selection items parameter register Library Network
series program data chart (P1) (P2) (P3) (P1) (P2) (P3) (Extension) drawing
program+parameter+comment *3 O*1 O*2 O O O O O O O O × × O*5
program+library+parameter+comment O*1 O*2 O O O O O O O O × O*4 O*5
program1 O*1 O*2 O × × × × × x x × × ×
program2 *3 O*1 O*2 × O × × × × × x × × ×
program3 *3 O*1 O*2 × × O × × × × x × × ×
program1+comment(P1+Extension) O*1 O*2 O × × × O × × O × × ×
program2+comment(P2+Extension) *3 O*1 O*2 × O × × × O × O × × ×
yes program3+comment(P3+Extension) *3 O*1 O*2 × × O × × × O O × × ×
program1+comment(P1) O*1 O*2 O × × × O × × x × × ×
program2+comment(P2) *3 O*1 O*2 × O × × × O × x × × ×
program3+comment(P3) *3 O*1 O*2 × × O × × × O x × × ×
parameter × × × × × O × × × x × × ×
comment × × × × × × O O O O × × ×
PC10 register × × × × × × × × × x O × ×
3J I/O and Network drawing × × × × × × × × × x x × O*5
PCDL program+parameter+comment *3 × × O O O O O O O O × × O*5
Plus program+library+parameter+comment × × O O O O O O O O × O*4 O*5
program1 × × O × × × × × × x × × ×
program2 *3 × × × O × × × × × x × × ×
program3 *3 × × × × O × × × × x × × ×
program1+comment(P1+Extension) × × O × × × O × × O × × ×
program2+comment(P2+Extension) *3 × × × O × × × O × O × × ×
no program3+comment(P3+Extension) *3 × × × × O × × × O O × × ×
program1+comment(P1) × × O × × × O × × x × × ×
program2+comment(P2) *3 × × × O × × × O × x × × ×
program3+comment(P3) *3 × × × × O × × × O x × × ×
parameter × × × × × O × × × x × × ×
comment × × × × × × O O O O × × ×
register × × × × × × × × × x O × ×
I/O and Network drawing × × × × × × × × × x × × O*5
program+parameter+comment × - O - - O O - - - × × ×
3J
program1 × - × - - × × - - - × × ×
PC2
- parameter × - × - - O × - - - × × ×
compatible
comment × - - - - - O - - - × × ×
mode register × - × - - × × - - - O × ×
program+parameter+comment - - O - - O - - - - × × ×
program1 - - O - - × - - - - × × ×
2/2J - parameter - - × - - × - - - - × × ×
comment - - × - - × - - - - × × ×
register - - × - - × - - - - O × ×
program+parameter+comment *3 O*1 - O O O O O O O O × × ×
program1 O*1 - O × × × × × × x × × ×
program2 *3 O*1 - × O × × × × × x × × ×
program3 *3 O*1 - × × O × × × × x × × ×
program1+comment(P1+Extension) O*1 - O × × × O × × - × × ×
program2+comment(P2+Extension) *3 O*1 - × O × × × O × O × × ×
program3+comment(P3+Extension) *3 O*1 - × × O × × × O O × × ×
MX -
program1+comment(P1) O*1 - O × × × O × × x × × ×
program2+comment(P2) *3 O*1 - × O × × × O × x × × ×
program3+comment(P3) *3 O*1 - × × O × × × O x × × ×
parameter × - × × × O × × × x × × ×
comment × - × × × × O O O O × × ×
register × - × × × × × × × x O × ×
P1register × - × × × × × × × x O × ×
program1 - - O - - - - - - - × × ×
PC1 -
P1register - - × - - - - - - - O × ×
*1:Write is excuted when 'write' is selected when the project namein Pcwin side and PLC side is different.
*2:Write is excuted even when SFC data is existing.
*3:Programs which are not present in Split , single or PCDL mode are out of its purviev.
*4:Write when Library Data exists.
*5:Writing when I/O and Network drawing present

13-4
 *1

13.2.1. All Program + Parameter + Comment

Automatically deciphers the Program contents and writes the following data in the CPU.
Before writing, SFC conversion (Build) and Program Check are automatically carried out.
Carry out writing of All Program + Parameter + Comment after stopping the CPU.
When preparation for writing is complete, following message of confirmation is displayed.

If [Yes] is clicked, writing starts. Writing can be stopped by pressing [No].

Following message is displayed on completion of writing.

If [OK] is pressed, the message will disappear.

When Program contents and the type of CPU do not match, following message is displayed and writing is
terminated.
When CPU does not correspond with SFC.

13-5
When Program of PC3 mode is written in PC2 series.

Further, during RUN, following message is displayed.

13-6
13.2.1.1. Collate&Check of FB version when FB is used
The dialog is displayed as follows.
When The master library or the subset library is used by link setting for the project program.
And if the version of each FB is difference between the PCwin side and the PLC side .
When the FB library where the link setting use is done is standard 32KW and large capacity 60KW, this display is not done.
FB of PLC is collated based on the FB list of the subset library on the PCwin.
FB not put on the project program is not targeted in collation even if registered in the FB library.

Writing is discontinued with [OK].

Writing in CPU is locked when there is un-matched. Please execute it as follows.

1) Setting the link of matched FB libraries again.
2) Writing by the batch use of [All Program+Library+Parameter+Comment] command.
3) Writing matched FB library.

13-7
13.2.2. All Program + Library+Parameter + Comment
Automatically deciphers the Program contents and writes the following data in the CPU.
Before writing, SFC conversion (Build) and Program Check are automatically carried out.
Carry out writing of All Program + Library + Parameter + Comment after stopping the CPU.

13.2.2.1. Check on version of FB library

The version of the FB library is checked.
When the library name or the version of the FB library is different on the PCwin side and the PLC side, the following dialog is
displayed.

Writing is discontinued with [NO].

Writing is continued with [YES].

13-8
13.2.3. Program 1
Data of Program 1 only is written.
However in case SFC is included in Program 1, SFC Program is also written.
It is also writable for during RUN of CPU. Refer to "13.2.11 About writing during RUN."

13.2.4. Program 2
Data of Program 2 only is written.
However in case SFC is included in Program 2, SFC Program is also written.
It is also writable for during RUN of CPU. Refer to "13.2.11 About writing during RUN."

13.2.5. Program 3
Data of Program 3 only is written.
However in case SFC is included in Program, SFC Program is also written.
It is also writable for during RUN of CPU. Refer to "13.2.11 About writing during RUN."

13.2.6. Parameter
Writes Parameter information.
Use it when only Parameter has been changed.
Carry it out in the RUN stopped state of CPU.

13.2.7. Comment
Writes Comment Data.
It can not be written in CPU of PC2 series.

13.2.8. Register
Writes Register Data.

Since following Register selection screen will be displayed, write after selecting the register where writing is To be
executed.
(Note) Please do not select GZ, GS or GF area of a device, because the areas are for system maintenance
purpose.
13-9
13.2.9. Situation list of selection "Write project data, at the same time.".
In case of writing to CPU, whether to write or not to write the project changes by the situation.
Selection of "Write project" O:Situation of selection,-:Impossible
Selection of "Write project"
Not selectable
Selectable Write Not write
No. Locked Locked
No
Check of Default Checked
checked
selection :Checked Gray Gray
1 All Program+Parameter+Comment - - -
2 All Program+Library+Parameter+Comment - - -
3 Program1 O
4 Program2 O
5 Program3 O
6 [Program1+Comment(P1+Ext.)] O
7 Project [Program2+Comment(P2+Ext.)] O
8 name [Program3+Comment(P3+Ext.)] O
9 mached [Program1+Comment(P1)] O
10 [Program2+Comment(P2)] O
11 [Program3+Comment(P3)] O
12 Parameter - - -
13 Comment O
14 Register O
15 RUNin I/O and Network drawing O
16 g All Program+Parameter+Comment - - -
17 All Program+Library+Parameter+Comment - - -
18 Program1 O
19 Program2 O
20 Program3 O
21 [Program1+Comment(P1+Ext.)] O
22 Project [Program2+Comment(P2+Ext.)] O
23 name [Program3+Comment(P3+Ext.)] O
24 un-mached [Program1+Comment(P1)] O
25 FB used [Program2+Comment(P2)] O
26 [Program3+Comment(P3)] O
27 * Parameter - - -
28 In case Comment O
29 Register O
un-
30 matched I/O and Network drawing O
31 All Program+Parameter+Comment O
FB Ver
32 All Program+Library+Parameter+Comment O
Pn
33 Program1 O
writing Program2
34 O
35 all Program3 O
36 rejects [Program1+Comment(P1+Ext.)] O
37 Project [Program2+Comment(P2+Ext.)] O
38 name [Program3+Comment(P3+Ext.)] O
39 mached [Program1+Comment(P1)] O
40 [Program2+Comment(P2)] O
41 [Program3+Comment(P3)] O
42 Parameter O
43 Comment O
44 Register O
RUN I/O and Network drawing
45 O
stoppe
46 d
All Program+Parameter+Comment O
47 All Program+Library+Parameter+Comment O
48 Program1 O
49 Program2 O
50 Program3 O
51 [Program1+Comment(P1+Ext.)] O
52 Project [Program2+Comment(P2+Ext.)] O
53 name [Program3+Comment(P3+Ext.)] O
54 un-mached [Program1+Comment(P1)] O
55 [Program2+Comment(P2)] O
56 [Program3+Comment(P3)] O
57 Parameter O
58 Comment O
59 Register O
60 I/O and Network drawing O
13-10
 Selection of "Write project" O:Situation of selection.-:Impossible
Selection of "Write project"
Not selectable
Selectable Write Not write
No. Locked Locked
No
Check of Default Checked
checked
selection :Checked Gray Gray
61 All Program+Parameter+Comment - - -
62 All Program+Library+Parameter+Comment - - -
63 Program1 O
64 Program2 O
65 Program3 O
66 [Program1+Comment(P1+Ext.)] O
67 Project [Program2+Comment(P2+Ext.)] O
68 name [Program3+Comment(P3+Ext.)] O
69 mached [Program1+Comment(P1)] O
70 [Program2+Comment(P2)] O
71 [Program3+Comment(P3)] O
72 Parameter - - -
73 Comment O
74 Register O
75 I/O and Network drawing O
RUNing
76 All Program+Parameter+Comment - - -
77 All Program+Library+Parameter+Comment - - -
78 Program1 O
79 Program2 O
80 Program3 O
81 [Program1+Comment(P1+Ext.)] O
82 Project [Program2+Comment(P2+Ext.)] O
83 name [Program3+Comment(P3+Ext.)] O
84 un-mached [Program1+Comment(P1)] O
85 [Program2+Comment(P2)] O
86 [Program3+Comment(P3)] O
87 Parameter - - -
88 Comment O
89 Not FB Register O
90 I/O and Network drawing O
used
91 All Program+Parameter+Comment O
92 All Program+Library+Parameter+Comment - - -
93 Program1 O
94 Program2 O
95 Program3 O
96 [Program1+Comment(P1+Ext.)] O
97 Project [Program2+Comment(P2+Ext.)] O
98 name [Program3+Comment(P3+Ext.)] O
99 mached [Program1+Comment(P1)] O
100 [Program2+Comment(P2)] O
101 [Program3+Comment(P3)] O
102 Parameter O
103 Comment O
104 Register O
RUN I/O and Network drawing
105 O
stoppe
106 d
All Program+Parameter+Comment O
107 All Program+Library+Parameter+Comment - - -
108 Program1 O
109 Program2 O
110 Program3 O
111 [Program1+Comment(P1+Ext.)] O
112 Project [Program2+Comment(P2+Ext.)] O
113 name [Program3+Comment(P3+Ext.)] O
114 un-mached [Program1+Comment(P1)] O
115 [Program2+Comment(P2)] O
116 [Program3+Comment(P3)] O
117 Parameter O
118 Comment O
119 Register O
120 I/O and Network drawing O

13-11
13.2.10. Confirmation of SFC Deletion and Program Writing.
13.2.10.1. Confirmation of SFC Deletion
At the time of writing, in case PLC side data is in SFC use state and PC win side data is in SFC non-use state,
confirmation whether SFC program data be deleted is asked.

When not deleting the data, click the [Cancel] button. Writing in PLC will be terminated.
In case data may be deleted, after entering password "#W” click [Continue] button.
Writing in PLC is carried out after deleting SFC Program data.

13.2.10.2. Confirmation of Program Writing

When carrying out only writing of Ladder Program, since the equipment may become inoperative, confirmation
whether to carry out writing is asked.

When not carrying out writing, click [Cancel]. Writing in PLC will be terminated.
When carrying out writing, after entering the password"#W” click [Continue]. Writing in PLC will be carried out.

13.2.11. SFC memory extension correspondence

In the case of split 1 mode, following message will be displayed if the P1 (Program No.1) program capacity has
crossed 16KW during SFC conversion (build).
Click [OK] after confirming that the object PLC is corresponding to SFC memory expansion. Program will be written
into SFC memory extension.

13-12
*1
O Writing possible
*1 Confirmation of SFC deletion
*2 Confirmation of Program Writing
*3 Writing not possible(Operation mode does not tally)
*4 Writing not possible(Capacity does not match)
PLC CPU side
SFC Data Yes No
CPU PC3J PC3J
Mod
Writing Data PC2 PC2
PC1 PC1
All Programs
*2 *1 O O
+Parameter+Comment
PC3J Program *2 O *3
PC1 Parameter O O *3
0 Comment O O *3
Register O O *3
I/O and Network drawing O O *3
Nil All Programs
+Parameter+Comment *1 *4 O
*3
Program *2 *3 O
PC2 Parameter *3 *3 O
PCwinside

Comment *3 *3 O
Register *3 O O
I/O and Network drawing *3 O O
All Programs
*4
+Parameter+Comment O O O
PC3J Program O O *3
PC1 Parameter O O *3
0 Comment O O *3
Register O O *3
I/O and Network drawing O O *3
Yes All Programs
+Parameter+Comment
Program
PC2 Parameter
Comment
Register
I/O and Network drawing

13-13
13.2.12. About writing during RUN

Since execution of Program is stopped temporarily during writing,

do not carry out writing during RUN, when object machine is under
operation.
Carry out writing during RUN in the Cycle halt state of the equipment
or machine.
Since the equipment can have unexpected operation depending on
the change in circuit, sufficient care must be taken for safety.

Following message will be displayed when CPU tries writing of Programs 1, 2 and 3 during RUN.

During operation of CPU, writing operation is inhibited for safety reasons.

In case writing during RUN has to be carried out, carry it out after confirmation the contents of
The warning once again.
Enter following 2 Character password.
Password : # W

Writing during RUN is risky at times. Execute the job after reading the message thoroughly, operation procedure is
as under.
(1) Enter [# W] in the Password item.
(2) When resetting after writing the program, select the check box for [Reset after writing {R}].
(3) Press [Continue].
(4) Program is written.

* Check box for [Reset after writing {R}] can not be selected with PC3 single mode.

Writing during RUN can not be carried out in case of Project and Parameters.

Except on special occasions, writing into CPU during RUN should be executed without putting a check [v] against
the check box, ''activate reset after writing into [ ] ", in the write dialog during RUN .
When check [v] is put against it, the PLC output will turn OFF. Therefore, utmost care on the device's condition
should be taken during these operations.
Check [v] Program counter after writing Output process
Not to be put START command Maintenance
To be put 00000 Turn OFF
In PCwin there is certainly no check on 'dialog open time check box' during RUN time.

13-14
13.2.12.1. Writing during RUN of a SFC use program
The following messages are displayed when the chart portion of SFC has change. Following message will be
displayed. 'Write' should be executed in the stopped state of CPU RUN.

13.2.12.2. Writing during RUN of a FB use program

Writing during RUN of a FB use program can be performed after PCwin Ver. 5.7.

Writing for during RUN is possible only when satisfying condition after the program is read from CPU.
Basically, if it is a correction of circuit for only of LD part, it is possible.
There are no differences in which the push address and the size which each FB uses ,compared with the origin
program(previously, program read from CPU) .

The check box of [Write program and then reset/start PC] cannot be selected.

Writing during RUN cannot be done ,if as follows. The following message is displayed.
Please stop RUN of CPU, and write the project program and the library program.

• In case of "FB in CPU and FB that specification is different." or "New FB was added."
• In case of project program are made new.
• In case of reading from an existing file.
• In case of import of LD program.

13-15
13.2.12.3. Correspondence list writing of FB use program during RUN
Writing
O:Exist, X:none
OK:Write, NG:not
PLC data
command During RUN
LD SFC FB
O O O NG
O O X NG
1 All program+parameter+comment
O X O NG
O X X NG
O O O NG
O O X NG
2 All program+library+parameter+comment
O X O NG
O X X NG
O O O OK
O O X OK
3 Program1
O X O OK
O X X OK
O O O OK
O O X OK
4 Program2
O X O OK
O X X OK
O O O OK
O O X OK
5 Program3
O X O OK
O X X OK
O O O OK
Program1+ comment (P1+Extension) O O X OK
6
Program1+ comment (P1) O X O OK
O X X OK
O O O OK
Program2+ comment (P2+Extension) O O X OK
7
Program2+ comment (P2) O X O OK
O X X OK
O O O OK
Program3+ comment (P3+Extension) O O X OK
8
Program3+ comment (P3) O X O OK
O X X OK

13-16
13.2.13. Initialization of the inside data of FB

When you write in FB library, please perform initialization of the inside data
of FB, and the clearance of Edge, a Timer/Counter, and a Timer/ Counter
currently depending on the contents of circuit change of FB library.
Keep in mind that equipment may carry out an unexpected motion if
initialization/clearance is not performed appropriately enough safely.
Completion of the writing of a program displays the following message.

"No" is chosen when not writing in FB library. Selection of "Yes" initializes/clears the data currently held inside FB.

In the following cases, "Yes" is chosen.

• "Defragment FB execution memory" was executed.
• The library was written in by specification change of FB.

The above-mentioned message is not displayed for writing during RUN.

Please execute "14.5 Inside FB I/O initial" separately when it is necessary.

13.3. Collating with the CPU

13.3.1. Binary checking of Program + Parameter
Program and Parameter information of tools and CPU is checked at the binary level.
Checking is carried out in the post build state of the SFC portion

Note) In case build result is same even if there is difference in SFC portion, it is not a checking error
(Instance) 1.Re-allocation of Number
2.Change of Comment
3.Shift of cell position of step transition etc.

13-17
13.3.2. Collate&Check of FB version when FB is used.
The collation of the FB version when FB is used can be individually confirmed.

The dialog is displayed as follows.

When The master library or the subset library is used by link setting for the project program.
And if the version of each FB is difference between the PCwin side and the PLC side .
When the FB library where the link setting use is done is standard 32KW and large capacity 60KW, this display is
not done.
FB of PLC is collated based on the FB list of the subset library on the PCwin.
FB not put on the project program is not targeted in collation even if registered in the FB library.

The following message is displayed when there is no difference.

13-18
13.3.3. In case of Register
Register data of tool and CPU is checked.

PCwin

13.4. Clear registers of CPU

PC10G is shipped to customer detaching battery, that’s why the status of register is not proper to use.
PC3JG has the function of data back up, however, PC10G does not since the data memory capacity of PC10G is
increased.
Therefore, Resister clear is needed after attaching battery on it before you use it.
Please Clear registers following the procedure.

Procedure:
1. Set up the mode of CPU operation as the same setting as the writing program to CPU.
2. Clear registers of CPU.
3. Enter pass word“ # W ”.

Object CPU operation mode:

PC2,PC3 separate,PC3 single,PC3JG separete/PC10 standard,
PC10 extension(Except PC1,MX),PCDL
Clear register:
Describing the range of register or address of CPU operation mode for CPU as below.
PC2,PC3 separate,PC3 single,PC3JG separate /PC10 standard,PCDL
------ All register except X,Y
PC10 extension ------ All register except X,Y,FR (Including GZ,GS,GF,JL,JS)

*Unavailable for register clear during RUN.

13.5. Operation Status of CPU

Current Status of CPU is displayed.

13-19
13.6. Stop/ Release stop of CPU
Following message is displayed during RUN of CPU or at the time of stop release.

CPU is stopped if [Yes {Y}] is selected. In such a case, following message is displayed.

Processing is cancelled if [No {N}] is selected. In such a case, following message is displayed.

Further, following message is displayed when CPU stops.

If [Yes {Y}] is selected, CPU stop state is released. In such a case, following message is displayed.

Processing is cancelled if [No {N}] is selected. In such a case, following message is displayed

13-20
13.7. Resetting of CPU

Following message is displayed when CPU is under RUN.

Close the dialog by pressing [Enter] Key.

Following message is displayed when CPU is under RUN.

CPU halt state is released if [Yes {Y}] is selected.

Processing is cancelled if [No {N}] is selected. (CPU halts).

Following message is displayed when CPU is in halt release state.

If [Yes {Y}] is selected, CPU is reset.

If [No {N}] is selected, processing is cancelled (halt state is release).

13-21
13.8. CPU Activation
Used when wanting to start the CPU without using restart.

Following message is displayed when CPU is under RUN.

Close the dialog by pressing [Enter] Key.

Following message is displayed when CPU is under halt.

If [Yes {Y}] is selected, CPU becomes halt free and is activated.

If [No {N}] is selected, processing is cancelled (under halt).

CPU is activated when it is in halt – free state.

13-22
13.9. Error Monitor of CPU

Error information for previous 8 times is stored in the CPU. It can be read in PC win.
When CPU mode is PC10 Extension mode, 64 times is stored in the CPU.

If [Details] is selected with the cursor, details of error are displayed.

13.9.1. Clear history

It is available to clear CPU error history.

Select [Clear ], a confirm message will be displayed.

Select [Yes] to clear the history.

*Available for Ver10 or later versions.

13-23
13.9.2. Detailed Display of Error Code:86
In case Error Code is 86, Communication Link Abnormality History and their countermeasures are
displayed. After selecting Error Number Line of Error Code 86, if [Details] button is clicked, following
display will show.

After selecting related Link Number line, if [Details]button is clicked, following display will appear.
Avert the error by referring to the estimated cause and method of its elimination.

13-24
13.9.3. The table for error-code of CPU.
CPU Error Details
Code Error Details Meaning of Error
13 Power Down 5V power supply voltage of the CPU unit has fallen. Make the input
voltage within the rated range.
21 Program Memory Parity Error Step No. of %1. %3 of %2 are erroneous.
Rewrite the Program.
E.g. >Application Instruction of Step No. 1234 of Program 1 is erroneous.
22 Fall in Battery Voltage Voltage of lithium battery for Memory Back up has fallen.
Either replace or connect lithium batteries.
23 Supplementary Information Sum Parameters are erroneous. Rewrite the Parameters.
Check Error
24 Undefined Instruction There is undefined application instruction in Step No. %2 of %1.
Modify and rewrite the program.
e.g. > There is undefined application instruction in Step Nos. 1234 of
Program 1.
25 No memory card Memory card is not mounted.
Mount the memory card.
26 Memory Card data Transfer Error Memory card is not mounted.
Mount the memory card.
27 Fall in Memory Card Battery Voltage Lithium batteries are week.
Replace the batteries.
28 Memory Card Data Error Data of memory card is erroneous.
Rewrite the Data in the Memory Card.
31 Excess Scan Time Execution time of %2 Program of %1 is too long.
Either re-set the Scan Timer value of the Parameter appropriately or modify
the sequence Program.
Instance 1>Execution Time of Main Program of Program 1 is too long.
Instance 2 > Execution Time of the overall system is too long.
32 System RAM error System can not read Data written in RAM correctly.
Reset start or switch on the power again,
35 System Control Processor Error Processing time of system Control Processor was excessively long. Reset
start or switch on the power again.
36 Word Processing Processor Error Processing time of word processing processor or Application Instruction
Operation was too long. Reset start of switch on the power again.
37 Bit Processing Processor Clock ErrorSystem clock in the bit processing processor exceeded the specified value.
Reset start or switch on the power again.
38 Bit Processing Processor Power Bit Processing Processor detected Power Down signal. Reset start or switch
down on the power again.
39 System Interruption Error Undefined interruption was caused due to excessive external noise etc.
Reset start or switch on the power again.
3A Address Conversion Error It is CPU Module fault.
Replace the CPU Module.
3B No response from Bit Processing It is CPU Module fault.
Processor Replace the CPU Module.
3C I/O Port Error It is CPU Module fault.
Replace the CPU Module.
41 I/O Rack Usage of “F” Rack no. Selection Switch on I/O power supply module is set at “F”. Set it
at other than “F”.

13-25
42 I/O Module Parameter Error Mounting error or breakdown of I.O module of Rack No. %1 and Slot
No. %2.
Either re-mount the I/O module firmly or replace it.
Instance > Mounting error or breakdown of I/O module of Rack No. 1 and
Slot No. 2
43 I/O Module Error Error in High Function module (high speed counter, analog input etc.) or
fuse disconnection of output module of Rack No. %1, Slot No. %2.
Either replace the fuse of the output module or remove the fault referring to
each module manual.
Instance > Error of output module of Rack No. 1 and Slot No.1.
44 I/O Address Bus Parity Error Either it is poor connection or disconnection on I/O cable in the selector
module of I/O power supply module of Rack No. %1.
Either re-connect the I/O cable properly or replace it.
Instance > I/O Power supply module of Rack No. 1….
45 I/O Rack No. Duplication Either the setting of Rack No. Selection switch on selector module or I/O
Power supply module is “O” or it overlaps with other Rack. Ensure that
there is no duplication of setting of Rack No. selection switch.
46 I/O Address overlap Address area occupied by Rack No. %1 and Rack No. %2 is overlapping.
Set the I/O Address Selection switch properly.
47 I/O Power Supply Power Down 5V power supply voltage on add-on I/O rack side or I/O power supply
module has fallen. Make the input within the rated range.
48 I/O Table Checking Error Set Parameter of Rack No. %1 and Slot No. %2 and I/O module state are
different.
Set Parameter : %3
Mounted Module : %4.
Reset the parameter correctly.
Instance > Setting off Rack No. 1, Slot No. 2.…………
Set Parameter : HPC Link
Mounted Module : ME-NET
49 I/O Address Setting Error I/O Address of Rack No. %1 exceeds “7FF”.
Change the I/O Address allocation of Set Parameter.
Instance> I/O Address of Rack No. 1
4A I/O Table Checking Error Slot No. not in the slot number of the base of Rack no. %1 is set. Reset
the Parameter correctly.
Instance > I/O Address of Rack No. 1
71 Application Instruction Error 1 Operand value or operation result of application instruction of serial no. %2
or Step No. %1 of Program %1 is outside the defined range.
Rectify the Sequence Program or Data.
Instance> Application Instruction of Serial No. 0002 of Step No. 00023 of
Program 1……….
72 Excess User Program Stacking It is calling itself in the subroutine.
Modify the sequence program.
73 No END Instruction END instruction was not executed between 2 executions of START
instruction.
In case there are more than 2 START instruction, make it one.
74 No START Instruction There is no START instruction in the sequence program. Add the START
instruction.

13-26
75 Master control error 1.Nesting of Master Control in program %1 is exceeding 16 level.
2.MC instruction (%2) and MCR Instruction (%3) in Program %1 are not in
pairs.
3.MCR Instruction or MC Instruction is note there in program %1
Change the above message at the value of error related information.
Make the nesting within 16 levels or make MC Instruction and MCR
Instructions in pairs.
76 Label table Error 1.In Program %1, JMP Instruction is there but LABEL instruction is not there.
2.In Program %1, CALL Instruction is there but LABEL Instruction is not
there.
3.Sequence interruption is used in Program %1 and LABEL instruction is not
there.
4.One of START, END, PEND instructions is erroneous.
Change above message at the value of Error Related Information .
Rectify the sequence Program.
77 Parameter Set Value Error Set value of parameter “%2” of Program %1 is outside the defined range.
Rewrite the parameter.
Instance > Parameter “Program Capacity” of Program 1……
78 Application Instruction Error 2 Application instruction against special I/O Module of Step No. %2 of
Program %1 was executed against a slot not mounted.
Mount the special I/O module.
79 FOR – NEXT Error 1.NEXT instruction against FOR Instruction or FORN Instruction of Step
No. %2 of Program %1 is not there.
2.FOR Instruction or FORN Instruction against NEXT Instruction of Step
No. %2 of Program %1 is not there.
3.Nesting of FORN-NEXT Instruction or FOR-NEXT instruction of
Program %1 is exceeding 128 levels.
4.Loop count of FOR Instruction or FORN Instruction of Step No. %2 of
Program %1 is erroneous.
* Change the above message at the value of error related information 1.
Make pairs of FOR instruction or FORN instruction and NEXT
instruction.
Make the nesting below 128 levels.
Rectify the sequence Program so that the loop count does not exceed the
defined range.
7A RET Error CALL Instruction or RET instruction of step no. %2 of Program %1 are not in
pairs. Make the pairs of CALL and RET Instruction.
7B RET 1 Error 1.There is no RETI Instruction at interruption level %2 of Program %1.
2.RETI Instruction is being used in a place other than sequence Interruption
Program in Step No. %2 of Program %1.
Change the above message at the value of Error Related Information 1.
Add or Delete RETI Instruction.

13-27
7C Library Call Error Error during FB (Library) Call
1: It is not Library-enabled
2: Library is already under execution (Library was called from inside the library)
3: Label Number is outside the scope
4: Label Life is over
5: Label Number is not matching
6: SYS415 is not there
7: It is not useable program number
8: It is not useable operation pattern
9: SYS415 was executed twice.(There is no SYS416. )
7D PRG END Execution Either END Instruction is not there in the sequence Program or RET or RETI
Instruction is not there in subroutine.
Add END instruction or RET or RETI.
81 Special Module Over Allocation No. of used special modules is too many.
Reduce the number of special modules.
82 Special Module Parameter Error Mounting error or breakdown of special module of Rack No. %1 and
Slot %2. Either mount the special module properly or replace it.
83 Excess Number of Interruption No. of used External Interruption modules is over 4. Reduce their number.
Modules
84 Special Module Error Error of special module of Rack No. %1 and Slot No. %2. Remove the error
by referring to the manual for special module.
85 Link Parameter Error There is error in the setting of link parameter of Link No. %2 or Program %1.
Modify the Link Parameter.
86 Link Communication Error There is communication error in the link module set in Link No. %2 of
Program %1. Remove the error by referring to the manual of each link
module.
88 Excess Number of InterruptionNo. of used External Interruption modules exceeds 8.
Modules Reduce their number.
89 Link Module Allocation Error There is error in link Module Allocation Parameter of Rack No. %1 and Slot
No. %2. Modify the link Module Allocation Parameter.
8A External Interruption Error Interruption occurred due to excess external noise etc. or there is
breakdown of external interruption module.
Reset and start or turn the power off then on again. Or replace the external
interrupt module.
8B NC Communication Error 1. When Related Information is 1:1
NCOK Signal is ON in the initial state (1 sec.)
When related information is 1: 2
NCOK Signal does not turn on for 30 sec. At the start of communication.
When related information is 1: 3
NCOK turned OFF during communication.
<common>
Carry out communication resetting or reset start or switch on power
supply again. Replace the module in case error occurs again.

13-28
 8C NC Communication Error 2 When related information is 1:1
Communication stopped for 1 sec. PC -> NC
When related information is 1: 2
Communication stopped for 1 sec. NC -> PC
<Common>
Carry out communication resetting or reset start or switch on power
supply again. Replace the module in case error occurs again.
8D NC Communication Error 3 When related information is 1:1
2 Port RAM Error (Data Bus)
Write Data : %2
Read Data : %3
When related information is 1: 2
2 Port RAM Error (Address Bus)
<Common>
Carry out communication resetting or reset start or switch on power
supply again. Replace the module in case error occurs again.
8E NC Communication Error 4 Communication Data Check Error 1 (at the time of writing)
Carry out communication resetting or reset start or switch on power supply
again. Replace the module in case error occurs again.
8F NC Communication Error 5 Communication Data Check Error 1 (copy data)
Carry out communication resetting or reset start or switch on power supply
again. Replace the module in case error occurs again.
A1 Error of the sequence processingRefer to PC 3J Manual.
processor.
A2 RAM Data Error Refer to PC 3J Manual.
A3 RTC Error Refer to PC 3J Manual.
A4 RISC Program Error Refer to PC 3J Manual.
A5 RISC Program Alarm Refer to PC 3J Manual.
A6 System Program Error Refer to PC 3J Manual.
A7 System Program Alarm Refer to PC 3J Manual.
A8 No RISC Response Refer to PC 3J Manual.
A9 Sequence RAM Error Refer to PC 3J Manual.
AA System Parameter Error Refer to PC 3J Manual.
AB Flash ROM Write Error Refer to PC 3J Manual.
AC Batter Circuit Error Refer to PC 3J Manual.
AD Data Error Refer to PC 3J Manual.
AE Data Error unconfirmed Refer to PC 3J Manual.
AF Clock not set Refer to PC 3J Manual.
* %1, %2, %3 and %4 imply Error Related Information.
For details refer to the PC manual.

13-29
13.10. Setting of Data and Time in the CPU.

Date and Time on the CPU side can be set.

Method of setting is as under.

After directly entering Date and Time, click (Write) button.
Click (Read from CPU) or (Computer timer) and then click the (Write) button.

Reading from CPU

Date and Time are read in CPU win from the CPU built in clock.
In this case, first 2 digits of the western calendar are read from the internal clock.

Computer Internal Clock

Date and Time are read in CPU win from the built in clock.

13-30
13.11. Repair and Maintenance
13.11.1. Facility information memory
To select CPU, the information of the memory can be displayed.
To select PCwin, writable data size to the memory can be confirmed.

When select CPU

Readout and display facility information memory of the CPU

Note) I/O chart, network chart/comment/second and third comment can be deleted.
Usually they cannot be deleted.

When select PCwin

When select PCwin, click “Data size” button, display facility information used memory size of the opened project in
PCwin.

13-31
13.11.2. System Write
Change (change version) CPU.
After stopping RUN of CPU, follow the steps below.

1. [CPU]-Select [Maintenance information]-[Write system].

[OK] Touching the button displays the selection screen of the system transfer information table.

13-32
Select CPU you want to modify.
This section explains how to change PC10G.
[PC10G-CPU], Select [Open].

Select the version of the file that you want to change.

13-33
The present version of PLC and the version to be changed are displayed. Select [OK] after confirming.

Do not turn off CPU.

Do not disconnect the communication cable.

[OK] Press to back up PLC files.

13-34
Save PLC.

After backing up PLC data, upgrade the system.

13-35
13.12. Test mode

If circuit modification can be done with CPU as a static test mode, the circuit can be reverting to the previous setting
immediately. The modification which was done by the test mode can be applied. The function is available in PC10F, but
not with other CPU.
The function is only work for communication module named "CPU-USB".

PC10
Communications cable
Previou
s circuit

Circuit A
Test mode: setting

Circuit A’ Circuit change: A→A’

Circuit A’’
Test mode Circuit change: A’→A’’

Circuit A’’’ Circuit change: A’’→A’’’

Test mode: release

Previous circuit

Circuit A
Revert to the previous setting
immediately

PC10

If [Test mode] - [apply changing] is selected,

circuit change in the test mode is applied (hold to
circuit A’’’).

* If the CPU is written in the test mode, the fact is recorded in the history as a maintenance support function/circuit modification
check.

13-36
7SEG on PC10G panel to the left is turned on during the test mode as below.

PC10G-CPU
POWER RUN E/A
W
P2 P3
Run status in the test mode
L1 L2
L3

BATTERY MODE
1st./
2nd./

Normal run status

If you have the following operation during the test mode, the mode is automatically
cancelled and CPU is shut down.
 Disconnect network cable
 Quit PCwin
 Turn on/off CPU

When CPU is restarted, all the modification in the test mode will be invalid and the
previous program will be running.

13-37
13.12.1. Setting the test mode
To set the test mode, select [CPU]-[Test mode]
Password entry screen is displayed.

The password is #TEST.

After entering password, test mode setting screen is displayed to press [continue].

(1)

(2)

(1) Indicate test mode status

Test mode ON: Green, Test mode OFF: gray

(2) Indicate the changes to be held in the test mode. (note)

PRM: Parameter
PRG1: Program 1
PRG2: Program 2
PRG3: Program 3
FBD: FB Library
EV: Event monitor
PRJ/CMT/IO: Project, comment, I/O chart

To press [Setting] button, test mode will be running.

During the test mode, [Test mode] is displayed on the top of the screen.

To double click [Test mode], test mode setting screen is displayed.

There is no restriction for usual operations during the test mode. Stop and start CPU, write during running operation or
other usual operations are available. However, pay particular attention for cancellation the test mode automatically by
turning on/off CPU, or above operations mentioned above.

(Note) Parameters have system parameters and program parameters like PRG1/PRG2/PRG3. Therefore, if you write-in
a parameter, a message “PRG1/PRG2/PRG3 updated” is displayed.

13-38
13.12.2. Cancel test mode

To cancel test mode, select [CPU]-[test mode] or double click [test mode].then the test mode is displayed.

To press [cancel] button, test mode is cancelled.

The cancellation should be operated after all the updates done by the test mode are confirmed.
As soon as the test mode is cancelled, all the updates done by the test mode are invalid, the previous program will start.

Cancelled: during CPU stopping

If the test mode is cancelled, following message is displayed.

Cancelled: during running CPU

It depends on the updates in the test mode.

When the updates are in PRG1/PRG2/PRG3/FBD/EV/PRJ/CMT/IO, the test mode can be cancelled even running.
Password protection is provided to cancel in running similarly to write in running.

The password is #W.

After entering password, to press [continue], the test mode is cancelled and return to the program.

13-39
 If the update is in PRM, test mode cannot be cancelled during running.
The following message is displayed.

13.12.3. Apply test mode updates

To apply the test mode updates, select [CPU]-[test mode] or double click [test mode]. Test mode setting screen is
displayed.

To press [Apply update] button, the test mode updates are applied.
Be sure to confirm the update contents first, operate [Apply update] button.
To press [Apply update] button, the updates completed in the test mode are all in operation and the test mode will be
cancelled.

13-40
14. Monitor
14.1. Operation Outline
It indicates how to shift the screen in the operation during monitoring.
Start of operation is regarded as SFC sheet on the monitor.

Select action and click

Press the [Enter] key [Action Program] button.
here or double-click. Direct jump in case action is
Action Block
1 number ,minus "AQ=R"
SFC Window

Ladder Window
Press [Enter] key here or
double click.

Sub SFC Window

Press [Enter] key here or

double click.

14.2. Monitor Start / Stop:[Monitor] – [CPU Monitor Start]

14.2.1. Monitor Start :[Monitor] – [CPU Monitor Start]
By selecting [Monitor] – [CPU Monitor Start] on the Menu Bar, simultaneously with displaying
the Process Status Monitor Window (14.3.4 Process Status Monitor : [Monitor], CPU monitor
is started.

14.2.2. Monitor Halt :[Monitor] – [CPU Monitor Halt]

By selecting [Monitor] – [CPU Monitor Halt] on the Menu Bar, simultaneously with closing the
Process Status Monitor Window (14.3.4 Process Status Monitor : [Monitor], CPU monitor is
stopped.

14-1
14.3. SFC Chart Monitoring
14.3.1. Display of Execution History
If monitoring is started from the menu with SFC chart in displayed state, execution state of
each step of SFC is displayed on the monitor. As for Monitoring Results, "Executed Steps"
"Activated Steps" "Unexecuted Steps" are displayed in color.
Executed : Green
Activated : Orange
Unexecuted : No color
Display color can be changed with the help of [Option] -- [Customize].

Executed

Unexecuted

Active

Based on these monitoring results, execution paths and active steps in selective branching
can be known.

Executed display is automatically cleared (unexecuted state) when a return to the initial step is
made at the end of 1 cycle (when initial step is under activation).
Further, when "MOR" of Process Control Input turns "ON", executed display is cleared.

In case of SFC chart which does not return to the initial step at the end of 1 cycle, clear the
executed display by controlling "MOR" of Process Control input.

14-2
14.3.2. Hold Action Display
Normal actions specified in each step are not executed in the inactive state. Therefore,
monitoring of action specified in a step that is in inactivate state, has no meaning. In other
words, attention may be paid only to the step in active state. However, in case of action where
hold system has been set, execution of action is continued till resetting even in inactive state
takes place. Therefore, "H" mark implying "Hold Action" is displayed against the step having
hold action (action that continues execution), on SFC chart monitor. "H" mark disappears
when action is reset.

There is held action

(Action whose execution is
being continued)

14-3
14.3.3. Monitor with Step Elapsed Time
When setting of Step Elapsed Time is carried out in the action block of each step, present
value of Timer control (1) is displayed.
As for the timing of output, scanning is implemented only during active state and during
inactive state, there is no output.

It may be noted that this timer value and the timer value of step diagnosis sometimes differ.

Even when setting of step elapsed time is not carried out, step active elapsed time for all
steps can be monitored.

Display the time

required for step
(executed).

Display in real time in 0.1

seconds (under execution)

For carrying out this display, select [Display] – [Display Type] – [All Display] or [Step Elapsed
Time Display] on the menu.

14-4
14.3.4. Process Status Monitor:[Monitor] – [Process Status Monitor]
Process Status Monitor Window B is displayed by selecting [Monitor] - [Process Status
Monitor] on the menu bar.
However, it is valid only during monitoring.
CPU monitor is started simultaneously with the display of Process Status Monitor Window.

Further, jump to corresponding LD can be made by double clicking each button.

Further, if "Execution Step Search" is left clicked, active steps among the displayed processes
are searched and displayed at the middle.

Child Process execution

control program in Parent
process
Parent process

Process execution control program

Child
Process A
(SFC Chart) B
(SFC) C
(SFC) D
(SFC)

14-5
14.3.5. Step Diagnostic Error History : [Monitor] – [Step Diagnostic Error].
Step Diagnostic Error Window is displayed by selecting [Monitor] – [Step Diagnostic Error] on
the menu bar.
When setting of step diagnosis has been carried out on the action block of each step,
comparison of set value and current timer value of Step Action Elapsed Time is made and
alarm is given when the time is over.

Further, erroneous Step No. is displayed in R7F8~R7FF for Erroneous Step Search Monitor
(PC3JG Separate, PC10 Standard, Separate1~5, Single1~6 mode, PC10 mode)
It is displayed in JSEF8~JSEFF. (PC10 Extension mode)
On the basis of this Data, PCwin displays jump monitor to SFC including erroneous steps.
However, since there are only 8 Erroneous steps storage buffers, Data more than 8 numbers
is discarded.

Optional Step No. is selected and with the left click of "Jump" button, step cell of Process
sheet is automatically displayed by turning the monitor mode ON.
If this window is displayed in the monitor, monitor stops automatically.

Step diagnosis can be reset by turning ON the "DGR" in the Process Control Area of
PROC00(Process O). When reset, the buffer area is also cleared.

14-6
14.3.6. General Process Monitoring :[Monitor]-[General Process Monitor]
By selecting [Monitor] – [General Process Monitor] on the menu bar, execution state of each
process can be monitored generally.

COMMENT

Selecting the optional Process No., concerned process sheet is displayed by the left click of
"Jump" button.

14-7
14.3.7. Execution Action Search: [Monitor]-[Execution Action Search]
By selecting [Monitor] – [Execution Action Search] on the menu bar, list of actions currently
under execution is displayed.

Selecting the optional Action No., movement to the start of the concerned Action ladder is
made with the left click of "LD JMP" button.

14-8
14.3.8. Jump Display to Process from SFC Step
It is possible to jump display from Step to specified Program Number-Process/Sub-process
On SFC monitor.
Normally, jump to Action ladder Program set with AQ(Action Qualifier)or Input Pin of FB
Specified with bit device is given preference.

By creating Comment data based on following rules, it becomes possible to jump display to
Process from SFC step with Pcwin and Direct Circuit Monitor [DM-10WZ].

<Rules>
Setting Target :Comment Head of an optional step
Setting Method :[Pn-PROCnn],[Pn-PROCnn-SUBnn]
In case of jump to self-program, it is possible to omit "Pn-".
Instance of setting :Action Block Dialog

Instance of execution :SFC Monitor Screen

14-9
14.3.9. Flag Jump Display from SFC Step to FB Input Pin
During SFC monitor, it is possible to jump display from Step to Input Pin Contact Point of a
Specified FB Coil Block. Jump display to Coil Block Contact Point of Ladder only is not
Possible.

By carrying out setting of Action Block Dialog based on following rules, it is possible to jump
Display from SFC Step to Input Pin Contact Point with PCwin and Direct Circuit Monitor
[DM-10WZ].

<Rules>
Setting Target :Action Block Dialog Action of an optional Step
Setting Method :Bit Device specification of Action
* In case Action ladder Program (ACnnn)is specified with Action, jump display is
made by giving precedence to Action Ladder Program.

Instance of Setting :Action Block Dialog

Instance of execution :SFC Monitor Screen => Ladder Monitor Screen

14-10
14.4. LD Monitor
If [Monitor] – [Monitor Start] are selected with LD window in the displayed state, LD monitor
will start.
Moreover, monitoring state is automatically achieved even when a jump from SFC is made at
the time of SFC in monitoring state.

Monitor displays the current value of Timer/ Counter, Contact / Coil state and the contents of
data memory specified with Operand of Application Instruction,

The monitor result of the function operand could be changed to Hex, Dec or Oct via the choice
in menu Select - [Set] - [Operate] - [Type of Register Contents].

If the CPU is PC10, it is possible to monitor the status of contact functions.

14-11
14.4.1. Ensued Monitoring

14.4.1.1. LD
By double clicking contact point at the time of monitoring LD, jump to that coil can be made.
Moreover, by double clicking the left of the coil, return to the original contact position is made.
Tracing up to a maximum of 16 steps can be made.

Double-click

14-12
14.4.1.2. Function Block Internal Monitor
When monitoring LD, by double clicking Function Block, that Function Block can be monitored
internally. And double clicking Input Pin or Output Pin of the Function Block, jump to
corresponding contact point, coil can be made.
Further, by left double click of that coil, return to Output Pin position of original Function Block
is made.
It is not possible to simultaneously display Ladder Monitor and Internal monitor of Function
Block.

With [Close], Internal Monitor of

Function Block is terminated
and return to Ladder Monitor is
made.

14-13
14.4.1.3. Ensued Monitoring of inside Function Block global point of contact
By double clicking global contact point at the time of FB inside monitor, jump to that coil can
be made.(global contact point: Point of contact to step over FB and to achieve transfer of
register data) A jump is performed to a call side program or other FB.
Moreover, by double clicking the left of the coil, return to the original contact position is made.

FB-Inside Monitor

FB-Inside Monitor

14-14
14.4.1.4. Ensued Monitoring of flag contact
When the LD monitor running, double-click the flag contact can jump to the SFC page.
Jump from the ladder to flag contact of the steps only limited the bit address of EK device.

14-15
14.4.2. Action Monitor
At the time of LD Monitor, execution state of the Action is displayed with the help of ON/OFF of "LABEL
Command".

14.4.3. Continuity monitor

The continuity monitor display monitor can be set by "Change to continuity monitor display" of
[Option]-[Configuration]-[Operation]of the menu. Contact/Coil/Bar/NOT is expressed by the display color.

Notes
•Edge (PTS,NTS) /function cannot continuity monitor display.
•The display with the ladder window might not be able to continuity monitor display in case of Block on
the way.

14-16
14.5. Register and I/O Address Monitor
[Register – I/O Address Monitor] is selected on the Monitor Menu.
This screen is used combined with monitor.

14.5.1. Setting of monitor address

14.5.1.1. Batch setting of monitor address

Two modes can be selected in Register and I/O Address Mode:
(Note) Please do not select GZ, GS or GF area of a device, because the areas
Are for system maintenance purpose.

1) Address Selection Mode

Select a target address from the program, device and display area.
Hold the set value with [Close]. When re-displayed, the display with the last address will
appear.

2) Address Input Mode

Input a target address.
For moving (shifting) address on the same device, you can scroll up or down.
Hold the set value with [Close]. When re-displayed, the display with the last address will
appear.

Header address input

Scrollable

14-17
14.5.1.2. Individual setting in address

(1) Add
When selecting [Addition of address], Address Input Screen will be displayed.

Enter the address after selecting Program No. and Device.

If block specification is made, those block addresses are added at a time.
Click [OK] when setting is complete.

(2) Change
Place the cursor on the address to be changed and when [Change] is selected, Address Input Screen
will be displayed.

Enter the contents of change and click [OK].

(3) Erase
Place the cursor on the address to be erased and click [Erase]. Address will be erased.

(4) Clear
If [Clear] is clicked, following message will be displayed.

If [Yes] is selected, all set addresses will be erased.

(5) Read
A click of [Read] displays the address saved by [Save].

(6) Save
A click of [Save] saves the address displayed now.
14-18
14.6. Time chart monitor
ON/OFF time chart is displayed by specifying the coil address in the connected PC.

Both kinds of Time Chart Monitors. are available.

1) Time chart monitor (generally)
Sampling specified address via PCwin periodically and displaying the result.
2) Time chart monitor for scan
Sampling specified address and scan states of CPU, and displaying the result.

Both kinds of Time Chart Monitor specifications are as follows.

Time chart monitor (generally) Time chart monitor for scan
Requirement CPU PC2/PC3 series, MX PC3JG(PC3JG-P)
PC10 series PC3JB-G(PC3JB-GP)
PCDL PC3JP-G(PC3JP-GP)
Plus PC10 series
Plus
Requirement CPU All CPU mode PC3JG / PC10 Standard mode,
mode PC10 Extension mode,
PC10 mode
Plus Extension mode
Requirement PCwin Ver2.1 Rev00as follows Ver7.2 Rev01as follows
version
Sampling points 1 - 32 points 1∼ 64 points
Sampling precision 0.1second *1 1 scan *2
Sampling volume 0.1second∼ 600second 1∼ 6000 scan
Scale width 0.5/1/2/4 (s/div) 5/10/20/40 (scan /div)

* 1) When ordered structure monitor is processing, the time scale difference could be occurred
Because of this, only 0.2 sec can be selected in the case of layer structure monitoring.
* 2 Sometimes the monitor is not available because of different setting of the communication methods (the
baud rate and the order setting when CPU specified)
(If each scanning cannot be monitored, the monitor is automatically stopped.)
The baud rate when CPU is specified should select AUTO..
14-19
14.6.1. Activation of time chart monitor
Select the [time chart monitor] in the monitor menu.

The first time activation of time chart monitor after the start of PCwin will become as shown in new status
display above.
The previous setting will be reflected from second time onwards. However, the sampling data will get
erased.

14-20
14.6.2. Address setting

Address setting dialog is displayed by button.

14.6.2.1. Title setting

Up to 50 half sized characters can be input into the title column (field).
Project name (Program name of parameter: system) will be reflected.

14-21
14.6.2.2. CPU operation mode setting
Set the CPU operation mode. Please match it to the operation mode of the monitoring CPU.
Time chart function can be independently executed even when no CPU data [SFC - LD program] is
present in PCwin.
The operation mode will automatically switch over to the selected mode when PLC data [SFC/LD
program] is present. Therefore, no special setting is required in that case.

14.6.2.3. Setting of scan unit

Available only when CPU is on PC3JG separate / PC10 Standard, PC10 Extension, PC10
mode, Plus Extension mode.
Please select the kind of Time Chart Monitor.
Check ON : In the case of Time Chart Monitor for scan
Check OFF : Time chart monitor (generally)

14.6.2.4. Change page

Available only when CPU operation mode is PC3JG separate / PC10 Standard, PC10 Extension, PC10
mode, Plus Extension mode whilst scan unit is ON.
For scan unit time chart, the max setting value of address is 64.
Make a selection after value 33 has been set.

14.6.2.5. Line color

The value of wave color could be set up to 64.
All channel turned to be sky blue by setting output.
The setting is recorded in computer after the setting finished. (It is cannot be recorded by the unit of file)
It is not required to do other settings after the first setting finished.

14-22
 Select the [Line Color] button, the following picture will be displayed.

14.6.2.6. Program No. selection

Select the program No. to be sampled.

14.6.2.7. Address setting

Set the address to be sampled.
All bit device addresses available in each CPU operation mode can be set.
Any number of addresses can be set if the range is ch1-ch64. Setting of other area reference address and
identical address is also possible. (Only for scan unit time chart which could be set from ch33 to ch64.)
Already registered comments, if any, in the comment field (column) will be reflected. Up to 50 half sized
characters can be input.
The comment inputted in the comment field (column) will be registered independently, exclusively for Time
chart. Hence, it will not reflect on the original registered comments.
Non-display check box is for Time chart Display / no display selection. It will turn to [display] with out
putting any check v, the moment address has been set.

If you click button, you can select the address among the address list..

14-23
14.6.2.8. Continuous address input

Following is the procedure

1) Display the address setting dialog by using [Edit] button.
2) Input the address of the coil to be displayed into the address field (column) of the concerned channel.
3) Set the channel No. of channels of continuous input into [a header channel]or set the cursor on the
address field (column) used as header channel.

4) Input the count of continuous input into [count].

The existing addresses also should be renewed.

5) Following will be displayed when [continuous address input] button is clicked.

14-24
14.6.2.9. Monitor starting trigger
Execute the setting of monitor starting trigger.

Following is the procedure

1) Specify the channel, which will become the monitor start trigger.

List box of the trigger to be selected will be displayed when button is pressed. Channels whose address
has already been set will be displayed in the selection list. Sampling will not start in the case of "no

setting".

14-25
2) Set the mode of trigger channel for starting the monitor.

When button is pressed, list box of the selected trigger mode will be displayed.

• OFF→ON: Sampling will start when the channel address condition set on the monitor start trigger turns ON
from OFF.

• ON→OFF: Sampling will start when the channel address condition set on the monitor start trigger turns OFF
from ON.

• ON: Sampling will start when the channel address condition set on the monitor start trigger turned ON.
• OFF: Sampling will start when the channel address condition set on the monitor start trigger turned OFF.

3) Trigger detection condition can be set. Following screen will be displayed when [detection conditions]
button is pressed. Besides the channels set in the monitor start trigger as explained in above 2),
trigger conditions for another eight more channels can be set.

(Example)
Following monitor start conditions will create a timing chart as shown below.

Time Chart Monitor start

Ch01 Start up

ON ON
Ch02 OFF

ON
OFF OFF
Ch03

14-26
14.6.2.10. Monitor stop trigger setting.

Following is the procedure

1) Specify the channel for setting monitor stop trigger.

The list box of the trigger to be selected will be displayed when button is pressed. Channels
whose address has been already set will be displayed in the selected list. Sampling will not stop in the
case of "No setting".

14-27
2) Specify the mode of channel for stopping the monitor.

List box of the trigger mode to be selected will be displayed when is pressed.
• OFF→ON: Sampling will be stopped when the channel address conditions set on the monitor stop
trigger turns ON from OFF.

• ON→OFF: Sampling will be stopped when the channel address conditions set on the monitor stop
trigger turns OFF from ON.

• ON: Sampling will be stopped when the channel address conditions set on the monitor stop trigger
turned ON.
• OFF: Sampling will be stopped when the channel address conditions set on the monitor stop
trigger turned OFF.

3) Trigger detection condition can be set. Following screen will be displayed when [detection
conditions] button is pressed. Besides the channels set in the monitor stop trigger as
explained in above 2), trigger conditions for another eight more channels can be set.

For details, please refer the timing chart of monitor start condition explained above.

4) Delay time for stopping the monitor can be set up to 0-300 seconds in the unit of 1 second each.
After activating the monitor stop trigger, monitor should be stopped after running it for the
prescribed period of set time.

14-28
14.6.2.11. Ddress ALL CLEAR

Following screen should be displayed by pressing the [Address all-clear] button for clearing
and resetting an address or a comment already set.

Press [OK] button when an address is set newly after clearing the previous setting.

14-29
When [cancel] button is pressed, address will get cleared and the system will return to
Address Setting Dialog.

Press [OK] button once all the settings are complete.

14-30
14.6.3. Monitor starting

Start the monitor by pressing the [monitor] button.

Monitor can not be started if address has not been set.

In Time Chart Monitor, if it is not acquired at the set sampling interval, "ALARM:TIME OVER"
is displayed in the lower right.

When "ALARM:TIME OVER" is displayed, it is not acquired at the set sampling interval. It is
displayed as an alert.
If the sampling interval is 100ms, change the sampling interval to 200ms and confirm whether
it improves.
If it does not improve even when the sampling interval is set to 200ms, check the
communication environment, for example, to see if the environment is highly networked.

14.6.4. Monitor stopping

It is used for stopping the monitor compulsorily.
Gray display of monitor stop button will disappear (get cancelled) after clicking [monitor start].

Stop the monitor by pressing [stop].

14-31
14.6.5. All Channel Display

All channel display check-box is meant for selecting Display / No display of all channels (ch1

∼ ch32).
When no check v is put against, display as shown below will appear in the order of channel

No.

Address against which a check v is put in the non-display check box by the [address set]
dialog will not be displayed. Addresses without any check v will be displayed in the order of
channel No.

14-32
 When check v is put, all channels (ch1 ~ ch32) will be displayed as shown
below.

Channel against which a check v is put in the non-display box by the [address set] dialog
will also be displayed.

14.6.6. Time measurement

Time from point 1 to point 2 is measured.

1. 2.

Measuring Time

Following is the procedure.

1) Set point 1. When [point1] button is clicked, point will be displayed as 1. in the above
diagram.
Position of the point can be moved (shifted) by using the left/right arrow button.
14-33
 2) Set point 2. When [point 2] button is clicked, 2. as shown in the above diagram will be
displayed.
Position of the point can be moved (shifted) by using the left / right arrow button.

14.6.6.1. Measurement time display

After point setting, the measurement time from point 1 to point 2 will be displayed.

In the case of Time Chart Monitor (generally)

In the case of Time Chart Monitor for scan

14.6.7. Scale change

Change of scale (time axis).

In the case of Time Chart Monitor (generally)

Following list box will be displayed when is clicked.

Scale can be selected from these 4 types and then changed.

(Initial value is set as 1s/div)

0.5s/div(Initial value) When changed into 4s/div.

14-34
 In the case of Time Chart Monitor for scan

Following list box will be displayed when is clicked.

Scale can be selected from these 4 types and then changed.
(Initial value is set as 10/div)

14.6.8. Open file

File for the saved time chart will be opened
In the case of Time Chart Monitor (generally) : *.tm1
In the case of Time Chart Monitor for scan : *.tm2

File dialog will be displayed when [open file] button is clicked.

Specify the place (location) of file by button.

Click [open] button after selecting the file to be opened.

14-35
14.6.9. Open a CSV File
Open the CSV file for the time chart.

Pressing the [File Open] button will display a file dialog.

Set File of type to CSVFile (*.csv).

To specify the save destination of the file, select the button.

Select the file to open, and press the [Open] button.

Note:
The input and output of the CSV file for the time chart is only supported by the time chart
monitor (generally).
(They are not supported by the time chart monitor for scan)

The sampling setting can be imported, with no need for setting on PCwin, by creating a CSV
file for the time chart monitor using, for example, a text editor or Excel.

In addition, by saving the sampling result to a CSV file, the data can be utilized in other tools.

14-36
14.6.10. CSV File Format
When creating a CSV file for the time chart monitor using, for example, a text editor or Excel, write
the content in the order of the keyword of the item name, comma (,), and setting value in each line.
Example)
Text editor

EXCEL

The following table shows the item names. (Single-byte characters are distinguished from
double-byte characters. Note: PLC is single-byte characters).
When there is no item setting, a default is applied.
File format must be set.
Item name Content Default
File format Set TM1CSV1000. -
Title Set the screen title. -
Time when sampling stops No need to set in the case of condition setting. -
Number of sampling No need to set in the case of condition setting. -
Sampling interval Set 100 or 200. 100
PLC mode Set the CPU operation mode with a keyword PC10
(*).
Start trigger Set the CH No. of Start trigger. Disabled
Start trigger mode Set Start trigger mode. No setting
1: OFF → ON 2: ON → OFF 3: ON 4: OFF
Stop trigger Set the CH No. of Stop trigger. Disabled
Stop trigger mode Set Stop trigger mode. No setting
1: OFF → ON 2: ON → OFF 3: ON 4: OFF
Monitor stop delay Set 0 to 300. 0
Program number Set the program number. 1
Address Set the address for CH1 to CH32. -
Comment Set the comment for the address. -
(Sampling data) No need to set in the case of condition setting. -

14-37
* PLC mode keyword
PLC mode Keyword
PC2 mode PC2
PC3 Data area separate1mode PC3.S1
PC3 Data area separate 2mode PC3.S2
PC3 Data area separate 3mode PC3.S3
PC3 Data area separate 4mode PC3.S4
PC3 Data area separate 5mode PC3.S5
PC3 Data area single 1mode PC3.G1
PC3 Data area single 2mode PC3.G2
PC3 Data area single 3mode PC3.G3
PC3 Data area single 4mode PC3.G4
PC3 Data area single 5mode PC3.G5
PC3 Data area single 6mode PC3.G6
MX Data area separate MX.S
MX Data area single MX.G
PC3JG Data area separate PC3JG.S
PC10 Standard PC10.STD
PC10 Extension PC10.EX
PC10 mode PC10
PCDL mode PCDL
Plus Standard PLUS.STD
Plus Extension PLUS.EX

14-38
14.6.11. File Saving
The set address and the time chart monitor data can be saved.

File dialog will be displayed when [File Save] button is clicked.

Specify the place (area) for saving the file by clicking button.
For saving a new file, input the file name and click the [Save] button.

14.6.12. CSV File Saving

Data of the time chart monitor can be saved in CSV format.
The saved CSV file can be viewed with, for example, Excel.

Pressing the [File Save] button will display a file dialog.

Set Files of type to CSV File(*.csv).

To specify the save destination of the file, select the button.
To save a new file, enter the file name and press the [Save] button.
14-39
14.6.13. Printing
Printing of the time chart monitor screen where sampling has been executed will be done.

Print dialog will be displayed when [print] is clicked after displaying the monitor screen to be
printed.

Select print type/print range/print copies, and click OK to begin the print.

Print range
All : Print all wave data
Range : Print specified wave data
Now displaying. : Print displaying wave data

14-40
14.6.14. Display of comparison data

Time chart monitor is compared with time chart data saved.

Select the file that the comparison data is saved in.

The information of the address as same as the sampling address is loaded, and Display the
graph.

14-41
14.7. Time Chart Monitor (Multiple PLCs Compatible)
This function is supported by PCwin Ver19 1 Rev01 or later.
This section describes a time chart monitor compatible with multiple PLCs.
Specifies Address of several PLCs connected through the communication module and
displays the collection (sample rig) and time chart.

14.7.1. Time chart monitor before Ver. 19.13 R01 (Multiple PLC support)
For details, refer to "15.9.2.3 Enabling or disabling backup" of the network monitor setting.

14.7.1.1. Start Method

By selecting [Monitor]-[Time chart monitor (compatible with multiple PLCs)] from PCwin menus,
the time chart monitor (compatible with multiple PLCs) turns Start.

The initial Start of the time chart monitor after PCwin Start shows the new status as shown
below.
The second and subsequent times reflect the last configuration Description.

14-42
14.7.1.2. User interface
14.7.1.2.1.Screen positioning
Screen positioning of the time chart monitor (compatible with plural PLCs) is described below.

Time Chart Monitor (Multiple PLC Compatible) Screen

⑫
①
② ⑧ ⑨
⑦
⑩ ⑥ ④
③

⑬ ⑭ ⑮

No. Item Supplement

① Menu bar MENU Displays configuration.
② In the toolbar Details are described in section 14.1.2.2.
③ Acquisition Address (Bit Data) Displays module name, Address name, and comments of
the collected Bit address.
④ Acquisition Address (Analog Displays Address name, Address name, and comments of
Data) module other than the collected bits.
⑤ Graph display Displays the collection Address in a time chart.
⑥ Scale value Displays the scale of the chart relative to the analog Data
Max value and Min value of Address other than the
collected bit are set to auto scale.
⑦ Time horizon Time axis of the graph
⑧ Point 1 Axis for displaying values at arbitrary time
⑨ Point 2 Same as above
⑩ Current value (bit) Displays the bit value at point 1 and point 2.
*1 ⑪ Current value (analog Data) Displays analog values at Point 1 and Point 2
⑫ Measurement time display Displays the measurement time from point 1 to point 2.
⑬ Output filename Displays Output filename that has been set.
⑭ Status Bar Acquisition start, trigger wait, sampling in progress, etc.
Displays the current status
⑮ Display unit Displays and sets the time axis.

14-43
 *1) ⑪The display format of the current value (analog data) changes depending on the address
data type.

Number
Data Types Data Types Example
of bits
Bit 1bit －
Word (unsigned) 16bit Decimal (Hex) 22703(5BAFh)
Word (signed) 16bit Decimal (Hex) -29032(8E98h)
Double word (unsigned) 32bit Decimal (Hex) 790485536(2F1DDA20h)
Double word (signed) 32bit Decimal (Hex) -2071881760(848197E0h)
Single precision real number 32bit Decimal (With point) 265.000000
Double precision real number 64bit Decimal (With point) 33.000000
BCD(Word) 16bit BCD4 digits 0265
BCD(Double word) 32bit BCD8 digits 00000033

14.7.1.2.2.In the toolbar

The time chart monitor (supporting multiple PLCs) has the following toolbars.
Function by clicking the icon.
You can also select the same function from the menu in the menu bar.

Button Corresponding menu item Function Name

[File]-[Settings] Monitor Settings
[File]-[Open] Open
[File]-[Print] Print
[Monitor]-[Start] Starting Monitor
[Monitor]-[Exit] Monitor Exit
[Monitor]-[Point 1] Point 1
[Monitor]-[Point 2] Point 2

14-44
14.7.1.3. Monitor Settings
14.7.1.3.1. Start in Monitor Settings window

Left-click the toolbar icon,

Or, select [File]-[Settings] from the menu to Start Monitor setting window.

Perform various settings such as Address, data type, channel color, and trigger to be collected from
Monitor setting window.

14-45
14.7.1.3.2.Address selection
Start Address selection window by clicking any channel in Monitor setting window.
Select Address from Address selection window.

Address selection Step is shown below.

Step
1. Module selection
Specifies the target module.
This combo box displays module configured in the Communications module settings.

2. Program selection
Specify the target program.
Select from P1, P2, P3, and extension buttons.

14-46
3. Device Selection
Specify the target device.
Select the device displayed in the combo box.

4. Address selection
Specify Address that you want to collect.
Double-click Address to register with Monitor configuration. From Address listing
Select Address you want to collect.
Double-click to apply the settings to Monitor settings dialogue.
Comments, device names, and device codes are displayed based on backups collected by the
network Monitor.

14-47
14.7.1.3.3.Data type setting
Specifies the data type of Address set to the channel.
Select the data type from the data type column in Monitor setting window.

The following data types can be specified:

Data Types Number Data Types Number of

of bits bits
Bit 1bit BCD (word) 16bit
Word (unsigned) 16bit BCD (double word) 32bit
Word (signed) 16bit
Double word (unsigned) 32bit
Double word (signed) 32bit
Single precision real number 32bit
Double precision real 64bit
number

14.7.1.3.4.CH color setting

Specifies the color to be displayed in the time chart.
Select a color from the Color column in Monitor Settings window.

14-48
14.7.1.3.5.Display setting
Specifies whether or not to display the time chart monitor.
Set whether or not to display in the display column.

14.7.1.3.6.Trigger settings
Configure the "trigger" setting that controls the starting/ending of the collection by changing Data.
Select one trigger point for each start and end.
Select the CH to be set as the trigger from the start column or end column.
No selection is required for manual collection.

14-49
The trigger conditions can be set according to the data type as shown in the table below.
Data Types Conditions Overview
Bit ON Trigger is established when Data of the specified
channel is 1.
OFF Trigger is established when Data of the specified
channel is 0.
ON->OFF Trigger is established when Data of the specified
channel changes from 0 to 1.
OFF->ON Trigger is established when Data of the specified
channel changes from 1 to 0.
Word (unsigned) Greater than Trigger is established when Data of the channel
Word (signed) <value> is greater than the specified value.
Double word (unsigned)
Double word (signed) Less than Trigger is established when Data of the channel
Single precision real <value> is smaller than the specified value.
number
Double precision real
<value> or more Trigger is established when Data of the channel
number
is equal to or greater than the specified value.
BCD (word)
BCD (double word)
<Value> or less Trigger is established when Data of the channel
is less than or equal to the specified value.

The trigger selected CH is displayed. Select the trigger establishment condition.

The setting window is displayed in Description depending on Data type of the channel.
If the data type is a bit type, select the trigger establishment condition.
If the data type is other than bit type, select the value and the condition for satisfaction.

<Non-bit type>
<Bit type>

By setting Save range, sampling can be performed including the time before and after the trigger is
established.
If it is a start trigger, sampling is performed for the specified time before the start trigger is met, and
if it is an end trigger, sampling is performed for the specified time after the end trigger is met.
Specify the duration in msec from Save Range Edit box.

* Save can be set up to 2147483647 seconds.

14-50
EXAMPLE 1: CYCLE COLLECTION
- Only the start trigger controls the start and end of the collection.
- Can be used as a cycling Data (consecutive collections do not break collections).
parameter setting
Start trigger（CH） yes
Strat trigger mode OFF→ON ▲：Start trigger satisfied
Stop trigger（CH） no ▲ ▲ ▲ △：Stop trigger satisfied
Stop trigger mode －
Storage range
Storage（ms） 0
Collect type continuous
Retrigger（ms） 0
Collect（times） 2

EXAMPLE 2: CYCLE COLLECTION

- Collects data including Data (Save scope) prior to the start trigger establishment.
parameter setting
Start trigger（CH） yes
Strat trigger mode OFF→ON ▲：Start trigger satisfied
Stop trigger（CH） no ▲ ▲ ▲ △：Stop trigger satisfied
Stop trigger mode －
Storage range
Storage（ms） 2000
Collect type continuous
Retrigger（ms） 0
Collect（times） 2

EXAMPLE 3: CYCLE COLLECTION

- Starts and ends the collection only by the stop trigger.
parameter setting
Start trigger（CH） no
Strat trigger mode － ▲：Start trigger satisfied
Stop trigger（CH） yes △ △ △ △：Stop trigger satisfied
Stop trigger mode OFF→ON
Storage range
Storage（ms） 0
Collect type continuous
Retrigger（ms） 0
Collect（times） 2

14-51
EXAMPLE 4: CYCLE COLLECTION
- When the start trigger is met, the acquisition starts and ends when the stop trigger is met.
parameter setting
Start trigger（CH） yes
Strat trigger mode OFF→ON ▲：Start trigger satisfied
Stop trigger（CH） yes ▲ △：Stop trigger satisfied
Stop trigger mode OFF→ON
△
Storage range
Storage（ms） 0
Collect type Only once
Retrigger（ms） －
Collect（times） －

EXAMPLE 5: Analysis at Error Occurrence

- Click the Stop button to start or stop the acquisition by the start trigger.
- Save is performed including Data (Save scope) prior to the start trigger establishment.
parameter setting
Start trigger（CH） yes ■：Press stop button
Strat trigger mode OFF→ON ▲：Start trigger satisfied
Stop trigger（CH） no ▲ ■ △：Stop trigger satisfied
Stop trigger mode －
Storage range
Storage（ms） 2000
Collect type Only once
Retrigger（ms） －
Collect（times） －

EXAMPLE 6: Analysis at Error Occurrence

- Acquisition starts when the start button is pressed and the stop trigger is met.
- Turns Save including Data (Save scope) after a stop trigger is established.
Start trigger（CH） no ●：Press stop button
Strat trigger mode － ▲：Start trigger satisfied
Stop trigger（CH） yes ● △ △：Stop trigger satisfied
Stop trigger mode OFF→ON
Storage range
Storage（ms） 2000
Collect type Only once
Retrigger（ms） －
Collect（times） －

14-52
EXAMPLE 7: Analysis at Error Occurrence
- When the start trigger is set to Register, the trigger establishment is determined by comparing with the
set value.
- If the cycle is Data, only the start trigger is used to continuously collect Data for one cycle.
parameter setting
Start trigger（CH） yes
Strat trigger mode >0.3 ▲：Start trigger satisfied
Stop trigger（CH） no △：Stop trigger satisfied
0.3
Stop trigger mode － ▲ ▲ ▲

Storage
Storage（ms） 0
Collect continuous
Retrigger（ms） 0
Collect（times） 2

14-53
14.7.1.4. Starting Monitor

14.7.1.4.1.Collection settings

Left-click the toolbar icon,

Or, select [Monitor]-[Start] from the menu to Start the collection setting window.
The collection settings window is displayed each time you begin Monitor. Press the Apply button to
apply the setting.

In the collection settings window, set Save destination of the file and the number of collections. The
configuration Description is as follows:
Setting items Description
Save destination Sets the directorywhere the collection Data is Save.
File name Specifies the base filename for Save.
Save as "<filename>_NN_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.csv" when using Save.
Collection interval Specifies the interval, in milliseconds, at which Data is collected.
Collection time Specifies Data duration to Save to a single file.
Number of collections Specify one-time only or continuous collection
When continuous collection is set, retrigger time and collection count
specification are enabled.
Retrigger time Valid when continuous collection is set
Specify the amount of time before retrigger is enabled.
Collection count Valid when continuous collection is set
specification If you want to limit the number of times to collect, set the number of times.

14-54
14.7.1.4.2.Start of collection
Start sampling by pressing the Start button. When the collection starts, the buttons on the toolbar

are disabled except for the (Stop Collection) button and cannot be operated until the collection
is completed.

The chart area displays the most recent Data during collection.

14-55
14.7.1.5. End of collection

Left-click the toolbar icon ,

Or select [Monitor]-[Exit] from the menu to finish collecting.

14.7.1.6. Save
Save of Data is executed at the following timing.
・ When manually stopping Data load
・ When the end trigger condition is met
・ When the collection time limit is reached

14.7.1.7. Open
Reads the collected and Save of Data and displays it graphically. Clicking on the tool bar

displays JSON or CSV file selection window.

Selecting a file opens the selected file and displays it in a graph.

JSON: Settings only

CSV: Setting & Collection Monitor

14-56
14.7.1.8. Register scale indication
The selected Register will be registered in Auto Scale.

14.7.1.9. Point display

In the graph display screen, the time from point 1 (red) to point 2 (blue) is measured.

Click the or button on the toolbar to display the corresponding point bar.
You can move the point bar by dragging with the mouse or using the left and right arrow keys on
the keyboard when selected.
Next to the point bar is the date and time Data was collected.
If you use both points, the time difference is displayed in milliseconds.
If a point is installed, Data of each channel at that point is also displayed.
Data display Method differs between bit-type and non-bit-type cases.

For bit types

Draws a circle representing the bit ON/OFF on the channel line.
In the example, the red point turns ON and the blue point turns OFF.
e.g. Data representation of bit-type

For non-bit types

Displays the value below the legend.
Example: Non-bit type Data display

14.7.1.10. Print
Displays Output the selected Description to the printer.

14-57
14.7.2. Time chart monitor after Ver. 19.13 R01 (Multiple PLCs Compatible)
When monitoring time charts of several PLC, setting of communication modules and network
monitors and data backup are required in advance.
For details, refer to "15.9.2.3 Enabling or disabling backup".

When performing time chart monitoring for a single PLC (a project currently opened in PCwin), no
prior data backup is required.

14.7.2.1. Start Method

By selecting [Monitor]-[Time Chart Monitor (Multiple PLCs Compatible)] from PCwin menus, the
Time Chart Monitor (Multiple PLCs Compatible) turns Start.

The initial Start of the time chart monitor after PCwin Start shows the new status as shown below.
The second and subsequent times reflect the last configuration Description.

14-58
14.7.2.2. User interface
14.7.2.2.1.Screen positioning
Screen positioning of the Time Chart Monitor (Multiple PLCs Compatible) is described below.

Time Chart Monitor (Multiple PLC support) Screen

① ② ⑧ ⑫ ⑨
⑦

③ ⑥

⑪ ⑩
④
⑤

⑬ ⑭ ⑮

No. Item Supplement

① Menu bar Displays the menu configuration
② In the toolbar For more information, see 14.7.2.2.2 Toolbar
③ Acquisition Address (Bit Data) Displays module name, Address name, and comments of the
collected Bit address.
④ Acquisition Address (Analog Displays Address name, Address name, and comments of
Data) module other than the collected bits.
⑤ Graph display Displays the collection Address in a time chart.
⑥ Scale value Displays the scale of the chart relative to the analog Data
Max value and Min value of Address other than the collected
bit are set to auto scale.
⑦ Time horizon Time axis of the graph
⑧ Point 1 Axis for displaying values at arbitrary time
⑨ Point 2 Axis for displaying values at arbitrary time
⑩ Current value (bit) Displays the bit value at point 1 and point 2.
*1 ⑪ Current value (analog Data) Displays analog values at Point 1 and Point 2
⑫ Measurement time display Displays the measurement time from point 1 to point 2.
⑬ Output filename Displays Output filename that has been set.
⑭ Status Bar Acquisition start, trigger wait, sampling in progress, etc.
Displays the current status
⑮ Display unit Displays and sets the time axis.

14-59
 *1) ⑪The display format of the current value (analog data) changes depending on the address data
type.
Number
Data Types Data Types Example
of bits
Bit 1bit －
Word (unsigned) 16bit Decimal (Hex) 22703(5BAFh)
Word (signed) 16bit Decimal (Hex) -29032(8E98h)
Double word (unsigned) 32bit Decimal (Hex) 790485536(2F1DDA20h)
Double word (signed) 32bit Decimal (Hex) -2071881760(848197E0h)
Single precision real number 32bit Decimal (With point) 265.000000
Double precision real number 64bit Decimal (With point) 33.000000
BCD(Word) 16bit BCD4 digits 0265
BCD(Double word) 32bit BCD8 digits 00000033

14.7.2.2.2.In the toolbar

The Time Chart Monitor (Multiple PLC support) has the following toolbars.
Function by clicking the icon.
The same function can also be operated from the menu by selecting it on the menu bar.

Button Corresponding menu item Function name

[File]-[Settings] Monitor Settings

[File]-[Open] Open
[File]-[Print] Print
[Monitor]-[Start] Starting Monitor
[Monitor]-[Exit] Monitor Exit
[Monitor]-[Point 1] Point 1
[Monitor]-[Point 2] Point 2
Changing the Chart Time
―
Axis
Resetting the Graph
[Monitor]-［Analog chart display initial size］
Display Size
Zooming in on the Graph
[Monitor]-［Analog chart zoom-in］
Size
[Monitor]-［Analog chart display reduction］ Reducing the Graph Size

14.7.2.3. Monitor Settings

14.7.2.3.1.Start in Monitor Settings window

Left-click the toolbar icon,

Or, select [File]-[Settings] from the menu to Start Monitor setting window.

14-60
 Perform various settings such as Address, data type, channel color, and trigger to be collected from
Monitor setting window.

14.7.2.3.2.Setting the Monitor Setting Screen

The status of one PLC or multiple PLCs can be displayed simultaneously on a time chart monitor.
Use the checkbox to select whether to display one PLC or multiple PLCs.
To monitor multiple PLCs, check "Obtain from multiple PLCs".

If you check or uncheck “Obtain from multiple PLCs” when the monitor is already set, a message to
clear the data will be displayed.

Click Cancel to close the message.

Click [OK] to clear the setting of the address in the monitor setting window.
Perform the setting again.
14-61
14.7.2.3.3.About Modules
For single PLC (unchecked "Obtain from Multiple PLC")
When the address selection screen of the monitor setting screen is displayed, the same
module as the setting of PCwin communication module is displayed.

<Monitor setting screen display>

If PCwin communication module is changed after the address is registered, the communication module
becomes inconsistent and communication cannot be performed.

By pressing the button, the following message is displayed when the setting monitor setting
screen is displayed.

Setting a different communication module results in an error.

To match the module set in PCwin, click [OK].

Set the communication module again with the [Cancel] button.

14-62
<Monitor setting screen confirmation/Monitor start confirmation>
If the communication module of PCwin differs from the communication module set in the time chart monitor
window, an error is displayed in the following cases.
・When opening the monitor setting screen
・When the monitor start button is pressed

Set the communication module in PCwin and the same communication module as the monitor setting window in
the time chart.

2. Multiple PLC (Checked in "Obtaining from Multiple PLC")

When the address selection screen of the monitor setting screen is displayed, all
communication modules set in PCwin communication module are displayed.
It is possible to configure multiple PLC modules.

14-63
14.7.2.3.4.Address comment
When the Obtain from Multiple PLC checkbox is OFF (single PLC), comments are obtained from
projects that are currently open in PCwin.

If the Acquisition from Several PLC checkbox is ON, comments will be obtained from the
back-up even if the communication module selected in PCwin is selected for the module.
For backup, see section 16.9.7, Data Backup.

14.7.2.3.5.Clearing Addresses
To clear all address settings on the monitor setting screen, click [All Clear Addresses].

Click [Cancel] to close the message.

Click [OK] to clear the setting of the address in the monitor setting window.
Perform the setting again.

14-64
14.7.2.3.6.Address selection
When monitoring multiple PLCs, perform a backup with the network monitor before selecting
addresses.For backup with Network Monitor, see section 16.9.7, Data Backup.

Start Address selection window by clicking any channel in Monitor setting window.
Select Address from Address selection window.

Step
1. Module selection
Specifies the target module.
This combo box displays module configured in the Communications module settings.

2. Program selection
Specify the target program. Select from P1, P2, P3, and extension buttons.

14-65
 3. Device Selection
Specify the target device.
Select the device displayed in the combo box.

4. Address selection
Specify Address that you want to collect.
Double-click Address to register with Monitor configuration. From Address listing
Select Address you want to collect.
Double-click to apply the settings to Monitor settings dialogue.
Comments, device names, and device codes are displayed based on backups collected by the
network Monitor.

14.7.2.3.7.Data type setting

Specifies the data type of Address set to the channel.
Select the data type from the data type column in Monitor setting window.

14-66
 The following data types can be specified:

Number Number of
Data Types Data Types
of bits bits
Bit 1bit BCD (word) 16bit
Word (unsigned) 16bit BCD (double word) 32bit
Word (signed) 16bit
Double word (unsigned) 32bit
Double word (signed) 32bit
Single precision real number 32bit
Double precision real
64bit
number

14.7.2.3.8.CH color setting

Specifies the color to be displayed in the time chart.
Select a color from the Color column in Monitor Settings window.

14.7.2.3.9.Display setting
Specifies whether or not to display the time chart monitor.
Set whether or not to display in the display column.

14-67
14.7.2.3.10. Trigger settings
Configure the "trigger" setting that controls the starting/ending of the collection by changing Data.
Select one trigger point for each start and end.
Select the CH to be set as the trigger from the start column or end column.
No selection is required for manual collection.

The trigger conditions can be set according to the data type as shown in the table below.
Data Types Conditions Overview
Bit ON Trigger is established when Data of the specified
channel is 1.
OFF Trigger is established when Data of the specified
channel is 0.
ON->OFF Trigger is established when Data of the specified
channel changes from 0 to 1.
OFF->ON Trigger is established when Data of the specified
channel changes from 1 to 0.
Word (unsigned) Greater than Trigger is established when Data of the channel
Word (signed) <value> is greater than the specified value.
Double word (unsigned)
Double word (signed) Less than Trigger is established when Data of the channel
Single precision real <value> is smaller than the specified value.
number
Double precision real
<value> or more Trigger is established when Data of the channel
number
is equal to or greater than the specified value.
BCD (word)
BCD (double word)
<Value> or less Trigger is established when Data of the channel
is less than or equal to the specified value.

The trigger selected CH is displayed. Select the trigger establishment condition.

14-68
 The setting window is displayed in Description depending on Data type of the channel.
If the data type is a bit type, select the trigger establishment condition.
If the data type is other than bit type, select the value and the condition for satisfaction.

<Bit type> <Non-bit type>

By setting Save range, sampling can be performed including the time before and after the trigger is
established.
If it is a start trigger, sampling is performed for the specified time before the start trigger is met, and
if it is an end trigger, sampling is performed for the specified time after the end trigger is met.
Specify the duration in msec from Save Range Edit box.

* Save can be set up to 2147483647 seconds.

14.7.2.4. Open
Reads the collected and Save of Data and displays it graphically. Clicking on the tool bar

displays JSON or CSV file selection window.

Selecting a file opens the selected file and displays it in a graph.

JSON: Settings only
CSV: Setting & Collection Monitor

14-69
14.7.2.5. Print
Displays Output the selected Description to the printer

14.7.2.6. Starting Monitor

14.7.2.6.1.Collection settings

Left-click the toolbar icon,

Or, select [Monitor]-[Start] from the menu to Start the collection setting window.
The collection settings window is displayed each time you begin Monitor. Press the Apply button to
apply the setting.

In the collection settings window, set Save destination of the file and the number of collections.
The configuration Description is as follows:
Setting items Description Setting range
Save Sets the directorywhere the collection Data is Save.
destination
File name Specifies the base filename for Save.
Save as "<filename>_NN_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.csv" when using Save.
*1 File format Select type1(TM1CSV2001) or type2(TM1CSV2101)
Collection Specifies the interval, in milliseconds, at which Data is collected. 100~
interval 2147483647[ms]
Collection time Specifies Data duration to Save to a single file. 0~
2147483647[s]
Number of Specify one-time only or continuous collection
collections When continuous collection is set, retrigger time and collection count
specification are enabled.
Retrigger time Valid when continuous collection is set 0~
Specify the amount of time before retrigger is enabled. 2147483647[ms]
Collection Valid when continuous collection is set 2~
count If you want to limit the number of times to collect, set the number of 2147483647[times]
specification times.

14-70
*1 Select type1 (TM1CSV2001) or type2 (TM1CSV2101) for the file format.
type1 (TM1CSV2001) is a format of Ver.19.13R01 or earlier and can be displayed regardless of the
version.
type2(TM1CSV2101) is the format of Ver.19.14R01 or later. It cannot be displayed on versions
lower than Ver.19.14R01.

csv output data of type1(TM1CSV2001)

Display addresses and

collected values in separate
columns

csv output data of type2(TM1CSV2101)

Display addresses and collected

values in the same column

14-71
14.7.2.6.2.Start of collection
Start sampling by pressing the Start button. When the collection starts, the buttons on the toolbar

are disabled except for the (Stop Collection) button and cannot be operated until the collection
is completed.

The chart area displays the most recent Data during collection.

14-72
14.7.2.7. End of collection
14.7.2.7.1.Collection completed
Terminate collection by left-clicking the icon on the bar or by selecting [Monitor]-[End] from the
menu.

14.7.2.7.2.Save
Save of Data is executed at the following timing.
 When manually stopping Data load
 When the end trigger condition is met
 When the collection time limit is reached

14.7.2.8. Point display

In the graph display screen, the time from point 1 (red) to point 2 (blue) is measured.

Click the or button on the toolbar to display the corresponding point bar.
You can move the point bar by dragging with the mouse or using the left and right arrow keys on
the keyboard when selected.
Next to the point bar is the date and time Data was collected.
If you use both points, the time difference is displayed in milliseconds.
If a point is installed, Data of each channel at that point is also displayed.
Data display Method differs between bit-type and non-bit-type cases.

For bit types

Draws a circle representing the bit ON/OFF on the channel line.
In the example, the red point turns ON and the blue point turns OFF.
e.g. Data representation of bit-type

For non-bit types

Displays analog values for the address data type in the Point Value column.
In the example, the red point is the decimal value 520 (hexadecimal value 208) and the blue point
is the decimal value 776 (hexadecimal value 308).
Example: Non-bit type Data display

14-73
14.7.2.9. Zoom in/out
14.7.2.9.1.Time base scale
Enlarges or reduces the time axis (horizontal axis) of the displayed time chart.

【0.1sec】

【0.5sec】

【1.0sec】

【2.0sec】

【4.0sec】

14-74
14.7.2.9.2.Analog chart display
Zoom in or out the analog chart display width of the displayed time chart.
Enlarge, reduce, change to initial size from menu selection or icon.
(Enlargement can be changed from the initial size to 12 steps, and reduction can be changed from
the initial size to 3 steps)

<When operating from the icon>

Analog chart display

Analog chart display initial size
Analog chart zoom-in
<When operating from the menu>

[Normal display (initial display)

[Enlarged display (12-step enlargement)]

[Reduced display (3-step reduction)]

14-75
14.8. Event monitor
This function support PCwin Ver3.3 Rev00 or later.
PLC PC3JD/PC3JB support Ver. 2.40 of or later.
(Not applied to PCDL-CPU)
When CPU mode is used by the PC3JG separate 1
(a) Support PLC [PC3JG/PC3JG-P Ver. 1.70].
(b) Support PCwin Ver. 5.7 or later.

The amount of space you can configure for the event monitor depends on the version of PCwin.
PCwin Version Event monitor settable upper limit capacity
Ver.19.11R01 or later 128KByte
Ver.19.11R01 or earlier 64KByte
* If the capacity exceeds 64KBytes, the version of the write destination CPU must
support event monitor capacity expansion.

14.8.1. Creating of data for event monitor

In making the new data for event monitor, the following method is.
(1) Creating data by the toolbar
(2) Creating data by the project window

14.8.1.1. Creating data by the toolbar

(1) Click the following button in the toolbar.

(2) If the confirmation message is displayed, click [OK] button.

14.8.1.2. Creating data by the project window

(1) Right-click in "Project" of the project window, and click "Event monitor setting data addition".

(2) If the confirmation message is displayed, click [OK] button.

14-76
14.8.2. Opening/Reading of data for event monitor
In opening/reading the data for event monitor, the following method is.
(1) Reading project data in CPU
(2) Reading only the data for event monitor in CPU
(3) Importing the data for event monitor
(4) Opening the project file

14.8.2.1. Reading project data in CPU

The data for event monitor can be read from CPU with the project data according to the
following procedure.
(1) Make reading the data for event monitor effective.
Display the setting screen by clicking the "Option"-"Configuration" in the menu.

Select the check box of "Event monitor file open/save at the same time".

(2) Reading the project data in CPU

Click "CPU" - "Read Data" - "PC2/PC3/PC10 All Program+Parameter+Comment".

14-77
14.8.2.2. Reading only the data for event monitor in CPU
The data for event monitor can be read from CPU with the project data according to the
following procedure.
(1) Reading the data in CPU
Click "CPU" - "Read Data" - "PC3 Data for Event Monitor" "PC10 Data for Event Monitor".

14.8.2.3. Importing the data for event monitor

The data for event monitor can be imported into the opening project according to the following
procedure.
(1) Importing the data for event monitor.
Click "File" - "Import Data" - "Event Monitor".

14-78
14.8.2.4. Opening the project file
The data for event monitor can be opened with the project file according to the following
procedure.
(1) Make reading the data for event monitor effective.
Display the setting screen by clicking the "Option"-"Configuration" in the menu.

Select the check box of "Event monitor file open/save at the same time".

(2) Opening the project file

Click "File" - "Open", and Select the project file with the data for event monitor.

14-79
14.8.3. Saving/Writing of data for event monitor
In saving/writing the data for event monitor, the following method is.
(1) Writing project data to CPU
(2) Writing only the data for event monitor to CPU
(3) Exporting the data for event monitor
(4) Saving the project file

If event monitor data exceeding 64KByte is written to a CPU that does not support event
monitor capacity expansion, an error message is displayed.

Current event
monitor capacity

Set the capacity of the event monitor to 64K bytes or less, and then perform writing.

14.8.3.1. Writing project data to CPU

The data for event monitor can be written to CPU with the project data according to the
following procedure.
(1) Make writing the data for event monitor effective.
Display the setting screen by clicking the "Option"-"Configuration" in the menu.

Select the check box of "Event monitor file open/save at the same time".

14-80
(2) Writing the project data in CPU
Stop CPU.
Click "CPU" - "Write Data" - "All Program+Parameter+Comment".

14-81
14.8.3.2. Writing only the data for event monitor to CPU
The data for event monitor can be Written to CPU with the project data according to the
following procedure.

(1) Writing the data to CPU

Stop CPU.
Click "CPU" - "Write Data" - "Data for Event Monitor".

14.8.3.3. Exporting the data for event monitor

The data for event monitor can be exported from the opening project according to the following
procedure.

(1) Exporting the data for event monitor.

Click "File" - "Export Data" - "Event Monitor".

14-82
14.8.3.4. Saving the project file
The data for event monitor can be saved with the project file according to the following
procedure.

(1) Make saving the data for event monitor effective.

Display the setting screen by clicking the "Option"-"Configuration" in the menu.

Select the check box of "Event monitor file open/save at the same time".

(2) Saving the project file

Click "File" - "Save" or "Save As".

14-83
 14.8.4. Display of setting data for event monitor
Select the item of "Setting data of event monitor" in the project window to edit the data for event monitor.
(1) Double-click "2.Setting data of event monitor" in the project window.

(2) Double-click "Header" in the project window.

14.8.5. Setting of Header information

Click the "Header" tab to display and set the Administrative information.

Set the name of this data. Set the Click [Open]button to

title within the 24 characters and set import the file of event
Set the ID of this data. Set ID by
the sub title within the 30 characters. monitor which have saved.
4 decimal digit *2 and set sub ID
by 4 decimal digit. Be sure and
set ID. ID is collated with ID
specified by the start instruction,
and the event monitor starts only
in case of the same. Click [Save]button
to save the data
for event monitor.
Displays the total number of
bytes of event monitor data. It is
updated each time the
information in the operation
parameter table is set. Select CPU
If the total number of bytes is
mode to use.
exceeded, additional settings
cannot be made. Click [Update of table information]button
Also, writing to the CPU is not Click [Checking data]button to check to convert the comments of tables by
possible. the leaking data and the correction of the Specified batch update mode.
Please delete unnecessary address.
information. *1

*1 : The total number of bytes that can be set varies depending on PCwin version.
For more information, see the 14.8 Event Monitor PCwin versioning table.
If the setting exceeds the limit, the following message is displayed. Set it so that it is within the range.

14-84
14.8.6. Setting of the parameters

the status of the setting of the stored Select the parameter No. to
action parameters and the comments set and click [Detail
that were set at each the setting screen setting]button to Display the
are displayed. If the set data is good, setting screen of the action
“0” is displayed in [setting]item. If it is parameters. (Refer to
CPU mode which is not good, “0” is not displayed. So, “14.8.6.1 Detail setting of
selected in the header display the screen to set the action action parameters”)
data is displayed. parameters and confirm the content.

Select the parameter No. of the copying

source and click [Copy]button to display
the copying screen. (Refer to “14.8.6.2
Copying of action parameters”)

Select the cleared parameter and click

[Clear]button to clear the action
parameter. The confirmation message is
displayed. If it is OK that the selected
parameter is cleared, click [Yes]button.

Click [All clear]button to clear all the action parameter.

The confirmation message is displayed. If it is OK that Click [Checking data]button
all the parameters are cleared, click [Yes]button. to check the leaking data and
the correction of address.

14-85
14.8.6.1. Detail setting of action parameters

The No. of action CPU mode which is The No. of the stored tables
Set the size for the action parameter that
parameter that has selected in the header
of the table. has selected is displayed.
selected is displayed. data is displayed.

Set the comment of each

the action parameter. Select the forwarding
pattern for detecting
event.
Select each mode. If
"Type" is "Byte" or "Word",
Select the event type. Select the No. of the
forwarding pattern and
click [Edit pattern]button
to select the forwarding
data. (Refer to "14.8.6.1.1
Set the address of the Setting of forwarding
forwarding destination and pattern")
the number of the forwarded
data for the detected event.

14-86
14.8.6.1.1. Setting of forwarding pattern

The table No. that has The explanation of the forwarding

selected is displayed. pattern that has selected is displayed.

Select the forwarded data

for the detected event.

If “user data 1” or “user data

Select the unit (Byte or Word)
2” is selected in “Pattern”,
of the forwarded data for the this is effective. Set the
detected event. If “No data” is address and the number of
selected in “Pattern”, this is not
the forwarded source data
effective. and transformation type for
the detected event.

Select whether to forward

it(day, month, year, second,
minute, hour) or to forward it in
reverse order, when the time
data is forwarded.

It is specified whether the start

address of the forwarding data
is an even number address or
not. If “No data” is selected in
“Pattern”, this is not effective.

14.8.6.1.2.Copying of action parameter

(1) Operation
(1-1)Select of copying type
Select Whether only the action parameter is copied or action parameter + table is
copied.
(1-2)Setting of parameter No. of destination
Set the parameter No. of the destination.

14-87
 14.8.7. Setting of the table

Select the action CPU mode which is selected in the

parameter No. header data is displayed.

Forced ON/OFF
mark change to
red.

Select the cleared table No.

Select the source table and click [Clear] button to clear
No. and click [Copy]button the table. The confirmation
to display the copying message is displayed. If it is OK
screen. (Refer to "14.8.7.2 that the selected table is cleared,
copying of table content") click [Yes]button.

Select the No. of the table to set and Click [Checking data] Click [All clear]button to clear all the tables. The
click [Setting the table]button to button to check the leaking confirmation message is displayed. If it is OK
display the setting screen. (Refer to data and the correction of that all the tables are cleared, click [Yes]button.
"14.8.7.1 Setting of table content") address.

14.8.7.1. Setting of table content

The table No. that has CPU mode which is selected in

selected is displayed. the header data is displayed.
Set the address to detect. When
"Batch setting" is selected, "end
address" is effective.

The detected address is

Set the comparison value for the set from the specified

detected event. If "Byte" or " Word" start address to the

is selected in "Type" of "Detection specified end address.

mode", this is effective.

If "table information" is selected in "forwarding pattern", the set data is It is specified whether to set the table
forwarded. Select Whether table information is the numerical value or the data continuously. If "Continuous setting"
character string. If the type is the character string and the reference is selected, the next table can be set
comment is set, the comment of the specified address is set as the initial automatically, after the data is set and
value of the table information. click [OK]button.

14-88
14.8.7.2. Copying of table content

(1) Operation
(1-1)Select of copying type
Select whether copying into the same action parameter or into the another parameter.
(1-2)Setting of parameter No./table No.
Set the parameter No. and the table No. of the copying destination.
If "Copying the table to the table of the another parameter" is selected, Set the
parameter No.

14-89
14.9. I/O Recorder

Input-output signal status which PLC is sampling constantly can be read out and displayed by
time chart. While the time chart displays the current status, I/O recorder displays the past
status.

•CPU: PC10 or Plus

•Operation mode: Entire operation mode or Plus extension mode
•PCwin version: Ver. 8.1 or later or Ver.14.1R00 or later

Following is indicating the differences with time chart monitor.

I/O recorder

Read out and draw input-output signal status which PLC is sampling constantly.

Time chart monitor

Collect and draw signal status of the set-up address.

14.9.1. Mechanism of I/O recorder

PC10
PCwin (3)Read out
sampling (1) I/O recorder
(2)I/O recorder

(read-out button)

Sampling only constant

(6)Save (4)address setup
(7)Open
storage X/Y in PC10.
(5)Display time chart

I/O
recorder
Data

The set address can be saved.

(1) Sampling When X/Y 2048 point has unusual situation, store constantly
(2) Read out button Press I/O recorder readout button
(3) Read out Read out data in I/O data stores in PLC.
(4) Address setting Set address indicates in Time chart.
(5) Display time chart Display time chart.
(6) Save Save I/O recorder data and address setting data.
(7) Open Open stored file.

14-90
 2Displaying two types of time charts is available.
•Standard time chart: Displays by time scale
•Scan unit time chart: Displays by scan-unit scale

2The specification of the two time charts

Standard time chart Scan unit time chart
Sampling points 1-2048 points (All X/Y points)
Sampling accuracy 0.1 second 1 scan
Sampling frequency Under the conditions below;
Cycle time : 30 sec.
Signal variations in 1 cycle: 200 times
10 cycle (approx. 5 min.) sampling in max. 512KB memory
Scale width 0.5/1/2/4 (sec/div) 5/10/20/40 (scan/div)

14.9.2. Start up I/O recorder

Select [I/O recorder] from monitor menu.

14-91
14.9.3. Read out I/O recorder data
Press [Readout I/O recorder] button, read out the I/O recorder data stored in CPU (approx. 30
sec.)

14.9.4. Time chart

0 at right-end

Indicates the time of the cursor position

Right end of the time scale should be 0. The time flow to the past is indicated from right to left.
Left-click on the time chart displays cursor position (green dashing line).
For clearing, right-click on the time chart.

To click , button, move to left-end and right-end.

14-92
14.9.5. Search button
Search ON, OFF, positive edge and negative edge of the signal.

To press [search] button, displays search screen.

Enter address

Click button, then select from address entry dialog box.

Select search criteria from ON, OFF, Positive edge or negative edge.
Up to 3 addresses can be entered and searched by exact criteria.
To put √ in [POWER OFF search], the address displays as gray (not search objects)

Specify the search starting position.

To press [left]/[right] buttons cursor (green dashing line) jumps to the criteria position.

14-93
14.10. Forced ON/OFF during Ladder Monitor

Enter the password when launching PCwin or at option setting, to make this function effective.

Forced ON/OFF operation will be possible during ladder monitoring. (Same as I/O operation
panel function)
When the cursor is at contacts and coils, the forced ON/OFF operation become effective.
If the conditions do not meet, the forced ON/OFF operation becomes ineffective.

O: Operation Possible × : Operation not possible

During CPU RUN *1
During monitor During
stoppage monitoring
Cursor at contact, coil × *3 O *2
No cursor at contact, coil × *3 × *3
*1. If you carry out forced ON/OFF when RUN is stopped, the below message will be
displayed.

*2. Menu becomes effective when forced ON/OFF operation is possible

*3. Menu becomes ineffective when forced ON/OFF operation is impossible

If carrying out forced ON/OFF operation with inappropriate CPU, below message will be
displayed.

14-94
14.10.1. Forced ON/OFF Judgment
A state of forced ON/OFF can be known at a glance.
1) Judgment by Symbol

During forced ON/OFF Forced ON/OFF stopped

1-shot is being set (with I/O op panel)

Red Circle Displayed Green Circle Displayed

2) Judgment by Window
During forced ON/OFF, [Forced ON/OFF mode] screen will be displayed at the top right of
ladder window.
With the [Open I/O operation panel] button, I/O operation panel can be displayed.
When forced ON/OFF is reset, [forced ON/OFF mode] screen will be dissapeared.

14-95
14.10.2. "ON" Operation
Carries out the forced ON at specified address.

Example: When forced ON at the address "X000" contact

1. Right click 2. Selects ON

Forced ON/OFF mark

change to red.

3. Changes to ON.

14.10.3. "OFF" Operation

Carries out the forced OFF at specified address.

Example: When forced OFF at the address "X000" contact

1. Right click
2. Selects OFF

Forced ON/OFF mark

change to red.

3. Changes to OFF.

14.10.4. Reset
Resets only the designated address.
Important) The address which output coil exists returns to the actual state.
The address which only the input coil exists will be retained with the state
immediately before being cancelled.

14.10.5. Reset All

Resets all the specified address.
Important) The address at which an output coil exists will return to the actual state.
The address for only input will be held in the state just before reset.

14-96
14.10.6. Open File
Able to open the forced ON/OFF state saved in a file.
[Open File] menu becomes selectable when all the forced ON/OFF states are cancelled.

14.10.7. Save File

Able to save the set forced ON/OFF state into a file.

14.10.8. I/O Operation Panel

Sets to be able to see the setting states with the address buttons on I/O operation panel
screen.

Example) When executing forced OFF

@H:X000

@ "Forced ON/OFF setting"

H: "Hold setting"
X000 "Address"

Example) When set by I/O op panel

H:X000

H: "Hold setting"
X000 "Address"

14-97
14.11. Offline Monitor
With the offline monitor function, the I/O status and so on saved in project files can be viewed.

The function can be used only when saved data is opened.

CPU connection is disabled during offline monitoring.
Available in PCwin Ver.18.1R02 or later.

The data loaded from the CPU is not monitored with the offline monitoring function.
To monitor with the offline monitoring function, save the data first, then open the project file.

The offline monitor is applicable to the following monitors.

· SFC monitor
· Ladder monitor
· CPU error monitor

14.11.1. Starting Offline Monitor

To start offline monitor, select [Monitor]-[Start OffLine Monitor].

<SFC monitor>

<Ladder monitor>

14-98
 <CPU error monitor>

14.11.2. Stopping Offline Monitor

To stop offline monitor, select [Monitor]-[OffLineMonitor Stop].

14-99
14.12. Watch Monitor Function
Enter the desired addresses in the watch list with this function to view the status or jump to the
corresponding circuit.

Starting at the PCwin menu, select [View] - [Watch].

14-100
14.12.1. How to Register the Watch List
Description is given here for how to register the watch list.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

(1) Enter the address.

The following three methods are provided to enter the address.
1) Select the address
2) Enter the address directly
3) Register from the ladder

1) Address selection method

Click [Address Select]. The address selection screen is displayed.

Select the desired address and

double click it

Double click on the desired address to add it in the watch list.

14-101
2) Registration through direct address entry
Enter directly in the address entry field. Double click the address field and enter the address.

Double click and enter the address

Select [Enter]

The contact and coil information is registered.

3) Registration in watch list from ladder

Right click the desired contact or coil position and select [WatchListRegist]. Registration is
made in the watch list and displayed.

Contact/Coil information is registered.

14-102
(2) To view the current value, select [Monitor Start].

(3) Select the current value type.

· ASCII (character string)
· HEX (hexadecimal)
· DEC (decimal)
· U-DEC (unsigned decimal)
· OCT (octal)
· BIN (binary)
· F-DEC (single precision floating point)
· D-DEC (double precision floating point)
* The displaying type of the current value varies according to the selected address.

(4) Select the address data type.

· BIT (displaying type: "-")
· BYTE
· WORD
· DWORD
· 4WORD
· 8WORD
· 16WORD
· TIMER/COUNTER(If "T/C" is selected as an address)
· CURRENT VALUE(If "T/C" is selected as an address)
· SET VALUE(If "T/C" is selected as an address)
* The address data type varies according to the selected address.

(5) The comment is displayed. The list title is displayed in the selected language.

The same language as the selected one is

displayed

(6) The device name is displayed.

If a device name is provided for the designated address, the device name is displayed.

(7) The device symbol is displayed.

If a device symbol is provided for the designated address, the device symbol is displayed.

14-103
14.12.1.1. Exporting Watch List
Select Export to export the watch list.
The watch list can be saved for use in another project.
Enter the file name and select [Save].

14.12.1.2. Importing Watch List

Select Import to import a watch list having been exported.
Select the file name and select [Open].

If the operation mode of the destination of importation differs from that of the source of importation, only addresses that
can be used at the destination of importation are reflected while non-supported addresses become blank.

14-104
14.12.1.3. Tab Control
The tab name and tab position can be changed. The tab can be deleted.
Right click on the desired tab and select [Tab control].

<Changing the tab name>

Select [Replace Name] at the desired tab name to change the tab name.
Enter the new name within 16 single-byte characters.

<Changing the tab position>

Select [Prev] or [Next] at the desired tab to move to the desired position.

<Deleting a tab>
Select [Delete] at the desired tab to delete the tab.

14-105
14.12.2. Watch Monitor Circuit Jump
Select an address being monitored to jump to the circuit.
Select [Monitor Start].
Double click an address to jump to the coil at the designated address.

Select Monitor Start

Double click the desired address

A jump occurs to the coil

14-106
15. Settings
Avoid carrying out setting of the equipment during operation or during
operation of equipment to be used. Depending on the contents of writing,
equipment can have unforeseen operation, therefore pay sufficient
attention to safety. Therefore, take sufficient precautions for safety.

15.1. Setting Menu

Setting items are as shown above.

15.2. Change of Timer/Counter set value and current value.

The list of used timer/counter are displayed in the dialog.

Select the program number and the address, and input the [Set value] / [Current value].
If you click [Write] button, the data is written.
If write is selected, following message will be displayed and end of writing will be notified.
• Change Set Value

• Change Current Value

15-1
15.3. I/O Forced on-off
It is possible that the bit address in 16 points or less is turned on or off at the same time.
The following dialog is displayed.
Add the bit address turned on and off with [addition] button.
If you click [PC writing] button, the data is written.

15.3.1. Set the address and ON/OFF

If you click [Addition] button, the following dialog is displayed.

Setting of the address: select ON or off, so the data is added in the list with [OK] button.

If you click [Keeping relay display] button, the list of keeping relay is displayed.
If the keeping relay is selected, it is set in the [Address] item with [OK]button.

15-2
15.3.2. Writing the data to CPU
If you click [PC writing]button, the following message is displayed.

In case there is no problem, Select [Yes].

After the completion of writing, monitoring is carried out and results are displayed under "Result".

However, in case PC is under RUN, since operation results of sequence program are given
preference, execution result sometimes becomes OFF even if ON is set.

Note) I/O Forced ON-OFF does not have Hold function. Consequently, when I/O Forced
ON-OFF is carried out during RUN, I/O state changes in accordance with sequence
operation or Refresh result.

15-3
15.4. Inside FB I/O Forced on-off
This function can be selected only at the monitor in FB. Compulsion ON/OFF function of tag in
monitored FB can be done.
It is possible that the bit address in 16 points or less is turned on or off at the same time.
The following dialog is displayed.
Add the bit address turned on and off with [addition] button.
If you click [PC writing]button, the data is written.

15.4.1. Set the address and ON/OFF

If you click [Addition]button, the following dialog is displayed.

Setting of the address : select ON or off, so the data is added in the list with [OK]button.

If you click [Tag Name List] button, the list of keeping relay is displayed.
If the keeping relay is selected, it is set in the [Address]item with [OK]button.

15-4
15.4.2. Writing the data to CPU
If you click [PC writing]button, the following message is displayed.

In case there is no problem, Select [Yes].

After the completion of writing, monitoring is carried out and results are displayed under "Result".

However, in case PC is under RUN, since operation results of sequence program are given
preference, execution result sometimes becomes OFF even if ON is set.

Note) Inside FB I/O Forced ON-OFF does not have Hold function. Consequently,
when Inside FB I/O Forced ON-OFF is carried out during RUN, I/O state
changes in accordance with sequence operation or Refresh result.

15.5. Inside FB I/O initial

This function initializes VAR type data used in FB, and clears edge and timer/counter currently .
This function is the same as the processing done to CPU after the program writing.

15-5
15.6. Register Edit
15.6.1. Register and I/O address Monitor
15.6.1.1. Setting of Edit Address
15.6.1.1.1. Batch Setting of Edit Address
The two modes can be selected in Register and I/O Address Mode:
(Note) Please do not select GZ, GS or GF area of a device, because the areas
Are for system maintenance purpose.

1) Address Selection Mode

Select a target address from the program, device and display area.
Hold the set value with [Close]. When re-displayed, the display with the last address will
appear.

2) Address Input Mode

Input a target address.
For moving (shifting) address on the same device, you can scroll up or down.
Hold the set value with [Close]. When re-displayed, the display with the last address will
appear.

Top address input

Scrollable

15-6
15.6.1.1.2. Individual Setting of Edit Address
(1) Addition of Address
If [Address Addition]is selected, Address input screen will be displayed.

After selecting Program No. and Device, address is entered.

If Block specification is carried out, block of addresses can be added in one go from the
specified address.
Click [OK] on completion of setting.

(2) Change of Address

Place the cursor on the address to be changed and if [Change] is selected, Address Input
screen will be displayed.

Feed the change contents and click [OK].

(3) Deletion of Address

Place the cursor on the address to be deleted and if [Adr delete] is clicked, address will be
deleted.

(4) Clear Address

If [Clear] is clicked, following message will be displayed.

If [Yes] is clicked, all set addresses will be deleted.

(5) Read Address

If [Read] is clicked, addresses to be edited and saved in [Save Address] will be displayed.

(6) Save Address

If [Save] is clicked, currently displayed edited addresses will be saved in the internal data of
PCwin.

15-7
15.6.1.2. Offline Editing
Place the cursor on the address to be edited. In this state, if [Add] is selected, Edit screen will be
displayed.

After selecting the type of data (hexadecimal, decimal, octal)enter the set value and click [OK].
This state is offline editing state (change of data inside the PCwin) register data and writing in
CPU is not made.

15.6.1.3. Data Fill

If [Data fill] is clicked, Set Value Edit Screen will be displayed. After entering the set value, click
[OK]. All the data of edited addresses will be changed to set value.

This state is one of offline editing (change of data inside PCwin) of register data and it is not
written in the CPU.

15.6.1.4. CPU writing

When there is need to write in the CPU, click [Write CPU].
All the data displayed on the screen will be written in the CPU.

On the completion of writing, above message will be displayed.

15-8
15.6.2. Signed and floating-points address monitor
Store real number in CPU is available.
Set up edit address. Set values via Offline Edit Set Up.
Please refer to "14.6.1. Register and I/O Address monitor".

Example: Double real number, fixed decimal point display (5-digit after decimal point)

15-9
15.6.3. ASCII monitor

Save strings of ASCII CODE Table into CPU.

Set up strings via Offline Edit.

Change CPU set up value via saving in PLC.

15.7. Register Fill

Since above screen will be displayed, operate in accordance with the message. Following
message will be displayed at the time of [writing].

15-10
15.8. Setting of Communication Module
This function sets the connection method of CPU and PCwin and it is not the writing function for
set data in the CPU.
Use it when connection method with CPU is changed.

Module for communication with PCwin is selected.

• Computer link, Ethernet module.

Sometimes communication based on the combination of Computer Link, Ethernet Module and
CPU version is not possible. When carrying out Remote communication, confirm the module
version and judge on the basis of the following table.

CPU PC2series PC3J / PC10

Module PC2
∼ 2.00 2.00∼ PC3 mode
compatible
∼ 3.00 O X X X
3.00 ∼
Computer O O X X
5.00
5.00 ∼ O O O O
∼ 2.00 X X X X
Ethernet
2.00 ∼ O O O O

• ME-NET, HPC Link

Remote programming up to 4 layers between CPUs linked with NET, HPC link is possible and
100 different settings can be registered with comments.
Use remote programming of above 2 layers in the following CPU, communication module
versions.
PC2/L2 CPU ................ aboveVer4.0
PC2J CPU ...................... aboveVer3.0
ME-NET ...................... aboveVer2.0
HPC Link .......................... aboveVer2.0
High speed Remote I/O ...aboveVer2.0

• FL-net
It can be used for above 2 hierarchies (layers)

15-11
Procedure
(1) Click [Setting]--[Setting of communication module]
The name list which has already been set is displayed. When the version is 19.1 or later, the
hierarchical structure is displayed in the tree.
Select the name and click [Delete] button, [Change] button or [Addition] button.

Version is displayed before 19.1 Displays version 19.1 or higher.

(2) Select the target name

Click in the target item and select the target to communicate.

When selecting "ME-NET, HPC Link", "Ethernet[Link]", "CPU[Link]" "In case of CPU – USB
[Link] ",always set [via link].

(3) Set the communication conditions

Setting contents vary for each communication module. Always set the [Communication
Conditions]

(4) Set the name as comment.

(5) End of Setting

Click [OK] when all settings are complete.

15-12
15.8.1. Communication module Settings before Version 19.1
15.8.1.1. Setting of communication conditions
(1) In case of CPU

Set the communication port and baud rate of the PC.

If AUTO is selected in Baud Rate, CPU is automatically and suitable Baud Rate is set.

(2) In case of ME-NET, HPC Link

Set only Communication Port of the PC.

(3) In case of Computer Link

Feed Port number from 0--37 in octal number.

As for communication specifications, set in such a way that they are same as the settings on
computer link side.

(4) In case of Ethernet

Enter IP address and Port No.

(5) In case of CPU – USB

No need to set.

15-13
15.8.1.2. Setting via link
This setting is required only in case communication module has "ME-NET, HPC Link", "Ethernet (Via
Link) and "CPU (Via Link) ", " In case of CPU – USB (LINK)".
Remote Programming / monitoring up to a maximum of 4 layers between CPUs linked with
communication module is possible.
Up to 100 settings with comments can be made in Remote Programming / monitor.

Reference: Setting of Remote Programming (see item 14.8.3)

Procedure

1. Select the number of layers

Select from 1-4 by clicking the number of layers. Screen changes depending on the number of
layers.
Screen below is that in case of 2 layers.

Click one of the following for an instance of screen display based on number of layers.

• Screen when No. of layer is 1.

15-14
• Screen when number of layers is 2.

• Screen when number of layers is 3.

•Screen when number of layers is 4.

15-15
2. Set the layer module.
1) Click layer 1 and select from "ME-NET", "HPC Link" and "Remote I/O"
2) Click layers 2-4 and select from "ME-NET", "HPC Link", "FL-net".
3. Set the Relay Center No. / Target Station No.
Relay Center No. is the number of the communication module that relays communication
(Receiving end).
Target Station No. is the number of the communication module mounted in the CPU that actually
carries out remote programming.
Setting of number varies depending on hierarchical module and is as under.
(1) In case of ME-NET
If [Relay No.], [Target No.] are clicked, following screen will appear.

(2) In case of HPC Link

If [Relay No.], [Target No.] are clicked, following screen will appear.

(3) In case of Remote I/O

Station No. of Remote I/O is not required. If set, Relay No./Target No. will be displayed as under.

(4) In case of FL-net

If [Relay No.], [Target No.] are clicked, following screen will appear.

(5) Completion of Setting

Click [OK] on completion of Setting.

15-16
15.8.1.3. Setting of Remote Programming
Instance of setting of Remote Programming against CPU (Target CPU) connected to 2 layers, as
shown below.

HPC Link

PCwin
Layer 1

HPC Link

Layer 2

Module
Target CPU

Setting of each module is as under

- Module A [Relay Center] Station No.:02 Link No. : 1
- Module B [Relay Center] Station No.:04 Link No. : 2
- Module C [Target No.] Station No.:01 Link No. : 1

Setting Procedure

1. Click [Communication Module Setting] in the setting menu of Menu bar

2. Set the target at [PC2] and Module Name at [ME-NET, HPC Link].

15-17
3. Since [Via Link] becomes valid, click it.

4. Select 2 by clicking the No. of layers.

5. Since the 1st layer is connected to HPC Link, set the module name of layer 1 at [HPC Link].

6. Set the Station No. of Relay center (Module A) of layer 1 at 2.

15-18
7. Since the 2nd layers is also connected to HPC Link, set the module name of layer 2 at [HPC Link].

8. Set the Link No. of Relay Center (Module B) of layer 2 at 2.

9. Set the Station No. of Target Center (Module C) of layer 2 at 1.

15-19
15.8.2. Communication module setting of 19.1 or later
For communication module settings of version 19.1 or later, the tree view is displayed in a
hierarchical structure.
Can be added, deleted, or changed on the tree.
The following is a sample configuration for use in this section:

PCwin

USB

Layer 1
ABC-0001

(Link: P1L1)

FL-net

Layer 2

ABC-0002 ABC-0003 ABC-0004

Node 10 Node 20 Node 30

15-20
<How to read the tree display>
Description of the communication settings are aggregated and displayed in the tree.
You can get an idea of configuration from the tree view without having to open the configuration
dialogs.

 When there is a target (communication destination) in the layer 1

Displays the target name [Port] in the tree.

Configuration dialog

The target comment is the target name.

The port varies depending on the communication module. For Ethernet, Ethernet port number,
For CPUs and computer links (serial communication), this is the serial port number (COM1 to).

 When there is a target (communication destination) in the layer 2

The node name [Port: link] is displayed in the layer 1 tree.
The target name [Target No.] is displayed in the tree of the layer 2.

The comment of the relay station becomes the node name.

The target comment is the target name.
A link is a combination of a program number (P1 to P3) and a link Parameter number (L1 to L8).

 When there is a target (communication destination) in the layer 3

The node name [Port: link] is displayed in the layer 1
The tree in layer 2 shows the node name [Relay No. : Link].
The target name [Target No.] is displayed in the layer 3 tree.

 When there is a target (communication destination) in the layer 4

The node name [Port: link] is displayed in the layer 1 tree.
The tree in layer 2 shows the node name [Relay station No. : Link].
The layer 3 tree shows the node name [Relay station No. : Link].
The target name [Target No.] is displayed in the tree of the layer 4.

15-21
15.8.2.1. Communication settings
The communication module can be added to the layer1 using the following two Method.
Method 1: Click "Add"
Method 2: Right-click on the tree view and press the "Add" menu

Method 1

Method 2

The communication module that can be set for the layer1 are as follows.
 CPU
 ME-NET/HPC link
 Computer link
 Ethernet
 CPU‐USB

The above module communication settings are the same as for Version 19.1 and earlier. Refer to
15.8.1 in this manual.

15.8.2.2. Via link Settings

You can add a communication module from the layer2 onward by the following three methods.
Method 1: Select Communication module on the tree view and press Add below.
Method 2: Right-click on the tree view and click Add below.

Method 1
Method 2

15-22
 "Add below" function automatically inherits the communication settings of the upper hierarchy.
Example: To select the layer2 and add the third hierarchy from "Add below"

Automatic inheritance of
higher-layer communication
settings

The communication modules that can be set from the layer2 onward are as follows.
 ME-NET
 HPC link
 FL-net
 EtherNet / IP

The above module communication settings are the same as those for Version 19.1 and earlier.
Refer to 15.8.1 in this manual.

15.8.2.3. Editing in the Tree View

15.8.2.3.1. Move
You can select the communication module and drag-and-drop it to any position.
The communication settings of the mobile communication module inherit the hierarchical settings of
the destination.
Here is a sample module move:

Example 1) Move E-PLC4 to the lower position of E-PLC3.

Dragging E-PLC4 to E-PLC3 Drop

15-23
 Example 2) Move E-PLC4 over E-PLC3

Dragging E-PLC4 over E-PLC2 Drop

→ Be represented by a yellow bar

Example.3) Move E-PLC4 over E-PLC1

Dragging E-PLC4 over E-PLC1

→ Be represented by a yellow bar Drop

15.8.2.3.2. Direct Input to the tree

The comments and station numbers displayed in the tree can be edited directly on the tree.

Input [50]

15-24
15.8.2.4. Import/Export
This function is supported by version 19.1 or later.
Files can be imported/exported to the communication module settings.
Using this function makes it easy to divert communication module settings between terminals.

15-25
 15.9. Network Monitor
Up to four network layers can be defined to display the network status or save backup data.
The network Monitor is specified differently in Version 19.1 or earlier and Version 19.1 or later.
For versions earlier than Version 19.1, see 15.9.1 in this manual.
Version19.1 or later versions, see 15.9.2 in this manual.

15.9.1. Networking Monitor earlier than Version 19.1

15.9.1.1. Network Monitoring Range
The network settings have the following configuration.

PCwin

···
Settings of up to five networks
Line A (layer 1) can be entered

Up to four layers can be

defined

Line B (layer 2) ·
·
·
Target
stations

A-1 A-2 A-3 ·····

Settings of up to 100 units can be connected

Target
stations

B-1 B-2 B-3

15-26
15.9.1.2. Starting the Network Configuration Tool

(1) Select [Setup] - [Networkmonitor] (1) or select the button (2) - [Networkmonitor] to start
the network monitoring tool.

(2)

(1)

15-27
15.9.1.3. Creating

To create, select [File] - [New].

Press [OK] to initialize settings.

15-28
15.9.1.4. Network Monitor Settings
Enter the communication port, program number to be used, link number and so on of each
network.
In addition, data can be backed up via the link.

Select [Setting] - [Network setting].

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

(11) (12) (14)

(13) (15)
(1) Place a check mark at the setting item. Settings are invalid if no check mark is placed.
(2) Select one of the following as a module name.
• CPU-USB
• CPU-USB (via link)
• Ethernet
• Ethernet (via link)
(3) Enter the name of the network. (Within 16 single-byte characters)
(4) Enter the IP address.
Valid only for Ethernet of Ethernet (via link) networks.
(0.0.0.1 to 255.255.255.254)
(5) Enter the port number. (1025 to 65534)
(6) Enter the number of layers. (Select among layers 2 to 4.)
(7) Select the communication of layer 2 to layer 4 from the following.
• FL-net
• EtherNetIP
(8) Select the relaying station of layer 2 to layer 4 among P1-3.
(9) Select the link number of relaying station of layer 2 to 4 among 1-8 and Builtin.

15-29
(10) Enter the station number of the relaying station among layer 2-3 and 3-4.
• In case of AL-net, enter the station number with a decimal between 1 and 249.
• In case of EtherNet IP, enter the station number with a decimal between 1 and 254.
(11) To back up data, place a check mark at Data backup valid.
The data is backed up to the folder selected at [Data backup folder] (13).
(12) Enter the backup port number. (1025 to 65534)
(13) Select the data backup destination.
(14) Enter the target station number.
(e)

(a) (b) (c)

(d)

(a) Select whether or not to enter the settings (Do or Do not).

(b) If Do is selected, entry of the slave station number is accepted.
• In case of FL-net, enter the station number with a decimal between 1 and 254.
• In case of EtherNet IP, enter the station number with a decimal between 1 and 254.
Note: If CPU-USB is selected as a module name at (2), enter "1."
(c) Enter the name of the destination of connection. (Within 16 single-byte characters)
(d) Place a check mark at Data backup valid to automatically back up data if there is a
change in the CPU data.
(15) Press the [OK] key to finish entering settings. The network monitor screen is displayed.

Note: If there is duplication in the port number with settings of another network, a warning is
displayed when the [OK] button is pressed.
Enter settings so that there is no duplicate port number with settings of other networks.

15-30
<Network name view>
After settings are entered, the following data is displayed next to the network name.

LineA [ 2 3 - 2 - 1 3 ]

Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 3

Layer 2
Relaying station L Relaying station Relaying station L
Relaying station
PC
PC
Layer 2-3
Relaying station

15-31
15.9.1.5. Target Station Edit of Network Monitor
The target station of the network monitor can be edited or deleted.
Each station can be edited, too.

(1) Select Edit. All target stations in the designated layer can be edited.

Select either valid or invalid for settings of each target station, slave station number, name
of the destination of connection, and either valid or invalid for data backup.

(2) Each target station can be selected to edit individually.

<Delete>
To delete, select the target station and select Delete.

<Connect invalid/valid>
Select a target station and select either valid or invalid connection.
If valid connection is selected, the effect is the same as that obtained with [Do] for the
connection destination setting.
If invalid connection is selected, the effect is the same as that obtained with [Do not] for the
connection destination setting.

Same as invalid connection

Same as valid connection

15-32
 <Backup valid/invalid>
The backup setting of all stations can be enabled or disabled. The setting can be enabled or
disabled individually, too.

To change the data backup

setting of all stations

To change the data backup

setting individually
The [valid] or [invalid] data backup setting can be selected only for stations with setup [Do].

(3) Change the order of destinations of connection.

Select the desired one and drag & drop it in the desired
position to change the order

The order changes to this position

15-33
15.9.1.6. Changing or Deleting the Name or Changing the Position
The name can be changed or deleted on the tab.
Right click the desired tab. The network setting screen is displayed.
<Changing the name>
Select a desired network name and select [Name Change].

Right click

Select a network name

Select Name Change

The network name is changed. Enter the new name within 16 single-byte characters.

Select the [OK] key to change the name.

Press [OK] on the network setting screen to change the name of the tab.

15-34
 <Deleting>
To delete a network name on the tab, select the desired network name and select [Delete].

Right click

Select a network name

Select Delete

Select [Delete]. The designated network name is deleted and changes to "Network 1."

<Changing the position>

The position of the network name on the tab can be changed.
Select the desired network name and select [Up] or [Down] to change the position.
Right click

Select a network name

Press [Up] to move the selected

data up
Press [Down] to move the
selected data down

The position is changed

15-35
15.9.1.7. Monitor
The connection state is displayed and circuit monitoring is performed.
To monitor, back up the data first.

With the circuit monitor, the backup data of the configured network is monitored and displayed.
( The data is backed up if a check mark is placed at Data backup valid in a network monitor
setting.To back up data, refer to 15.9.7 Data Backup.)

(1) Select [Monitor] - [Monitor start] (1). Or select the [Monitor start] button on the screen (2).
(2) Both selection methods lead to the same effect.

(1) (2)

The connection state is displayed.

Green:

Red: Not connected

Double click to start monitoring

Double click a green setting ("connected"). The following message is displayed. Press the [OK]
button. Another PCwin opens and the .prj file corresponding to the selected setting starts from
the backup data and starts monitoring.

15-36
Press the [OK] key. Another PCwin starts and starts monitoring.

Note) If no backup data is available, the following message is displayed when [CPU connect] is
selected.
Back the data before starting monitoring.

When monitoring is started, the communication module setting corresponding to the selected
target equipment is added on the communication selection module selection screen.
If 100 communication module settings have been entered, the new communication setting
overwrites the 100th record.

The setting of the communication module

being monitored is added to the last

15-37
15.9.1.8. Network Monitor View

The icon is displayed on the task tray.

The orange lamp lights up in monitoring, or the yellow lamp lights up in other than monitoring.

Orange lamp lights up in monitoring Yellow lamp lights up in other than monitoring

15-38
15.9.1.9. Data Backup
The data is backed up only during monitoring operation with the network monitor.
The data is automatically backed up to the connected CPU.
The function is applicable only to the network with which a check mark is placed at Data backup
valid in the [Setting] menu.
Changes in CPU data are backed up to the designated folder in the PC.

Place a check mark at the network where data is backed

Designate the folder in which data is backed

Up to 10 pieces of backup data can be saved for each destination of connection.

Earlier data is deleted so that the latest 10 pieces of data are always saved.
Example of data storage folder
PLC_BACKUP
Network 1
Equipment 1 [station No.] Folde
Equipment Equipment1_prj
Up to 10 files
Equipment Equipment1_prj
Equipment 2 [station No.]
Network 2

Network 3
The backup function is temporarily stopped in CPU monitoring with PCwin. Backup restarts
from temporary stop after CPU monitoring is finished.

15-39
< Designation of location of backup >
If no backup location has been designated when [Monitor start] is selected with a check mark
placed at Data backup valid, the following message is displayed.

The following message is displayed if no backup location is found though [Monitor start] is
selected with a check mark placed at Data backup valid.

To monitor backup data, be sure to designate the backup folder.

15-40
15.9.1.10.Logging Function
When monitoring starts, success or failure log information of backup data acquisition at each
destination of connection is monitored and displayed in text data.
In addition, the data can be exported.

<Log data>
· State of destination of connection
· Success or failure of data backup
· Date and time of data backup

Select [Export]. The following screen is displayed. Press [OK] to export data.

The exported log file (Networkmonitor.log) is saved in the Global folder located at the same layer
as that of PCwin.exe.

To open the exported data, designate Unicode as a character code.

15-41
15.9.2. Networking Monitor Version 19.1 or Later
For Ver.19.1 and later versions, the settings and monitor environment have been changed from the
versions prior to Ver19.1.
Furthermore, in Ver.19.5 and later versions, PCwin2 and network monitor function are integrated, and
the network monitor function can be used regardless of whether PCwin or PCwin2 is used.

15.9.2.1. Scope of network monitoring

The networking setting is configuration as shown below.

PCwin/
PCwin2



Line A (Layer 1) Line B (Layer 2)




Target
stations

A-1 A-2 A-3 ・・・・・

Settings of up to 100 units can be connected Target

stations
Up to 4 Layers are possible

B-1 B-2 B-3

15-42
15.9.2.2. Start for networked Monitor

 Select [Network Monitor] in [Settings] or  and select [Network Monitor] to turn Start the
Network Monitor Tool.
①
②

15-43
15.9.2.3. Configuring Networking Monitor
Based on module configuration set in the communication module setting window, set the
communication port of each network, the program No. to be used, the link No., etc.
You can also back up Data on Via link.

<Adding, Changing, and Deleting Modules>

Adding, changing, and deleting module can be edited in the same way as the 15.8 communication
module setting.

<Data Backup Settings>

To back up Data, the backup port number must be set.
The backup port number can be edited in module communication settings.

<Connection disabled, enabled>

To enable the connection of the target station module, right-click module and click the [Enable
Connection] menu.
Module with the connection enabled is displayed in black in the color of the displayed characters.
To disable the connection of the target station module, right-click module and click the [Disable
Connection] menu.
Module with the connection disabled status is displayed in gray.

Example: Changing from Connection Disabled to Connection Enabled Method

To enable connection of all layer modules below the specified module, right-click to select the
module and click the [Connection]-[Valid below for selected modules] menu.
To disable the connection of all layer modules below the specified module, right-click to select the
module and click the [Connection]-[Invalid below selected Module] menu.

15-44
Example: How to change from connection disable setting to connection enable setting (below selection
module)

<Backup Enabled, Disabled>

To enable backup, right-click module to select it, and then click [Backup]-[Enable only selected
module].
Module in the backup-enabled state is displayed with O next to module name.
To disable backup, right-click module and click [Backup]-[Disable Only Selected module].
Module in Backup Disabled state is not displayed with O next to module name.

Example: Changing from the backup disable setting to the backup enable setting Method (selected
module only)

To enable backup of all layer modules below the specified module, right-click the module and click
the [Backup]-[Valid below selected module] menu.
To disable backup of all layer modules below the specified module, right-click the module and click
the [Backup]-[Invalid below selected module] menu.

15-45
Examples: Change from backup disabled to backup enabled method (Select module or less)

15-46
15.9.2.4. Monitor
Displays the connection status and performs ladder Monitor.
If you use ladder Monitor, back up Data.

The Circuit Monitor will Monitor the backup Data of the configured network.
(Back up the network Monitor settings if Enabled is checked.
For Method of the backup, see section 15.9.2.7 Data Backup. )

 Select [Monitor]-[Monitor Start]. Or  Select the [Begin Monitor] button in the window.
This is the same for both selection Method in .
 

Displays the connection

status.

Green: Connecting

Red: Not connected

Black: Connection

Double-click to begin Monitor.

Double-click the green connected setting to open another PCwin with [OK] after displaying the
following message. The selected.prj file starts Monitor at the rising edge of the backup Data.

15-47
[OK] Press to bring up another PCwin and begin Monitor.

NOTE) If there is no backup data and [CPU Connection] is selected, the following message is
displayed.

Back up the file before starting Monitor.

15-48
15.9.2.5. Update check
Check that the backup Data and Data in the PLCs have been updated.
The check is compared to the most recent backup Data.

Module with "Match" checked is displayed in blue.

Module whose checked result is "Mismatch" is displayed in red.
An unchecked module is displayed in black.

When completed, the following message is displayed.

15-49
15.9.2.6. Viewing Networked Monitor
In versions prior to Ver19.5, the network monitor display is the same as the display before Ver.19.1.
Refer to 15.9.1.8 in this manual.
For Ver.19.5 or later versions, the icon is displayed on the taskbar.

15.9.2.7. Data backup

Automatically backs up Data to connected CPU only during Monitor.
Only module that has been backed up and enabled is applicable.
If Data of the CPU is changed, it is backed up to the specified folder on the PC.
The folders to back up are specified on a per-network basis for PCwin and PCwin2.

Specify the folders to back up Data

Set the backup target

Write date of the backed up Data

The file name

You can Save up to 10 backup Data per destination.

11 The older Data will be deleted after the first one, and the most recent 10 Data will be Save.

Sample Data Save Folders

PLC_BACKUP
Equipment 1 [station number] Folder

Date and time Equipment 1_prj

Date and time Equipment 1_prj Up to 10 files
Date and time Equipment 1_prj

Equipment 2 [station number]

Equipment 3 [station number]

The backup function pauses temporarily while CPU Monitor is running on PCwin, unpauses when
CPU Monitor is finished, and resumes the backup.
15-50
 <Specify backup destination>
If Data backup destination has not been specified when [Monitor Start] is selected after checking
Data backup, the following message is displayed.

If there are no Data backup destinations when [Monitor Start] is selected after checking Data
backup enabled, the following message is displayed.

If you want to Monitor the backed up Data, specify the folders to back up.

15.9.2.8. Log function

Log function is similar to Ve.19.1 and earlier. Refer to 15.9.1.10 in this manual.

15-51
15.9.2.9. Configuration properties
The configuration properties set the configuration of the network monitor.
Setting configuration properties is required to monitor PCwin and PCwin2 networking.

Click the [Browse] button to set the location of the communication module setting file (Allback.cfg) for
PCwin and PCwin2.

15.9.2.10. Stand alone

Ver.19.5 or later versions, the network monitor can be started independently.
The network monitor can be started from the start menu.

15-52
16. ME-NET
In case of PCwin, operations like setting of parameter against ME-NET, file reading, file saving etc. are
independent from project data and they have independent menu configuration.

16.1. ME-NET Menu

Simultaneously 7 numbers of MET-NET Parameter can be handled.

16.2. Editing
16.2.1. Parameter setting

Procedure is as under

(1)Link configuration is set.

TOYO PUC only ….. Only when equipment connected to ME-NET is of our company.
There are other connections… When equipment of other manufacturers is also connected.
(Our module is valid only for the parent station )
(2)Set the number of connected stations.
Entry Range : 2 - 64 (decimal number).

16-1
(3)Set detailed items of each Area Code.
If [Setting] is selected, following screen will be displayed.

1. Enter the leading address off Relay Link.

L00L∼L7FH
M00L∼M7FH
2.Enter bytes of the Relay Link.
Enter Range : 0 – 256 (decimal number)
3.Enter the leading address of Register Link.
R0000L∼R07FFH
D0000L∼D2FFFH
4.Enter the File No. (when there are other connections).
Enter Range : 00 – FF (hexadecimal number).
5.Enter bytes of the Register Link.
Enter Range : 0 – 2048 (decimal number).
6.Select [OK] when setting is complete.

(4)When setting is complete, press [OK] to end the process.

16-2
16.2.2. Communication with ME-NET
When carrying out communication with ME-NET, always connect this machine with MENET module.

(1)Read
Reads parameter from ME-NET Module.
(2)Communication Stop.
Stops communication with ME-NET Module.
Communication stop is valid only when PC has been stopped. Always carry it out after stopping the PC.
(3)Write
Writes parameters in the ME-NET module.
Writing is valid only when PC and ME-NET have been stopped. Execute it after stopping the PC and
ME-NET.
(4)Communication Start.
Starts communication of ME-NET Module.
Communication start is valid only when ME-NET is stopped. Always carry it out after stopping the
NE-NET.

16.3. Open the File.

Since File Dialog will be displayed, select the file and click [Open].

16.4. Saving of File.

It saves the file. In case of newly created data, since File Dialog will be displayed, enter the file name and
click [Save].

16.5. Save As.

Since File Dialog will be displayed, enter the File name and click [Save].

16-3
17. Option
17.1. Customize
Explains the [Options]-[Customize] menu.

17.1.1. Font
17.1.1.1. SFC, ladder display character font setting (Initial: MS Gothic 9 (Japanese))
• Select the language you wish to change from the [Language] list.
(Choose from 6 languages - Japanese, English, Czech, Chinese, French, Russia)
• Select the SFC or Ladder/FB button to pick a font and character size.

General display font

: All fonts except for contact comment.
Contact comment font
: Font for contact comments

17.1.1.2. Ladder contact comment display position setting (Initial: above)

• Select [Top] or [Bottom] from the [Character arrangement] list.

Top Bottom

17.1.1.3. Word wrap for SFC/ladder comment display setting (Initial: OFF)
• Word wrapping function is meant for preventing the loop back in the middle of character string at
the time of line feed.
Setting for display/ no display of word wrapping should be executed for SFC comment, ladder coil
comment, and ladder contact comment respectively. This setting is valid during printing also.

No word wrapping Word wrapping done

SFC comment

Ladder coil comment

Ladder contact
comment

17-1
17.1.2. Color
17.1.2.1. Color setting for SFC/ladder display
• Select the item you wish to change.
• Select a color for foreground and background.

On clicking Foreground and Background, dialog for color setting will be displayed.

17-2
17.1.3. Display
17.1.3.1. Tool bar, status bar display setting (Initial: ON)
• Select active/inactive for display of the tool bar and status bar.

Check ON: displays

Check OFF: does not display

Standard tool bar

SFC tool bar

Ladder/FB tool bar

17.1.3.2. Address display for search/contact screen (Initial: OFF)

• Select address display status for search/contact screen.
Check OFF: Moves the cursor to the last character of the address.

Good for entering values in the last

digit

Check ON: Selects the entire address.

Good for entering a different

address

17-3
17.1.3.3. Ladder window display setting (Initial: OFF)
• Select display size for the ladder window. (Effective in projects with SFC)

Check ON: Maximize

Check OFF: Bottom half of the screen

OFF ON

17-4
17.1.4. SFC
17.1.4.1. Step number, transition number incremental value setting (Initial: 1)
• Enter the incremental value when step numbers, transition numbers are set up.
(You do not need to enter Sub-SFC number)

Step number
incremental value

Entry range: 0 - 9999

Transition number incremental

value

17.1.4.2. Initial value setting for step diagnostic setting value (Initial: 100)
• Enter the initial value for step diagnostic setting value for when a step with diagnostic is set up.

Entry range: 0-65535

Initial value for step diagnostic

setting value

17.1.4.3. Initial step setting for jump (Initial: ON)

• Designates an initial step for when a jump is set up.

Check ON: Initial step

Check OFF: No designation
ON: Automatically sets an initial step number when jump
is set up.

17-5
17.1.4.4. Limit setting for action setting number (Initial: ON)
• Puts a limit on the action number setting.
Check ON: Limited to 1 or less
Check OFF: Limited to 16 or less

ON: A warning message displays when you hit ok after

setting a plural number of actions.

17-6
17.2. Setting
Explains the [Options] – [Settings] menu.
17.2.1. File
17.2.1.1. Simultaneously open/save related file setting (Initial: ON)
• Choose to open/save a related file when opening/saving a project file.

Check ON: Simultaneously open/save

Check OFF: Do nothing

The following types of files can be selected:

① I/O register file
② Event monitor file (including CPU read/write)
③ Cover setting, format data file
④ I/O diagram, network diagram file
⑤ Bookmark file

Project ③ Cover setting (print)

③ Format data (printing out ⑤ Bookmark (ladder)

② like drawings)

17-7
17.2.2. Operation 1
17.2.2.1. Ladder circuit insert new block setting (Initial: ON)
• Designates a storage location for data provided to the translation support function.
Check ON: Inserts above
Check OFF: Inserts below

ON: New block is inserted

above the cursor position

17.2.2.2. Direct display setting for the ladder circuit properties screen (Initial: ON)
• Designates how to display the properties screen when setting up a ladder symbol.

Check ON: Properties screen displays

automatically
Check OFF: Pressing the Enter key displays
the properties screen

Set up contact with

F3 key

ON: Automatic properties display

OFF: After hitting Enter, properties
displays

17.2.2.3. Continuous ladder circuit comment input setting (Initial: OFF)

• Selects the method for inputting ladder circuit comments.
Check ON: Input comment after inputting an address
Check OFF: Input comment on properties screen

Address input

Enter

OFF: After moving with TAB key,

input comment ON: Input comment with Enter
key

17-8
17.2.2.4. Setting for clearing the ladder circuit properties screen (Initial: ON)
• Selects how to close the ladder circuit properties screen.
Check ON: Closes when you hit apply
Check OFF: Does not close when you hit apply

ON: Closes screen

OFF: Does not close screen

17.2.2.5. Comment tracking setting when copying ladder circuit (Initial: ON)
• Selects comment tracking when copying a ladder circuit.

Check ON: Copies

Check OFF: Doesn’t copy
Copy-compatible comments are as follows. Contact comments are not copied.
① Coil comment
② Function comment
③ Block comment
④ Index comment
Copies equipment name, device code at the same time.
Copies data in maximum 3 languages.

17.2.2.6. Duplication check setting in SFC system Comment tracking setting when copying ladder circuit (Initial: ON)
• Selects double check function for operand of type output apply command.
* Double checking can take some time depending on the number of apply commands.

Check ON: Double checks

Check OFF: Doesn’t double check

ON: Double checks operand of type output apply command

17-9
17.2.2.7. Duplication check the SFC system work area and ladder circuit (Initial: ON)
• Selects the duplication check function for SFC system work area and ladder circuit.
* In CPU operation mode, this function is available only in PC3JG separation /PC10
Standard/PC10 mode.

Check ON: Duplication checks

Check OFF: Doesn’t duplication check

ON: Duplication checks the SFC system work

area and ladder circuit

17.2.2.8. Setting to prohibit writing to CPU of unsaved data (Initial: OFF)

• Selects writing operation to CPU of the data in the state of unsaved.

Check ON: Prohibits writing to CPU

Check OFF: Allows writing to CPU

ON: When writing unsaved data to CPU, a warning displays

and writing is prohibited.

17.2.2.9. Conduction monitor setting (Initial: OFF)

• Selects the type of ladder circuit monitor.

Check ON: Continuity monitor

Check OFF: Normal monitor

OFF: Normal monitor

ON: Continuity monitor

17-10
17.2.2.10. Mid-block page setting for ladder circuit printing (Initial: OFF)
• Can select the printing method for when printing a ladder circuit and the page break comes in the
middle of a block.
Check ON: Splits off to a new page
Check OFF: Does not split
ON: Splits off to a new page.

When a page break comes in the middle

of a block, the top of the block can be
printed on the next page.

17.2.2.11. Write program + single unit comment setting (Initial: OFF)

• Can select whether or not [CPU] – [Write to CPU] – [Program + Comment] displays in the menu.
Check ON: Menu active
Check OFF: Menu not active

OFF: Menu not active

17-11
17.2.2.12. Write setting of single unit program being displayed (Initial: OFF)
• Can select whether programs being displayed can be added to [CPU] – [Write to CPU] in the
menu.
Check ON: Addition to menu YES
Check OFF: Addition to menu NO
ON: Addition to menu YES

17.2.2.13. User library setting for data back-up(Initial: OFF)

• Can select whether user library data is saved or not when backing up a data.
Check ON: Saves
Check OFF: Doesn’t save

17.2.2.14. CPU operation mode setting when creating anew(Initial: PC3JG separation/PC10 standard)
• Can select the CPU operation mode when creating anew.

17.2.2.15. Setting for monitor display type (Initial: hexadecimal)

• Can select a format by which the register monitor value is displayed when monitoring ladder
circuit.

Can select hexadecimal, decimal, or octal values.

17-12
17.2.2.16. Monitor sampling time setting (Initial: 500ms)
• Can select sampling time for ladder circuit monitoring.

17.2.2.17. Floating point decimal setting (Initial: exponent display, 4 decimal display)
• Can select floating point decimal display type and number of decimal places for ladder circuit
display, monitoring.

Exponent display, 4 digit display

Fixed point display, 2 digit display

17-13
17.2.3. Operation 2
17.2.3.1. Block check display setting (Initial: OFF)
• Select the type of display for block check results.

Check ON: Displays above/below

Check OFF: Displays left/right
OFF: Displays left/right

ON: Displays above/below

17.2.3.2. Block check master library setting (Initial: ON)

• Selects whether the same master library as the block check source is used or a different master
library is used.
Check ON: Same library is used
Check OFF: Different library is used

17.2.3.3. Block check FB execution address setting

• Select whether to include the FB execution range address in the block check target.. [Initial: OFF]

Check ON: Include FB execution range address

Check OFF: Do not include FB execution range address
• Select whether or not to include the edge address as a target of block verification. [Initial: ON]
Check ON: Edge address is included.
Check OFF: Edge address is not included.
17-14
17.2.3.4. Forced ON/OFF setting in ladder monitoring [Initial: OFF]
· Select whether or not to show the password entry screen upon each launch of PCwin.

Check ON: Password screen is not displayed when PCwin is launched.

Check OFF: Password screen is displayed when PCwin is launched.

· Select whether or not to use the forced ON/OFF function.

Check ON: Forced ON/OFF function is used.

Check OFF: Forced ON/OFF function is not used.

To use the function, enter the password and select the [OK] button.
[Password: #OUT]

Note: Equipment may start unexpected movement due to certain operation.

Be careful when operating.
Forced outputs are not issued.

17.2.3.5. Comment Edit

Select [Option] - [Setting] - [Operation 2] - [Edit comment].

Place a check mark at the following settings to open the ladder properties screen supporting three languages.
Comment editing is described in “8.1.2.1 Positioning of Symbols.”

(1) Language common use of device and label.

While different equipment names or device symbols can be assigned among languages, they can be
made common with those designated for the first languages if a check mark is placed at “Language
common use of device and label.”

(2) Display multiple languages at the same time.

Place a check mark at “Display multiple languages at the same time.” to display the comment in three
languages on the ladder properties screen.
With comments in three languages displayed simultaneously, editing is easier.

17-15
17.2.4. Shortcut key definition
17.2.4.1. SFC, ladder shortcut key setting
• Select the item for which you wish to define a shortcut key.
• After selecting [keytyping entry], define an optional key on the hot key screen.

Define an optional key

17-16
17.2.5. Library
17.2.5.1. FB library directory setting
• Select the directory where the FB library is stored.

When using a master library.

Select this button then select the directory on the folder access screen where the FB library
is stored.

When using a sub-set library.

No setting is necessary. Erase any settings.

17.2.5.2. Comment setting when saving tags (Initial: OFF)

• This setting is used for symbolic programming. Because symbolic programming is not supported,
it is not necessary.

17.2.5.3. Program check setting for changing link library (Initial: OFF)
• Link library setting that selects whether there is a program check after the FB library is changed.

Check ON: Program check

Check OFF: No program check
ON:Program check

Program check executing

17-17
17.2.5.4. FB library tree display setting (Initial: OFF)
• This setting is used exclusively for “Master 2 free library”.
• Selects how the FB library project tree displays.
Check ON: Alphabetically
Check OFF: FB number order

17.2.5.5. Sentinel setting for FB library editing (Initial: OFF)

• When editing FB library, one of the devices below is necessary.
a. sentinel 25P : TXY-6066
b. sentinel USB : TXY-6067
• When starting PCwin, selects sentinel detection.

Check ON: Detects

Check OFF: Does not detect

ON: Detects

If there is no sentinel attached and PCwin is

started, the message on the left is displayed. It
is not possible to carry out library in this
situation.

• Sentinel status is identified as an icon in the bottom left-hand of the PCwin screen.

Sentinel is not attached. Sentinel is attached.

(Library editing not possible) (Library editing is possible)

17-18
17.2.6. 3 languages
17.2.6.1. Language setting for new projects
• Select from 6 languages for new projects.
(Select from Japanese, English, Czech, Chinese, French, and Russian)

17.2.6.2. Usage condition setting for projects prior to 3 language support (Initial: OFF)
• Selects language type when using project data created with versions of PCwin (Ver.6 or earlier)
prior to 3 language support.

Check ON: Activates 3 language

function
Check OFF: Does not activate 3
language function

ON: Activates 3 language function

When a file is opened / read from CPU, you select language type.

OFF: Does not active 3 language function

When a file is opened / read from CPU, language is chosen by this setting.

17.2.6.3. 3 language recovery setting (Initial: OFF)

• When 3 language comments have been written to the CPU and then those comments are
overwritten by a version of PCwin prior to 3 language support (Ver.6 or earlier), you will not be
able to read the second and third comments with 3 language supported PCwin (Ver.7 or later).

ON: Recovery active

Select [CPU] – [Read from CPU] – [Recovery of the 3 language data].
* If the second and third comment in the CPU are erased, they can not be recovered.

OFF: Recovery not active

Recovery is not possible. Rewrite from back-up data.

17-19
 17.2.7. Interchangeable
17.2.7.1. PC10G and CPU operation mode setting
• For “CPU operation mode”, you can choose PC10 mode, PC10 standard mode, PC3JG partition
mode, etc.
• For “CPU operation mode”, the usable address space (range) and command set are defined.
■ Address space
Area Number
Identifier Name points Address(***-***)
of words
P Edge detection 512 32 P000 P1FF
K Keep-relay 768 48 K000 K2FF
V Special relay 256 16 V00 VFF

Occupied separately
TC Timer Counter 512 32 T000 T1FF
L Link relay 2048 128 L000 L7FF
XY Input Output 2048 128 X000 X7FF
M Internal relay 2048 128 M000 M7FF
PC10 S Special register 1024 S000 S3FF
N Present value register 512 N000 N1FF
Standard R Link register 2048 R000 R7FF
Basic area P1, P2, P3

mode D Data register 4096 D0000 D0FFF

D1 4096 D1000 D1FFF
D2 4096 D2000 D2FFF
P1 Edge detection 2048 128 P1000 P17FF
PC10 mode V1 Special relay 2048 128 V1000 V17FF
TC1 Timer Counter 2048 128 T1000 T17FF
L1 4096 256 L1000 L1FFF
Link relay
L2 4096 256 L2000 L2FFF
CPU operation mode M1 Internal relay 2048 128 M1000 M17FF

■ Instruction set: floating point calculation

■ Instruction set: signed calculation function, etc.

When PC10 Standard/ PC3JC Partition are active

When a circuit is read from CPU or file, inside PCwin changes to the same mode as the CPU.

PC10 PC10
Standard Standard
mode mode
PC10G

Read

PCwin

PC10 mode PC10 mode

PC10G

Read

PCwin

17-20
 When PC10 mode is active

When a circuit is read from CPU or file, inside PCwin changes to PC10 mode.

PC10
Standard
PC10 mode

PC10G

Read

PCwin

PC10 mode PC10 mode

PC10G

Read

PCwin

When PC10 extended mode is active

When a circuit is read from PC10GE, inside PCwin changes to PC10 extended mode.

PC10 extended PC10 extended

mode mode
PC10GE

Read

PCwin

17-21
17.2.7.2. PC10 extended address display setting (Initial: OFF)
• Selects the format for the address display of PC10 extended range.

Check ON: Ver.9 compatible display

Check OFF: Highlight display

ON: Ver.9 compatible OFF: Highlight display

Ver.9 compatible display Highlight display

No distinction for extended Extended device is highlighted
device in blue

17.2.7.3. Forwarding location setting for I/O diagram, network diagram (Initial: OFF)
• This setting is used exclusively for “PC10 Series”.
• Selects the forwarding location when writing I/O or network diagrams to PC10.

Check ON: Used when DM-12W direct monitor and PC10 are used together
Check OFF: Used for all other configurations

17.2.7.4. Ladder circuit single column display setting (Initial: OFF)

• Normally, a double column display ladder circuit cannot be copied to a single column display
ladder circuit.
• If this setting is turned ON, a double column display ladder circuit is forced into a single column
display, and thus it is possible to copy the ladder circuit.
Caution 1) Editing is not possible with this setting.
Caution 2) This setting automatically turns OFF when PCwin is closed.

Check ON: Forced single column display active

Check OFF: Forced single column display not active

17-22
18. CAD
Use when exchanging data between PCwin, UniDraf & UniDraf SFC [Shinwa Electrical-made].
Depending on the UniDraf version, the CPU operation modes that can be used differ.

UniDraf drawing data

UniDraf drawing data
CPU operation Circuit
ZMN ZMN SUD
mode structure (UniDrafSFC type)
(UniDraf4 type) (UniDraf5
~V17.8R01 V18.1R01~* type) ~V17.8R01 V18.1R01~*
PC2 Ladder 1 - 1/2 3 -
compatibility
Ladder 1 - 1/2 3 -
PC3J
Ladder+SFC - - - 3 -
separate/single
Ladder+FB - - 2 - -
Ladder - - 2 - -
PC3JG
Ladder+SFC - - - - -
separate
Ladder+FB - - 2 - -
Ladder - - 2 - -
PC10 standard Ladder+SFC - - - - -
Ladder+FB - - 2 - -
Ladder - - 2 - -
PC10 mode Ladder+SFC - - - - -
Ladder+FB - - 2 - -
Ladder - - 2 - -
PCDL mode Ladder+SFC - - - - -
Ladder+FB - - 2 - -
Plus Standard Ladder - - 2 - -
/Extension Ladder+SFC - - - - -
mode Ladder+FB - - 2 - -
PC1 mode Ladder 4 - - - -
MX Ladder 1,4 - - - -
separate/single
* With Ver. 18.1 Rev. 01 or later, no support is provided for the UniDraf4 format or UniDraf SFC format.
Use PCwin V17.8 R01 or an earlier version.

[CAD] menu Number Reference

[Read From UniDraf] [Read From UniDrafSFC] 3 18.1.1
[Read From UniDraf] 1 18.1.2
[Convert UniDraf to PC2/PC3/PC10 2 18.1.3
Ladder(UniDraf5 only]
[Convert UniDraf to PC1 Ladder] 4 18.1.4

[Write To UniDraf] [Write To UniDrafSFC] 3 18.2.1

[Write To UniDraf] 1 18.2.2
[Convert PC2/PC3/PC10 Ladder to 2 18.2.3
UniDraf(UniDraf5 only)]
[Convert PC1 Ladder to UniDraf] 4 18.2.4

[Convert FB library for UniDraf] 2 18.2.3

18-1
18.1. Read from UniDraf
18.1.1. PCwin <- UniDraf Data Exchange [SUD]
UniDraf SFC Data is converted into data for Pcwin.
Procedure is as under.

1) Following screen is displayed on clicking [CAD]-[Read from UniDraf]-[Read from UniDraf SFC].

On clicking,[Open File]dialogue is displayed.

2) Specify the file to be read.

Extender of the target file becomes(*.SUD).

Specify the file and click [Open] button.

3) Execute Read.

Reading starts on clicking [Execute] button.

If [Cancel] is clicked, return to [Read from Unidraf] dialog is made.

18-2
Following screen is displayed on the start of reading.

Click [OK] to end the process.

* If button is clicked without specifying the place of reading of the file in Procedure 1),
following screen will appear and reading will not be executed.

If [OK] is clicked, return to [Read from UniDraf] dialog is made.

18-3
18.1.1.1. Symbol Number Setting
Symbol Number can be specified, if necessary.

Following Symbol Number Setting Dialog is displayed, if [Symbol Number Setting] Button is clicked.
Change the Symbol Number, whenever required.
Modified data is valid also in the subsequent reading and writing.

18-4
18.1.2. PCwin <- UniDraf Data Exchange [ZMN]
UniDraf data is converted into data for PCwin
Procedure is as under.

1) Following screen will be displayed if [CAD]-[Read from UniDraf]-[Read from UniDraf] are clicked.

No clicking, [Open File] Dialog will be displayed.

2) Read the file to be read.

Extender of the target file will be(*.ZMN).

File is specified and [Open] button is clicked.

•"Makes the program number of an input coil equal to its soft circuit."
Please uncheck the checkbox if a program No. is different between software and I/O circuit diagram within the
same device.

18-5
Click the [ Execute ] button, and it starts to read.

[Program check result] is displayed even if there is no error.

Click [Close] button to end the process.
In case of an error, message about the point of error will be displayed.

18-6
18.1.3. Convert UniDraf to PC2/PC3/PC10 Ladder(UniDraf5 only)
UniDraf 5 drawing data（software drawing）is converted to PCwin circuit data.

The procedures are as follows.

1) By selecting [CAD]－[Read from UniDraf]－[Convert UniDraf to PC2/PC3/PC10 Ladder(UniDraf5 only] the
following confirmation screen will be displayed.

By pressing [OK], the following dialog box will appear.

2
3

Program memory and flash register is only valid in (FR) PC10 mode.

1 By pressing [...], a dialog box to select a folder will be displayed. Designate the ladder data exchange folder
(folder where the intermediate file for data exchange is outputted).
2 Enter the project name of the input data.
3 Select the CPU operation mode of the input data.
4 Set the languages for comment main sentence (1st language) and sub-sentence (2nd language).

2）Press the [Execute] button to convert the intermediate file for data exchange and make circuit data.
If FB library is used, the library file dialog box will be displayed. Select the FB library in use.

18-7
18.1.4. PCwin <- UniDraf Data Conversion [PC1]
UniDraf data is converted into PC1 Ladder Data.
Procedure is as under.

1) Following screen will be displayed on clicking [CAD]-[Read from UniDraf]-[CAD→PC1 Ladder Data
Conversion].

On clicking, [Open File] dialog will be displayed.

2) Specify the Conversion Source File.

Extender of the target file will be(*.snw).

Specify the file and click [Open] button.

3) Carry out conversion.

Conversion starts on clicking [Execute] button.

Return to [CAD→PC1 Ladder Data Conversion] dialog is made on clicking [Cancel] button.
Following screen is displayed on the start of conversion.

18-8
Click [OK] to end the process.

* In case button is clicked without specifying the Conversion Source File in Procedure 1),
following screen will be displayed and conversion is not carried out.

Return to [CAD→PC1 Ladder Data Conversion] dialog is made on clicking [OK] button.

18-9
18.2. Writing in UniDraf
18.2.1. PCwin ->UniDraf SFC Data Conversion [SUD]
Pcwin Data is converted to data for UniDraf SFC.
Procedure is as under.

1) Following screen is displayed on clicking [CAD] -[Write in UniDraf]-[Write in UniDraf SFC].

On clicking, [Open File] dialog is displayed.

2)Specify the place of saving the file.

Extender of the target file will be(*.SUD).

<When creating a new file>

Enter the file name and click [Open] button.

If [Yes] is clicked, file opens and following screen will be displayed.

18-10
* Selecting(*.ZMN)File if [Open] is clicked, following message will be displayed and file cannot be
created.

<When updating an existing file>

Specify the file and click the [Open] button to display the following screen.

* Following confirmation message will be displayed if(*.ZMN)File is selected and [Execute] button is
clicked.

Writing starts on clicking [Yes] and it will get converted to SUD File.
If [No] is clicked, return to [Write from UniDraf] dialog is made.

18-11
3) Various setting for the data to be written in UniDraf SFC are made.

Following screen is displayed on clicking [Detailed Setting] button.

C
D

G
F
I
H
J
K L
M N

O
Q
P
R

Instances of output are indicated below in Fig. A ∼ R.

18-12
 K M N
H I

G
ABCDEFGGHIJKLMNOP
L OQRSTU
Q
C

R
F

E J

B A D

18-13
 4) Writing is carried out.

Writing starts on clicking [Execute] button.

Click [OK] button to end the process.

18.2.1.1. Symbol Number Setting

Symbol number can be specified, if necessary.

Following Symbol Number Setting Dialog is displayed, if [Symbol Number Setting] Button is clicked.
Change the Symbol Number, whenever required. Modified data is also valid for the subsequent reading
and writing.

18-14
18.2.2. PCwin -> UniDraf Data Conversion [ZMN]
Pcwin Data is converted into data for UniDraf.
Procedure is as under.

1) Following screen will be displayed on clicking [CAD]-[Write in UniDraf] - [Write in UniDraf].

On clicking, [Write in UniDraf Data] dialog will be displayed.

2) Specify the file.

Extender of the target file will be(*.ZMN).

Specify the file and click [Open] button.

No clicking [Execute] button, following screen will be displayed.

18-15
 3) Various settings for the data to be written in UniDraf are made.

O
P

Following screen will be displayed on clicking [Page Format setting].

C
D
E
F G
H I

J
K L
M N

Instances of output are indicated below in B ∼ Q.

18-16
 K M N
H I

G
ABCDEFGGHIJKLMNOP
L OQRSTU
Q
C

R
F

E J

B A D

18-17
 4) Writing is carried out.
Conversion starts on clicking [Write] button.
Following screen will be displayed on the completion of conversion.

Click [OK] to end the process.

18.2.3. [Convert PC2/PC3/PC10 Ladder to UniDraf (UniDraf5 only)]

Convert PCwin circuit data into drawing data for UniDraf5（software diagrams）.

The procedures are as follows.

1) By selecting [Convert PC2/PC3/PC10 Ladder to UniDraf (UniDraf5 only)], the following dialog box will be
displayed.

2
3

1 By pressing [...], a dialog box to select a folder will be displayed. Designate the ladder data exchange folder.
2 The current project name will be displayed.
3 The current CPU will be displayed.
4 Set the language of the main sentence, sub-sentence to be outputted.

2) Press the [Execute] button and the intermediate file for exchanging circuit data converted data will be outputted.

18-18
18.2.4. PCwin -> UniDraf Data Conversion [PC1]
PC1 Ladder Data is converted into UniDraf data.
Procedure is as under.

1) Following screen will be displayed on clicking [CAD] - [Write in UniDraf]-[PC1 Ladder Data→CAD
Conversion].

2) Specify the file to be saved.

On clicking, [Save As] dialog will be displayed.

Extender of the target file will be(*.snw).

Specify the file and click [Save] button.

18-19
3) Conversion is carried out.

Conversion starts on clicking [Execute] button.

If [Cancel] button is clicked, return to [CAD→PC1 Ladder Data Conversion] dialog is made.
Following screen will be displayed on the start of conversion.

Click [OK] to end the process.

* If button is clicked without specifying the Conversion Source File in Procedure 1),
following screen will be displayed and conversion will not be carried out.

If [OK] button is clicked, return to [PC1 Ladder Data→CAD Conversion] will be made.

* About snw data reading in UniDraf.

Since (*.snw) is intermediate File, PLC link function is used for UniDraf Ver4.0 and subsequent
versions.

Procedure is as under.

1)Following screen will be displayed on clicking [PLC Link]-[Read Circuit from PLC].

18-20
Select [Yes.]
2) Specify the read file.

On clicking, [PLC File] dialog will be displayed.

Specify the file and click [Open] to display the following screen.

18-21
 Reading starts on clicking [ Execute] button..

For other details, see UniDraf instruction manual.

18-22
18.3. FB library conversion for UniDraf
Convert PCwin library data into FB library data for UniDraf5.

The procedures are as follows.

１）When [Convert FB library for UniDraf] is selected, the following dialog box will appear.
2

1 By pressing [...], a dialog box to select a library will be displayed.

Select the library you wish to convert.
2 The FB library will convert when [Convert] is pressed.
The converted data will be created in the folder which contains the selected FB library.
The file name will be (FB library file name). MNE.
To convert circuit data using FB library, register the FB patter file in Unidraf5.

18-23
18.4. Errors at the time of CAD Data <--> PC1 Language Data Conversion
Details of errors at the time of execution of CAD conversion and their disposal method have been
described below.
Source of
Code Message Details Action
Occurrence

There is error in the

Modify the Return Part
A(41H) CAD Return Error Return Part of the
appropriately.
circuit.
Attempt was made to
create the program Modify it within the
B(42H) CAD Exceeding the memory exceeding the memory memory capacity level.
capacity.

Set Value Error of the Timer Modify the set value in

C(43H) CAD Set value is 0.
Counter the range of 1-255.
Constant Operand Modify the numerical
D(44H) CAD Format Error of Constant Operand Portion has unspecified value in line with Radix
Radix (Notation). (Notation).
Register Value Modify the address
E(45H) CAD Register Address Error exceeds the specified within the specified
limit. limit.
Circuit code that cannot Modify the
Presence of non-convertible Circuit
F(46H) CAD be converted into PC1 inappropriate circuit
Code language has been used. code.
Circuit pattern that cannot
Presence of non-convertible Circuit
G(47H) CAD be converted into PC1 Modify the circuit.
Pattern language has been used.

CAD
PC1
Same address has Modify one of the
H(48H) Double Out Error
Language
been repeated. addresses.
CAD Total number of lines
Modify to a circuit of
I(49H) PC1 Circuit exceeding display limit. including Return exceeds
Language 22 lines vertically. less than 22 lines.
Program is either fully Convert to a file
CAD
NOP or it has no pictorial
J(4AH) PC1 No Program information. Only in case
containing the
Language Program.
of End Program.
PC1 Size of 1 block Make the program
K(4BH) Exceeding the Program limit
Language exceeds 256 steps. short.
There in no END
PC1 Review the sequence
L(4CH) No END Instruction Instruction in the
Language program.
program read from FD.
HLT Instruction is
PC1 HLT Circuit cannot be
M(4DH) HLT Circuit included in the
Language modified.
program
PC1 RQI Instruction is included RQI Circuit cannot be
N(4EH) RQI Circuit in the program.
Language modified.
Program is built in a
PC1
O(4FH) Reverse Output Circuit manner that it carries Modify the program.
Language
out opposite operation.
It is a circuit having
PC1
P(50H) Multi circuit more than 2 output Modify the program.
Language
coils.
It is a circuit that
PC1
Q(51H) Non-displayable circuit cannot be displayed as Modify the program.
Language
Ladder Circuit.
PC1 Program Format is
R(52H) Format Error Circuit [TNA (01)] Modify the program.
Language incorrect.
I/O Address Value
PC1 Modify the address in
S(53H) I/O Address Error used exceeds
Language the specified range.
0000-3777.

18-24
18.5. Precautions when creating a module

Module names and module identification numbers cannot be duplicated with other modules.
For the module name, module identification number, and number of modules, refer to the limitations of the module
(below).

< Module Limitations>

Item PCwin
Limit of module name Up to 6 half-width alphanumeric characters

Limiting the Number of Modules Upper limit 235 pieces

Module Identification Number Restrictions Only 21 to 255 can be used

1 to 20 cannot be used because they are system areas.

18-25
19. Print
Only SFC chart or LD Program, displayed currently along with SFC, LD are target of printing.
After displaying SFC chart or LD Program to be printed, select the Print Menu.
19.1. Printing of SFC Sheet
Select [File] – [Print] – [ SFC Sheet] the menu bar and display the SFC sheet dialog.

19.2. Printing of Action Block List

Select [File] – [Print] – [Action Block List] on the menu bar and display the action block dialog.

19-1
19.3. Circuit Diagram List
LD Program is printed.
Select [File] – [Print] – [Circuit Diagram List] on the menu bar and display the circuit diagram list dialog.
(Note) For a contact comment, with a halfwidth of ten characters x two lines are printed.

19-2
19.4. Library Printing
19.4.1. Printing Procedure
Entity Ladder Sequence Program of FB(Function Block)is printed 1FB each at FB unit. There is no
printing function of the drawing style to library printing.
FB that is registered in the Library and ought to be output is displayed and “Function Block Circuit
Diagram List” is selected.

FB

Following dialog is displayed. Depending on requirement, setting items are selected and entered and
printed by clicking [Print]button.
1.Printing Conditions 2. Cover Setting 3. Printer Setting

19-3
19.4.2. Instance of Function Block Print Output

19-4
19.5. Usage Status List
Address Usage Status in use can be printed with [DIFFERENCE OF PROGRAM] or [DIFFERENCE
OF DEVICE].

• Cover
Cover is printed along with print start as setting check ON.

• Function input area

Addresses of function input area are printed with [underline] characters along with print start as
setting check ON.

• Function output area

Addresses of function output area are printed with [italic] characters along with print start as setting
check ON.

19.6. Other drawing style prints

Following can also be printed :

• Comments List (LD Comment)
• Contacts List
• CPU Parameter List
• ME-NET Parameter List.

19-5
20. Drawing Style Print
Printing of the drawing style can output the printing list with a drawing frame of the CAD
drawing style. [File]-[Drawing Style Print] A printing list is chosen. This function is after
PCwin V4.5, and unless the option 2 (Drawing Style Print:TJA-6042/6045) is installed, it
cannot be chosen. This function does not operate in PC1/MX program.
Option 2 becomes not necessary from PCwin Ver12 onwards. (This option becomes a
PCwin standard function.)

20.1. Page set up

Select [File] - [Page set up] to display following dialogue box.
Please set up print direction, margin, binding position and paper size. Default value for
margin is 0mm, biding position is 0mm.

* Match after Ver.10

Set position
( Top ) ( Left )
Binding position

Binding position

Margin Margin

20-1
20.2. Form setup
In this dialog, a printing [ of the drawing style ] attached item is set up. Each project can
maintain its own settings. For details, please refer to "21.6 Document Printing Method"
Default is blank.

The number of effective char.

Item Char.
A MAKER 30
B MACHINE NO. 20
The input of "START C MACHINE NAME 100
NO." can be
performed if it is D DRAWING NO. 20
checking. DESIGN
E 2
CHANGENO.
F START NO. 4
G STD.DRAWING NO. 20
H DEVICE CODE 10
I CONTENTS 30
J PROGRAM NO. 2
K DRAWING FOR 20
L MESSRS 30
M USER’S NO. 20
N REMARKS 20
REMARKS1
O 500
(COPY RIGHTS)
P PROGRAM NAME 50
Q UPDATE 10
R PAGE NO. 4

It becomes a project
name at the time of
un-inputting.

20-2
(1) The printing position in the cover of each item

A MAKER
B MACHINE NO.
O C MACHINE NAME
D DRAWING NO.
E DESIGN CHANGENO.
F START NO.
G STD.DRAWING NO.
H DEVICE CODE
I CONTENTS
J PROGRAM NO.
K DRAWING FOR
L MESSRS
M USER’S NO.
N REMARKS
REMARKS1(COPY
O
RIGHTS)
P PROGRAM NAME
Q UPDATE
R PAGE NO.

B C L M K

A D E

20-3
(2) Position where circuit chart list of formatting item is printed

A MAKER
B MACHINE NO.
C MACHINE NAME
D DRAWING NO.
E DESIGN CHANGENO.
F START NO.
G STD.DRAWING NO.
O H DEVICE CODE
I CONTENTS
J PROGRAM NO.
K DRAWING FOR
L MESSRS
M USER’S NO.
N REMARKS
REMARKS1(COPY
O
RIGHTS)
P PROGRAM NAME
Q UPDATE
R PAGE NO.

J H

G Q P M I D A E R

20-4
20.3. Printing of SFC Sheet
Select [File] – [Drawing Style Print] – [SFC Sheet] the menu bar and display the SFC sheet
dialog.

Example of printing SFC Sheet

20-5
 20.4. Circuit Diagram List
LD Program is printed.
Select [File] – [Drawing Style Print] – [Circuit Diagram List] on the menu bar and display the
circuit diagram list dialog.
(Note) For a contact comment, with a halfwidth of ten characters x two lines are printed.

The project recommend OFF if I/O drawing

attached with data (Cross-reference print
I/O drawing when OFF)

Only print appointed action or sub procedure This setting item can be set up if printing
is available. of "Contact Table List" is completed.

The device which prints "Contact Table List Page" of "Circuit Diagram List" is decided by setting this dialog. After
"Contact Table List" is printed, the print of "Contact Table List Page" of "Circuit Diagram List" can be printed.

20-6
 (1) About "Contact Table List Page" of "Circuit Diagram List"
The following procedure performs printing of "Contact Table List Page."
1. Print "Contact Table List" after specifying a device by front page" Contact Table List
Dialog."
2. Print "Contact List Page" after a check by " Circuit Diagram List Dialog."

The device which prints "Contact Table List Page" to "Circuit Diagram List" is a device
specified by "Contact Table List Dialog."

Contact Table

Circuit Diagram List

102
Page

Circuit Diagram

20-7
(2) Explanation of coil cross reference

The coil which

exists in the page is
output.

The part used is output by "Program

number-block number" (Contact B is shown
with the under line)

When the "coil reference" of a circuit diagram list dialog is checked, it outputs in this form.
All become blank when there is no check in "Coil reference".

20-8
(3) The example of printing of a circuit with a function block (FB)

(4) No page feed in mid of circuit block operation example

After checking "No page feed in mid of circuit block" in Menu-[Options]-[Set]-[Operation] , change
page to print circuit diagram list without cutting circuit.
(Do not include FB block)

Change page and print next page when

circuit cut off.

20-9
20.5. Usage Status List
Address Usage Status in use can be printed with [DIFFERENCE OF PROGRAM] or
[DIFFERENCE OF DEVICE].

• Cover
Cover is printed along with print start as setting check ON.

• Function input area

Addresses of function input area are printed with [underline] characters along with print
start as setting check ON.

• Function output area

Addresses of function output area are printed with [italic] characters along with print start
as setting check ON.

20.6. Other drawing style prints

Following can also be printed :
• Comments List
• Contact Table List
• CPU Parameter List
• ME-NET Parameter List.

20-10
21. Tool
Tool has following functions
• I/O operation panel
• I/O check (for output)
• Log data display
This function can be operated since PCwinV5.1.

21.1. I/O Operation Panel

This function is the debug support function that enables I/O operation when actual input device is not connected.
Input from this I/O operation panel ignores the input from sequence program and forcibly turns I/O ON/OFF.

About difference from [Forced ON/OFF of I/O]

• Forced ON/OFF of I/O : There is forced setting of I/O but thereafter, it is the actual input state.
• I/O Operation Panel (Input Retention): Retains I/O state even after I/O operation setting.
(Effective only for PC3JG, PC10 and Plus extension mode)

(NOTE) Forced output of the output in the I/O operation panel function cannot be carried out.

Forced ON/OFF of 32 input addresses can be carried

out simultaneously

I/O Button

Register Monitor • Set Function

[Register Address]
Specifies Monitor Set Address.
[Register Data]
During Monitor :Specified Address is monitored.
During Edit :Data is set.
[Edit] Button
Register data is edited.
[Monitor] Button
Monitor of specified address is carried out.
[Write] Button
Writes Register data in the specified Register.

21-1
 I/O Button
Type and address are displayed on setting I/O
button. If clicked during execution, ON/OFF is
selected alternately.
Example of display of P1-L000
Input Hold Type H:P1-L000
1 Shot Type P1-L000
Monitor only Type M:P1-L000

Automatic Stoppage Timer (Effective only for

PC3JG, PC10 and Plus extension mode)
In case communication between Pcwin and PC
breaks, this timer automatically stops this function
on the PC side, for the safety of the system. It can
be set in the range of 2~300 seconds

Read/Save Set Data

[Open]:Opens Set Data File (*.OPP) and reads it.
[Save] :Saves Set Data File (*.OPP).

21.1.1. I/O Button Setting

On clicking [OK] button on I/O operation panel, I/O button setting screen is displayed. If [OK] is clicked, type and
address are displayed.

[Address] Enter ON/OFF Address.

[Comment] Display comment of the specified address.
It can be edited but edited comment is valid only in I/O operation panel.
[Type] Output method is set for each input address.
• Hold: Holds input state from I/O operation panel.
(Actual input of the sequence program is ignored) (Effective only for PC3JG, PC10 and
Plus extension mode)
• 1 Shot : Carries out forced setting only once. After execution, input of actual sequence program
becomes valid. (This function is similar to [I/O Forced ON/OFF]
• Monitor only : Displays address status. (Setting of Initial value/End value cannot be made)
[Initial Value] Sets ON/OFF at the time of start of execution.
[End Value] Sets ON/OFF at the time of execution stoppage. Setting of NONE will be the state during
execution stoppage.

21-2
21.1.2. Execution Start/Stop
If [Execution Start] button is clicked after address setting, there will be Input ON/OFF operable state.
If I/O button is clicked, ON/OFF can be selected alternately.

ON OFF

Click/Change
Yellow
of State

Gray

Gray
Under Execution State Execution Stop State

Yellow Click

When execution start is clicked, if simulation input is set,

display will be yellow, otherwise gray.

21-3
 21.1.3. Simulation Input (Effective only for PC3JG, PC10 and Plus extension mode)
If [Simulation Input] button is clicked, simulation input screen will be displayed. By turning simulation input ON/OFF,
sequence program can be simulated. When [Execution Start] button is clicked on the I/O operation panel, if there is
simulation input setting, simulation input is executed along with execution of Hold Input.

Maximum 32
Nos.
(No. 1-32)

•Shows correspondence of Input items and display items of simulation input.

[Add] Button Adds simulation input setting.

[Edit] Button Edits selected simulation input setting.
[Delete] Button Deletes selected simulation input setting.
[All clear] Button Clears all the settings.
[Open] Button Opens and reads Set Data File (*.SIO).
[Save] Button Saves in the Set Data File (*.SIO).

Set Simulation Input

On clicking [Add] [Edit] buttons, simulation input set screen will be displayed

[Type] 1 Input operation : Carries out address setting of one simulation input.
2 Input operation : Carries out address setting of two simulation inputs.
[Condition] Address : Sets condition address.
Comment : Displays comment of the specified address.
It can be edited but valid only in simulation input list.
[ON Timer] : Sets time for forced ON at a unit of 0.1 sec.
[OFF Timer : Sets time for forced OFF at a unit of 0.1 sec.
[Simulation Input] Address :Specifies simulation input address.
Comment : Displays comment of the specified address.
If can be edited but it is valid only in simulation input list.

21-4
Type : 1 Input Operation
Explains regarding 1 input operation.

Condition ON Timer OFF Timer Simulation Input

P1-M000 5 sec. (t1) 3 sec. (t2) X000

(a) In case of ON Time for condition P1-M000. ≥ ON Timer + OFF Timer

Timer Start
Time Up
ON Timer
0
Add Timer t1

Timer Start
Time Up Timer Start Time Up
OFF Timer
0
Add Timer t2 t2
Subtract 0
Timer

ON
P1-M000

X000

(b) In case of ON Time for condition P1-M000. < ON Timer + OFF Timer

Timer Start Time Up

ON Timer
0 Add Timer t1
Timer
Start Timer Stop

OFF Timer Add

0 Timer t2 ’ t2
Timer Start Time Up

Subtract
t2 ’ 0
Timer
ON
P1-M000

X000

21-5
 Type : 2 Input Operation
Explains regarding 2 input operations.

Condition ON Timer OFF Timer Simulation Input

P1-M000 3 sec. (t1) 2 sec. (t2) X000
P1-M001 3.5 sec. (u1) 1.5 sec. (u2) X001

1 input operation was carrying out forced I/O of simulation input address based on 1 condition. 2 Input operation
carries out forced I/O of simulation input address based on 2 conditions.

Timer operation condition is determined by condition 1 or 2.

Condition 1 Condition 2
|-------| |------------------| / |-----------------------[ ON Timer 1 ]--|
| Condition 1 Condition 2 |
|-------| / |-----------------| |------------------------[ ON Timer 2 ]--|

Timer Start Time Up

ON Timer 1
0 Add Timer t1 Timer Stop/Start

Timer Start (t2) Time Up

OFF Timer 1
Add Subtract
0 Timer t2 ’ Timer 0

ON
Condition 1
P1-M000

Condition 2 OFF
P1-M001

Simulation Input 1
X000
Forced OFF Forced ON
Simulation Input 2 Forced OFF
X001 Forced
Timer Start Time Up ON
ON Timer 2
0 Add Timer u1

Timer Start Time Up

OFF Timer 2
Add
0 Timer u2

21-6
21.2. I/O Check (for Output) (Effective only for PC3JG, PC10 and Plus extension mode)
This function is meant for output wiring check at the time of equipment start up. Output based on I/O check function
forcibly turns I/O ON/OFF ignoring the output of sequence program.
Kindly avoid using the equipment under operation and also take sufficient care for safety.

When executing, entering password “#OUT” ( #OUT:OK / #out:NG ), after push [continue] button.

I/O Button

Max. 16 Nos.

Automatic Stoppage Timer

This timer is meant for stopping the present function automatically on the PC side, in
case communication between Pcwin and PC breaks, for the safety of the system. It can
be set in the range of 2~300 sec.
Kindly carry out setting on the I/O operation panel.

(Caution) Forced output of input cannot be carried out in the I/O check function.

21-7
21.2.1. I/O Button Setting
On clicking [I/O] button of I/O check, I/O button set screen is displayed.

[Set Type] 16 Point bundle Setting : 0~15 bit of the specified address from top are set.
Individual Setting : Only 1 point is set.
Default Only in case of top-most level button of [Set] button is “16 point bundle setting”.
Default beyond the second line is “Individual Setting”.
[Monitor only] Displays the state of address, (Setting of Initial value/End value cannot be carried out)
[Address] ON/OFF address is entered.
[Comment] Comment of the specified address is displayed.
It can be edited but edited comment is valid only in I/O check function.
[Initial Value] Sets ON/OFF at the time of execution start.
[End Value] Sets ON/OFF at the time of execution stop.
Setting NONE becomes the state when execution is stopped.

21.2.2. Execution Start/Stop

On clicking [Execution Start] button after address setting, ON/OFF operable state of output is achieved.
Clicking of address button alternately selects ON/OFF.
ON OFF

Click, Status
Change
Yellow
Gray

Execution Stop State

Execution-in-progress state

Yellow Gray
Click

21-8
21.3. Log Data Display
Display log data of events recorded in the CPU.
This function is meant for maintenance/diagnosis of PC.
Corresponds since version 3.4 of PC3JD/PC3JB/PC3JB-F,E. Corresponds to PC3JG/PC10G/PCDL.

♦ Save
Save Log file (*.lg1). (*.lg2 when PCDL mode)

♦ Open
Open Log file (*.lg1). (*.lg2 when PCDL mode)

21-9
22. Switching three comment languages
22.1. Summary
The three comment languages can be shown/edited/switched/printed. The three languages can also be
used to write/read the comments of CPU (PC3JG/PC10G/PCDL/Plus). The three comment languages
written in CPU can be shown on the circuit monitor.
An universal management of various language comments is achieved on Pcwin of Ver 7 or later.

Further more, there is no need to restart your computer to have various local languages shown/printed.
This feature will make a great deal of contribution for the management /operation of control data in the
light of globalization of equipment.

PCwin

Japanese

English

Chinese

PC3JG

Reading/writing of
three
comment languages

Reading
The switch of three comment languages of three
comment
languages

Print
Direct circuit monitor

Japanese Japanese
English

Chinese English

Chinese
Circuit Diagram, etc.

switching of three comment languages

22-1
 There is no options required for switching three comment languages in the menu.
The languages corresponding to the three comment language switch are the five languages of
Japanese, English, Chinese, French, and Czech. The switch of three languages among the five
languages can be realized.
(Languages other than the above-mentioned six languages cannot be used now, as the drawing
frame data, etc for that language are required)

Action modes that can be written in PLC and CPU

All the CPU action modes of PC3JG(PC3JG-P), PC3JB-G(PC3JB-GP),
PC3JP-G(PC3JP-GP), PCDL, Plus(Extension mode)
Besides the above-mentioned PC3J series, PC1, MX cannot be written in.
If to write PLC that cannot be written in, the following warning sign will appear:

If to write three comment languages data into incompatible PLC (PC3JD, etc.), after confirmation
is shown, only the first comment language can be written in.
(The second, third comment languages cannot be written in)
Files using three comment languages (Project example : TOYODA)
Main projects
TOYODA.CSV Comment files
The first
language TOYODA$***.DFS Format set files *1
TOYODA$***.COV Cover set files *1
The TOYODA$C2.CSV Comment files
second TOYODA$***.DFS Format set files *1
language TOYODA$***.COV Cover set files *1
TOYODA$C3.CSV Comment files
The third
language TOYODA$***.DFS Format set files *1
TOYODA$***.COV Cover set files *1

Files using three comment languages (Project example : TOYODA_LIB)

FB library projects
TOYODA_LIB.CSV Comment files
The first Program library header files
language TOYODA_LIB.LBH
(Including the second language comments)
TOYODA_LIB $***.COV Cover set files *1
The TOYODA_LIB $C2.CSV Comment files
second
language TOYODA_LIB $***.COV Cover set files *1
TOYODA_LIB $C3.CSV Comment files
The third
language TOYODA_LIB $C3.LBH Library header files
TOYODA_LIB $***.COV Cover set files *1
*1 It is done when [Cover data and format data open/save at the same time] is set to be ON.
[Cover data and format data open/save at the same time] appear after clicking
[Option]-[Configuration]-[File].

22-2
 *** To be determined according to various languages (JPN: Japanese,ENG: English,CHN:
Chinese,CZE: Czech,FRA: French)

When showing various language comments, the corresponding font needs to be inputted in
advance. Regarding to the font input, please refer to the Windows manual.

The language for the following comment display is fixed (the three comment languages can not
be replaced).
But various functions can be normally operated.

• The comment display of the time diagrams on the monitor

• The comment display in the I/O tool
• The comment display on the event monitor
• The comment display in the communication module option
• The name display of the parameter program

22-3
22.2. Initial settings
The explanation on the initial settings of three comment languages switch.

22.2.1. Font settings

After installing PCwin Ver7, all the fonts of five languages will be set.
Only when changing fonts, can the following operation be conducted.
(1) Select [Option]-[Customize]

(2) After selecting the language to change font, press [Change] button.

(3) After changing to the font of designated language, press [OK] button.

(4) After confirming the settings in the customized window, press [OK] button.

22-4
22.2.2. Function of setting 3 comment languages

The settings when building new projects of versions before PCwin Ver6 and using the project data of
versions before PCwin Ver6.
(1) After Selecting [Option]-[Configuration], press the [3 languages] separator

(2) The language settings when building new projects. Please select the language for new projects
from the five languages.

(3) The language settings when using project data of versions before Ver6.
The language information when opening file/CPU read, please select from the five languages.

When the three comment languages function is effective

The language selection window is shown when opening file/CPU read

When the three comment languages function is ineffective

Use the language information of this setting to show comments (The language selection
window is not shown when opening file/CPU read)

22-5
22.3. Sequence to convert previous projects to the 3 language projects (main projects)
22.3.1. Output the 3 language comments to existing projects
The explanation still adopts the main projects of versions before PCwin V6 and the sequence to
read three comment languages data.
(1) [Enable the 3 languages function] after clicking [Option]-[Configuration]-[3 languages] is set to be
ON. (Please refer to the 3 language function settings in 22.2.2.)
(2) Select [File]- [Open].

(3) Select the old main project file, press [Open] button.

(4) After opening the project, select [File]- [Language Setup]

(5) Select the language of the chosen project, press [Registration] button.

Select the comment language of the

designated project (Compulsory). When
[Enable the 3 languages function] is set
to be OFF, the window is not shown.

22-6
 (6) Select the second/third languages, press [Registration] button

To select the third language, the

second language must be selected.
When not using the third language,
please select [Not Use]. The same
language cannot be selected twice.

(7) Select [File]-[Import Data]-[Comment]-[Designated language]. Import comment files of the

second/third languages

(8) The read in of three comment languages is completed.

22.3.2. To save 3 comment languages projects

After selecting [File]-[Save as], save the three comment languages project. Based on the login of the
language selection window, decide whether to produce the comment file of various languages.

22.3.3. To open the 3 comment languages project

Select [File]-[Open], then open the three comment languages project.
Different from opening old projects, the language selection window is not shown. The comment data
of the three languages part of project management is automatically opened.

22-7
22.3.4. To write three comment languages into CPU
Select [CPU]-[Write Data]-[All Program+Parameter+Comment], or select [All Program+library+
Parameter+Comment]

Write in the comment data of the

entire logged-in language part.
[Program*+Comment] or [Comment]
is the same.

22.3.5. The CPU read of 3 comment languages

Select [CPU]- [Read Data]- [All Program+Parameter+Comment], or select
[All Program+Parameter+Comment+Register]

Read the comment data of the

entire written in language part
and the comment data of the
library.

*When [Enable the 3 languages function] is set to be ON at the [3 languages] window after clicking
[Option]-[Configuration] and when use CPU to read the data written by versions before PCwin V6,
the language selection window is shown when read. Please select the displayed language type.

Primary project FB library project

(Only select the first language) (Select the first and second languages)

22-8
22.3.6. Recovery method of 3 comment languages data
When writing data of versions before PCwin V6 into the CPU that three comment languages has
been written in, the second/third language comments cannot be read after PCwin V7.
The explanation of the reading method of the second/third language comments

(1) After selecting [Option]- [Configuration], press the [3 languages] separator.

(2) To make [Enable (Recovery of the 3 languages data)] effective, click to set it to be ON.

(3) Select [CPU]-[Read Data]- [Recovery of the 3 languages data]

(4) After selecting the recovering language of the second/third language comments, press
[Registration] button.
Primary project FB library project

(5) Under normal recovery conditions, the following reminding content will be prompted.

Note) When the second/third language comments written in CPU fails or lost, it is likely to be
impossible to be recovered when reading again using this function.

22-9
22.4. Sequence to convert previous projects to the 3 languages projects (FB Library
project)
22.4.1. Import 3 language comments to previous projects
The following description explains the sequence of reading three comment languages data from FB
library projects written by versions before PCwin V6.
Besides, the PCwin Option 1 [Sign•FBD] English version FD TJA-6036 and PCwin security tool
[Identity indicator25P:TXY-6066], [Identity indicator USB: TXY-6067] are needed.
When editing, one of the following needs to be installed in normal conditions.
a. The hardware keyboard attached in TXY-6066 [Identity indicator25P]
b. The hardware keyboard attached in TXY-6067 [Identity indicator USB]
Option 1 becomes not necessary from PCwin Ver12 onwards. (This option becomes a PCwin
standard function.)

(1) Set [Enable the 3 languages function] to be ON in the [3 languages] window after clicking
[Option]-[configuration].
(Refer to the 3 language function settings in 21.2.2.)

(2) Select [Library] – [Open]

(3) Select the old FB library project file, click [Open] button.

(4) Select the first/second languages of the chosen project, click [Registration] button.

Select the designated project’s comment

language (Compulsory)
When [Enable the 3 languages function]
is OFF, this window cannot be shown.

22-10
(5) After opening the menu, select [Library] – [Language Setup]

(6) Select the third language, press [Registration] button

The same language as the

first/second languages cannot be
chosen.

(7) Select [Library]- [Library Import]- [Import Language3]

22-11
 (8) Select the inputted FB library and language, press [Open] button.

* When it fails to input, the following window will be shown. Please delete the errors and input again.

The logged in content can be saved as

documents.

(9) The read in of the three comment languages is completed.

22.4.2. To save the 3 comment languages project

Select [Library]-[Save as], save the three comment languages project. Decide whether to produce
comment file of various languages based on the login in the language selection window.

22.4.3. To open the 3 comment languages project

Select [Library]-[Open] to open the three comment languages project
Different from opening old projects, the language selection window is not shown. The comment data
of the three languages part of the project management is automatically opened.

22-12
22.4.4. To write 3 comment languages into CPU
Select [Library]- [Write CPU]-[FB library]

Write in the library comment data of

the entire logged in language part

22.4.5. CPU read of three comment languages

Select [Library]-[Read CPU]-[FB library]

Read the library comment data of

the entire written in language part

*When [Enable the 3 languages function] is ON at the [3 languages] window after clicking
[Option]-[Configuration], if reading data of versions before PCwin V6 from CPU, the language
selection window is shown. Please select the displayed language type.

22.4.6. Recovery method of 3 comment languages data

When saving three comment languages written into CPU with the versions before PCwin V6, the
second/third language comments can not be read by versions after PCwin V7.
The explanation of the reading methods of the second/third language comments.

(1) After selecting [Option]-[Configuration], press [3 languages] button.

(2) Click to select the item in order to make [Enable(Recovery of the 3 languages data)] to become
effective.

(3) Select [Library]-[Read CPU]-[Recovery of the 3 languages data]

22-13
(4) After selecting the recovering language for the second/third comment language, press
[Registration] button.

(5) During normal recovery, the following reminding content will be shown.

Note) When the second/third language comment written in CPU fails or is lost, it cannot be
recovered even to read again with this function.

22-14
22.5. Switching methods of comment display
Select [View]-[Display Selection]-[Designated language]

Display switch can also be done from the toolbar

* The optional language becomes the logged in language in [File]-[Language Setup].

22.6. Drawing style print method

Since PCwinVer7,to print in designated language can be realized.
(The characters and comment characters in the drawing frame can be printed in the designated
language.)
(1) Select printing language based on the sequence in [21.5. Switching method of comment display]
(2) Select [File]-[Drawing Style Print]-[Format Setup]

The format set of various languages is

managed by each project. But there
are possibilities for separate
input/output instances.

22-15
 (3)Select the printing list in [File]-[Drawing Style Print]
The format settings and comments of the chosen language can be printed
(4) After inputting the format set of three languages, save the project.
Based on the login at the language selection window, determine whether to produce the format
set data file of various languages.

*Since the next time, while opening the project, the format set data can also be read in.
*The format set files can not be written in CPU.

22.7. Regular printing method

Since PCwinVer7,to print in designated language can be realized.
(The characters of the cover set and comment characters can be printed in the designated
language)
For the operation method, please refer [21.6 Drawing style print method]
Based on the login at the language selection window, determine whether to produce the cover set
data file of various languages

*Since the next time to open the project, data can also be read in simultaneously.
*The cover set files can not be written in CPU.

22-16
22.8. Regarding to language selection
22.8.1. When the language settings in the main project and the FB library project are different
There is the language selection option in both main project and FB project.
The explanation of the comment display when the selected language is different

Example 1) FB library project Main project

The first language :Japanese The first language :Chinese
The second language :English The second language :English
The third language :Chinese The third language :Japanese
* Although the location of the language settings is different, as there exist the same comment data,
the FB library comments in the ladder chart can be shown in designated language.

Example 2) FB library project Main project

The first language :Japanese The first language :Japanese
The second language :English The second language :English
The third language :Chinese The third language :Czech
* As there is no Czech in the FB library, the FB library comments in the ladder chart are shown in
English.

Example 3) FB library project Main project

The first language :Japanese The first language :Japanese
The second language :Chinese The second language :English
The third language :Czech The third language :Chinese
* As there is no English in the FB library, The FB library comments in the ladder chart are shown
in the first language.

22.8.2. The sequence replacement method of the language selection

The explanation of the language’s sequence replacement method of the currently existing three
languages projects. (the projects incorporated in the I/O chart can not be replaced).
Example)
The sequence replacement of the first language: Japanese and the third language: Chinese
(1) Select [File]-[3 Language Setup]

(2) The first language is changed to [Chinese], and the third language is changed to [Japanese].
(3) Press [Registration] button, then replacement is completed.

22-17
22.9. Confirm language environment
Confirm if the language currently selected is one of the device language environment could provide.

(1) Select [File] - [Confirm language environment]

[Project]: display set project language.

[Library]: display set library language.

22-18
23. Function of I/O Diagram

23.1. Summary
I/O Diagram and the network Drawing data can be edited and be printed. The edited data can be
written in CPU.
The I/O Diagram and network Drawing written to CPU are available for display and trace, network
diagnostic, and ground and break diagnostic on the direct circuit monitor.
The comments can be translated into 3 languages.
CPU

PCwin I/O Diagram and network

Drawing

I/O Diagram
and network
Drawing

edit I/O chart and network Drawing

Direct circuit monitor

Option: Print

Need a sentinel that comes with

“I/O Chart function extension tool

(TXY-6351)”
I/O chart

Network chart

23-1
 PCwin versions vs. their available functions are shown as below.
[○:available ×:not available]
PCwin Ver7.0 PCwin Ver7.5 ∼ PCwin Ver8.0 ∼
∼
PCwin Ver7.2
I/O Drawing function O O O
I/O Drawing function
X O O
extension tool
Network Drawing X X O

When I/O Diagram is printed out from PCwin, Option 2 [Drawing -like-print] is necessary.
•Options vs. I/O Diagram [○:necessary ×:not necessary]
Option 2 I/O Drawing function
[Drawing -like print] extension tool
TJA-6043 TXY-6351
I/O Drawing display
I/O Drawing of CPU read X X
and write
PCwin
I/O print O X
I/O Drawing edit X O

• Operation methods of writable PLC with CPU

[○:possible ×:impossible]
PC3JG(PC3JG-P) PC3J series,
PC3JB-G(PC3JB-GP) PC1,MX,PCDL
PC3JP-G(PC3JP-GP) other than the
PC10G following
Plus(Extension mode) Plus(Standard mode)
O X

When writing to an unwritable PLC, the following message will be displayed.

23-2
 • Files about functions of an I/O Drawing (Project example : TOYODA)
I/O diagram TOYODA.IOZ I/O Drawing project file
TOYODA.IOC Symbol comment file
The 1st
TOYODA SSM Subset symbol file
language
TOYODA CSV Comment file (shared with ladder circuit draw)
TOYODA$C2.IOC
The 2nd
TOYODA$C2.SSM Same as above
language
TOYODA$C2.CSV
TOYODA$C3.IOC
The 3rd
TOYODA$C3.SSM Same as above
language
TOYODA$C3.CSV

- Data exchange is impossible with the I/O drawing data of UniDraf / UniDraf SFC made by Shinwa
Electric.

- Can not send or accept data with the I/O Drawing of UniDraf /UniDraf SFC.
Symbols shown in the List of symbols used in I/O Drawing Function cannot be used to draw the I/O
Drawing.
* For details, refer to "Document 5 I / O Diagram Symbol / Network Diagram Symbol List"

- To show comments of different languages, corresponding fonts need to be added beforehand. See
Windows operation manual for details of adding fonts.

Caution）Correction method depends on the PCwin & Direct Circuit Monitor version combination
No Problem (PcwinVer7～ Ver10.5) Correction method
In DM12W M-1G it was displayed correctly
however after upgrading/O diagram data
was written in PCwin, “undefined” was
displayed for the I/O symbol.

After upgrading, it is
possible to normally
1 display on the DM by
R/W the I/O diagram
in the CPU.

Upgrade version
to Pcwin Ver 10.6
or later.
In PCwin it was displayed correctly
however after upgrading “undefined” was
displayed for the device name. After upgrading,
reenter the device
2
code (with
comment).

I/O diagram can not be printed in Print after

3
PCwinVer7. upgrading.
The numbers of the first page for PCwin Print after
4
Ver 7､8 and Ver 10 respectively will differ. upgrading.

23-3
23.2. Tracing search of I/O Drawing
Introduce the function of tracing and retrieval between a ladder circuit diagram and an I/O Drawing.

23.2.1. Tracing search(Input)

Double-clicking any contact of the ladder window in the monitor will jump to the I/O Drawing.
Double-clicking the side of the I/O Drawing will return to the ladder window.

X000

Double-click

X000

ON/OFF Status
is not displayed.

Right-click any contact in the ladder window, then click[Go to IO Drawing]. It will jump to the I/O
Drawing .
Right-clicking the symbol [Return to Ladder] in the I/O Drawing window will return to the ladder
windows.

X000

X000

23-4
 Right-clicking the symbol [Jump to Ladder] in the I/O Drawing window will jump to the initial circuit
location of the ladder window.

X000

X000

23.2.2. Tracing search(Output)

Select coil from ladder window, and jump to I/O Drawing via menu [display]-[jump]-[Go to IO
Drawing] in the screen.

Double-clicking the coil in the ladder window will show the Jump Choice window.
You can choose[Go to IO Drawing] or [Return Contact].
Double-clicking the To the I/O Drawing will return to the coil in the ladder window.
The To the I/O Drawing symbol doesn’t show the state of ON/OFF.

The tracing search of the output is the same as “Tracing search (Input)”. Right-clicking the [Go to
IO Drawing] will jump to the I/O Drawing, while right-clicking the [Return to Ladder] will jump to the
ladder window.

23-5
23.3. To setup the I/O Drawing and Network Drawing
Click [Option]-[Configuration]-[File] in order, then check the option [While project(program file)
open/save] under the [I/O and Network drawing file open/save at the same time](Check on).

When following conditions are met, the option [Open and save the I/O and Network drawing
simultaneously] is available.
• There are I/O and Network drawing data with the same name as the project
(extension not included ).
• The option [I/O and Network drawing open/save at the same time] is checked.

23-6
23.4. Print of I/O Drawing

23.4.1. Coil cross reference of I/O Drawing

Screen print of PCwin package is included Coil cross reference of I/O Drawing (the contact point of
ladder circuit is indicated as “program number + block number, and the contact point of relay circuit is
indicated as “page number + line number”)
Drawing print of I/O Drawing Editor does not print the coil cross reference of I/O Drawing.

Drawing print of network Drawing is not included coil cross reference I/O Drawing.
When printing an I/O Drawing with PCwin’s Drawing Print, Option 2(Drawing style print) is needed.

X000
X001
X002
X003
•
•

Coil cross reference of I/O draw

23-7
23.4.2. The circuit diagram list coil mutual reference, the output circuit diagram contact point mutual reference
When there are coil addresses of circuit diagram list in the I/O Diagram, print “the page number + line
number” on the coil cross reference of circuit diagram list.
Print "procedure ordinal number + block ordinal number" in circuit diagram list into the contact point
mutual reference via I/O diagram.

• I/O draw • Circuit diagram list

Y010

Y010

I/O draw (page

33 / line 2)

23-8
23.4.3. Contact cross reference of circuit diagram list
Print I/O drawing page number and line number at cross point while I/O drawing "Circuit Diagram List
dialog" set following values:
"Contact reference": ON;
"Contact List": OFF and no allocated device for "Contact List dialog"
• circuit diagram list.

Ladder diagram circuit

(P1 / block 5)

I/O draw(page
38 / line 1)

23.4.4. Mutual reference of other device contact points in I/O diagram

Print instrument sign with its comment and correspond coil page number into mutual reference when
other device contact points existed in I/O diagram.

Label Comment Page No

23-9
23.5. Edit of I/O Drawing and Network Drawing
23.5.1. New
Click [File]-[New], the new wizard will be launched.
The details about the project settings will be discussed later.

(1) To select a language : Set one of the three languages, then click the [Next] button.
(Please refer to "23.5.2.1 Setup of language" for Symbol.)

(2) To set the property of the project : Input the items and click the [Finish] button.

• The startup screen of the I/O drawing Editor

I/O drawing
window:
Project tree window: Edit drawings
displaying drawings

symbol view: Symbol window:

displaying symbols displaying symbols
selected in the
symbol window

23-10
23.5.2. Setup of project
23.5.2.1. Setup of language
Click [File]-[Project Setup]-[Language Setup] in order, then specify the three languages .
If the project of PLC program already exists, then the project should be setup according to the
languages.
You are allowed to set only the first and the second language. The language unused should select
“NOT USE”.
The symbol can be specified since PCwinV9.1 (TMS/JIC/New TMS[IEC]). Moreover, the IEC symbol
was added.
The symbol of each language has been fixed before PCwinV9.0. The data made before V9.0 can be
used since V9.1.

Before PCwinV9.0 Since PCwinV9.1

JAPANES TMS JAPANES

TMS
ENGLISH JIC ENGLISH
Fixed Selectable JIC
CHINESE CHINESE
New TMS[IEC]
--- ---

The composition of language-symbol can be changed. Please review the drawing of the changed
language when changing.

The language settings can be changed. However, if you click [Registration], the following message
will be displayed.

Click [Yes], the data about the language classification prior to changes will be deleted. The newly set
language classification data will be “Undefined”.

23-11
23.5.2.2. Properties of project
By clicking [File]-[Project Setup]-[Project Properties], you can input the items of the frame. All
items with white background can be input.

Name shown at the beginning of the project tree

Not the project name saved in the file.

23-12
23.5.3. Import of comment

The I/O Diagram and ladder diagram circuit shares the same comment data (CSV file).
When PCwin starts, the I/O drawing Editor uses the comment data of the ladder diagram circuit, so
comments do not need to be imported.
When there is no ladder diagram circuit, comment data need to be imported before an I/O drawing
can be drawn.

To show the import sequence

(1) Click the menus [File]-[Import comment]-[Import a language] in order.

(2) Specify the file to be imported.

* Repeat Step (1) to Step (2) to import other languages.

23.5.4. Append of page number

In the project tree window, Select the “project name” or “I/O drawing”, right-click and then click
[Add page]. The new page number will be appended to the last page.

Add page [Select frame]:

Start page addition wizard
[Outer frame]-> [cross reference
frame]->[drawing information frame]
can be specified.
Page addition wizard can be start at
page property.

23-13
23.5.5. Page property
Set on each page.

Item Description
Continued from the
The setting can be continued from the previous page.
previous page
Specify program number 1-3 in P1-3.
Program number (Example: when indicate P2, L1000 described of the page should be
P2-L000).
Page number Specify page number.

Comment on relay Switch the status if there is any comment on relay contact point comment.
contact point If there are some same comments, the status is as “not display”

Touch point cross Switch the status if there is any cross reference print.
reference When there are some same comments, the status is as “not display”

Drawing No. Specify Drawing No.

Design Change Specify Design Change.

23-14
 Item Description
Specify each symbol from [outer frame] – [coil cross reference frame] –
[drawing information frame].
To press drawing frame select button, page adding wizard starts, frame
symbol can be selected.

Drawing frame symbol

PCwin V7.5 or later drawing frame symbols can be specified in each page,
and the frame symbol became connection type.
The frame symbols 2000 in the previous versions are fixed. For version 7.5
or later they cannot be selected, and 20010+20020+20030 should be
selected for the same class.

23-15
23.5.6. Symbol data list and text data list
Symbol setting data and text setting data can be listed for each one and entered.

23.5.7. Input/output data list

The addresses of I/O circuit diagrams, etc. 8 point, 16 point consecutive drawing creation is made
easy.
1. Line the cursor up with the device name, address, comment you wish to change and select
"Continuous Input".
2. Enter the device name, address or comment in the “Character String”. When doing this, enter
replacement characters (*,#,?,¥,@)in the location you wish to change continuously.
3. Set the ”Start Value”.
4. Set the number for ”No. of items”.
5. Pressing “OK” will allocate the number of cells specified where the cursor is positioned.
6. Also, when an address is entered in ""Device Name" , as shown in the below example, multiple
cells can be copied and pasted.

Copy/ Paste

23-16
23.5.8. Move of page
A page can be moved by dragging and dropping with a mouse.
To move the page “12.INPUT CIRCUIT L” behind the page “1. INPUT CIRCUIT A ”

Drop Append page

number
Drag automatically

23.5.9. Copy and paste of page

Select the page to be copied in the project tree window , then click the menu.
• To copy the first page of the project

<Right-click,then click [Copy/paste]>

Append Page
number
<Click the menu [Edit]-[Copy/paste]> automatically

Appended to
the last

To copy the first page of Project A to Project B

(1) Start the source Project A and the target Project B in the I/O Diagram Editor.
(2) Copy the page in Project A.
(3) Paste the page in Project B. The page will be added to the last.

23-17
23.5.10. The position of network Drawing
• The page number of network Drawing should be after from the I/O Diagram.
Because of Copy & paste, cut & paste, drag & drop, if network Drawing pages are allocated in
front of, the I/O Diagram an error message is displayed.

New project

I/O Diagram An error message is displayed

at dropping (paste)
1.I/O page

2. .I/O page
10. Network page
3.I/O page

Drag
Network chart

10. Network drawing

New project

I/O Diagram

1. I/O page

2 I/O page

3. I/O page

Network drawing
Drag

10. Network page

3. I/O page

23-18
23.5.11. Replacing
The text for search object should be the language strings currently displayed. (“Save by language”
OFF[common language] is also handled as search object).

[Distinguish upper case and lower case letters]

•Check if the search should be distinguish upper case and lower case of English one-bite
characters.

[Perfect matching]
•Check when search by perfect matching.

<Example> On the above, assume that search for character strings is 1.X000 and 2
Signal X000 are regarded as running.
1. Can be handled as replacing object.
2. Not handled as replacing object for not matching in the search result.

[Symbol ID]
Check the pasted symbols when they are changed.
•If the input symbol items are not matched, the symbols can be searched for object.
•If the input symbol items are not matched, an inquire message is displayed.

23-19
23.5.12. Create Cover page and update
Cover page with index (cover page) can be created and updated.
Next, the function to automatically create the front page is shown.
(1) Set “Contents of the equipment (page name)/page area” to the front of the index symbols.
(2) Index “Contents of the equipment (page name)/page area” are depends on the language selected
at creating cover page.
(3) When the index is exceed 1 page, create the following page.
(4) “Update cover page” updates only index. The freehand illustrations are not updated.
(5) “Create cover page” and “Update cover page” in the menu can be switched by if there is cover
page or not.
(6) When recreated cover page, “delete page” on the cover and “create cover page”.

With presence of cover page,

valid/invalid can be switched.

23-20
23.5.13. Font style batch change
All the font style of the symbol and Text can be changed page by page.

(Symbol)
•When the equipment name and comment of each symbol and etc. are
changed, it checks it.

(Text)
•When the comment of I/O Comment Input are changed, it checks it.

Please push [OK] button, and the confirmation message is displayed.

23.5.14. The window style is returned to default

The window style can be returned to default.
Please select Menu [View]-[Docking Window]-[Default].

Before After

23-21
 23.5.15. Mark
Write unprinted comment in the diagram with I/O diagram edit function.
Can see marking on the PCwin.
Double click mark part to display the mark contents.

Mark Available

23-22
23.6. I/O Drawing, Structure of Network Drawing
Import an I/O Drawing to the PCwin project that has been set (including a ladder diagram circuit
and comments) and instruct how to save, edit and read/write the I/O Drawing from/to CPU.

23.6.1. Import of I/O Drawing and Network Drawing data

By clicking [File]-[Import Data]-[Import I/O and Network Drawing Data], specify the I/O Drawing data
and network Drawing data to be imported. After the I/O Diagram data and network Drawing data Is
imported, comments can be imported subsequently.

23.6.2. Save additional project of I/O Drawing and Network Drawing data

Click the menu [Option]-[Configuration]-[File] and check the option [I/O Drawing file open/save at
the same time] (check on), the additional items will be saved.
If the option remains unchecked, the I/O Drawing data can not be saved.
If the option [I/O Drawing file open/save at the same time] checked , when opening a project with
PCwin, corresponding I/O Drawing will be opened simultaneously .
Refer to “23.3 To setup the I/O Drawing and Network Drawing”.

23-23
23.6.3. To edit the imported I/O Drawing and Network Drawing data
If you need to edit I/O Drawing after importing the data, select [edit]-[edit I/O Drawing, network cart]
and start [edit I/O Drawing and network Drawing]. If sentinel that comes with “I/O Drawing function
extension tool” is not installed, the menu is not available.

If you try to save the I/O Drawing and network Drawing in the [edit I/O Drawing and network
Drawing], a message will be displayed on the side of PCwin, asking if read the I/O Diagram again.

[Yes] : Usually click [Yes] and read the I/O Drawing again.
[No] : For some reason, the opened I/O Drawing data have been updated. To keep the I/O
Drawing in the memory of PCwin unchanged, click [No].

23-24
23.6.4. Write CPU of I/O and Network drawing

With the submenu of the menu [CPU]-[Write Data] is selected, you can write.
• [All Program + Parameter + Comment]
• [All Program + Library + Parameter + Comment]
• [I/O and Network drawing]

The writing to the CPU in the I/O Drawing can be indicated by the option [Writes IO Drawing data, at
the same time] in the dialog box displayed during the process. Keep the option checked.
Option checked : Write the I/O Drawing data to the CPU.
Option unchecked : Do not write the I/O Drawing data to the CPU.
If there are I/O Drawing data In the CPU, they will be reserved.

When writing to an unwritable PLC , the following message is displayed:

23.6.5. Read CPU of I/O Drawing and Network Drawing

With the submenu of the menu [CPU]-[Read Data], you can read :
• [PC2/3 All Program + Parameter + Comment]
• [PC2/3 All Program + Parameter + Comment + register]

23-25
23.7. Illustration function
23.7.1. Display toolbar

Icon Function/Name Remarks

Highlight Text
Find

Grid

Language Selection
Zoom
23.7.2. Illustration command toolbar

Icon Function/Name Icon Function/Name

Selection/Correct Connect Line
Symbol Selection/Correct Mother Line
Text Selection/Correct Center Point
Enlarge/reduce Polyline for connection
Line Group
Polyline Ungroup
Polycurve Bring to Front
Bezier Curve Bring to Back
Rectangle Align Left
Picture Align Light
Circle・Ellipse Align Top
Arc Align Bottom
Text Box Left 90 degrees turn
Circle Text Right 90 degrees turn
Mark Right/left reversing
Connection Point Upper/lower reversing

23-26
23.7.3. Style setting toolbar

Icon
Function Undo symbol
Color Fill Color Line Style
Name format

Remarks Same left

Icon

Function
Line Width Begin Style End Style Fill Pattern
Name

Remarks

23-27
 Icon Function/Name Icon Function/Name

Default Align Left-Right Left 90 degrees turn

Align Left Right 90 degrees turn
Align Center Bold
Align Right Italic
Default Align
Font
Top-Bottom
Align Top Font Size
Align Middle
Align Bottom

23.7.4. Page specification toolbar

Icon Function/Name

Top Page
Previous page
Page
Next page
Last page

23-28
23.7.5. Enlarge/reduce operation
How to switch enlarge/reduce in I/O Diagram view
•Operate with mouse Gestures
Switch enlarge/reduce Use a mouse with buttons
mode Expansion reduction Expansion reduction
mode mode release

Use a buttonless mouse

Enlarge
(1)
(3)
(2)

Reduce
(4) (1)
(2)

(3)
Return to standard
(1) (4)
(2)
(3)
•Operate with zoom icon
Enlarge/reduce

•Operate with keyboard

Enlarge
Ctrl Key + + Key

Reduce
Ctrl Key + - Key

23-29
23.7.6. Symbol group
To improve drawing efficiency, symbol groups can be created.

The group name 1-9 can be set in your own way (Select group tab -> menu on the right-clicking of
mouse).

Copy/delete/display property is available for the symbols registered in the group.

(Select Symbol -> menu on the right-clicking of mouse)

23-30
24. Network Drawing
The display, edit and print are available for I/O chart, Network Drawing. The read and write of CPU I/O
chart and Network Drawing. The LINK parameters could be set automatically via created Network Drawing.
This chapter describe the rule of create Network Drawing.

[Module specification] O: Match -: No Match

FL Fl-net(8/16/32KW)
DLNK-M2 Ether CAT
remote-M N:N 1:N
Network Drawing
O O O O *5 -
diagnosis
Create Network Drawing O O O - *1 O *6
Parameter set automatically *3 O O O - *2 -
Communication area display O O O - -
Grounding disconnection diagnosis O O - - -

Ethernet SN-I/F PC link EtherNet/IP

*4 (PCS)*4 *4 *7
Network Drawing - - - ○
diagnosis
Create Network Drawing - - - ○
Parameter set - - - ○
automatically *3
Communication area display - - - ×
Grounding disconnection diagnosis - - - ×

*1. Create 1:N communication Network Drawing is available. But input information for automatic set
parameter is not available.

*2. 1:N communication parameter automatically set is not available.

Please set at detail setting in PCwin Link setting.

*3. Please refer to 24.3 for details of Auto parameter setting.

*4. Ethernet or PC Link did not prepare symbol.

If you want to create Network Drawing but cannot use network symbol, please create the chart
followed the same way to create I/O chart.
But, can not diagnostic the network.

*5. When Program No/Link No/Node No is set, network drawing can be diagnosed.

*6. Importing ENI files enables you to create network diagrams.

The maximum number of slaves is 31.
*7. In the direct circuit monitor, the version that supports EtherNet/IP in the network diagram is DM:10.2.0
or later.

O : Drawing by network symbol

X : Drawing by figure

24-1
24.1. Flow from edit to diagnostic

(1) Edit
Edit I/O and Network
Drawing s
IODraw.EXE

(2) Automatically set parameters

PCwin (3) File save and print

Ver8.0 or later

(4) Write to CPU

Direct loop monitor

Ver8.0 or later

(5) Display/Diagnose

24-2
24.2. Edit the Network Drawing
Network Drawing is created via the reserved symbols and the kinked lines.

Toolbar

Example: FL-net network system chart.

24-3
24.2.1 Type of the reserved symbols (module tag of the symbol list)
•CPU 11000 : PC3JG
11001 : PC3JG-P
11002 : PC3JP
11003 : PC3JP-GP
11004 : PC10G
11005 : PC10P
11006 : PC10P-DP
11007 : Plus

•FL-net 11050 : PC3JB-G(inner)

11051 : PC3JB-GP(inner)
11052 : PC3JP(inner)
11053 : PC3JP-GP(inner)
11054 : FL/ET-T-V2
11055 : FL/ET-T-V2H
11056 : other maker Fl-net
11057 : PC10G(inner)
11058 : 2PORT-EFR
11059 : PC10P(inner)
11060 : PC10P-DP(inner)
11061 : Plus

•DLNK-M2 11100 : PC3JG(inner)

11101 : PC3JG-P(inner)
11102 : PC3JP(inner)
11103 : PC3JP-GP(inner)
11104 : DLNK-M2
11105 : PC10P-DP(inner)
11106 : Plus

•FL remote 11200 : 2PORT-EFR

11201 : PC10G(inner)
11202 : PC10P(inner)
11203 : PC10P-DP(inner)
11204 : Plus

24-4
•DeviceNet slave

11150 : DLNK-S
11151 : DLNK-S2
11152 : Other maker slaves
11153 : DRMT-32/00P(diagnostic function)
11154 : DRMT-00/32P(diagnostic function)
11155 : DRMT-16/16P(diagnostic function)
11156 : DRMT-32/00(diagnostic function)
11157 : DRMT-00/32(diagnostic function)
11158 : DRMT-16/16(diagnostic function)
11159 : Other maker slaves(diagnostic function)

•FL remote slave

11250 : FRMT-32/00P
11251 : FRMT-00/32P
11252 : FRMT-16/16P
11253 : Other maker slaves
11254 : Other maker slaves(diagnostic function)
11255 : FRSK-32ND3
11256 : FRSK-32TD2
11257 : FRSK-16NTD2

24-5
•Hub

11300 : Hub(4 port) down

11301 : Hub (4 port) up
11302 : Hub (4 port) left
11303 : Hub (4 port) right
11304 : Hub (8 port) down
11305 : Hub (8 port) up
11306 : Hub (8 port) left
11307 : Hub (8 port) right

•Branch unit

11350 : 5 branch unit up

11351 : 5 branch unit down
11352 : 5 branch unit left
11353 : 5 branch unit right
11354 : 3 branch unit up
11355 : 3 branch unit down
11356 : 3 branch unit left
11357 : 3 branch unit right

24-6
・EtherNet/IP
Sscanner

Symbol

11500 : EtherNet/IP PC10G(Built-in)

11501 : EtherNet/IP PC10P(Built-in)
11502 : EtherNet/IP PC10P-DP(Built-in)
11503 : EtherNet/IP PC10PE(Built-in)
11504 : EtherNet/IP Plus
11505 : EtherNet/IP Nano(Built-in)
11506 : EtherNet/IP Nano 10GX(Built-in)
11507 : EF10 EtherNet/IP
11508 : 2ET EtherNet/IP
11509 : Nano Safety EtherNet/IP
11510 : Another manufacturer EtherNet/IP Scanner

・EtherNet/IP
Adapter

Symbol

11550 : EPSK-32ND3
11551 : EPSK-32TD2
11552 : EPSK-16NTD2
11553 : RS0xIP
11554 : Another manufacturer EtherNet/IP Adapter

24-7
24.2.2 Method of reduce symbol setting

Use it if you want to set multi symbols in a chart.

There are two cases to reduce the symbol.

•Reduce symbol first then start setting.
•Reduce symbol after setting finished.

(1) Reduce symbol first then start setting.

After the setting, all displayed symbols are reduced ones.
Select “Small” at the “Option – Set – Network Drawing”

After paste symbols, the setting is small symbols.

24-8
(2) Reduce symbol after setting finished.
Select the symbols you want to reduce, click the right button, then select “Small size symbol”

(3) Recover the reduced symbol to normal size.

Select the symbol you want to recover, click the right button, then select “Normal size symbol”

24-9
24.2.3 Rules to locate the CPU symbol and Master symbol

Before PCwin Ver.8.1R01

CPU symbol and Master symbol must be put side by side.
CPU symbol and network master symbol must be appeared in every page.

•Internal Link case

Please create CPU symbol and internal master symbol at the same time

PCwin Ver.8.1R02 or later

There is no need to put the CPU symbol and master symbol side by side (if this have been done
before in creating Network Drawing, it unnecessary to delete CPU symbol). Instead of creating CPU
symbol, just check the item “Self node/Self Appointment” in symbol data input dialogue box of network
master symbol.

If checked, the area will be filled by mesh.

If CPU symbols are created

to network master symbol by
horizontally, in spite of the
setting of “Self node/Self
appointment” master symbol
should be meshed.

24-10
24.2.4 The object of Network Drawing diagnosis.
Only CPU network connected direct circuit monitors should be the diagnostic object on direct circuit
monitor. Other network cannot be diagnosed on direct circuit monitor.
[FL-net]

CPU FL-net Ethernet

DM

CPU FL-net FL-net Diagnosis of the FL-net master/slave

network which DM is connected is
O
available.

CPU FL-net

X
Diagnosis of FL-net network on the
different slave line is not available.

[DeviceNet FL, remote]

CPU DLNK-M2 FL-net Ethernet

DM

Diagnosis of DLNK-M2(FL remote)

O DRMT
master/slave network which DM is
connecting is available
CPU FL-net DLNK
-M2

Diagnosis of FL-net network on

different slave line is not available.
X DRMT

24-11
【EtherNet/IP】

CPU EtherNet EtherNet

DM
/IP

EtherNet EtherNet
CPU /IP /IP
The EtherNet/IP network to which
○ the DM is connected can be

EtherNet
CPU /IP
It is not possible to diagnose the
× other network of the EtherNet/IP

24-12
24.2.5 Rules on Network Drawing
1 line Network Drawing should be created in 1 page.
• FL-net, DeviceNet and FL remote must be created in the separate pages.
• Even with the same network, different line Network Drawing must be created in the separate pages.
• If the slave has plural lines and the chart cannot be created in 1 page, then split it to 2 pages.

24.2.6 Add pages in Network Drawing

Add pages by right-clicking on Network Drawing folder
[New Page] is added.

24.2.7 Load ENI file(EtherCAT)

When writing the EtherCAT network diagram, create the network diagram by reading the ENI file.
Right click the desired network diagram file and click [Load ENI File].

Right click

Select and click

Select the desired file and open it

The module position can be changed.

24-13
24.2.8 Rules of writing wire connection
Create the wire connection between symbols by connecting them with broken lines.

1)Select connecting broken line [ ] from toolbar

2) Select start mark. Left-click on the circle which is the start mark.

3) While pressing [ALT Key], left-click on the next mark.

24-14
 4). While pressing [ALT key], left-click on the circle which is the end mark.

The line positions can be changed after the lines are connected.

(1) Left-click on the vertex to be moved.

(2) While pressing [ALT Key], Drag the mouse to the direction you want to move.

24-15
24.2.9 Entries of symbol property

Set each data when the symbols are arranged. The automatic setting of parameters can be done
based on the setting data. If some data is unknown, the parameters can be saved in the file. However,
in that case, the diagnosis cannot be held properly in parameter automatic setting and direct circuit
monitor.

24.2.9.1 Symbol property setting items

•FL-net (need to set both master & slave)
FL-net Content Range
Program code 1-3

LINK code 1-8

0-F
Rack code
(inner: F)
0-7
Slot code
(standard:0,option:1)
0:FL-net(8K),1:FL-net(16K)
Work mode
2:FL-net(32KW)
relay Link
Link-initial word address
address
relay Link
0-128(Total Word Count in Message
number of link
Reception and Sending)
words
relay link
sending initial word address
address
relay link
0-128(Total Word Count in Message
Number of send
Board)
words.
Register link
Link initial word address
address
Register link 0-2048,0-6144,0-8192
number of link (Total Word Count in Message
words Reception and Sending)
Register link
sending initial word address
address
Register link 0-2048,0-6144,0-8192
number of send (Total Word Count in Message
words Reception and Sending)
Node code 1-249

comment 3 language

24-16
DLNK-M2(master)FL remote(master)
DLNK-M2
FL Content Range
remote
Program
1-3
code

Link code 1-8

0-F
Rack code
(inner: F)
0-7
Slot code
(standard:0,option:1)

Initial address byte address

General
status byte address
Initial address
Ground buffer
byte address
initial address
disconnect
buffer byte address
initial address
comment 3 language

DeviceNet (slave)FL remote(slave)

DLNK-M2
FL Content Range
remote
Node code 1-63

Only DLNK-S,DLNK-S2
byte count
DRMT/FRMT – automatic judgment
Transfer 0:M<-S,S<-M
direction 1:M->S,S->M

comment 3 language

EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP Content Range
Program No. 1～3

Link No. 1～8

0~F
Rack No.
(inner : F)
(standard, option:1, L1:2, L2:3)
Slot No.
Nano(0~F(L1[2], L2[3], L3[0], L4[1]))

Detail Reference to 24.2.9.1Symbol property setting items

Comment 3 language

24-17
24.2.9.2 Advanced EtherNet/IP Settings
24.2.9.2.1 Scanner symbol
 When specifying own node/own station
Clicking the [Detailed Settings] tab. IP address entry field is displayed when the "Own Node" and "Own
Station" are checked.

Enter IP address. Then, select [Advanced].

Refer to 11.2.5.2 EtherNet/IP in TOYOPUC-EF10 Instruction Manual (t-760n) for more information on the
settings.
After completing the setting, click the [OK] button, and click the [Register] button in the symbol data entry
window.

24-18
  For other nodes
Do not enter the program-link No./ rack No./ slot No at other nodes.
Enter only the connection No..
Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. Uncheck the self-node/own station specification, and the connection No.
entry field is displayed. Enter a value between 0 and 383 in the connection No. field.

24.2.9.2.2 Adapter symbol

Click the [Advanced] tab. Enter a value between 0 and 383 in the connection No. entry field.

24-19
24.2.10 Ground fault and disconnection diagnosis setting
Options of ground fault and disconnecting diagnosis valid are shown as below.
• Select from symbol list
• Select when symbols are arranged
The valid/invalid abnormal sensing for ground fault and disconnect can be set by checking this item.

1. When it is selected from symbol list

Right-click on a symbol, the selected symbol turned, and a menu bar is displayed
To select [Unconnected detecting Enable], set valid/invalid connection detection for the selected
symbols.
This status becomes setting when symbols are arranged. The status should be the setting when
the symbol is arranged.

2. Select when symbols are arranged

Every time the symbols are arranged, the valid/invalid setting of connection detection is available

24-20
24.2.11 Disconnection diagnosis/Network diagnosis possible line
As for I/O Drawing and the Network Drawing edit function, a lot of lines are possible as shown in the
table. The line function which was able to be used when Disconnection diagnosis/Network diagnosis
was done was shown.
Polyline
Poly Connect Mother Poly Bezier
Line for Arc
line line line curve curve
connection
I/O Drawing Can not
Enable Enable Disable
(disconnection diagnosis) select
Disable
Network Drawing Can not Can not
Disable Enable
(Network diagnosis) select select

In the precondition, both ends of the line are without fail on grids.
Enable : Diagnosis function enable.
Disable : Diagnosis function disable.
Can not select : Because the icon cannot be selected, the line cannot be done.

The diagnosis function is invalid to the line where an invalid line kind is used.
When one line is composed of an effective line kind and an invalid line kind, the diagnosis function is
invalid.

Line which cannot be diagnosed

Line Polyline

24.2.12 Display of DeviceNet and FL remote communication area

This can be used when the number of transfer is set without using slave.
Slaves not being used can be set.
Select [Network Drawing] – [Communication area display] – [FL-Remote].

Check “Display slave reservation list”

Enter Slave No., number of input bite/output bite, and [Add/Update] button.
To delete, press Del Key after selecting the slave you want to delete

24-21
24.2.13 DM Network diagnosis/ground fault & disconnecting diagnostic check

The valid and invalid diagnosis can be confirmed by the function.

Select [Network Drawing] – [Diagnostic test]

If there is no error, every line is displayed bold and indicated “Error was not found”.

If there is any error, the lines are not displayed as bold and the error is indicated.

Example) When the symbols did not connected with the broken lines, there will be the error
message: “There are unconnected symbols exist”

24-22
If an error is displayed in the diagnostic test, check the following.
Error display contents Cause
Some symbols are not connected. The connection point is not connected by a
connection line.
More than one CPU is installed. There are two or more CPU symbologies.

Install a symbol as the master. The scanner symbol (self-node) is not placed.

Multiple symbols have been set as the master. Two or more scanner symbols (self-node) are
placed.
Slaves of a kind that the master is not to be Symbology other than EtherNet/IP is placed.
diagnosed are installed.
Master symbols with different setting values are The network diagram is created over multiple
installed in the same program number and link pages, but the parameters of the self-node
number. symbol do not match.

24-23
24.3. Auto parameter setting
(1) Start editing I/O chart and Network Drawing from PCwin

(2) The update can be made from Menu [network flow chart] – [Renew parameter update].
When the restart status is just edit I/O chart and Network Drawing, the [update parameters] menu is invalid.

(3) On I/O chart and network flow chart editing, when [parameter update] is selected (if the startup resource
PCwin has parameter update request), the startup resource PCwin displays following confirmation
message.
“Yes” – re-load I/O chart and network flow chart and update parameters
“No” – do not precede either data re-load or parameter update

24-24
The detailed link parameter settings are also updated.

NOTE) If there is a mismatch between the parameters of PCwin and the settings of the network
system diagram, a warning message is displayed when saving.

24-25
 Show automatic updates.
link parameter setting screen

FL-net advanced setting screen

DLNK-M2 advanced setting screen

In case there is DLNK-M2 network

input/output circuit chart, automatic
setting is available.

24-26
FL-remote advanced setting screen

In case there is FL remote-M

network input/output circuit chart,
automatic setting is available.

Detailed EtherNet/IP Settings Window

24-27
24.4. Save and print files, write to CPU
Network drawing is the same operation as I/O drawing.

24.5. Direct circuit monitor-display/diagnosis

24.5.1 Illustration of Screen Works
When a trouble such as network failure, ground fault or disconnecting is found by the trouble
warning screen on the control panel, a setting is required on screen works to jump the trouble spot.

Double click on button parts.

Select” start EXE

(extended button)”

Enter“D:¥Application¥Utility¥Htom.exe” “in
EXE file.

Enter following information in parameter

Network flow chart: “IOZ_N”
OK to complete.
Ground fault / disconnection: “IOZ D”

24-28
24.5.2 Follow up process of diagnostic trouble report
1) FL-net network flow chart diagnosis
The diagnostic outcome is shown following colors. (Color of symbols and wire connections)
Normal: green
Abnormal: red

If click on the network with

trouble, jump to the page.

Network trouble slave shown in red

Identify the facility and trouble module
immediately.

Touch the troubled module, jump to

CPU error monitor

Identify network trouble details.

24-29
 2) DeviceNet FL remote network flow chart diagnosis
The diagnostic report is shown by colors (color of symbol)
Normal: green
Abnormal: red
Edge cutting: yellow
No connection: Black
Chase method is identical to 1) FL-net network flow chart diagnosis

3) DeviceNet FL remote ground fault / disconnect diagnosis

The slaves having ground disconnect warning are marked out in red (yellow)
Ground fault: yellow
Disconnected: red

Touch ground fault/disconnect

warning, jump to the page.

Ground fault /disconnected warning

slave is shown in red/yellow.
Facility and warning slave can be
identified immediately.

The machines connected to the

slave can be identified
immediately.

To touch the warning slave ground fault

or disconnected, the I/O chart is
displayed.
The warning address of ground fault or
disconnected is shown in red (yellow).

24-30
Document 1. To add fonts

From PCwin Ver.7 onwards, corresponding fonts need to be added beforehand to show the notes of
different languages.
The steps may vary from the OS version of windows 2000/XP and the method of the font to be
added.
Refer to the Operation Manual of Windows for further details.

Document -1
Document2 SFC / FBD function and limitation of CPU

SFC/FBD are graphical programming languages prescribed in IEC61131-3.

SFC Function
SFC (Sequential Function Chart) Functionality of PC3JD Programming based on SFC of
Products i.e. PC3JD/PC3JB version 2.00 and above is possible.
Please refer to "SFC Installation manual" for the programming by SFC.
FBD Function
Products PC3JD/PC3JB version 2.60 and thereafter can be programmed based on
FBD(Function Block Diagram).

Document2-1 Judging method

Check the presence of SFC Function based on version.
Position of putting the version seal differs depending on the version.
3.00 SFC/FB
PC3JD-C 3.00 SFC/FB

* ** * **

1.10

No SFC function Has SFC function

Document2-2 Display of SFC execution status

When SFC Program is stored, “SFC” will be displayed .

PC3JD-C 3.00 SFC/FB

SFC program
PWR
X00
Y01 S 1 SFC
0123456789ABCDEF
RUN MODE X02
Program1 is programmed with SFC.
E/A Y03
INC SFC display
1->s1 , 2->s2 , 3->s3

Document -2
Document2-3 Restrictions of SFC
When carrying out Programming based on SFC, Data memory area indicated below is selected
exclusively for execution control of SFC. Therefore, be careful that it can not be used as user
memory.
Further, note that sometimes programming based on SFC is not possible depending on the
operation mode.
Program Actions Action SUB-
Data area Steps Transitions Processes The data memory occupation area
No. /Step Labels SFCs

P1 1000 1000 16 1000 256 100 P1-JSC80~JSEFF P1-JS800~JSBFF P1-JS400~JS7FF P1-JS000~JS3FF

PC10 Extension
P2 1000 1000 16 1000 256 100 P2-JSC80~JSEFF P2-JS800~JSBFF P2-JS400~JS7FF P2-JS000~JS3FF
mode
P3 1000 1000 16 1000 256 100 P3-JSC80~JSEFF P3-JS800~JSBFF P3-JS400~JS7FF P3-JS000~JS3FF
PC10
P1 1000 16 1000 256 100 P1-R580~R7FF
PC10 Standard ET000~ET5FF H000~H5FF EN000~EN5FF
PC3JG Separate P2 *1 1000 16 1000 256 100 P2-R580~R7FF
mode *2 *2 *2
Plus Extension P3 1000 16 1000 256 100 P3-R580~R7FF

P1 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 P1-R580~R7FF ET000~ET1FF H000~H1FF EN000~EN1FF

Separate
P2 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 P2-R580~R7FF ET200~ET3FF H200~H3FF EN200~EN3FF
mode1
P3 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 P3-R580~R7FF ET400~ET5FF H400~H5FF EN400~EN5FF

P1 1000 1000 16 1000 256 100 P1-R580~R7FF ET000~ET3FF H000~H3FF EN000~EN3FF

Separate
P2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
mode2
P3 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 P3-R580~R7FF ET400~ET5FF H400~H5FF EN400~EN5FF

P1 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 P1-R580~R7FF ET000~ET1FF H000~H1FF EN000~EN1FF

Separate
P2 1000 1000 16 1000 256 100 P2-R580~R7FF ET200~ET5FF H200~H5FF EN200~EN5FF
mode3
P3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

P1 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 P1-R580~R7FF ET000~ET1FF H000~H1FF EN000~EN1FF

Separate
P2 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 P2-R580~R7FF ET200~ET3FF H200~H3FF EN200~EN3FF
mode4
P3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

P1 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 P1-R580~R7FF ET000~ET1FF H000~H1FF EN000~EN1FF

Separate
P2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
mode5
P3 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 P3-R580~R7FF ET400~ET5FF H400~H5FF EN400~EN5FF

P1 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 R580~R7FF ET000~ET1FF H000~H1FF EN000~EN1FF

Single
P2 Imposible Imposible
mode1
P3 Imposible Imposible

P1 1000 1000 16 1000 256 100 R580~R7FF ET000~ET3FF H000~H3FF EN000~EN3FF

Single
P2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
mode2
P3 Imposible Imposible

P1 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 R580~R7FF ET000~ET1FF H000~H1FF EN000~EN1FF

Single
P2 Imposible Imposible
mode3
P3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

P1 1000 1000 16 1000 256 100 R580~R7FF ET000~ET3FF H000~H3FF EN000~EN3FF

Single
P2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
mode4
P3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

P1 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 R580~R7FF ET000~ET1FF H000~H1FF EN000~EN1FF

Single
P2 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
mode5
P3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

P1 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 R580~R7FF ET000~ET1FF H000~H1FF EN000~EN1FF

Single
P2 Imposible Imposible
mode6
P3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

P1 500 1000 16 1000 256 100 R580~R7FF ET000~ET3FF H000~H3FF EN000~EN3FF

PCDL
P2 Imposible Imposible
Plus Standard
P3 Imposible Imposible

PC2
P1 Imposible --- --- --- ---
interchange

0000 0000 000- 000-

Usable number --- --- 00-99 --- --- --- ---
-9999 -9999 999 255

Document -3
*1 The number of steps for which each program number can be used is shown (PC10, PC3JG Separate and
PC10 Standard mode).
Example
P1+P2+P3 ≤ 1500 P1 P2 P3 Explanation
P1+P2 ≤ 1000 At 700 step use of P1. P2 is 300(1000-700) step.
P2+P3 ≤ 1000 700 300 500 P3 can use 500 steps.
P3 ≤ 500 At 400 step use of P1. P2 is 600(1000-400) step.
400 600 400 P3 can use 400(1000-600) step.
*2 About PC10, PC3JG Separate (PC10 Standard) mode, the use area in the ET/H/EN address is decided
depending on the number of use steps of each program.

(1) They cannot be used in PC2 compatible mode/PC2/PC1 series•MX.

(2) In case of single mode, it can be used only in Program 1.
(3) When Program capacity is 16 KW, step number is restricted to maximum 500.
(4) Please do not use this area because Extension Label (EL****) is used by SFC control.
(5) Please do not use this area because Identifier R (Link Register Area) and Extension Timer Area of User
Data Memory are for SFC control.
(6) Please do not access this area because Special relay of “V58~V5D” and “EV800~EVBFF” are for SFC
control.
(7) By CPU Mode, areas for SFC control is different.
PC10 Extension mode opens the following area in the user by setting area only for SFC (JS).
PC10
PC3JG Separate
( PC10 Standard )
Name Range PC10 Extension
Separate 1~5/ Single1~6
PCDL
Plus
Extension Label EL**** Not use
Link Register R580~R7FF
Extension current value EN000~EN5FF
Register Not use
Possible
Extension set value H000~H5FF
Register
Extension Timer/Counter ET000~ET5FF
Area only for SFC JS**** Not use

Co-existence of SFC and usual LD (Ladder) is possible. Even when using SFC, no special setting is
required. When programming is carried out with SFC, always carry out Editing and Monitoring with
“PC Win”. Never carry out editing with peripheral devices like Hellowin, GH3 etc. which corresponds
only with LD.

Document -4
Document2-4 Restrictions of FBD
The limitation of the FB execution memory area and the program capacity of the FB library are shown.
(1)Limitation of FB execution memory area
CPU(Ver:CPU System version)
PCDL PC10G
CPU Mode PC3JD/
Plus PC3JG(Ver 1.40≤) PC10GE
PC3JG(Ver <1.40)
(Standard) Plus Extension [Word]
[Word] [Word]
[Word]
P1 MAX:15872 *1

PC10 Extension P2 MAX:15872 *1

P3 MAX:15872 *1
PC10
PC10 Standard
(PC3JG
Separate)
1520 9712
Plus
(Extension)
1 1520
2
Separ
3
ate 768
4
5
1
2
3
Single 768
4
5
6
PCDL 768
Plus Standard
*1: Capacity for which P1/2/3 can be used is decided P1 P2 P3
by the use state of a common area.
7680 7680 7680
Word Word Word

＋ ＋ ＋
Common area
8192Word

(2)Capacity of FB library
Type Capacity [KW] PLC Capacity [KW]

Standard 32 32

Large (*1) 60 60

Master (*2)
180 60 *4
PC10 Master (*3)
*1: PCwinV5.1R** or later. *2: PCwinV5.6R05 or later. *3: PCwinV9.0R** or later.
*4: 8KW when PCDL-CPU, Plus (Standard)

Document -5
(3)Program capacity of FB library(Support PLC)
CPU
Type
PC3JD PC3JG/PC10G PC10GE PCDL

Standard Possible
Impossibility
Large Possible Impossibility

Master Impossibility Possible

PC10 Master Impossibility Possible Impossibility

Document -6
Document3 Function Command(PC10, PC10 extension mode)
Document3-1 Index register
Index register is a specific register to keep the information of register addresses.
Index register has 16 IX0-IXF.
Index register is equal to former indirect assign.

[The difference of indirect assign. The problem of indirect assign]

• There are limited commands for indirect assign while applying indirect assign.
Former direct assign could also be done by indirect assign by using index register.
• There is only 16 bit (64 Kbyte) for address for former indirect assign.
The usage is limited under PC10, PC10 extension mode (Mbyte order) which has greatly extended
the register.
Index register could keep 32 bit information of address.
• In indirect assign circuit, there are only Hexadecimal address information could be displayed.
Although the circuit monitor applied, we cannot say it is a visual available circuit. But in the circuit
applied index register added the mechanism of monitoring address and the contents of the address at
the same time, the circuit visual ability is much higher.
• Offset function and before process increment and decrement, and after process increment and
decrement functions have been added to the index register make it easier to write a program.

[Index register operation command]

FUN Function
Command
No. Content
Index address set
356 INDX Set OP1 address on OP2 index register.
Example [INDX D0000L -> IX0] Set DO on index register IX0.
Load index
Set address in OP2 using the 32-digit address information saved in OP1 register.
357 LDIDX
Example [LDIDX D0000 -> IX0] Set address in IX0 using the address information saved in
D1/D0.
Store index
358 STIDX Save OP1index register 32-bit address information in OP2 register.
Example [STIDX IX0 -> D0000] Save IX0 address information into D1/D0.
Register offset
Set OP1 content (word) as offset complementary address in OP2 index register.
359 IDX+
(Offset range: -7FFFh~+7FFFh(8000h~7FFFh)=-32768~+32767)
Example [IDX + D0000 + IX0] Add D0 content offset on IX0.
Hexadecimal offset
Set OP1 Hexadecimal as offset complementary address in OP2 index register.
360 IDX+H
(Offset range: -7FFFh~+7FFFh)
Example [IDX+H FF + IX0] Add offset FFh on IX0
Decimal offset
Set OP1 Decimal as offset complementary address in OP2 index register.
361 IDX+D
(Offset range: -32768~+32767)
Example [IDX+D 99 + IX0] Add offset 99d on IX0.

Please refer to Programming Manual for details of index register specific function.

Document -7
Document3-2 Flash register
Flash Register open the data stored in flash memory in volatile RAM when CPU started.

Flash memory Volatile memory

4Mbyte FR register

Transfer set content part

First stage
transfer

Free access

PCwin DM Sequence program

|---| |------[MOV FR0 -> D0]--|

Note:
The FR register can be freely accessed.
But the data read into FR register could be overwritten by the flash memory data when power off or reset.
It is usually used as a read only memory.

How to rewrite on flash memory:

Rewrite in sequence program through specific function.
FUN No. Command Function

368 FRCL flash register clear

369 FRWR write in flash register

FR register is different from other registers. Please use it only when you understand its details.
1) The flash memory cannot take new data in without clearing part of memory.
Thus there is only once save after the clearance of the memory at the same address.
(The data is changed to [FFFFh] when memory clearance is performing).
2) The clearance unit in flash memory is 64 kbyte.
Thus no only some digit clearance could be performed.
3) It belongs to Non-Volatile Memory type. It will keep the data even without battery supply.
4) It takes some time to write and clear.It takes 0.5 second to clear 1 block (64 kbyte) typ,
while takes 6 μs to write1 block (64 kbyte) typ.
5) While it is performing clear/write as some areas, it could not perform clear/write at other areas.

Document -8
Use case:
1) Usage1
Store the constant data of work and settings conditions (those data will not be changed during
operation).
Constant data created by PCwin, write into PC10GE by using register’s memory functions.
The writing the register of PCwin function is written in the FR register area (volatile RAM) and the
flash memory at the same time.
2) Usage2
Work area for operation (the data could be lost after the power off but it does not matter).
It always writes in newest upper server data for operation (the data could be lost after the power off
but it does not matter).
3) Usage3
Store log information. Store log information on flash memory by using specific command.
When the log information accumulated till a limit amount, the upper server shall read it.

Please refer to Programming Manual for details of flash memory.

Document -9
Document3-3 Floating decimal function
Floating decimal function could be set by property dialog for single (2-word) or double (4-word).

FUN FUN
Command Function Command Function
No. No.
556 FD+ Add (Float Decimal) 943 F=FN Compare OR=Variable (Float Decimal)
557 FD- Subtract (Float Decimal) 944 F<>FD Compare STR<>Decimal (Float Decimal)
558 FD* Multiple (Float Decimal) 945 F<>FN Compare STR<>Variable (Float Decimal)
559 FD/ Division (Float Decimal) 946 F<>FD Compare OR<>Variable (Float Decimal)
560 FD+FH Constant Add (Float Decimal) 947 F<>FN Compare OR<>Variable (Float Decimal)
561 FD-FH Constant Subtract (Float Decimal) 948 F>FD Compare STR>Decimal (Float Decimal)
562 FD*FH Constant Multiple (Float Decimal) 949 F>FN Compare STR>Variable (Float Decimal)
563 FD/FH Constant Division (Float Decimal) 950 F>FD Compare OR>Decimal (Float Decimal)
564 FDSTI1 ΣX (Float Decimal) 951 F>FN Compare OR>Variable (Float Decimal)
565 FDMAX Max index (Float Decimal) 952 F>=FD Compare STR>= Decimal (Float Decimal)
566 FDMIN Min index (Float Decimal) 953 F>=FN Compare STR>=Variable (Float Decimal)
567 FDAVE Average (Float Decimal) 954 F>=FD Compare OR>= Decimal (Float Decimal)
569 FDMOVR Decimal constant transfer (Float Decimal) 955 F>=FN Compare OR>= Variable (Float Decimal)
570 FFLT BIN16-> Float Decimal 956 F<FD Compare STR< Decimal (Float Decimal)
571 FDFLT BIN32-> Float Decimal 957 F<FN Compare STR< Variable (Float Decimal)
572 FINT Float Decimal ->BIN16 958 F<FD Compare OR< Decimal (Float Decimal)
573 FDINT Float Decimal ->BIN32 959 F<FN Compare OR< Variable (Float Decimal)
574 FVAL String-> Float Decimal 960 F<=FD Compare STR<= Decimal (Float Decimal)
575 FSTR Float Decimal ->String 961 F<=FN Compare STR<= Variable (Float Decimal)
928 F=FD Compare AND=Decimal (Float Decimal) 962 F<=FD Compare OR<= Decimal (Float Decimal)
929 F=FN Compare AND=Variable (Float Decimal) 963 F<=FN Compare OR<= Variable (Float Decimal)
930 F<>FD Compare AND<>Decimal (Float Decimal) 985 DEG Radium -> Degree
931 F<>FN Compare AND<>Variable (Float Decimal) 986 RAD Degree ->Radium
932 F>FD Compare AND>Decimal(Float Decimal) 987 SIN Sine
933 F>FN Compare AND>Variable(Float Decimal) 988 COS Cosine
934 F>=FD Compare AND>=Decimal (Float Decimal) 989 TAN Tangent
935 F>=FN Compare AND>=Variable (Float Decimal) 990 ASIN Arcsine
936 F<FD Compare AND<Decimal (Float Decimal) 991 ACOS Arccosine
937 F<FN Compare AND<Variable (Float Decimal) 992 ATAN Arctangent
938 F<=FD Compare AND<=Decimal (Float Decimal) 993 SQR Square root
939 F<=FN Compare AND<=Variable (Float Decimal) 994 POW Power
940 F=FD Compare STR= Decimal (Float Decimal) 995 EXP Exponent
941 F=FN Compare STR=Variable(Float Decimal) 996 LOGE Logarithm (LOGe)
942 F=FD Compare OR=Decimal (Float Decimal) 997 LOG10 Logarithm (LOG10)

Document -10
Document3-4 LABEL function
Sign/None of LABEL can be set by the property dialog.

FUN FUN
Command Function Command Function
No. No.
7 WMOVR Decimal 5-digit constant transfer 375 WMAX Max Value Index (Word)
12 WCP Word compare 376 DMAX Max Value Index (32-digit)
17 CP String compare 377 MIN Min Value Index (Byte)
92 W+ BIN Add (Word) 378 WMIN Min Value Index (Word)
93 W- BIN Subtract (Word) 379 DMIN Min Value Index (32-digit)
94 W* BIN Multiple (Word) 380 AVE Average(Byte)
95 W/B BIN Division (Word 1) 381 WAVE Average (Word)
100 MOV Hexadecimal 2-digit constant transfer 382 DAVE Average (32-digit)
101 WMOV Hexadecimal 4-digit constant transfer 576 =H Compare AND= Hexadecimal (Byte)
102 DMOV Hexadecimal 8-digit constant transfer 577 =D Compare AND= Decimal (Byte)
105 MOVR Decimal 3-digit constant transfer 579 W=H Compare AND= Hexadecimal (Word)
106 DMOVR Decimal 10-digit constant transfer 580 W=D Compare AND= Decimal (Word)
168 + BIN Add (Byte) 582 D=H Compare AND= Hexadecimal (32-digit)
169 D+ BIN Add (32-digit) 583 D=D Compare AND= Decimal (32-digit)
170 - BIN Subtract (Byte) 585 <>H Compare AND<> Hexadecimal (Byte)
171 D- BIN Subtract (32-digit) 586 <>D Compare AND<> Decimal (Byte)
172 * BIN Multiple (Byte) 588 W<>H Compare AND<> Hexadecimal (Word)
173 D* BIN Multiple (32-digit) 589 W<>D Compare AND<> Decimal (Word)
174 / BIN Division (Byte) 591 D<>H Compare AND<> Hexadecimal (32-digit)
175 W/ BIN Division (Word 2) 592 D<>D Compare AND<> Decimal (32-digit)
176 D/ BIN Division (32-digit) 594 >H Compare AND> Hexadecimal (Byte)
211 DCP 32-digit Compare 595 >D Compare AND> Decimal (Byte)
323 +H BIN Constant Add(Byte) 596 >N Compare AND> Variable (Byte)
324 W+H BIN Constant Subtract(Word) 597 W>H Compare AND> Hexadecimal (Word)
325 D+H BIN Constant Add (32-digit) 598 W>D Compare AND> Decimal (Word)
329 -H BIN Constant Subtract (Byte) 599 W>N Compare AND> Variable (Word)
330 W-H BIN Constant Subtract (Word) 600 D>H Compare AND> Hexadecimal (32-digit)
331 D-H BIN Constant Subtract (32-digit) 601 D>D Compare AND> Decimal (32-digit)
335 *H BIN Constant Multiple(Byte) 602 D>N Compare AND> Variable (32-digit)
336 W*H BIN Constant Multiple (Word) 603 >=H Compare AND>= Hexadecimal (Byte)
337 D*H BIN Constant Multiple (32-digit) 604 >=D Compare AND>= Decimal (Byte)
341 /H BIN Constant Division(Byte) 605 >=N Compare AND>= Variable (Byte)
342 W/H BIN Constant Division (Word) 606 W>=H Compare AND>= Hexadecimal (Word)
343 D/H BIN Constant Division (32-digit) 607 W>=D Compare AND>= Decimal (Word)
362 STI1 ΣX(Byte)BIN 608 W>=N Compare AND>= Variable (Word)
363 WSTI1 ΣX(Word)BIN 609 D>=H Compare AND>= Hexadecimal (32-digit)
364 DSTI1 ΣX(32-digit)BIN 610 D>=D Compare AND>= Decimal (32-digit)
374 MAX Max Value Index (Byte) 611 D>=N Compare AND>= Variable (32-digit)

Document -11
FUN FUN
Command Function Command Function
No. No.
612 <H Compare AND< Hexadecimal (Byte) 772 W>N Compare OR> Variable (Word)
613 <D Compare AND< Decimal (Byte) 776 D>H Compare OR> Hexadecimal (32-digit)
614 <N Compare AND< Variable (Byte) 777 D>D Compare OR> Decimal (32-digit)
615 W<H Compare AND<(Word) 780 D>N Compare OR> Variable (32-digit)
616 W<D Compare AND< Decimal (Word) 784 >=H Compare STR>= Hexadecimal (Byte)
617 W<N Compare AND< Variable (Word) 785 >=D Compare STR>= Decimal (Byte)
618 D<H Compare AND< Hexadecimal (32-digit) 788 >=N Compare STR>= Variable (Byte)
619 D<D Compare AND< Decimal (32-digit) 792 W>=H Compare STR>= Hexadecimal (Word)
620 D<N Compare AND< Variable (32-digit) 793 W>=D Compare STR>= Decimal (Word)
621 <=H Compare AND<= Hexadecimal (Byte) 796 W>=N Compare STR>= Variable (Word)
622 <=D Compare AND<= Decimal (Byte) 800 D>=H Compare STR>= Hexadecimal (32-digit)
623 <=N Compare AND<= Variable (Byte) 801 D>=D Compare STR>= Decimal (32-digit)
624 W<=H Compare AND<= Hexadecimal (Word) 804 D>=N Compare STR>= Variable (32-digit)
625 W<=D Compare AND<= Decimal (Word) 808 >=H Compare OR>= Hexadecimal (Byte)
626 W<=N Compare AND<= Variable (Word) 809 >=D Compare OR>= Decimal (Byte)
627 D<=H Compare AND<= Hexadecimal (32-digit) 812 >=N Compare OR>= Variable (Byte)
628 D<=D Compare AND<= Decimal (32-digit) 816 W>=H Compare OR>= Hexadecimal (Word)
629 D<=N Compare AND<= Variable (32-digit) 817 W>=D Compare OR>= Decimal (Word)
640 =H Compare STR= Hexadecimal (Byte) 820 W>=N Compare OR>= Variable (Word)
641 =D Compare STR= Decimal (Byte) 824 D>=H Compare OR>= Hexadecimal (32-digit)
648 W=H Compare STR= Hexadecimal (Word) 825 D>=D Compare OR>= Decimal (32-digit)
649 W=D Compare STR= Decimal (Word) 828 D>=N Compare OR>= Variable (32-digit)
656 D=H Compare STR= Hexadecimal (32-digit) 832 <H Compare STR< Hexadecimal (Byte)
657 D=D Compare STR= Decimal (32-digit) 833 <D Compare STR< Decimal (Byte)
664 =H Compare OR= Hexadecimal (Byte) 836 <N Compare STR< Variable (Byte)
665 =D Compare OR= Decimal (Byte) 840 W<H Compare STR< Hexadecimal (Word)
672 W=H Compare OR= Hexadecimal (Word) 841 W<D Compare STR< Decimal (Word)
673 W=D Compare OR= Decimal (Word) 844 W<N Compare STR< Variable (Word)
680 D=H Compare OR= Hexadecimal (32-digit) 848 D<H Compare STR< Hexadecimal (32-digit)
681 D=D Compare OR= Decimal (32-digit) 849 D<D Compare STR< Decimal (32-digit)
688 <>H Compare STR<> Hexadecimal (Byte) 852 D<N Compare STR< Variable (32-digit)
689 <>D Compare STR<> Decimal (Byte) 856 <H Compare OR< Hexadecimal (Byte)
696 W<>H Compare STR<> Hexadecimal (Word) 857 <D Compare OR< Decimal (Byte)
697 W<>D Compare STR<> Decimal (Word) 860 <N Compare OR< Variable (Byte)
704 D<>H Compare STR<> Hexadecimal (32-digit) 864 W<H Compare OR< Hexadecimal (Word)
705 D<>D Compare STR<> Decimal (32-digit) 865 W<D Compare OR< Decimal (Word)
708 D<>N Compare STR<> Variable (32-digit) 868 W<N Compare OR< Variable (Word)
712 <>H Compare OR<> Hexadecimal (Byte) 872 D<H Compare OR< Hexadecimal (32-digit)
713 <>D Compare OR<> Decimal (Byte) 873 D<D Compare OR< Decimal (32-digit)
720 W<>H Compare OR<> Hexadecimal (Word) 876 D<N Compare OR< Variable (32-digit)
721 W<>D Compare OR<> Decimal (Word) 880 <=H Compare STR<= Hexadecimal (Byte)
728 D<>D Compare OR<> Hexadecimal (32-digit) 881 <=D Compare STR<= Decimal (Byte)
729 D<>D Compare OR<> Decimal (32-digit) 884 <=N Compare STR<= Variable (Byte)
732 D<>N Compare OR<> Variable (32-digit) 888 W<=H Compare STR<= Hexadecimal (Word)
736 >H Compare STR> Hexadecimal (Byte) 889 W<=D Compare STR<= Decimal (Word)
737 >D Compare STR> Decimal (Byte) 892 W<=N Compare STR<= Variable (Word)
740 >N Compare STR> Variable (Byte) 896 D<=H Compare STR<= Hexadecimal (32-digit)
744 W>H Compare STR> Hexadecimal (Word) 897 D<=D Compare STR<= Decimal (32-digit)
745 W>D Compare STR> Decimal (Word) 900 D<=N Compare STR<= Variable (32-digit)
748 W>N Compare STR> Variable (Word) 904 <=H Compare OR<= Hexadecimal (Byte)
752 D>H Compare STR> Hexadecimal (32-digit) 905 <=D Compare OR<= Decimal (Byte)
753 D>D Compare STR> Decimal (32-digit) 908 <=N Compare OR<= Variable (Byte)
756 D>N Compare STR> Variable (32-digit) 912 W<=H Compare OR<= Hexadecimal (Word)
760 >H Compare OR> Hexadecimal (Byte) 913 W<=D Compare OR<= Decimal (Word)
761 >D Compare OR> Decimal (Byte) 916 W<=N Compare OR<= Variable (Word)
764 >N Compare OR> Variable (Byte) 920 D<=H Compare OR<= Hexadecimal (32-digit)
768 W>H Compare OR> Hexadecimal (Byte) 921 D<=D Compare OR<= Decimal (32-digit)
769 W>D Compare OR> Decimal (Word) 924 D<=N Compare OR<=Variable(32-digit)

Document -12
Document4 About Ver. 10
Interchange of PCwin Ver.10 and Ver.8 matched PC10 mode 3.0. PC10 standard/PC3JG
combination, PC10 extended and PC10 mode operation are available. Default value is PC10
standard/PC3JG combination mode. Set to enable PC10 exented and PC mode (Pleae refer
to 17.2.7 Interchangeable)

Document4-1 PC10 mode

Extended user address, extended operation functions (index memory, operator and floating
operation command) are available in PC10 mod+D1649e. More details please refer to
PC10G manual

PC3JG
Separate /
PC10 Standard
mode
Extended address available.
Extended operation
PC10 mode

Document -13
Document 5. I/O diagram symbol list, Network diagram symbol list
 I/O diagram symbol list
Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
1 Hard:Contact A(Pin)
2 Hard:Contact B(Pin)
3 Hard of another device:Contact A
4 Hard of another device:Contact B
5 Hard coil
6 Hard timer:Contact A(Pin)
7 Hard timer:Contact B(Pin)
8 Hard timer of another device:Contact A
9 Hard timer of another device:Contact B
10 Hard timer coil
11 Comment
12 Main Sub comment
13 Single phase line number
14 Single phase external line number
15 Magnet coil
16 Push button:Contact A
17 Thermal:Contact B
18 Mushroom type:Contact B
19 Contact(Device):On comment
20 Push button:Contact B
21 Thermal:Contact A
22 Mushroom type:Contact A
23 Lock type:Contact A
24 Lock type:Contact B
25 Select PB:Contact A
26 Select PB:Contact B
27 Select SW(Contact A <--)
28 Snap SW:Contact A
29 Snap SW:Contact B
30 Both PB:Contact A
31 Both PB:Contact B

Document -14
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
32 Push button:Contact A
33 Light type emergency stop
39 Select SW(Contact A -->)
43 Select SW(For the middle)
44 Select SW(Contact B <--)
45 Select SW(Contact B -->)
46 Thermal:Contact B(No device code)
47 Thermal:Contact A(No device code)
48 Free device name(Parts output)
49 Free device name(Parts output)
50 LS(Limit):Contact A
51 LS(Limit):Contact B
52 Proximity:Contact A(Two line type)
53 Proximity:Contact B(Two line type)
54 Proximity:Contact A(Tree line type)
55 Proximity:Contact B(Tree line type)
56 Amplifier Built-in type:Contact A
57 Amplifier Built-in type:Contact B
58 Inter lock BOX
59 Reflection type light curtain SW:Contact A
60 Reflection type light curtain SW:Contact B
61 Transmission type light curtain SW:Contact A
62 Transmission type light curtain SW:Contact B
63 LS:Contact A(No external)
64 LS:Contact B(No external)
65 Proximity:Contact A(No external)
66 Proximity:Contact B(No external)
67 Interlock(No external)
68 Proximity:Contact A(Two line type)
69 External contact
70 Interlock(No external)
71 Transmission type light curtain SW:Contact A

Document -15
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
72 Short circuit
73 Tool inspection device(Tool side)
74 Tool inspection device(Earth side)
75 Inspection measurement of tool
76 Foot operated SW:Contact A
77 Foot operated SW:Contact B
78 Flow SW:Contact A
79 Flow SW:Contact B
80 Pressure SW:Contact A
81 Pressure SW:Contact B
82 Float SW:Contact A
83 Float SW:Contact B
84 Temperature SW:Contact A
85 Temperature SW:Contact B
87 Safety plug
88 Safety plug:No external
89 Safety plug
90 Short circuit
92 Door switch: Contact B

94 Door switch: Contact B

96 Emergency stop
98 Emergency stop
100 Free drawing outside device output
101 Free device name(Parts output)
104 Select SW(Contact A <--)
105 Horn
106 Lamp
107 - - Connector(On)
108 - - Connector(Under)
109 - - connector(Left)
110 - - connector(Right)
111 Lock Type:Contact B(Outside)

Document -16
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
113 Amplifier Built-in type:Contact A
114 Amplifier Built-in type:Contact B
115 - - Connector(On)
116 - - Connector(Under)
117 - - connector(Left)
118 - - connector(Right)
119 Timer:Contact A(Off delay)
120 Timer:Contact B(Off delay)
123 Timer:Contact A(On/Off delay)
124 Timer:Contact B(On/Off delay)
131 Outside contact:Contact B
132 Rotary SW(Main)
133 Rotary SW(sub)
135 Safety plug not set
136 Foot operated SW:Contact A(Mormentari)
137 Foot operated SW:Contact B(Mormentari)
139 Short circuit(Length)
140 - - Pin(Upper)
141 - - Pin(Under)
142 - - Pin(Left)
143 - - Pin(Right)
144 - - Connector(Under)
145 - - Connector(On)
146 - - connector(Right)
147 - - connector(Left)
150 SOL valve
151 Clutch brake
153 Buzzer
154 Bell
155 Horn
160 Lamp
163 L.E.D.

Document -17
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
164 L.E.D.
165 Digital SW
166 Digital display
169 Three directions valve
170 Three directions valve
171 Rotating Lamp
173 Digital SW
174 Digital display
175 SOL valve(with gauge)
187 Horn(Outside device)
188 Lamp(Light type push button)
194 Input card(Line number)
195 Input card(Line number)
196 Input card(Line number)
197 Output card(Line number)
198 Output card(Line number)
199 Output card(Line number)
200 Input card
201 Input card
202 Input card
203 Output card
204 Output card
205 Output card
206 Card(Continuance)
207 Input card
208 Input card
209 Input card
210 Output card
211 Output card
212 Output card
213 Input card(Line number)
214 Input card(Line number)

Document -18
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
215 Input card(Line number)
216 Output card(Line number)
217 Output card(Line number)
218 Output card(Line number)
219 Input card
220 Input card
221 Input card
222 Input card
223 Output card
224 Output card
225 Output card
226 Output card
227 I/O card frame
228 Other card
229 Output card(Link)
230 Lamp for link
231 Output card
232 Output card
233 Output card
234 I/O card frame
235 I/O card frame
236 Input card
237 Output card
238 Output card
240 Input card(AB)
241 Input card(AB)
242 Input card(AB)
243 Output card(AB)
244 Output card(AB)
245 Output card(AB)
246 Connector(On)
247 Connector(Under)

Document -19
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
248 connector(Left)
249 connector(Right)
250 Comment
251 Arrow(On)
252 Arrow(Under)
253 Arrow(Right)
254 Arrow(Left)
255 Connector
256 Connector
257 Connector
258 Connector
259 - - Pin(Upper)
260 - - Pin(Under)
261 - - Pin(Left)
262 - - Pin(Right)
263 - - Connector(Under)
264 - - Connector(On)
265 - - Connector(Right)
266 - - Connector(Left)
270 Single phase external line number
271 Single phase line number
274 Single phase external line number
275 Single phase external line number
276 Input/Output line number
280 Arrow(Single phase:Right)
281 Arrow(Single phase:Under)
288 Arrow
289 Arrow
290 From
291 To
298 + Sign
299 - Sign

Document -20
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
300 Circuit protector
301 Circuit protector with contact
302 Circuit protector
305 Rectifier diode
306 Rectifier diode
307 Condenser(fixation)
308 Condenser(variable)
310 Fuse
311 Fuse
312 Ground earth
313 Ground earth(Outside)
314 Function ground
315 Earth(Short circuit)
316 Earth
318 Resistor
330 Circuit protector with contact
337 Line number for bus line of single phase
338 Arrow
339 Arrow
350 Circuit protector(No code)
351 Circuit protector with contact(No code)
352 Circuit protector(No device code)
353 Circuit protector with contact(No code)
354 Thermal(Single part)
355 Thermal(Single part)
356 Shielded cable
357 Shielded cable
358 Shielded cable
359 Shielded cable
360 Shielded cable
361 Shielded cable
362 Shielded cable

Document -21
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
363 Shielded cable
364 Shielded cable
365 Shielded cable
366 Shielded cable
367 Shielded cable
368 Shielded cable
369 Shielded cable
370 Shielded cable
371 Shielded cable
372 Shielded cable
375 Coil with serge
376 Coil with serge
377 Coil with serge
378 Coil with serge(S,R,L,U)
379 Coil with serge(S,R,L,U)
380 Spark killer
381 Rectifier
382 Inverter
386 Magnet:Contact A
387 Magnet:Contact B
388 Hard of another device:Contact A
389 Hard of another device:Contact B
398 CP(two phase) with contact
399 CB
400 CP
401 CP(two phase) with contact
402 CB
403 Earth leakage breaker
404 Magnet with thermal
405 Magnet contact
406 Thermal
409 Magnet with thermal

Document -22
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
418 Trans
420 Outlet
421 Outlet
422 Outlet
423 Outlet
435 Outlet
436 Ventilation fan
443 Single phase magnet(with thermal)
444 Thermal(two phase)
446 Single phase magnet(with thermal)
448 Fan
450 CB(device code none)
451 CP(device code none)
452 CP with contact(device code none)
453 CB(device code none)
454 Earth leakage breaker (device code none)
456 Two phase motor(No device code)
461 Inside device:Contact A with serge (single phase)
462 Inside device:Contact B with serge (single phase)
465 Inside device:Contact B (single phase)
468 Single phase thermal(1-3phase)
470 Single phase CB(1-3phase length)
471 CP(2 phase) with contact (device code none)
474 Single phase thermal(1-3phase)
476 Trans (three output)
477 Trans (middle tap)
478 Trans (middle tap)
480 Another device:Contact A (single phase)
481 Another device:Contact B (single phase)
482 Another device:Contact A with serge (single phase)
483 Another device:Contact B with serge (single phase)
484 Circuit breaker(Single phase)

Document -23
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
485 Circuit breaker(with Single phase contact)
486 Circuit breaker(Single phase:Length)
487 CB(1-2 phase with contact)
488 CB(one phase connecting wire)
489 CB(one phase connecting wire) with contact
490 CP(1-2 phase)
491 CP
492 CP(1-3 phase length)
493 CP(three phase)
494 CP(three phase) with contact
495 CP(three phase length)
496 CB (three phase) with contact
497 CP with contact
498 CP(1-2 phase) with contact
499 CP(one phase connecting wire) with contact
500 CB
501 Earth leakage breaker
502 CB
503 CB(three phase) with contact
504 Magnet with thermal
505 Magnet
506 Thermal
507 Motor
508 Three-phase sqirrel cage induction motor
509 Single-phase sqirrel cage induction motor
515 Thermal
520 Inside device:Contact A (theree phase)
523 Inside device:Contact A with serge (three phase)
524 Inside device:Contact B with serge (three phase)
534 Three phase Trans Y-delta
535 Three phase Trans delta- Y
536 Three phase Trans Y-Y

Document -24
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
537 Three phase Trans Y-delta(middle)
538 Three phase Trans delta-Y
539 Three phase Trans Y-Y
541 Trans
542 Trans
543 Trans
550 CB(device code)
551 Earth leakage breaker (device code none)
552 CB(device code none)
553 CB(three phase) with contact (device code none)
556 Motor with switch(device code none)
570 CB(three phase) with contact
571 3 phase magnet(with thermal)
572 Thermal( 1-3 phase)
576 3 phase thermal
579 Another device:Contact A (theree phase)
580 Another device:Contact B (theree phase)
581 Another device:Contact A with serge (three phase)
582 Another device:Contact B with serge (three phase)
583 Reactor
584 Magnet( with thermal) 3 elements
586 CB(three phase) with contact (device code none)
600 Multi-axis light curtain(Amplifier)
601 Multi-axis light curtain
602 Multi-axis light curtain
603 Multi-axis light curtain(Transmission type)
604 Multi-axis light curtain(Transmission type)
605 Multi-axis light curtain(Reflection type)
606 Fiber(Transmission type)
607 Fiber(Reflection type)
748 Hard ESU contact
749 Another device ESU contact

Document -25
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
764 Hard ESU two contact
765 Another device ESU two contact
9986 Allocation diagram[Design change]
10000 Select SW(Contact A <--)
10001 Select SW(Contact A <--)
10002 COM
10003 External line number
10004 Sign of arrow(To up)
10005 Sign of arrow(To down)
10006 Sign of arrow(To left)
10007 Sign of arrow(To right)
10008 Voltage comment
10009 Comment
10010 Protective ground terminal
10011 TOYOPUC-PC3J 4 Slot Base
10012 TOYOPUC-PC3J 6 Slot base
10013 TOYOPUC-PC3J 8 Slot base
10014 TOYOPUC-PC3J 4 Slot selector base
10015 TOYOPUC-PC3J 6 Slot selector base
10016 TOYOPUC-PC3J 8 Slot selector base
10017 TOYOPUC-PCS CPU
10018 TOYOPUC-PC3JG CPU
10019 TOYOPUC-PCS RMT-S(Front)
10020 TOYOPUC-PCS RMT-S (Side)
10021 TOYOPUC-PCS 8SLOT BASE
10022 TOYOPUC-PCS 12SLOT BASE
10023 TOYOPUC-FL/ET-T-V2
10024 TOYOPUC-FL/ET-T-V2H
10025 TOYOPUC-DRMT
10026 TOYOPUC-PC10G
10027 SOL valve(with gauge)
10028 Protective ground terminal

Document -26
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
10029 BUS-EXP
10050 Arrow(On:Comment right center)
10051 Arrow(On:Comment right under)
10052 Arrow(under:Comment right center)
10053 Arrow(right:Comment on center)
10054 Arrow(left:Comment on center)
10055 Arrow(left:Comment on rigth)
10056 Terminal Connection
10057 Connector Connection
10058 Seal Connction
10059 Profibus Connector
10060 Connector On
10061 Connector Under
10062 Connector Left
10063 Connector Right
10070 Single phase external line number
10071 Comment
10072 Single phase external line number
10080 Communication input card(32)
10081 Communication input card(32)
10082 Communication input card(32)
10083 Communication output card(32)
10084 Communication output card(32)
10085 Communication output card(32)
10086 TOYOPUC-PCS Input/Output card
10087 TOYOPUC-PCS input card
10088 TOYOPUC-PCS Input/Output card
10089 TOYOPUC-PCS Input/Output card
10090 TOYOPUC-PCS Input/Output card
10091 TOYOPUC-PCS Input/Output card
10092 TOYOPUC-PCS Output card
10093 TOYOPUC-PCS Output card

Document -27
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
10094 TOYOPUC-PCS Output card
10095 TOYOPUC-PCS Output card
10100 PCS input card
10101 PCS input card
10102 PCS Output card
10103 PCS Output card
10104 PCS Output card
10105 PCS Output card
10106 Input card
10107 Input card
10108 Input card
10109 Output card
10110 Output card
10111 Output card

Document -28
 Network diagram symbol list
Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
11000 CPU PC3JG
11001 CPU PC3JG-P
11002 CPU PC3JP
11003 CPU PC3JP-GP
11004 CPU PC10G
11005 CPU PC10P
11006 CPU PC10P-DP
11007 CPU Plus
11008 CPU PC3JX
11009 CPU PC3JX-D
11050 FL-net PC3JB-G(Built-in)
11051 FL-net PC3JB-GP(Built-in)
11052 FL-net PC3JP(Built-in)
11053 FL-net PC3JP-GP(Built-in)
11054 FL/ET-T-V2 FL-net
11055 FL/ET-T-V2H FL-net
11056 Another manufacturer FL-net
11057 FL-net PC10G (Built-in)
11058 2PORT-EFR FL-net
11059 FL-net PC10P (Built-in)
11060 FL-net PC10P-DP(Built-in)
11061 FL-net Plus
11062 EF10 FL-net
11100 DLNK-M2 PC3JG(Built-in)
11101 DLNK-M2 PC3JG-P(Built-in)
11102 DLNK-M2 PC3JP(Built-in)
11103 DLNK-M2 PC3JP-GP(Built-in)
11104 DLNK-M2
11105 DLNK-M2 PC10P-DP(Built-in)
11106 DLNK-M2 Plus
11107 DLNK-M2 PC3JX-D(Built in)
11150 DLNK-S

Document -29
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
11151 DLNK-S2
11152 Another manufacturer DeviceNet-Slave
11153 DRMT-32/00P
11154 DRMT-00/32P
11155 DRMT-16/16P
11156 DRMT-32/00
11157 DRMT-00/32
11158 DRMT-16/16
11159 Another manufacturer DeviceNet-Slave(with diagnosis)
11200 2PORT-EFR FL-remote
11201 FLRemote PC10G(Built-in)
11202 FLRemote PC10P(Built-in)
11203 FLRemote PC10P-DP(Built-in)
11204 FLRemote Plus
11205 EF10 FLRemote
11250 FRMT-32/00P
11251 FRMT-00/32P
11252 FRMT-16/16P
11253 Another manufacturer FLRemote-Slave
11254 Another manufacturer FLRemote-Slave(with diagnosis)
11255 FRSK-32ND3
11256 FRSK-32TD2
11257 FRSK-16NTD2
11300 HUB 4Port
11301 HUB 4Port
11302 HUB 4Port
11303 HUB 4Port
11304 HUB 8Port
11305 HUB 8Port
11306 HUB 8Port
11307 HUB 8Port
11308 HUB 5Port

Document -30
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
11309 HUB 5Port
11310 HUB 5Port
11311 HUB 5Port
11350 5 Divergence Unit
11351 5 Divergence Unit
11352 5 Divergence Unit
11353 5 Divergence Unit
11354 3 Divergence Unit
11355 3 Divergence Unit
11356 3 Divergence Unit
11357 3 Divergence Unit
11400 EtherCAT PC10G(Built-in)
11401 EtherCAT PC10P(Built-in)
11402 EtherCAT Plus
11403 EF10 EtherCAT
11450 GX-ID3284-T(In 32)
11451 GX-OD3284-T(Out 32)
11452 GX-MD3284-T(In 16/Out 16)
11453 Another manufacturer EtherCAT-Slave
11454 Another manufacturer EtherCAT-Slave(with diagnosis)
11460 3 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11461 3 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11462 3 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11463 3 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11464 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11465 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11466 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11467 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11468 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11469 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11470 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11471 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)

Document -31
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
11309 HUB 5Port
11310 HUB 5Port
11311 HUB 5Port
11350 5 Divergence Unit
11351 5 Divergence Unit
11352 5 Divergence Unit
11353 5 Divergence Unit
11354 3 Divergence Unit
11355 3 Divergence Unit
11356 3 Divergence Unit
11357 3 Divergence Unit
11400 EtherCAT PC10G(Built-in)
11401 EtherCAT PC10P(Built-in)
11402 EtherCAT Plus
11403 EF10 EtherCAT
11450 GX-ID3284-T(In 32)
11451 GX-OD3284-T(Out 32)
11452 GX-MD3284-T(In 16/Out 16)
11453 Another manufacturer EtherCAT-Slave
11454 Another manufacturer EtherCAT-Slave(with diagnosis)
11460 3 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11461 3 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11462 3 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11463 3 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11464 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11465 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11466 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11467 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11468 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11469 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11470 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)
11471 6 Divergence Unit(EtherCAT)

Document -31
 Symbol
No. Name
TMS JIC IEC
11500 EtherNet/IP PC10G(Built-in)
11501 EtherNet/IP PC10P(Built-in)
11502 EtherNet/IP PC10P-DP(Built-in)
11503 EtherNet/IP PC10PE(Built-in)
11504 EtherNet/IP Plus
11505 EtherNet/IP Nano(Built-in)
11506 EtherNet/IP Nano 10GX(Built-in)
11507 EF10 EtherNet/IP
11508 2ET EtherNet/IP
11509 Nano Safety EtherNet/IP
11510 Another manufacturer EtherNet/IP Scanner
11550 EPSK-32ND3
11551 EPSK-32TD2
11552 EPSK-16NTD2
11553 RS0xIP
11554 Another manufacturer EtherNet/IP Adapter

Document -32
Document 6 Requests for Customers Using Windows 10 Pro 2004 or Later PCs
 IME-related problems
When using TOYOPUC software such as PCwin on a PC equipped with a Windows 10 Pro version
2004 or later OS, IME-related problems (*1) of the OS may cause the software to become
unresponsive and cause a phenomenon that accepts mouse/key operations.
<One of the procedures to be followed>

PCwin becomes inoperable as the mouse cursor

continues to indicate processing.

The only way to recover a PC is to use the Task Manager to terminate the application.

 Requests to customers
Please change the setting to enable compatibility in M icrosoft IME setting as follows.

Enter "ime" in the search

bar next to Windows icon

Document -33
• The content of this manual may be changed without prior notice.

• We will very much appreciate your notifying us should you find any questions,
mistakes, or omissions in this manual.

• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior

permission.

1st edition June, 1999

68h edition November, 2024

Control Chart Edition:57-65706401

 ∗ We are ready to comply with your request for maintenance,
Please forward: Phone: +81-566-25-8291
FAX: +81-566-25-5469

1-1 Asahimachi, Kariya, Aichi 448-8652 Japan

Manual No.

T-A35-68-E

© JTEKT CORPORATION 1999-2024.

* Specification in this manual are subject to change without notice.

* Products herein may be strategic commodities under the Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan.
An approval under the law may be required exportation of the products.